Siemens SINUMERIK 828D Turning Function Manual Download Page 15

Page: 15 / 1799

Basic Functions
Function Manual, 09/2011, 6FC5397-0BP40-2BA0

Table of contents

Closed-loop control.................................................................................................................. 374

7.5.1

General .................................................................................................................................... 374

7.5.2

Parameter sets of the position controller ................................................................................. 377

7.6

Optimization of the control....................................................................................................... 380

7.6.1

Position controller, position setpoint filter: Balancing filter ....................................................... 380

7.6.2

Position controller, position setpoint filter: Jerk filter ................................................................ 383

7.6.3

Position control with proportional-plus-integral-action controller ............................................. 386

7.7

Data lists.................................................................................................................................. 388

7.7.1

Machine data ........................................................................................................................... 388

7.7.1.1 Displaying machine data ......................................................................................................... 388

7.7.1.2 NC-specific machine data ........................................................................................................ 388

7.7.1.3 Channelspecific machine data ............................................................................................... 388

7.7.1.4 Axis/spindlespecific machine data .......................................................................................... 389

H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC ......................................................................................................391
8.1

Brief description....................................................................................................................... 391

8.1.1

Function ................................................................................................................................... 391

8.1.2

Definition of an auxiliary function ............................................................................................. 392

8.1.3

Overview of auxiliary functions ................................................................................................ 393

8.2

Predefined auxiliary functions.................................................................................................. 400

8.2.1

Overview: Predefined auxiliary functions ................................................................................. 400

8.2.2

Overview: Output behavior ...................................................................................................... 412

8.2.3

Parameter assignment ............................................................................................................ 415

8.2.3.1 Group assignment ................................................................................................................... 415

8.2.3.2 Type, address extension and value ......................................................................................... 416

8.2.3.3 Output behavior ....................................................................................................................... 417
8.3

Userdefined auxiliary functions .............................................................................................. 422

8.3.1

Parameter assignment ............................................................................................................ 423

8.3.1.1 Maximum number of user-defined auxiliary functions ............................................................. 423

8.3.1.2 Group assignment ................................................................................................................... 423

8.3.1.3 Type, address extension and value ......................................................................................... 424

8.3.1.4 Output behavior ....................................................................................................................... 425
8.4

Associated auxiliary functions ................................................................................................. 426

8.5

Type-specific output behavior.................................................................................................. 428

8.6

Priorities of the output behavior for which parameters have been assigned ........................... 430

8.7

Programming an auxiliary function .......................................................................................... 431

8.8

Programmable output duration ................................................................................................ 433

8.9

Auxiliary function output to the PLC ........................................................................................ 435

8.10

Auxiliary functions without block change delay ....................................................................... 436

8.11

M function with an implicit preprocessing stop ........................................................................ 437

8.12

Response to overstore ............................................................................................................ 438

8.13

Block-search response ............................................................................................................ 439

8.13.1

Auxiliary function output during type 1, 2, and 4 block searches ............................................. 439

8.13.2

Assignment of an auxiliary function to a number of groups ..................................................... 440

8.13.3

Time stamp of the active M auxiliary function .......................................................................... 442

Summary of Contents for SINUMERIK 828D Turning

Page 1: ...p LookAhead 3 B2 Acceleration 4 D1 Diagnostics tools 5 F1 Travel to fixed stop 6 G2 Velocities setpoint actual value systems closed loop control 7 H2 Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 8 K1 Mode group channel program operation reset response 9 K2 Axis Types Coordinate Systems Frames 10 N2 Emergency stop 11 P1 Transverse axes 12 P3 Basic PLC Program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 13 P4 PLC for SINUMERIK 828D...

Page 2: ...ner Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described Since variance cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full consistency However the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions DANGER indicates that death or severe personal...

Page 3: ...ny questions about the technical documentation e g suggestions for improvement corrections to the following address docu motioncontrol siemens com My Documentation Manager MDM Under the following link you will find information to individually compile OEM specific machine documentation based on the Siemens content www siemens com mdm Training For information about the range of training courses refe...

Page 4: ...t described in this documentation might be executable in the control This does not however represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when servicing Further for the sake of simplicity this documentation does not contain all detailed information about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of installation operation or maintenance Technical Suppo...

Page 5: ...signal signal address signal name When the new gear step is engaged the following NC PLC interface signals are set by the PLC program DB31 DBX16 0 2 actual gear stage A to C DB31 DBX16 3 gear is changed Machine data machine data Type Number Complete Designator Meaning Master spindle is the spindle stored in the machine data MD20090 MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND Position of deletion of the master spind...

Page 6: ...rs no special characters AXIS Axis names only All axis identifiers in the channel FRAME Geometrical parameters for moving rotating scaling and mirroring Arrays can only be formed from similar elementary data types Up to 3 dimensional arrays are possible PPU240 2 241 2 PPU 260 2 261 2 PPU 280 2 281 2 BASIC T BASIC M T M T M System performance Basic quantity of axes spindles 3 4 3 4 3 4 Max number o...

Page 7: ...Simulation in 3D display PLC SIMATIC S7 200 integrated Basic I O modules PP 72 48D PN PP 72 48D 2 2A PN being prepared PLC cycle time 9 ms 9 ms 6 ms 6 ms 6 ms 6 ms Max number of PLC operations 24000 24000 24000 24000 24000 24000 Servo synchronous high speed PLC task Reaction time to process interrupts terminal to terminal 7 5 ms 7 5 ms 7 5 ms 7 5 ms 4 5 ms 4 5 ms Max number of digital inputs outpu...

Page 8: ...Preface Basic Functions 8 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 T Turning M Milling Standard basic scope Option Not available ...

Page 9: ... variable 59 1 3 5 Access protection via password and keyswitch 63 1 3 5 1 Access protection via password and keyswitch 63 1 3 5 2 Password 64 1 3 5 3 Keyswitch settings DB10 DBX56 4 to 7 65 1 3 5 4 Parameterizable protection levels 66 1 4 Examples 67 1 5 Data lists 69 1 5 1 Machine data 69 1 5 1 1 Display machine data 69 1 5 1 2 NC specific machine data 70 1 5 1 3 Channel specific machine data 70...

Page 10: ...in BKS 100 2 2 7 3 Working area limitation in WKS ENS 102 2 2 8 Deactivating all monitoring functions Parking 106 2 3 Protection zones 107 2 3 1 General 107 2 3 2 Types of protection zone 108 2 3 3 Definition via part program instruction 111 2 3 4 Definition via system variable 114 2 3 5 Activation and deactivation of protection zones 116 2 3 6 Protection zone violation and temporary enabling of i...

Page 11: ...esponse limiting values 187 3 4 4 Interaction between the smoothing of the path velocity and adaptation of the path dynamic response functions 188 3 4 5 Dynamic response mode for path interpolation 191 3 4 6 Free form surface mode Basic functions 193 3 5 Compressor functions 197 3 5 1 NC block compression 197 3 5 2 Combining short spline blocks option for 828D 201 3 6 Contour Orientation tolerance...

Page 12: ...ation 226 4 2 7 2 Programming 227 4 2 8 Acceleration with programmed rapid traverse G00 axis specific 228 4 2 8 1 General Information 228 4 2 8 2 Parameterization 228 4 2 9 Acceleration with active jerk limitation SOFT SOFTA axis specific 229 4 2 9 1 General Information 229 4 2 9 2 Parameterization 229 4 2 10 Excessive acceleration for non tangential block transitions axis specific 229 4 2 10 1 Ge...

Page 13: ...2 20 4 Parameterization 252 4 2 20 5 Programming 253 4 2 20 6 Boundary conditions 254 4 3 Examples 256 4 3 1 Acceleration 256 4 3 1 1 Path velocity characteristic 256 4 3 2 Jerk 258 4 3 2 1 Path velocity characteristic 258 4 3 3 Acceleration and jerk 259 4 3 4 Knee shaped acceleration characteristic curve 261 4 3 4 1 Activation 261 4 4 Data lists 263 4 4 1 Machine data 263 4 4 1 1 Channel specific...

Page 14: ...26 6 5 2 Setting data 326 6 5 2 1 Axis spindle specific setting data 326 6 5 3 Signals 326 6 5 3 1 Signals to axis spindle 326 6 5 3 2 Signals from axis spindle 327 7 G2 Velocities setpoint actual value systems closed loop control 329 7 1 Brief description 329 7 2 Velocities traversing ranges accuracies 330 7 2 1 Velocities 330 7 2 2 Traversing ranges 332 7 2 3 Positioning accuracy of the control ...

Page 15: ...liary functions 400 8 2 2 Overview Output behavior 412 8 2 3 Parameter assignment 415 8 2 3 1 Group assignment 415 8 2 3 2 Type address extension and value 416 8 2 3 3 Output behavior 417 8 3 User defined auxiliary functions 422 8 3 1 Parameter assignment 423 8 3 1 1 Maximum number of user defined auxiliary functions 423 8 3 1 2 Group assignment 423 8 3 1 3 Type address extension and value 424 8 3...

Page 16: ...ls to channel 474 8 18 2 2 Signals from channel 474 8 18 2 3 Signals to axis spindle 476 8 18 2 4 Signals from axis spindle 476 9 K1 Mode group channel program operation reset response 477 9 1 Product brief 477 9 2 Mode group MG 480 9 2 1 Mode group Stop 482 9 2 2 Mode group RESET 483 9 3 Mode types and mode type change 484 9 3 1 Monitoring functions and interlocks of the individual modes 490 9 3 ...

Page 17: ...s functions 553 9 8 8 6 Gear stage change 554 9 8 8 7 Superimposed motion 554 9 8 8 8 REPOS offset in the interface 555 9 8 8 9 Making the initial settings more flexible 555 9 8 9 System variables and variables for SERUPRO sequence 556 9 8 10 Restrictions 557 9 9 Program operation mode 558 9 9 1 Initial settings 558 9 9 2 Selection and start of part program or part program block 561 9 9 3 Part pro...

Page 18: ... 9 13 3 Adapting the size of the interpolation buffer 616 9 13 4 Program display modes via an additional basic block display 618 9 13 5 Basic block display for ShopMill ShopTurn 619 9 13 6 Structure for a DIN block 621 9 13 7 Execution from external 624 9 13 8 Execution from external subroutines 625 9 14 System settings for power up RESET part program end and part program start 628 9 14 1 Tool wit...

Page 19: ... Frames 683 10 1 Brief description 683 10 1 1 Axes 683 10 1 2 Coordinate systems 685 10 1 3 Frames 687 10 2 Axes 691 10 2 1 Overview 691 10 2 2 Machine axes 692 10 2 3 Channel axes 693 10 2 4 Geometry axes 693 10 2 5 Replaceable geometry axes 694 10 2 6 Special axes 698 10 2 7 Path axes 699 10 2 8 Positioning axes 699 10 2 9 Main axes 700 10 2 10 Synchronized axes 701 10 2 11 Axis configuration 70...

Page 20: ...obal basic frames P_NCBFR n 744 10 5 5 5 Complete basic frame P_ACTBFRAME 745 10 5 5 6 Programmable frame P_PFRAME 746 10 5 5 7 Channel specific system frames 748 10 5 6 Implicit frame changes 752 10 5 6 1 Frames and switchover of geometry axes 752 10 5 6 2 Frame for selection and deselection of transformations 755 10 5 6 3 Adapting active frames 771 10 5 6 4 Mapped Frames 772 10 5 7 Predefined fr...

Page 21: ...s from axis spindle 815 11 N2 Emergency stop 817 11 1 Brief Description 817 11 2 Relevant standards 818 11 3 Emergency stop control elements 819 11 4 Emergency stop sequence 820 11 5 Emergency stop acknowledgement 822 11 6 Data lists 824 11 6 1 Machine data 824 11 6 1 1 Drive specific machine data 824 11 6 1 2 Axis spindle specific machine data 824 11 6 2 Signals 824 11 6 2 1 Signals to NC 824 11 ...

Page 22: ...the basic program 875 13 8 1 Start up and synchronization of NCK PLC 877 13 8 2 Cyclical mode OB 1 877 13 8 3 Time interrupt processing OB 35 879 13 8 4 Process interrupt processing OB 40 879 13 8 5 Diagnostic interrupt module failure processing OB 82 OB 86 880 13 8 6 Response to NCK failure 880 13 8 7 Functions of the basic program called from the user program 881 13 8 8 Symbolic programming of u...

Page 23: ... ASUB startup of asynchronous subprograms 1015 13 13 18 FC 10 AL_MSG error and operating messages 1017 13 13 19 FC 12 AUXFU call interface for user with auxiliary functions 1019 13 13 20 FC 13 BHGDisp Display control for handheld unit 1020 13 13 21 FC 17 YDelta Star Delta changeover 1025 13 13 22 FC 18 SpinCtrl spindle control 1028 13 13 23 FC 19 MCP_IFM transmission of MCP signals to interface 10...

Page 24: ...Star delta changeover 1091 14 2 Programming Tool PLC828 1092 14 3 Programming 1093 14 3 1 Introduction 1093 14 3 1 1 Important terms 1093 14 3 1 2 Create open a project 1096 14 3 1 3 Program organization using the the Programming Tool 1097 14 3 1 4 Fast onboard inputs and outputs 1099 14 3 2 Target system memory 1099 14 3 2 1 Type of memory 1099 14 3 2 2 Addressing range of the target system 1100 ...

Page 25: ... in the status chart 1145 14 4 4 Execute cycles 1145 14 5 Data interface 1147 14 5 1 PLC NCK interface 1147 14 5 1 1 Mode signals 1147 14 5 1 2 NC channel signals 1148 14 5 1 3 Axis and spindle signals 1149 14 5 1 4 General NCK signals 1150 14 5 1 5 Fast data exchange PLC NCK 1151 14 5 2 PLC HMI interface 1152 14 6 Function interface 1153 14 6 1 Read write NC variables 1153 14 6 1 1 User interface...

Page 26: ...onological sequence 1224 15 6 4 Phase 1 Travel across the reference marks with synchronization 1224 15 6 5 Phase 2 Travel to fixed stop 1226 15 7 Referencing by means of actual value adjustment 1229 15 7 1 Actual value adjustment to the referencing measurement system 1229 15 7 2 Actual value adjustment to the referenced measurement system 1229 15 7 3 Actual value adjustment for measuring systems w...

Page 27: ...ial spindle state 1283 16 3 Reference synchronize 1284 16 4 Configurable gear adaptation 1289 16 4 1 Gear steps for spindles and gear step change 1289 16 4 2 Spindle gear stage 0 1300 16 4 3 Determining the spindle gear stage 1303 16 4 4 Parameter set selection during gear step change 1304 16 4 5 Intermediate gear 1306 16 4 6 Non acknowledged gear step change 1307 16 4 7 Gear step change with osci...

Page 28: ...pecific setting data 1360 16 11 2 2Axis spindle specific setting data 1360 16 11 3 signals 1361 16 11 3 1Signals to axis spindle 1361 16 11 3 2Signals from axis spindle 1361 17 V1 Feedrates 1363 17 1 Brief Description 1363 17 2 Path feedrate F 1366 17 2 1 General 1366 17 2 2 Type of feedrate G93 G94 G95 1368 17 2 3 Type of feedrate G96 G961 G962 G97 G971 1370 17 2 4 Feedrate with G33 G34 G35 threa...

Page 29: ...1418 18 W1 Tool offset 1419 18 1 Short description 1419 18 2 Tool 1422 18 2 1 General 1422 18 2 2 Compensation memory structure 1424 18 2 3 Calculating the tool compensation 1426 18 2 4 Address extension for NC addresses T and M 1426 18 2 5 Free assignment of D numbers 1428 18 2 6 Compensation block in case of error during tool change 1434 18 2 7 Definition of the effect of the tool parameters 143...

Page 30: ...18 6 2 Kinematic interaction and machine design 1504 18 6 3 Oblique machining with 3 2 axes 1511 18 6 4 Machine with rotary work table 1512 18 6 5 Procedure when using toolholders with orientation capability 1516 18 6 6 Programming 1520 18 6 7 Supplementary conditions and control system response for orientation 1521 18 7 Cutting data modification for tools that can be rotated 1524 18 7 1 Function ...

Page 31: ...5 18 13 Tool lengths L1 L2 L3 assignment LENTOAX 1591 18 14 Supplementary conditions 1594 18 14 1 Flat D number structure 1594 18 14 2 SD42935 expansions 1594 18 15 Examples 1595 18 15 1 Toolholder with orientation capability 1595 18 15 1 1Example Toolholder with orientation capability 1595 18 15 1 2Example of toolholder with orientation capability with rotary table 1596 18 15 1 3Basic tool orient...

Page 32: ...is spindle DB31 1666 19 6 Mode group channel program operation reset response K1 1667 19 6 1 Signals to mode group DB11 1667 19 6 2 Signals from the mode group DB11 1671 19 6 3 Signals to channel DB21 1675 19 6 4 Signals from channel DB21 1679 19 6 5 Signals to axis spindle DB31 1692 19 6 6 Signals from axis spindle DB31 1692 19 7 Axis types coordinate systems frames K2 1695 19 7 1 Signals to axis...

Page 33: ...Basic Functions Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 33 20 Appendix 1743 20 1 List of abbreviations 1743 20 2 Overview 1751 Glossary 1753 ...

Page 34: ...Basic Functions 34 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 ...

Page 35: ...unction interface on the other The data interface contains status and control signals auxiliary functions and G functions while the function interface is used to transfer jobs from the PLC to the NCK This Description describes the functionality of interface signals which are of general relevance but are not included in the Descriptions of Functions Asynchronous events Status signals PLC variable r...

Page 36: ...chine Control Panel Data exchange is organized by the basic PLC program Cyclic signal exchange The following interface signals are transferred cyclically i e in the clock grid of the OB1 by the basic PLC program NC and operator panel front specific signals Mode group specific signals Channel specific signals Axis spindle specific signals NC and operator panel front specific signals DB10 PLC to NC ...

Page 37: ...roller active current controller active etc Control signals from drive bytes 93 94 Function interface The function interface is generated by function blocks FB and function calls FC Function requests e g to traverse axes are sent from the PLC to the NC via the function interface References For detailed information about the following subject areas please refer to Description of the basic PLC progr...

Page 38: ... NC the corresponding drives are ready DB31 DBX93 5 1 Drive Ready DB10 DBX108 7 NC Ready The NC is ready 1 2 3 Status signals to PLC DB10 DBX103 0 remote diagnosis active The HMI component reports to the PLC that the remote diagnostics option is active i e the control is done via an external PC DB10 DBX109 6 ambient temperature alarm The ambient temperature or fan monitoring function has responded...

Page 39: ...rface signal is used to actively darken the screen It is no longer possible to switch the screen bright again on the keyboard see below The first keystroke on the operator panel front already triggers an operator action Screen darkening via keyboard automatic screen saver If no buttons are pressed on the operator panel front within the assigned time default 3 minutes MD9006 MM_DISPLAY_BLACK_TIME t...

Page 40: ... disk The jobs relate to the user control file in the interface signals DB19 DBB16 parts program handling Number of the control file for user file names DB19 DBB17 parts program handling Index of the file to be transmitted from the user list DB19 DBB16 control of file transfer via hard disk HMI Advanced only Control byte for file transfer via hard disk to define the index for the control file job ...

Page 41: ...omatic is carried out for a machine axis at rest and NC PLC interface signal DB31 DBX1 3 1 axis spindle disable The traversing request is maintained If the axis disable is cancelled when a traversing request is pending DB31 DBX1 3 0 the movement is carried out Axis disable when machine axis in motion When machine axis is in motion and NC PLC interface signal DB31 DBX1 3 1 the movement of the machi...

Page 42: ...error difference between setpoint and actual position is generated This error is corrected suddenly when the controller enable is set by the position controller without observing the axial acceleration characteristic The following interface signals have to be set for the hold function DB31 DBX2 1 0 controller enable DB31 DBX1 4 0 follow up mode Feedback DB31 DBX61 3 0 follow up mode active During ...

Page 43: ...e actual position Y1 to the clamping position Yk Figure 1 1 Effect of controller enable and follow up mode Figure 1 2 Trajectory for clamping and hold B 3RVLWLRQ VHWSRLQW IURP 32 ROORZ XS VHWSRLQW 3RVLWLRQ FRQWUROOHU RQWUROOHU HQDEOH FDQFHOHG 3RVLWLRQ DFWXDO YDOXH 1 1 6 ROORZ XS PRGH 5HPRYH 6 6HUYR HQDEOH 7HUPLQDOV LVFRQQHFW WHUPLQDOV 6HW 6 6HUYR HQDEOH 6HTXHQFH 3RVLWLRQ VKLIW UHVXOWLQJ IURP FODPS...

Page 44: ...er enable and external speed setpoint Axis spindle moves with external setpoint NC continues to detect the actual position and corrects the setpoint position to the actual position 3 Deactivate external controller enable and cancel external speed setpoint Axis spindle stops 4 Canceling follow up mode DB31 DBX2 1 1 controller enable DB31 DBX1 4 0 follow up mode NC synchronizes to current actual pos...

Page 45: ...n other interface signals DB31 DBX60 7 0 position reached with exact stop fine DB31 DBX60 6 0 position reached with exact stop coarse DB31 DBX1 5 1 6 position measuring system 1 2 2 measuring systems can be connected to one machine axis e g Indirect motor measuring system Direct measuring system on load Only one measuring system can be active at any one time All closed loop control positioning ope...

Page 46: ...able for a machine axis is influenced by NC PLC interface signal DB31 DBX2 1 controller enable DB31 DBX21 7 pulse enable DB31 DBX93 5 drive ready DB10 DBX56 1 emergency stop NCK internal Alarms that trigger cancellation of the controller enable on the machine axes The alarm responses are described in References DA Diagnostics Manual Canceling the controller enable when the machine axis is at stand...

Page 47: ...nable reset during movement The machine axis position control loop opens Feedback via interface signal DB31 DBX61 5 0 position controller active The time for the parameterized cut off delay of the controller enable is started by the machine data MD36620 MA_SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME switch off delay controller enable As soon as the actual speed has reached the zero speed range the drive controller e...

Page 48: ... machine axis is in motion DB31 DBX2 2 spindle reset axis spindle specific Delete distance to go is effective in AUTOMATIC and MDI modes only in conjunction with positioning axes The positioning axis is decelerated to standstill following the current brake characteristic The distance to go of the axis is deleted Spindle reset A detailed description of the spindle reset can be found in References F...

Page 49: ...rameter set changeover The parameter set is also changed during the movement Non identical servo gain factors or position control active In order to effect a changeover as smoothly as possible changeover is not activated until the axis is stationary i e once the parameterized zero speed has been reached or undershot DB31 DBX61 4 1 axis spindle stationary MD36060 MA_STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL threshold ve...

Page 50: ... up mode DB31 DBX61 4 axis spindle stationary n nmin Axis spindle stationary is set by the NC if No new setpoints are to be output AND The actual speed of the machine axis is lower than the parameterized zero speed MD36060 MA_STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL threshold velocity axis stationary DB31 DBX61 5 position controller active The machine axis position control loop is closed and position control is active...

Page 51: ...lubrication by PLC 1 2 8 Signals to axis spindle digital drives DB31 DBX21 0 21 1 21 2 parameter set selection A B C Request to change over drive parameter set The feedback signal is sent via the interface signals DB31 DBX93 0 1 93 2 active drive parameter set DB31 DBX21 3 21 4 Motor selection A B Selection of motor operating mode Only operating modes 1 and 2 are valid on main spindle drive Operat...

Page 52: ...or of the speed controller for the drive The speed controller is thus switched from PI to P controller Note If the speed controller integrator disable is activated compensations might take place in certain applications e g if the integrator was already holding a load while stationary Feedback via the interface signal DB31 DBX93 6 1 integrator n controller disabled DB31 DBX21 7 pulse enable The pul...

Page 53: ...types or motor operating modes is active The following selections can be made on the main spindle drive Star mode A 0 B 0 Delta mode A 1 B 0 DB31 DBX93 5 DRIVE ready Checkback signal indicating that the drive is ready The conditions required for traversing the axis spindle are fulfilled DB31 DBX93 6 integrator n controller disabled The speed controller integrator is disabled The speed controller h...

Page 54: ... DB31 DBX94 3 Md Mdx The signal indicates that the actual torque Md is less than the parameterized threshold torque Mdx The threshold torque is entered as a percentage of the current speed dependent torque limitation DB31 DBX94 4 nact nmin The signal indicates that the actual speed nact is less than the set minimum speed nmin DB31 DBX94 5 nact nx The signal indicates that the actual speed nact is ...

Page 55: ...uage MD9003 MM_FIRST_LANGUAGE foreground language In the case of SINUMERIK 840D sl 2 languages are available simultaneously The foreground language can be used to set the language to be displayed following control ramp up The language can be changed in the DIAGNOSTICS operating area on the HMI user interface Once the control has ramped up the foreground language will be restored Display resolution...

Page 56: ...e 1 Refresh of current values is suppressed in time critical channels Value 2 Refresh of current values is never suppressed 1 3 2 Settings for involute interpolation only 840D sl Introduction The involute of the circle is a curve traced out from the end point on a piece of string unwinding from the curve Involute interpolation allows trajectories along an involute Figure 1 6 Involute unwound from ...

Page 57: ...be set by the machine manufacturer end user Accuracy If the programmed end point does not lie exactly on the involute defined by the starting point interpolation takes place between the two involutes defined by the starting and end points see illustration below The maximum deviation of the end point is determined by the machine data MD21015 MC_INVOLUTE_RADIUS_DELTA end point monitoring for involut...

Page 58: ...adius compensation is the only tool radius compensation function permitted for involutes If 3D tool radius compensation is active both circumferential and face milling when an involute is programmed machining is interrupted with alarm 10782 With 2 1 2 D tool radius compensation the plane of the involute must lie in the compensation plane or else alarm 10781 will be generated It is however permissi...

Page 59: ...es for NC language elements References FB1 Function Manual Basic functions S7 Memory Configuration PGA Programming Guide Advanced 1 3 4 Read write PLC variable High speed data channel For high speed exchange of information between the PLC and NC a memory area is reserved in the communications buffer on these modules dual port RAM Variables of any type I O DB DW flags may be exchanged within this m...

Page 60: ...ed by the variable data type the position index is specified as an array index in bytes The following variables are available Ranges of values Access from PLC The PLC uses function calls FC to access the memory These FCs ensure that data are read and written in the DPR immediately i e not just at the beginning of the PLC cycle FCs receive data type information and the position offset as parameters...

Page 61: ...byte and word The user s programming engineer is responsible for ensuring consistent transmission of 32 bit variables double and real A simple semaphore mechanism is provided in the PLC for this purpose The PLC stores data in Little Endian format in the DPR Values transferred with A_DBR are subject to data conversion and hence to loss of accuracy The data format for floating point numbers is DOUBL...

Page 62: ...n part program Behavior during POWER ON block search The DPR communications buffer is initialized during POWER ON During a block search the PLC variable outputs are collected and transferred to the DPR communications buffer with the approach block analogous to writing of analog and digital outputs Other status transitions have no effect in this respect Program code extract Comment CALL FC21 Enable...

Page 63: ...l functions programs and data 1 Password Machine manufacturer Development defined functions programs and data for example entering options 2 Password Machine manufacturer Startup engineer defined functions programs and data for example Bulk of machine data 3 Password End user Service Assigned functions programs and data 4 Keyswitch position 3 End user Programmer machine setter less than the protec...

Page 64: ...ered in protection levels 0 and 1 Access rights for protection levels 4 to 7 are only suggestions and can be altered by the machine tool manufacturer or end user 1 3 5 2 Password Set password The password for a protection level 0 3 is entered via the HMI user interface Example DIAGNOSTIC operating area softkey SET PASSWORD References Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK 840D sl base software and HMI sl ...

Page 65: ... 3 Switch positions Switch position 0 has the most restricted access rights Switch position 3 has the least restricted access rights DB10 DBX56 4 5 6 7 switch positions 0 1 2 3 Machine specific enables for access to programs data and functions can be assigned to the switch positions For detailed information please refer to References IAM Startup CNC Part 2 HMI Access Protection Note Following NC C...

Page 66: ...me switch position 3 i e the keyswitch position with the least restricted access rights will be activated internally by the NC 1 3 5 4 Parameterizable protection levels Parameterizable protection level The parameter level can be freely parameterized for a variety of functions and data areas The protection level is set via operator panel machine data designated as follows MM_USER_CLASS_ Function_Da...

Page 67: ..._DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM 0 AX1 3 Denominator load gearbox for parameter set 1 MD31050 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM 1 AX1 3 Denominator load gearbox for parameter set 2 MD31050 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM 2 AX1 3 Denominator load gearbox for parameter set 3 MD31050 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM 3 AX1 3 Denominator load gearbox for parameter set 4 MD31050 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM 4 AX1 3 Denominator load gearbox for p...

Page 68: ...ameter set for machine axis X1 Request by PLC user program DB31 DBX9 0 DBX9 2 3 parameter set servo A request to change over to the 4th parameter set is sent for machine axis AX1 The parameter set is changed over once a delay has elapsed Parameter set 4 is now active in accordance with machine data with index 3 Feedback by NC DB31 DBX69 0 DBX69 2 3 parameter set servo The NC confirms acknowledges ...

Page 69: ...USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_SC Protection level change total tool offsets 9205 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_EC Protection level change tool setup offsets 9206 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_SUPVIS Protection level change tool monitoring limit values 9207 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_ASSDNO Change D No assigned to a tool edge 9208 USER_CLASS_WRITE_MAG_WGROUP change wear group magazine location mag 9209 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_ADAPT P...

Page 70: ... level for network drive 3 for PROGRAM operating area 9513 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY4_P Protection level for network drive 4 for PROGRAM operating area 9516 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY1_M Protection level for network drive 1 for MACHINE operating area 9517 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY2_M Protection level for network drive 2 for MACHINE operating area 9518 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY3_M Protection level for network drive 3 f...

Page 71: ... of storage elements for limiting path velocity in block Number Identifier MA_ Description 30350 SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT Output of axis signals for simulation axes 33050 LUBRICATION_DIST Lubrication pulse distance 35590 PARAMSET_CHANGE_ENABLE Parameter set definition possible from PLC 36060 STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL Maximum velocity speed when axis spindle stationary 36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME Length of th...

Page 72: ...3 DB10 DBX56 4 7 DB2600 DBX0 4 7 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Remote diagnostics active HMI alarm is pending DB10 DBX103 0 AT box ready DB10 DBX103 5 HMI temperature limit DB10 DBX103 6 HMI battery alarm DB10 DBX103 7 NCK Ready DB10 DBX104 7 HMI2 CPU Ready E_MMC2 Ready DB10 DBX108 1 HMI CPU1 Ready HMI to MPI DB10 DBX108 2 HMI1 CPU at OPI Ready DB10 DBX108 3 DB2700 DBX2 3 Drives in ...

Page 73: ...ve DB19 DBX14 7 Part program handling Number of the control data DB19 DBX16 7 DB1700 DBX1001 7 1 Mode change disable DB19 DBX44 0 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Screen is dark DB19 DBX20 1 Switch over MCS WCS DB19 DBX20 7 DB1900 DBX0 7 Error Part program handling status DB19 DBX26 0 DB1700 DBX2000 2 O K Part program handling status DB19 DBX26 1 DB1700 DBX2000 1 Active Part program ha...

Page 74: ...eing selected DB31 DBX21 5 Speed controller integrator disable DB31 DBX21 6 DB380x DBX4001 6 Pulse enable DB31 DBX21 7 DB380x DBX4001 7 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Referenced synchronized 1 Referenced synchronized 2 DB31 DBX60 4 5 DB390x DBX0 4 5 Traverse command minus plus DB31 DBX64 6 7 DB390x DBX4 6 7 Follow up mode active DB31 DBX61 3 DB390x DBX1 3 Axis spindle stationary n nm...

Page 75: ...tions 1 5 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 75 nact nmin DB31 DBX94 4 DB390x DBX4002 4 nact nx DB31 DBX94 5 DB390x DBX4002 5 nact nset DB31 DBX94 6 DB390x DBX4002 6 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D ...

Page 76: ...A2 Various NC PLC interface signals and functions 1 5 Data lists Basic Functions 76 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 ...

Page 77: ...rotection zones Function With the help of protection zones elements of the machine e g spindle chuck tool changer tool holder tailstock movable probe etc and the workpiece can be protected against collisions During automatic execution of part programs in the AUTOMATIC or MDI mode the NC checks at the start of every part program block whether a collision between protection zones can occur upon movi...

Page 78: ...ions especially on contour changes Circles are distorted into ellipses by unequal dynamic responses of the two feed drives Nonlinear signal distortions Nonlinear signal distortions are caused by Activation of the current limitation within the machining area Activation of the limitation of the set speed Backlash within and or outside the position control loop When traversing a circular path contour...

Page 79: ...aversing along a machine axis After a time depending on the parameterization of the position control loop the following error then remains constant in the ideal case Due to external influences more or less large fluctuations in the following error always arise during a machining process To prevent these fluctuations in the following error from triggering an alarm a tolerance range within which the...

Page 80: ...0BP40 2BA0 Fault If the configured tolerance limit is exceeded the following alarm appears 25050 Axis Axis identifier Contour monitoring The affected axis spindle is stopped via the configured braking ramp in follow up mode MD36610 MA_AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME Maximum time for braking ramp when an error occurs ...

Page 81: ...a positioning operation Set velocity 0 AND DB31 DBX64 6 64 7 motion command minus plus 0 checks the position monitoring to ensure that the following error of every participating machine axis is smaller than the exact stop fine tolerance during the delay time MD36010 MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE exact stop fine MD36020 MA_POSITIONING_TIME delay time exact stop fine W 0 0 B67 1 67 B B7 0 0 0 B 03B326B72 0 0 B...

Page 82: ...ng alarm appears 25080 Axis Axis identifier Position monitoring The affected axis is stopped via the configured braking ramp in follow up mode MD36610 MA_AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME Maximum time for braking ramp when an error occurs Note The smaller the exact stop fine tolerance is the longer the positioning operation takes and the longer the time until block change MD36010 MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE MD36020 M...

Page 83: ... is completed DB31 DBX60 6 60 7 position reached with exact stop coarse fine 1 The position monitoring function is deactivated and is replaced by the zero speed monitoring Zero speed monitoring monitors the adherence to the standstill tolerance If no new travel request is received the machine axis must not depart from the standstill tolerance Effectivity The zero speed monitoring only operates wit...

Page 84: ...mmon factor depending on the parameter set MD36012 MA_STOP_LIMIT_FACTOR exact stop coarse fine and standstill factor Because the factor applies in common for all three position tolerances the relationship between the values remains constant 2 2 2 5 Clamping monitoring Clamping monitoring For machine axes that are mechanically clamped upon completion of a positioning operation larger motions can re...

Page 85: ...k of the clamped axis until the clamped axis can once again be traversed If the clamping is released before stopping the path motion is not stopped Parameterization MD36052 MA_STOP_ON_CLAMPING H01 Special function for clamped axis Prerequisites for the PLC user program The axis is always removed from the clamp when a travel command is pending The following is always valid for the axis DB31 DBX2 2 ...

Page 86: ...iately before the traversing block of the clamped axis This way the PLC user program can release the axis clamp again in time The travel command is set a maximum of two rapid travers blocks prior including intermediate blocks to retain the reference to the initiating part program block N100 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 A0 G90 G54 F500 N101 G641 ADIS 1 ADISPOS 5 N210 G1 X10 Edit N220 G1 X5 Y20 N310 G0 Z50 Retractio...

Page 87: ...tates upon releasing of the axis clamp Figure 2 3 Release axis clamp if MD36052 MA_STOP_ON_CLAMPING H03 Automatic stopping for setting of the clamp If an axis is to be clamped in continuous path mode the NC stops the path motion before the next Non rapid traverse block if the axis has not been clamped by then i e the PLC has set the feedrate override value to zero Parameter assignment MD36052 MA_S...

Page 88: ...ck that is not traversed with rapid traverse The axis is clamped if the feed rate override of a machining block is not equal to 0 If the axis is clamped before the next machining block i e the feedrate override is other than 0 again no stop is generated The following image shows an example of the interface signals and states upon setting of the axis clamp The part program blocks N410 N510 N520 and...

Page 89: ...ng the clamps the Look Ahead function must be active Part program blocks without path motion e g M82 M83 interrupt continuous path mode and thus also the Look Ahead function Example The part program blocks N320 and N420 are inserted in the programming example used N100 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 A0 G90 G54 F500 N101 G641 ADIS 1 ADISPOS 5 N210 G1 X10 Edit N220 G1 X5 Y20 N310 G0 Z50 Retract N320 M82 no path motion...

Page 90: ...ce MD36050 MA_CLAMP_POS_TOL clamping tolerance with interface signal Clamping active Behavior upon releasing of the clamp If the axis was moved by the clamping process it is returned by the NC to the position setpoint after releasing of the clamp and setting of the servo enable state Repositioning depends on whether Follow up mode was activated for the axis Note MD36052 MA_STOP_ON_CLAMPING H01 or ...

Page 91: ...Figure 2 5 Speed setpoint calculation The speed setpoint monitoring ensures by limiting the control or output signal 10V for analog setpoint interface or rated speed for digital drives that the physical limitations of the drives are not exceeded MD36210 MA_CTRLOUT_LIMIT Maximum speed setpoint Note The following interface signals can be evaluated by the PLC user program as the criterion for activat...

Page 92: ...ectivity The speed setpoint monitoring is only active for closed loop position controlled axes and cannot be deactivated Fault If the configured delay time is exceeded the following alarm appears 25060 Axis Axis identifier Speed setpoint monitoring The affected axis is stopped via the configured braking ramp in follow up mode MD36610 MA_AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME Maximum time for braking ramp when an ...

Page 93: ...ting the speed will not normally exceed the velocity monitoring threshold exception drive error Activation The actual velocity monitoring is activated as soon as the active measuring system returns valid actual values encoder limit frequency not exceeded DB31 DBX1 5 1 6 position measuring system 1 2 Effectivity The actual velocity monitoring only operates with active position control and the follo...

Page 94: ...the drive software References Drive Functions SINAMICS S120 FBU SIMODRIVE 611 universal Function Manual Encoder limit frequency monitoring In the case of systems with PROFIBUS drives encoder limit frequency monitoring is also performed in the NCK Zero mark monitoring PROFIBUS drives with incremental encoders Zero mark monitoring is performed by the drive software PROFIBUS drives with absolute enco...

Page 95: ...ile the machine axis is not yet referenced If the hardware limit switch is triggered the PLC user program created by the machine manufacturer sets the corresponding interface signal DB 31 DBX12 0 12 1 1 Hardware limit switch minus plus Parameterization The braking behavior of the machine axis upon reaching the hardware limit switch is configurable via the machine data MD36600 MA_BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE ...

Page 96: ...limit the traversing range of a machine axis Per machine axis and per traversing direction two 1st and 2nd software limit switches are available MD36100 POS_LIMIT_MINUS 1st software limit switch minus MD36110 POS_LIMIT_PLUS 1st software limit switch plus MD36120 POS_LIMIT_MINUS2 2nd software limit switch minus MD36130 POS_LIMIT_PLUS2 2nd software limit switch plus By default the 1st software limit...

Page 97: ...rogram block with a programmed traversing motion that would lead to overrunning of the software limit switch is started The affected machine axis stops at the active software limit switch The other machine axes participating in the traversing motion are braked The programmed contour is left during this process With overlaid motion The part program block with a programmed traversing motion that wou...

Page 98: ...ng of the working area limitation 2 2 7 1 General Function The working area limitation function can be used to limit the traversing range of a channel s geometry and special axes to a permissible operating range The function monitors compliance with working area limits both in AUTOMATIC mode and in JOG mode The following versions are available Working area limitation in the Basic Coordinate System...

Page 99: ...the monitoring refers to the tool carrier reference point Transformation with change in orientation In the case of transformations with changes in orientation monitoring is always based on the tool center point MD21020 has no influence Response Automatic operating modes With without transformation The parts program block with a programmed traversing motion that would lead to overrunning of the wor...

Page 100: ...he active working area limitation is retained or deactivated MD10604 MN_WALIM_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE value 2 2 7 2 Working area limitation in BKS Application Using the working area limitation in BKS the working area of a machine tool is limited so that the surrounding devices e g tool revolver measuring stations are protected against damage Working area limits The lower and upper working area limits of...

Page 101: ...mmediately effective setting data SD43400 SA_WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE Working area limitation active in the positive direction SD43410 SA_WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE Working area limitation active in the negative direction Programmed working area limitation Activation or deactivation of the overall working area limitation in the BCS is arranged via part program instructions G25 X Y Z lower working area limi...

Page 102: ...B 0 43420 MD10710 MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB 1 43430 Reset position The reset position for the working area limitation WALIMON or WALIMOF is configurable via MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES RESET position of G groups 2 2 7 3 Working area limitation in WKS ENS Application The working area limitation in the workpiece coordinate system WCS or adjustable zero system AZS is mainly intended for defining wo...

Page 103: ...system for the group s working area limitations is selected by means of the channel specific system variable P_WORKAREA_CS_COORD_SYSTEM GN value System variable Meaning P_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE GN AN Activation of working area limitation in a positive traversing direction for axis AN in group GN P_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS GN AN Limit value in a positive traversing direction for axis AN in group GN ...

Page 104: ...e user interface and the part program Effectiveness The changes take effect the next time the corresponding working area limitation group is selected Working area limitation groups Changes The working area limitation group can be changed at any time in the part program via the program commandsWALCS1 WALCS10 Effectiveness Changes are immediately effective Data storage and security Data storage The ...

Page 105: ...ehavior or reset position of the working area limitation in the WCS AZS can be set via the following machine data MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUE 59 reset position of G groups MD20152 MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE 59 reset behavior of G groups Certain working area limitation group as a reset position MD20152 MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE 59 0 MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUE 59 n A reset causes the activation of working are...

Page 106: ...m For a machine axis with measuring system parking is activated by deselecting all measuring systems DB31 DBX1 5 0 position measuring system 1 DB31 DBX1 6 0 position measuring system 2 When the measuring systems are deactivated the axis is no longer designated as being referenced DB31 DBX60 4 0 referenced synchronized 1 DB31 DBX60 5 0 referenced synchronized 2 Machine axis without measuring system...

Page 107: ...ound the element to be protected The activation and deactivation of protection zones also takes place via part program instructions Protection zone monitoring by the NC is channel specific i e all the active protection zones of a channel monitor one another for collisions Definition of a protection zone It is possible to define 2 dimensional or 3 dimensional protection zones as polygons with a max...

Page 108: ...e same for the tool and workpiece related protection zones 2 3 2 Types of protection zone Machine defined and channel defined protection zones Machine defined protection zone Data for machine related protection zones are defined once in the control These protection zones can be activated by all channels Channel defined protection zones Data for channel related protection zones are defined in a cha...

Page 109: ...annel specific protection zones Coordinates The coordinates of a protection zone must always be programmed as absolute values with respect to the reference point of the protection zone When the protection zone is activated via the part program it is possible to apply a relative offset to the reference point of the protection zone Examples In the following figures some examples for protection zones...

Page 110: ...l 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 Figure 2 9 Example of a milling machine Figure 2 10 Example of a turning machine with relative protection zone for tailstock 7RRO UHODWHG SURWHFWLRQ RQH 7RRO UHODWHG SURWHFWLRQ RQH RUNSLHFH UHODWHG SURWHFWLRQ RQH 6 0 3 RUNSLHFH UHODWHG SURWHFWLRQ RQH IRU WDLOVWRFN ...

Page 111: ...the working plane G17 G18 or G19 Definition beginning Channel specific protection zones CPROTDEF Machine or NC specific protection zone NPROTDEF Contour description for protection zone End of definition EXECUTE Definition of the working plane The desired working plane to which the contour description of the protection zone refers must be selected with G17 G18 G19 before start of the definition It ...

Page 112: ...one is the zone left of the contour Internal protection zone The contour of an internal protection zone must described in the counter clockwise direction External protection zones permitted only for workpiece related protection zones The contour of an external protection zone must be described in the clockwise direction Figure 2 11 Examples External and internal protection zone Tool related protec...

Page 113: ... be described by a complete circle A complete circle must be divided into two half circles The sequence G2 G3 or G3 G2 is not permitted A short G1 block must be inserted between the two circular blocks Constraints During the definition of a protection zone the following functions must not be active or used Tool radius compensation cutter radius compensation tool nose radius compensation Transforma...

Page 114: ...plementary conditions apply for the definition of the contour of a protection zone as for a protection zone definition via part program instructions System variables The protection zone definitions cover following system variables Parameters Type Description NOT_USED INT Error variable has no effect in protection zones with EXECUTE System variable Type Significance SN_PA_ACTIV_IMMED n SC_PA_ACTIV_...

Page 115: ...tour element SN_PA_CONT_ABS n i SC_PA_CONT_ABS n i REAL End point of the contour i abscissa value SN_PA_CONT_ORD n i SC_PA_CONT_ORD n i REAL End point of the contour i ordinate value SN_PA_CENT_ABS n i SC_PA_CENT_ABS n i REAL Center point of the circular contour i absolute abscissa value SN_PA_CENT_ORD n i SC_PA_CENT_ORD n i REAL Center point of the circular contour i absolute ordinate value SN_ a...

Page 116: ...ctivation deactivation and activation of all protection zones always takes place channel specifically A protection zone can also be active in multiple channels simultaneously application example Double slide single spindle machine with one quill and two machining slides Protection zones are activated immediately after the runup of the control if the corresponding system variable SN_PA_ACTIV_IMMED ...

Page 117: ... positioning Deactivation A protection zone can be deactivated from a part program Additionally an active preactivated protection zone can be set again in the preactivated ineffective state through the PLC user program RESET response The activation status of a protection zone is retained even after NC RESET and program end Memory requirements The memory requirement of the persistent memory is dete...

Page 118: ...am Preactivated protection zones The NC indicates the preactivated protection zones DB21 DBX272 0 to 273 1 machine related protection zone 1 10 preactivated DB21 DBX274 0 to 275 1 channel specific protection zone 1 10 preactivated Protection zone violation Activated and preactivated protection zones that are or would be violated by the programmed traversing motions of the current part program bloc...

Page 119: ...e Channel specific protection zone SC_PA_ACTIV_IMMED n Machine or NC specific protection zone SN_PA_ACTIV_IMMED n With automatic activation no relative offset of the protection zone is possible Block search with calculation For block search with calculation the last programmed activation state of a protection zone is always taken into account Program test In automatic modes activated and preactiva...

Page 120: ...set to the operative state by the PLC In contrast to AUTOMATIC mode a change in the NC PLC interface signals Make preactivated protection zones operative only has an effect on stationary axes in the geometry system This means If an inoperative protection zone is made operative once a motion has been started it is not evaluated until the axes have stopped possibly resulting in the output of an alar...

Page 121: ...is inside the protection zone the movement is not started In case of violation of protection zone for the workpiece related protection zone the alarm 10700 NCK protection zone in v or MDI violated or 10701 channel specific protection zone in AUTOMATIC or MDI violated is given Figure 2 14 Behavior of the path velocity when entering a protection zone Overlaying several axis motions Overlaid motions ...

Page 122: ...gram when this alarm is triggered If the user does not want to permit overrunning the protection zone he can terminate the traversing movement with NC RESET If several protection zones are violated at the same time by the movement acknowledgment is required for each of these protection zones With NC start the individual protection zones can then be enabled one after the other Application for tempo...

Page 123: ...X39 0 1 protection zone monitoring not guaranteed The traversing range of the geometry axes is limited in all directions by the protection zones with the same effect as they had at the start point Figure 2 15 Motion boundaries of axes When the geometry axes have completed their movements end of interpolation the alarm is automatically reset and the final position checked to see whether it is withi...

Page 124: ...additional limiting element on the traversing motion of the geometry axes If the traversing motion of an axis is limited because it has reached a protection zone then a self resetting alarm Protection zone reached in JOG is generated The alarm text specifies the violated protection zone and the relevant axis It is assured that no protection zone will be violated when one axis is traversing in JOG ...

Page 125: ...e motion that has been started then alarms 10702 10703 or 10706 10707 are output The PLC interface signal Temporary enabling of protection zones can be set again to enable the protection zone for which an alarm is output The enabling signals for the individual protection zones are still valid on switchover to operating modes AUTOMATIC or MDA and vice versa the enabling signals of protection zones ...

Page 126: ...proached in the channel is taken as the current position If this axis has not yet been traversed in the channel zero is taken as the position Machine related protection zones A machine related protection zone or its contour is defined using the geometry axis i e with reference to the basic coordinate system BCS of a channel In order that correct protection zone monitoring can take place in all cha...

Page 127: ...minator load gearbox MD31060 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA Numerator load gearbox MD31070 MA_DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM Denominator measuring gearbox MD31080 MA_DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA Numerator measuring gearbox MD32810 MA_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME equivalent time constant speed control loop for feedforward control Encoder resolution The corresponding machine data is described in References FB1 Function Manual B...

Page 128: ...vided MD28600 MC_MM_NUM_WORKAREA_CS_GROUP 3 Define working area limitation groups Additionally 2 working area limitation groups will be defined Working area limitation group 1 In the first working area limitation group the axes in the ENS coordinate system will be limited X axis in the plus direction 10 mm X axis in the minus direction No limitation Y axis in the plus direction No limitation Y axi...

Page 129: ...ng area limitation group 1 applies in the AZS N10 P_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE 1 X TRUE N11 P_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS 1 X 10 N12 P_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE 1 X FALSE N20 P_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE 1 Y FALSE N22 P_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE 1 Y TRUE N23 P_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_MINUS 1 Y 25 N30 P_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE 1 Z FALSE N32 P_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE 1 Z FALSE N40 P_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE 1 A TRUE N...

Page 130: ... spindle chuck without limitation in the third dimension One channel specific protection zone for the workpiece without limitation in the third dimension One channel specific tool related protection zone for the toolholder without limitation in the third dimension The workpiece zero is placed on the machine zero to define the protection zone for the workpiece When activated the protection zone is ...

Page 131: ...our description 1 Contour element G01 X 100 Z0 Contour description 2 Contour element G01 X 100 Z110 Contour description 3 Contour element G01 X100 Z110 Contour description 4 Contour element G01 X100 Z0 Contour description 5 Contour element EXECUTE AB End of definition Protection zone for spindle chuck CPROTDEF 1 FALSE 0 0 0 Definition beginning Protection zone for workpiece G01 X80 Z0 Contour desc...

Page 132: ...on zone Spindle chuck System variable Valu e Comment SN_PA_ACTIV_IMMED 0 0 Protection zone for spindle chuck not immediately active SN_PA_T_W 0 Machine related protection zone for spindle chuck SN_PA_ORI 0 1 Orientation of the protection zone 1 3 and 1st geometry axis SN_PA_LIM_3DIM 0 0 Type of limitation in the third dimension 0 No limit SN_PA_PLUS_LIM 0 0 Value of the limit in the positive direc...

Page 133: ...e value Protection zone for spindle chuck contour element 4 SN_PA_CONT_ORD 0 5 0 Endpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for spindle chuck contour element 5 SN_PA_CONT_ORD 0 6 0 Endpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for spindle chuck contour element 6 SN_PA_CONT_ORD 0 7 0 Endpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for spindle chuck contour element 7 SN_PA_CONT...

Page 134: ...t of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for spindle chuck contour element 7 SN_PA_CENT_ORD 0 8 0 Midpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for spindle chuck contour element 8 SN_PA_CENT_ORD 0 9 0 Midpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for spindle chuck contour element 9 SN_PA_CENT_ABS 0 0 0 Midpoint of contour i abscissa value Protection zone for spindle chuck contou...

Page 135: ...Protection zone for tool holder SC_PA_MINUS_LIM 0 0 Value of limitation in negative direction in the third dimension Protection zone for workpiece SC_PA_MINUS_LIM 1 0 Value of limitation in negative direction in the third dimension Protection zone for tool holder SC_PA_CONT_NUM 0 4 Number of valid contour elements Protection zone for workpiece SC_PA_CONT_NUM 1 5 Number of valid contour elements Pr...

Page 136: ...d Protection zone for tool holder contour element 9 SN_PA_CONT_ORD 0 0 80 Endpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 0 SN_PA_CONT_ORD 0 1 80 Endpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 1 SN_PA_CONT_ORD 0 2 80 Endpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 2 SN_PA_CONT_ORD 0 3 80 Endpo...

Page 137: ...int of contour i abscissa value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 2 SN_PA_CONT_ABS 0 3 0 Endpoint of contour i abscissa value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 3 SN_PA_CONT_ABS 0 4 50 Endpoint of contour i abscissa value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 4 SN_PA_CONT_ABS 0 5 0 Endpoint of contour i abscissa value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 5 S...

Page 138: ... contour i ordinate value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 5 SN_PA_CENT_ORD 0 6 0 Midpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 6 SN_PA_CENT_ORD 0 7 0 Midpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 7 SN_PA_CENT_ORD 0 8 0 Midpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 8 SN_PA_CE...

Page 139: ...ontour element 7 SN_PA_CENT_ABS 0 8 0 Midpoint of contour i abscissa value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 8 SN_PA_CENT_ABS 0 9 0 Midpoint of contour i abscissa value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 9 SN_PA_CENT_ABS 1 0 0 Midpoint of contour i abscissa value Protection zone for tool holder contour element 0 SN_PA_CENT_ABS 1 1 30 Midpoint of contour i abscissa value Prot...

Page 140: ...0BP40 2BA0 Activation Table 2 4 Part program excerpt for activating the three protection zones for spindle chuck workpiece and toolholder NPROT 1 2 0 0 0 Protection zone Spindle chuck CPROT 1 2 0 0 100 Protection zone Workpiece with 100mm offset in the Z axis CPROT 2 2 0 0 0 Protection zone Toolholder ...

Page 141: ...a limitation 24130 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_1 Tool handling with active transformation 1 24230 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_2 Tool handling with active transformation 2 24330 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_3 Tool handling with active transformation 3 24426 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_4 Tool handling with active transformation 4 24436 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_5 Tool handling with active transformation 5 24446 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_6 Tool...

Page 142: ... for active protection zones DRAM Number Identifier MA_ Description 30310 ROT_IS_MODULO Modulo conversion for rotary axis spindle 30800 WORK_AREA_CHECK_TYPE Type of checking of working area limits 32200 POSCTRL_GAIN n Servo gain factor 32250 RATED_OUTVAL Rated output voltage 32260 RATED_VELO Rated motor speed 32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL Maximum axis acceleration 32800 EQUIV_CURRCTRL_TIME Equivalent time co...

Page 143: ...nitoring 36300 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT Encoder limit frequency 36302 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW Encoder limit frequency for encoder resynchronization 36310 ENC_ZERO_MONITORING Zero mark monitoring 36400 CONTOUR_TOL Tolerance band contour monitoring 36500 ENC_CHANGE_TOL Maximum tolerance for position actual value switchover 36510 ENC_DIFF_TOL Measuring system synchronism tolerance 36600 BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE Decelerati...

Page 144: ...ection zone 10 DB21 DBX11 1 DB3200 DBX11 1 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Machine related protection zones 1 8 preactivated DB21 DBX272 0 7 DB3300 DBX8 0 7 Machine related protection zone 9 preactivated DB21 DBX273 0 DB3300 DBX9 0 Machine related protection zone 10 preactivated DB21 DBX273 1 DB3300 DBX9 1 Channel specific protection zones 1 8 preactivated DB21 DBX274 0 7 DB3300 DBX10...

Page 145: ...nable DB31 DBX2 1 DB380x DBX2 1 Clamping in progress DB31 DBX2 3 DB380x DBX2 3 Velocity spindle speed limitation DB31 DBX3 6 DB380x DBX3 6 Feed stop spindle stop DB31 DBX4 3 DB380x DBX4 3 Hardware limit switch minus Hardware limit switch plus DB31 DBX12 0 1 DB380x DBX1000 0 1 Software limit switch minus 2nd software limit switch plus DB31 DBX12 2 3 DB380x DBX1000 2 3 Encoder limit frequency exceed...

Page 146: ...A3 Axis Monitoring Protection Zones 2 6 Data lists Basic Functions 146 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 ...

Page 147: ...determining the possible path velocity If the following block contains only a short path the NC must reduce the path velocity decelerate in the current block to be able to stop in time at the end of the next block if necessary When the NC looks ahead over a configurable number of traversing blocks following the current traversing block a much higher path velocity can be attained under certain circ...

Page 148: ...uality of the surfaces of the workpieces The following functions are available for processing free form surfaces Free form surface mode Basic functions This makes the definition of the path velocity profile less sensitive to fluctuations in curvature and torsion Free form surface mode Extension function This extension in standard LookAhead functionality is used to calculate the path velocity profi...

Page 149: ...ve characteristic also during transition between the part program blocks The disadvantages of the spline interpolation as compared to the linear interpolation are For a spline curve no exact curve characteristic but only a tolerance band can be specified within which the spline curve should lie As with linear interpolation the processing of splines can produce such short blocks that the path veloc...

Page 150: ...er compared to continuous path mode due to the deceleration of the axes and the wait time until Exact stop status is reached for all machine axes involved In exact stop mode undercuts can occur on the workpiece surface during machining Status Exact stop The state of the machine axis based on the position difference relative to its position setpoint at the end of a traversing motion is also called ...

Page 151: ...have reached their position according to set point programmed in the block That is the interpolator has executed the block The actual position and the following error of the relevant machine axes are not taken into consideration for exact stop criterion Interpolator end Thus depending on the dynamic response of the machine axes this can result in a relatively large smoothing of the contour at the ...

Page 152: ... depending on various machining states such as roughing and finishing Assignable specification of the active exact stop criterion The active exact stop criterion can be permanently specified for the part program commands of the first G function group irrespective of the exact stop criterion programmed in the part program This specification can be made independently for each of the following part p...

Page 153: ...after rapid traverse blocks can be parameterized as follows MD20552 MC_EXACT_POS_MODE_G0_TO_G1 value Z or E Active exact stop criterion 0 Programmed exact stop criterion 1 G601 Exact stop window fine 2 G602 Exact stop window coarse 3 G603 Interpolator end Value Meaning 0 No additional stop at the block transition 1 Stop at block transition Same behavior as in the case of G601 Exact stop window fin...

Page 154: ...path mode causes the smoothing and tangential shaping of angular block transitions by local changes in the programmed contour The extent of the change relative to the programmed contour can be limited by specifying the overload factor or rounding criteria Continuous path operation causes Contour rounding Shorter machining times through elimination of braking and acceleration processes that are req...

Page 155: ... transformation is changed the block previously processed is terminated with the active exact stop criterion A block is terminated on interpolator end if the following block contains the changeover of the acceleration profile BRISK SOFT References For more information about BRISK and SOFT refer to the chapter Acceleration B2 If the empty buffer function is programmed the previous block is terminat...

Page 156: ...opping to zero This jump is performed if the axial velocity was reduced with the axial acceleration to a velocity from which the new setpoint can be reached with the jump The magnitude of the setpoint jump can be limited using an overload factor Because the magnitude of the jump is axial the minimum jump of the path axes which are active during the block change is considered during block transitio...

Page 157: ...lent to the function Exact stop with interpolator end This is undesirable for continuous path mode so the factor must be set to greater than 1 0 By setting the following machine data the block transitions are rounded independent of the set overload factor with G641 G642 MD20490 MC_IGNORE_OVL_FACTOR_FOR_ADIS Activation Deactivation Continuous path mode with a reduction in speed according to the ove...

Page 158: ...g auxiliary function output parallel to motion stop at end of block With rounding all synchronization conditions are best referred to the end of the shortened first block and not to the end of the intermediate rounding block The following block is thus not started and with a stop at end of block the contour of the following block can still be changed Design Rounding is only performed if the block ...

Page 159: ...are not completely assigned to the path motion e g for oscillation positioning axes The rounding block would slow down the part program execution This occurs between two very short blocks Since each block requires at least one interpolation cycle the added intermediate block would double the machining time If a block transition with G64 continuous path mode without rounding can be traversed withou...

Page 160: ...ronized e g contour special axis then every path must always have its own rounding area There are no practical means of achieving this exactly Therefore on the basis of the specific meaning of the contour geometry axis the following procedure is applied Rounding behavior with synchronized paths Original path for Rounding path outcome Geometry axes Orientation synchronized axis Smooth Smooth Define...

Page 161: ...ereby limited to ADIS interpolation cycle Irrespective of ADIS and ADISPOS the rounding area is limited by the block length In blocks with short distances distance 4 ADIS and 4 ADISPOS respectively the rounding distance is reduced so that a traversable part of the original block is retained The remaining length depends on the axis path and is approximately 60 of the distance still to be traversed ...

Page 162: ... be specified Selecting the exact stop which works on a block by block basis enables rounding to be interrupted G9 Continuous path mode with rounding based on a path criterion G641 can be deactivated by selecting Modal exact stop G60 Continuous path mode G64 G641 G642 G644 or G645 Programming example Program code Comment N1 G641 Y50 F10 ADIS 0 5 Continuous path mode with rounding based on a path c...

Page 163: ...ting Modal exact stop G60 Continuous path mode G64 G641 G644 or G645 Differences between G642 G643 With regard to their rounding behavior commands G642 and G643 differ as follows Parameter assignment Maximum path deviation The maximum path deviation permitted with G642 G643 is set for each axis in the machine data MD33100 MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL Note Expansion to include contour and orientation tolera...

Page 164: ...OL is effective only in active orientation transformation Value E or Z Description 0 All Axes Rounding by maintaining the maximum permitted path deviation MD33100 MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL 1 Geometry axes Rounding by maintaining the contour tolerance SD42465 SC_SMOOTH_CONTUR_TOL Remaining axes Rounding by maintaining the maximum permitted path deviation MD33100 MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL 2 Geometry axes Roundi...

Page 165: ...must be applicable for all axes MD35240 MC_ACCEL_TYPE_DRIVE FALSE acceleration characteristic line DRIVE for axes on off Value Description 100 A profile of the limit velocity is calculated within the rounding area based on the defined maximum values for acceleration and jerk on the participating axes or path This can lead to an increase in the path velocity in the rounding area and therefore to th...

Page 166: ...the modal command G644 Selecting the exact stop which works on a block by block basis enables rounding to be interrupted G9 Continuous path mode with rounding with the maximum possible axial dynamic response G644 can be deactivated by selecting Modal exact stop G60 Continuous path mode G64 G641 G642 G643 or G645 Note Rounding with G644 is only possible if all the axes involved contain only a linea...

Page 167: ...nd maximum jerk SOFT If SOFT is active the maximum acceleration and the maximum jerk of each axis is maintained BRISK If BRISK is active only the maximum acceleration and not the maximum jerk of each axis is maintained With this setting neither the maximum deviations nor the rounding distance are checked The resulting deviations or rounding distances are determined exclusively by the dynamic limit...

Page 168: ...hing of the velocity jump on each axis and thus the shape of the rounding path depends on whether an interpolation is performed with or without jerk limitation Without jerk limitation the acceleration of each axis reaches its maximum value in the entire rounding area With jerk limitation the jerk of each axis is limited to its maximum value within the rounding area The rounding motion thus general...

Page 169: ...s from the original contour MD33120 MA_PATH_TRANS_POS_TOL are not exceeded In the case of angular non tangential block transitions the rounding behavior is the same as with G642 see Rounding in compliance with defined tolerances G642 G643 Page 163 Activation Deactivation Continuous path mode with rounding of tangential block transitions can be activated in any NC part program block by the modal co...

Page 170: ... parameterized limit MD32432 MA_PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM Depending on the level of the limit the path velocity at the block transition may be greatly reduced as a result This constraint is avoided by using G645 because the rounding movement is defined here in such a way that no jumps occur in acceleration Parameter assignment The following machine data indicates the maximum permissible path deviation f...

Page 171: ...er it is possible to implement the acceleration and deceleration phase over multiple blocks with approximately tangential block transitions thereby achieving a higher feedrate with shorter distances Figure 3 5 Velocity control with short distances and exact stop G60 or continuous path mode G64 with LookAhead Deceleration to velocity limits is possible with LookAhead such that violation of the acce...

Page 172: ...following fig which can be avoided by reducing the set velocity or increasing the number of blocks considered by the LookAhead function Figure 3 6 Example for modal velocity control number of blocks considered by the LookAhead function 2 Activation Deactivation LookAhead is activated by selecting continuous path mode G64 G641 G642 G643 G644 or G645 Selecting the exact stop which works on a block b...

Page 173: ...elocity control provides for when the path feed is overshot Velocity profiles In addition to the fixed plannable velocity limitations LookAhead can also take account of the programmed velocity This makes it possible to achieve a lower velocity by applying LookAhead beyond the current block Determination of the following block velocity One possible velocity profile contains the determination of the...

Page 174: ...the velocity profile is limited by the maximum path velocity The upper point should cover the velocity range that will be reached by the maximum value set in the machine data MD12030 MN_OVR_FACTOR_FEEDRATE n evaluation of the path feed rate override switch It can also be reached via the value of the machine data MD12100 MN_OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN limit for binary coded override switch In this way a r...

Page 175: ...ependent velocity limits into account Relief factor with block cycle problems Block cycle problems are encountered in cases where the traversing distances of the NC blocks to be processed are so short that the LookAhead function has to reduce the machine velocity to provide enough time for block processing In this situation constant braking and acceleration of path motion may occur Velocity fluctu...

Page 176: ...ing see also Free form surface mode Basic functions Page 193 Its use optimizes the continuous path mode as follows Symmetry between the acceleration and deceleration profiles Uniform acceleration process even with changing jerk or acceleration limits Uniform acceleration process of target velocity profiles irrespective of the degree to which they can or cannot be started with the specified dynamic...

Page 177: ...e Free form surface mode Extension function is typically only active if the Free form surface mode Basic functions are also active Therefore the settings in MD20443 MC_LOOKAH_FFORM n should correspond to the settings in MD20606 MC_PREPDYN_SMOOTHING_ON n The standard LookAhead functionality is active in the dynamic response modes in which the Free form surface mode Extension function is switched of...

Page 178: ...lity is active in the DYNPOS dynamic response mode N100 G17 G54 F10000 N101 DYNFINISH Switch on the DYNFINISH dynamic response mode The Free form surface mode Extension functions are active in the DYNFINISH dynamic response mode N102 SOFT G642 N103 X 0 274 Y149 679 Z100 000 G0 N104 COMPCAD N1009 Z4 994 G01 N10010 X 520 Y149 679 Z5 000 N10011 X10 841 Y149 679 Z5 000 N10012 X11 635 Y149 679 Z5 010 N...

Page 179: ...over standard LookAhead functionality considerably Rapid traverse movements G0 G0 blocks which are interspersed during free form surface processing do not switch the LookAhead functionality over from the Free form surface mode Extension function to standard LookAhead functionality or vice versa This means that even though the standard dynamic response setting DYNNORM is effective with G0 the stand...

Page 180: ...h determines the maximum permissible productivity loss takes effect with a view to achieving smoother path velocity control Acceleration processes which contribute less than this factor to a shorter program runtime are not performed Account is only taken of acceleration processes whose frequencies lie above the configurable limit frequencies of of the axes involved Benefits Avoidance of excitation...

Page 181: ...and 100 may also be entered without significantly increasing the machining time Consideration of the programmed feed The path velocity can be smoothed with or without taking the programmed feedrate into consideration The selection is made via the machine data MD20462 MC_LOOKAH_SMOOTH_WITH_FEED path smoothing with programmed feedrate When considering the programmed feedrate the specified smoothing ...

Page 182: ...Y AX1 20 Hz MD32440 MA_LOOKAH_FREQUENCY AX2 20 Hz MD32440 MA_LOOKAH_FREQUENCY AX3 10 Hz The path involves the 3 axes X AX1 Y AX2 Z AX3 The minimum value of MD32440 for these 3 axes is thus 10 Hz This means that any acceleration which is completed within a period of t2 t1 2 10 Hz 200 ms is examined The time t2 is the time it takes to reach velocity v1 again following an acceleration process startin...

Page 183: ...adaptation of the dynamic path response function Activation The adaptation of the dynamic path response function is only effective during path movements Continuous path mode G64 G64x In continuous path mode the optimal effect of the dynamic response adaptation is attained with an active 100 override Considerable deviations from this value or functions that cause the path axes to decelerate e g aux...

Page 184: ... assignment Adaptation factor of the dynamic path response Via the adaptation factor of the dynamic path response temporary changes in the path velocity are executed with smaller dynamic response limit values The adaptation factor is to be set on a channel specific basis For traversing motions with acceleration without jerk limiting BRISK via MD20465 MC_ADAPT_PATH_DYNAMIC 0 The adaptation factor a...

Page 185: ...lasts less than tadapt despite the reduced acceleration The permitted reduction was fully utilized 2 The time needed to change the velocity is greater than tadapt No dynamic response adaptation is required Example The following example is intended to show the effect of the adaptation of the dynamic path response function on traversing motions with acceleration and without jerk limiting BRISK The f...

Page 186: ...s between t0 t1 and the deceleration process between t2 t3 are extended in terms of time to tadapt01 or tadapt23 as a result of the acceleration being adapted Interval t4 t5 The acceleration process between t4 t5 is executed with an acceleration reduced by the maximum adaptation factor of 1 5 However the acceleration process is completed before time tadapt45 Interval t6 t7 The deceleration process...

Page 187: ...hout jerk limiting BRISK 1 Deactivate the adaptation of the dynamic path response function MD20465 MC_ADAPT_PATH_DYNAMIC 1 1 2 Observe the positioning behavior of each path axis at different traversing velocities When doing so set the jerk such that the desired positioning tolerance is maintained 3 Use the maximum permissible jerk determined for the least critical traversing velocity MD32431 MA_MA...

Page 188: ...nuous path mode Example 1 Acceleration mode BRISK The path involves the 3 axes X AX1 Y AX2 Z AX3 The following parameters are assumed Figure 3 11 Path velocity profile optimized for time without smoothing or dynamic adaptation response Figure 3 12 Path velocity profile with smoothing of the path velocity and adaptation of dynamic path response MD20465 MC_ADAPT_PATH_DYNAMIC 0 3 MD20460 MC_LOOKAH_SM...

Page 189: ...ng profile between t3 and t5 does not fulfill this condition or takes longer than the parameterized smoothing time TAxn 2 20 Hz 100 ms Interval t3 t4 The acceleration process between t3 and t4 is shorter than MIN TAXn 1 20 Hz 50 ms and is therefore executed with an acceleration reduced by an adaptation factor of 3 Interval up to t1 The acceleration up to t1 left over after path smoothing is stretc...

Page 190: ...to 0 instead of 1 in accordance with the default A smoothing factor of 100 comes into effect with this parameter assignment This gives rise to a path velocity profile with smoothing of the path velocity and adaptation of dynamic path response MD20465 MC_ADAPT_PATH_DYNAMIC 1 4 MD20460 MC_LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR 1 0 MD20460 MC_LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR 0 0 LPLWLQJ RI SDWK YHORFLW EDVHG RQ G QDPLF D LV UHVSR...

Page 191: ...s DYNPOS Positioning mode tapping DYNROUGH Roughing DYNSEMIFIN Finishing DYNFINISH Smooth finishing Note The dynamic response of the path axes alone is determined by the commands from G function group 59 dynamic response mode for path interpolation They have no effect on Positioning axes PLC axes Command axes Movements based on axis coupling Overlaid movements with handwheel JOG movements Referenc...

Page 192: ...ransition in continuous path mode MD32310 MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR n overload factor for axial jumps in velocity MD32433 MA_SOFT_ACCEL_FACTOR n scaling of the acceleration limitation with SOFT For the axis via the machine data MD20600 MA_MAX_PATH_JERK n path related maximum jerk MD20602 MC_CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_ACCEL n influence of path curvature on dynamic path response MD20603 MC_CURV_EFFECT_ON_PAT...

Page 193: ...n References Programming Manual Fundamentals chapter Path traversing behavior 3 4 6 Free form surface mode Basic functions Introduction In applications in tool and mold making it is important that the surfaces on the workpiece are as uniform as possible This requirement is generally more important than the precision of the surface of the workpiece Workpiece surfaces which lack uniformity can be at...

Page 194: ...ollowing advantages Greater uniformity in the profile of the path velocity Greater uniformity in the surface of the workpiece Reduction in the processing time if the dynamic response of the machine permits it Applications The function is used to process workpieces which primarily comprise free form surfaces Requirements The function can only be activated if the requisite memory capacity is reserve...

Page 195: ...cycle is not sufficiently small the max path velocity may be reduced in the case of contours with greater curvature This is necessary for ensuring that the surface of the workpiece is also produced with an adequate degree of precision in this case By changing the contour sampling factor the time interval with which a curved contour is sampled in the interpolator contour sampling time can be set at...

Page 196: ...20606 MC_PREPDYN_SMOOTHING_ON Free form surface mode Basic functions can be switched on and off in the part program by changing the active dynamic response mode Example By assigning the parameters MD20606 MC_PREPDYN_SMOOTHING_ON 2 4 1 and MD20606 MC_PREPDYN_SMOOTHING_ON 0 1 0 the function can be switched on via the commands DYNROUGH DYNSEMIFIN and DYNFINISH and switched off via the commands DYNNOR...

Page 197: ... similar conditions also similar deviations from the programmed points The common objective of compressor functions is to optimize the surface quality and machining speed by achieving continuous block transitions and increasing the path length for each block COMPCAD is very processor and memory intensive It is recommended that COMCAD is only used there where surface improvements were not successfu...

Page 198: ...erable deviation of the generated path from the program points can be specified The setting is done on an axis for axis basis using the machine data MD33100 MA_COMPRESS_POS_TOL The higher the permissible deviation the more short blocks that can be compressed into a long block Recommended setting 0 01 mm Contour accuracy The maximum tolerable deviation of the generated path from the programmed poin...

Page 199: ...ith SD42476 SC_COMPRESS_ORI_TOL SD42477 SC_COMPRESS_ORI_ROT_TOL are maintained for the axes of orientation motion TRAORI xx3 The tolerances specified with SD42475 SC_COMPRESS_CONTUR_TOL are maintained for the geometry axes The tolerances specified with SD42476 SC_COMPRESS_ORI_TOL SD42477 SC_COMPRESS_ORI_ROT_TOL are maintained for the axes of orientation motion TRAORI Value Meaning x0x x2x Blocks w...

Page 200: ...for processing from external 100 MD28520 MC_MM_MAX_AXISPOLY_PER_BLOCK maximum number of axis polynomials per block 3 MD28530 MC_MM_PATH_VELO_SEGMENTS Number of memory elements for limiting the path velocity 5 MD28540 MC_MM_ARCLENGTH_SEGMENTS number of memory elements for displaying the arc length function 10 MD28070 MC_MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP number of blocks for block preparation 60 MD28060 MC_MM_I...

Page 201: ... actually has a long smooth curve The Combine short spline blocks function allows you to combine these spline blocks such that the resulting block length is sufficient and does not reduce the path velocity Activation The function overview of short spline blocks can be activated for following cases independent of each other BSPLINE active BSPLINE ORICURVE active CSPLINE active The activation is don...

Page 202: ...n be combined into a program part one after the other depends on the size of the available memory for blocks in the block processing This memory is established by the machine data MD28070 MC_MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP number of blocks for block preparation Example In order to attain a higher path velocity when processing the following program the combine short spline blocks function is activated for BS...

Page 203: ...e machine data MD20480 MC_SMOOTHING_MODE rounding behavior with G64x For the compressor functions via the ones position in the machine data MD20482 MC_COMPRESSOR_MODE mode of compression Further machine and setting data which are of relevance in contour and orientation tolerance settings are MD33120 MA_PATH_TRANS_POS_TOL max deviation when rounding with G645 The value from MD33120 is effective whe...

Page 204: ...ng stop in the part program via the system variables Note The programmed tolerance also acts upon functions which are only implicitly dependent upon the tolerance These are currently Limiting the chord error in the setpoint value calculation The basic functions of the free form surface mode Note The following rounding functions are not affected by the programming of CTOL OTOL and ATOL rounding ori...

Page 205: ...ber of geometry axes If an orientation tolerance and an orientation transformation are active AA_ATOL orientation axis will return the orientation tolerance divided by the root of the number of orientation axes Note If no tolerance values have been programmed the A variables will not be differentiated sufficiently to distinguish potential differences in the tolerances of the individual functions s...

Page 206: ... is only effective if One of the following functions is active Compressor functions COMPON COMPCURV and COMPCAD Smoothing functions G642 and G645 Orientation smoothing OST Orientation smoothing ORISON Smoothing for path relevant orientation ORIPATH several 2 consecutive G0 blocks in the part program For a single G0 block the G0 tolerance factor is not effective as at the transition from a non G0 m...

Page 207: ...s not changed by programming the tolerance factor After a reset or end of part program the value set using MD20560 is effective again Value Meaning 0xx Circular blocks and G0 blocks are not compressed 1xx Circular blocks are compressed Only COMPCAD 2xx G0 blocks are compressed See also MD20560 MC_G0_TOLERANCE_FACTOR or NC command STOLF 3xx Circular blocks and G0 blocks are compressed Syntax STOLF ...

Page 208: ...ons or with a preprocessing stop in the part program via the system variables Without preprocessing stop in the part program via system variable If no value with STOLF is programmed in the active part program then these two system variables supply the value set using MD20560 MC_G0_TOLERANCE_FACTOR If no rapid traverse G0 is active in a block then these system variables always supply a value of 1 A...

Page 209: ... RESET position of G groups The following G function groups are of relevance to continuous path mode exact stop LookAhead Group 10 Exact stop continuous path mode Group 12 Block change criterion for exact stop Group 21 Acceleration profile Group 30 NC block compression Group 59 Dynamic response mode for path interpolation References For detailed information about setting initial states see the sec...

Page 210: ...ng auxiliary function acknowledgement by the PLC Non existent following blocks Active function Empty buffer Effects If a block change cannot be executed in continuous path mode all axes programmed in this part program block except cross block traversing special axes are stopped In this case contour errors do not occur The stopping of path axes during machining can cause undercuts on the workpiece ...

Page 211: ... G641 In the rounding area the traversing motion is interrupted and the axes are subsequently traversed e g manually to the REPOS starting point Repositioning on the contour takes place differently depending on the active REPOS mode Figure 3 13 Example of rounding and repositioning QWHUUXSWLRQ SRLQW 5 326 PRGH 50 5 326 PRGH 50 50 501 5 326 VWDUWLQJ SRLQW OHQGLQJ DUHD 3URJUDPPHG WUDYHUVLQJ GLUHFWLR...

Page 212: ...72 COMPRESS_VELO_TOL Maximum permissible deviation from path feed for compression 20400 LOOKAH_USE_VELO_NEXT_BLOCK LookAhead following block velocity 20430 LOOKAH_NUM_OVR_POINTS Number of override switch points for LookAhead 20440 LOOKAH_OVR_POINTS Override switch points for LookAhead 20443 LOOKAH_FFORM Activating the extended LookAhead 20450 LOOKAH_RELIEVE_BLOCK_CYCLE Relief factor for the block ...

Page 213: ...AX_JERK Maximum axial jerk when traversing along the path 32432 PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM Maximum axial jerk at the block transition in continuous path mode 32433 SOFT_ACCEL_FACTOR Scaling of acceleration limitation for SOFT 32434 G00_ACCEL_FACTOR Scaling of acceleration limitation for G00 32435 G00_JERK_FACTOR Scaling of axial jerk limitation for G00 32440 LOOKAH_FREQUENCY Smoothing limit frequency for...

Page 214: ...als 3 10 3 1 Signals from channel 3 10 3 2 Signals from axis spindle Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D All axes stationary DB21 DBX36 3 DB3300 DBX4 3 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Position reached with exact stop coarse DB31 DBX60 6 DB390x DBX0 6 Position reached with exact stop fine DB31 DBX60 7 DB390x DBX0 7 ...

Page 215: ...acteristic The knee shaped acceleration characteristic means that in the case of machine axes featuring a motor in particular stepper motors with a torque characteristic that is highly dependent upon speed acceleration can be set at the level required to ensure optimum utilization of the motor whilst at the same time protecting it against overload 4 1 2 Features Acceleration Axis specific function...

Page 216: ...part program instruction Acceleration with jerk limitation SOFTA Programmable maximum jerk value for single axis interpolation Programmable maximum jerk value for path interpolation Channel specific functions Acceleration profile that can be selected via part program instruction Acceleration with jerk limitation SOFT Adjustable jerk limitation Adjustable path jerk for specific real time events Spe...

Page 217: ...L 0 n acceleration n parameter set index MD32431 MA_MAX_AX_JERK 0 n jerk n parameter set index For positioning motion to fixed point positions G75 G751 the following values are used for acceleration and jerk dependent on the activation of the function Not active function Parameter set 1 index 0 Active function Parameter set 2 index 1 Activation is carried out via the NC specific machine data MD189...

Page 218: ...immediately As regards acceleration with jerk limitation it differs in the following respects Advantages Shorter processing times with the same maximum values for velocity and acceleration Disadvantages Increased load on the machine s mechanical components and risk of inducing high frequency and difficult to control mechanical vibrations Acceleration profile Figure 4 1 Velocity and acceleration sc...

Page 219: ...or each specific machine axis MD32300 MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL maximum axis acceleration The path parameters are calculated by the path planning component during preprocessing so that the programmed maximum values of the machine axes that are of relevance for the path are not exceeded Exceeding of maximum value It is possible for the maximum value to be exceeded in connection with specific machining situat...

Page 220: ...ecific initial setting is activated via a reset MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 20 Supplementary conditions If the acceleration profile is changed in a part program during machining BRISK SOFT an exact stop is performed at the end of the block Single axis acceleration without jerk limitation BRISKA Syntax BRISKA axis axis Function The BRISKA part program instruction is used to select the without jer...

Page 221: ... 3 1 General Information Overview In the case of acceleration without jerk limitation sudden acceleration of 2 amax occurs on switchover between acceleration and braking In order to avoid this sudden acceleration a channel specific constant travel time can be programmed The constant travel time defines the time taken to traverse between the acceleration and braking phases at constant velocity MD20...

Page 222: ...travel time Time t2 Start of braking phase with sudden acceleration 1 amax The times t0 t1 and t2 indicate the characteristic that would have been produced had no constant travel time been defined 4 2 3 2 Parameterization The constant travel time is parameterized for specific channels using machine data MD20500 MC_CONST_VELO_MIN_TIME minimum time with constant velocity 1 Characteristic with consta...

Page 223: ...s Value range Axis identifier for the channel s machine axes Adjustment factor Value range 0 adjustment factor 200 Unit Per cent Deactivate ACC axis 100 Effective Modal Reset response The behavior during channel RESET or M30 can be controlled via MD32320 MA_DYN_LIMIT_RESET_MASK Bit 0 0 The programmed ACC value is reduced to 100 with channel RESET M30 Bit 0 1 The programmed ACC value is retained be...

Page 224: ...he acceleration margin are assigned for each channel by means of machine datum MD20610 MC_ADD_MOVE_ACCEL_RESERVE acceleration margin for overlaid motions 4 2 6 Path acceleration limitation channel specific 4 2 6 1 General Information General Information To enable a flexible response to the machining situations concerned setting data can be used to limit the path acceleration calculated during prep...

Page 225: ...tion can be adjusted for the situation by programming the setting data Limit value Value range 0 Unit m s2 Application Part program Static synchronized action Switch ON OFF Syntax SC_IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL value Functionality The path acceleration limitation can be activated deactivated by programming the setting data Parameter Value Value range TRUE FALSE Application Part program Static synchronize...

Page 226: ...lities of the machine axes that are of relevance for the path a limit will be imposed on the path acceleration within the control so that the resulting axial acceleration ares is restricted to less than 2x the parameterized maximum axial value amax ares 2 amax with amax MD32300 MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL Effectiveness Note Real time event path acceleration is enabled irrespective of the radial acceleration E...

Page 227: ...ath acceleration Functionality Real time event path acceleration is set via the channel specific system variables Parameter Path acceleration Value range Path acceleration 0 Unit m s2 Deactivation AC_PATHACC 0 Application Part program Static synchronized action Reset response Real time event path acceleration is deactivated on reset Supplementary conditions Programming AC_PATHACC in the part progr...

Page 228: ...part program instruction G00 a specific maximum value can be programmed for the axis specific acceleration JOG setup mode This function does not affect acceleration in respect of a rapid traverse override in JOG setup mode 4 2 8 2 Parameterization The maximum value for axis specific acceleration with programmed rapid traverse is parameterized G00 using the axis specific machine data MD32434 MA_G00...

Page 229: ...on The maximum value for acceleration with active jerk limitation SOFT SOFTA is parameterized using the axis specific machine data MD32434 MA_SOFT_ACCEL_FACTOR scaling of the acceleration limitation with SOFT 4 2 10 Excessive acceleration for non tangential block transitions axis specific 4 2 10 1 General Information Function In the case of non tangential block transitions corners the programmable...

Page 230: ...on during acceleration and deceleration on the curved contour can for a short time reach 2x the maximum value Figure 4 3 Radial and path acceleration on curved contours The channel specific machine data MD20602 MC_CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_ACCEL influence of path curvature on dynamic path response can be used to set the proportion of the axis specific acceleration that is to be taken into account for ra...

Page 231: ... margin referred to above is ineffective in the case of linear motions linear interpolation without active kinematic transformation 4 2 11 2 Parameterization The proportion of maximum available axis acceleration to be taken into account as an acceleration margin for radial acceleration on curved contours is parameterized using the channel specific machine data MD20602 MC_CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_ACCEL ...

Page 232: ... limitation jerk infinite value is the assumed acceleration profile In the case of acceleration with jerk limitation linear interpolation is applied in respect of acceleration from 0 to the maximum value Advantages Minimal load on the machine s mechanical components and low risk of high frequency and difficult to control mechanical vibrations thanks to constant excessive acceleration Disadvantages...

Page 233: ...tic increase in velocity Interval t1 t2 Constant acceleration with amax linear increase in velocity Interval t2 t3 Constant jerk with rmax linear decrease in acceleration quadratic decrease in excessive velocity until maximum value vmax is reached Interval t3 t4 Constant jerk with rmax linear increase in braking acceleration quadratic decrease in velocity Interval t4 t5 Constant braking accelerati...

Page 234: ...value It is possible for the maximum value to be exceeded in connection with specific machining situations see following Section System variable AC_PATHJERK 4 2 12 3 Maximum jerk value channel specific Function As well as it being possible to set the maximum jerk value for specific axes it can also be assigned as a channel specific path parameter using the following machine data MD20600 MC_MAX_PAT...

Page 235: ...d of the block even in continuous path mode 4 2 13 Jerk limitation with single axis interpolation SOFTA axis specific 4 2 13 1 General Information Overview The maximum jerk value can be set for each specific machine axis for single axis movements setup modes e g JOG JOG INC positioning axis reciprocating axis etc MD32430 MA_JOG_AND_POS_MAX_JERK maximum axis jerk Initial setting Acceleration with j...

Page 236: ...vements MD32420 MA_JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE TRUE Reset response The axis specific initial setting is activated via a reset MD32420 MA_JOG_AND_POS_ENABLE 4 2 14 Path jerk limitation channel specific 4 2 14 1 General Information Overview To enable a flexible response to the machining situations concerned setting data can be used to limit the path jerk calculated during preprocessing for specific chan...

Page 237: ...h jerk limitation 4 2 14 3 Programming Maximum path jerk Syntax SC_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK jerk value Functionality The path jerk limitation can be adjusted for the situation by programming the setting data Jerk value Value range 0 Unit m s3 Application Part program Static synchronized action Switch ON OFF Syntax SC_IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK value Functionality The path jerk limitation can be activated deactiv...

Page 238: ...active for the duration of the change in velocity in respect of one of the real time events specified above Limiting As the jerk is not a physical variable of any relevance to the drive no limit is imposed on the jerk set Effectiveness Effective Path jerk for real time events is only enabled in AUTOMATIC and MDA operating modes in conjunction with the following real time events NC STOP NC START Ov...

Page 239: ... 02 s For information about programming system variables in the part program or synchronized actions see Chapter Programming 4 2 15 2 Programming Syntax AC_PATHJERK path jerk Functionality The path jerk for real time events is set via the channel specific system variables Jerk value Value range Path jerk 0 Unit m s3 Application Part program Static synchronized action Reset response The function is...

Page 240: ...ammed rapid traverse is parameterized G00 using the axis specific machine data MD32434 MA_G00_ACCEL_FACTOR scaling of the acceleration limitation with G00 This is used to generate the maximum value for axis specific jerk with programmed rapid traverse G00 that is taken into account by the path planning component during preprocessing Jerk axis MD32431 MA_MAX_AX_JERK MD32435 MA_G00_JERK_FACTOR 4 2 1...

Page 241: ...avoided using the velocity dependent jerk adaptation function Availability The velocity dependent jerk adaptation function is available independent of the function Free form surface mode Basic functions Page 193 Parameter assignment The Velocity dependent jerk adaptation function is activated and configured for each specific axis using machine data MD32437 MA_AX_JERK_VEL0 n Velocity threshold for ...

Page 242: ...MAX_AX_JERK to MA_MAX_AX_JERK_FACTOR MA_MAX_AX_JERK The factor that is set must be 1 If a value of 1 is set for this factor then velocity dependent jerk adaptation is not active basic setting Figure 4 5 Dependency of the maximum jerk of an axis on the axis velocity Example Example of parameter assignment MD32437 MA_AX_JERK_VEL0 3000 mm min MD32438 MA_AX_JERK_VEL1 6000 mm min MD32439 MA_MAX_AX_JERK...

Page 243: ...hannel and axis specific jerk limitations taken into account at interpolator level The effect of the jerk filter must be as strong as possible without having an unacceptable impact on contour accuracy The filter should also have as balanced a smoothing effect as possible i e if the same contour is traversed forwards and backwards the contour smoothed by the filter should be as similar as possible ...

Page 244: ...capable filter setting is not expected to yield useful results in any case as with the jerk filter s 2nd order filter PT2 low pass filter PT2 mode there is no setting option for the denominator damping DN The denominator damping DN is permanently set to 1 The bandstop filter can be parameterized in 2 different ways Real bandstop filter Bandstop filter with additional amplitude response increase de...

Page 245: ...s for the smoothing filter using machine data MD32410 MA_AX_JERK_TIME time constants for the axial return filter With SW 5 1 and higher it is also possible to control the jerk limitation in the position controller with a new filter based on a smoothing method that incurs few contour errors Modus 2 requires a bit more computation time but with the same smoothing effect it results in lower contour e...

Page 246: ...nominator natural frequencies are set to different values The numerator natural frequency determines the blocking frequency By selecting a lower higher denominator natural frequency than the numerator natural frequency you can increase decrease the amplitude response at high frequencies An amplitude response increase at high frequencies can be justified in most cases as the controlled system gener...

Page 247: ...stic curve of a motor with torque characteristic that is highly dependent upon speed Simulation of torque characteristic For the purpose of simulating the torque characteristic of the motor characteristic curve the machine data MD35242 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_TYPE characteristic can be used to select various types of characteristic curve The following figures show typical velocity and acceleration char...

Page 248: ...ristic with acceleration reduction 1 hyperbolic Linear characteristic Figure 4 9 Acceleration and velocity characteristic with acceleration reduction 2 linear The key data for the characteristic curves equate to vmax MA_MAX_AX_VELO vred MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT MA_MAX_AX_VELO amax MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL ared 1 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL YUHG YPD YPD YUHG DPD DUHG Y D Y W YPD YUHG DUH...

Page 249: ...on reduction 1 hyperbolic characteristic 3 Acceleration reduction 2 linear characteristic 4 No acceleration reduction effective A situation whereby no acceleration reduction is active arises for example when MD35220 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT 1 and or MD35230 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR 0 4 2 20 3 Substitute characteristic curve Function If the programmed path cannot be traversed using the param...

Page 250: ...n capacity is still available v15 a Consequently 15 of the maximum acceleration capacity motor torque always remains available whatever the machining situation Figure 4 10 Substitute path characteristic curve Linear path aers Substitute characteristic curve constant acceleration a15 Minimal constant acceleration a15 0 15 amax ared ared vers Substitute characteristic curve velocity vprog Programmed...

Page 251: ...th mode is active non tangential block transitions result in axial velocity jumps when the programmed path velocity is used for traversing As a result the path velocity is controlled in such a way that prevents any axial velocity proportion from exceeding the creep velocity vred at the time of the block transition Deceleration ramp with continuous path mode and LookAhead In the case of consecutive...

Page 252: ...e is parameterized for specific axes using machine data MD32000 MA_MAX_AX_VELO maximum axis velocity MD35220 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT speed for reduced acceleration MD35230 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR reduced acceleration MD32300 MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL Maximum axis acceleration MD35242 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_TYPE type of acceleration reduction 0 constant 1 hyperbolic 2 linear 1 Brake application point 2 ...

Page 253: ...LUES 20 Dependencies If the knee shaped acceleration characteristic curve is parameterized for a machine axis then this becomes the default acceleration profile for all traversing operations If the effective acceleration profile is changed for a specific path section using the SOFT or BRISK part program instructions then an appropriate substitute characteristic curve with lower dynamic limit value...

Page 254: ...aversing operations If the effective acceleration profile is changed for a specific axis using the SOFTA or BRISKA part program instructions then an appropriate substitute characteristic curve is used in place of the knee shaped acceleration characteristic curve It is possible to switch back to the knee shaped acceleration characteristic curve for a specific axis by programming DRIVEA 4 2 20 6 Bou...

Page 255: ...part program instruction DRIVE is active then a substitute characteristic curve with reduced dynamic limiting values is determined for the path Kinematic transformation The knee shaped acceleration characteristic is not considered in an active kinematic transformation With internal control a switchover is done to acceleration without jerk limitation BRISK and a substitute characteristic curve beco...

Page 256: ...ty can be adapted to take account of various events and the resulting change in acceleration Part program excerpt schematic Acceleration selection in accordance with fast input 1 A_IN 1 N53 ID 1 WHEN A_IN 1 1 DO AC_PATHACC 2 MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL X Test override profile simulates external intervention N54 ID 2 WHENEVER AC_TIMEC 16 DO AC_OVR 10 N55 ID 3 WHENEVER AC_TIMEC 30 DO AC_OVR 100 Approach N1000 G...

Page 257: ...OVR in accordance with real time acceleration AC_PATHACC N53 N55 4 Brake to block end velocity for intermediate smoothing block in accordance with acceleration default ACC N2200 5 Speed limitation as a result of smoothing see 9 6 Accelerate to 100 of path velocity AC_OVR in accordance with acceleration default ACC N2300 7 Decelerate as a result of override modification at a rate of acceleration th...

Page 258: ...f various events and the resulting change in jerk Part program excerpt schematic Setting of path acceleration and path jerk in the event of external intervention N0100 AC_PATHACC 0 N0200 AC_PATHJERK 4 MA_MAX_AX_JERK X MA_MAX_AX_JERK Y 2 Synchronized actions for the purpose of varying the override simulates external intervention N53 ID 1 WHENEVER AC_TIMEC 16 DO AC_OVR 10 N54 ID 2 WHENEVER AC_TIMEC ...

Page 259: ... data and the contour sections they influence Part program Acceleration profile SOFT 1 Jerk according to MA_MAX_AX_JERK 2 Jerk according to AC_PATHJERK 3 Jerk according to MA_MAX_AX_JERK approach block end velocity 4 Velocity limit due to arc 5 Jerk according to AC_PATHJERK N90 F5000 SOFT G64 Continuous path mode acceleration with jerk limitation N100 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 Rapid traverse N110 G1 X10 Straigh...

Page 260: ...0 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 Figure 4 15 Part program contour Figure 4 16 X axis Velocity and acceleration characteristic 1 1 1 1 LV YHORFLW LV DFFHOHUDWLRQ 1 1 1 1 0 0 B B29 B 725 0 3 7 B75 16B 5 B 0 0 0 B B 0 62 7B B 725 0 0 B B 5 ...

Page 261: ... only Activation by setting as the channel specific default setting MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUE 20 3 DRIVE X axis MD35220 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT X 0 4 MD35230 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR X 0 85 MD35242 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_TYPE X 2 MD35240 MA_ACCEL_TYPE_DRIVE X TRUE Y axis MD35220 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT Y 0 0 MD35230 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR Y 0 6 MD35242 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_TYPE Y 1 MD35240 ...

Page 262: ...E N20 BRISK Switchover to BRISK N25 G1 X120 Y70 Path motion Y Z with substitute characteristic curve N30 Z100 Path motion Z with BRISK N35 POS X 200 FA X 500 Positioning motion X with DRIVEA N40 BRISKA Z Activate BRISKA for Z N40 POS Z 50 FA Z 200 Positioning motion Z with BRISKA N45 DRIVEA Z Activate DRIVEA for Z N50 POS Z 100 Positioning motion Z with DRIVE N55 BRISKA X results in error message ...

Page 263: ...JERK_ENABLE Axial jerk limitation 32402 AX_JERK_MODE Filter type for axial jerk limitation 32410 AX_JERK_TIME Time constant for axial jerk filter 32420 JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE Initial setting for axial jerk limitation 32430 JOG_AND_POS_MAX_JERK Axial jerk 32431 MAX_AX_JERK Maximum axial jerk at the block transition in continuous path mode 32432 PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM Max axial jerk of a geometry axis...

Page 264: ...aracteristic for axes on off 35242 ACCEL_REDUCTION_TYPE Type of acceleration reduction Number Identifier SC_ Description 42500 SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL Max path acceleration 42502 IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL Analysis of SD 42500 ON OFF 42510 SD_MAX_PATH_JERK Max path related jerk 42512 IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK Analysis of SD 42510 ON OFF Identifier Description AC_PATHACC Path acceleration for real time events AC_PAT...

Page 265: ... and outputs of the PLC Service displays Nominal values actual values and status data for axes spindles Logbook Display showing version of system software installed External diagnostic tools The software to be installed on an external computer is used to commission the NC and to commission the SINAMICS drives The diagnostic functions support commissioning and service personnel during commissioning...

Page 266: ...arm handler provides an infrastructure for activating and managing alarms on the NCK Functions Buffering of a maximum of 16 alarms that have been activated since system power up and which have not yet been reset Alarm reactions can be programmed as channel specific mode group specific or NCK specific reactions The NoReady alarm reaction can also be programmed as a channel specific reaction Activat...

Page 267: ...READY signal are reconfigured by the alarm handler to the mode group specific NOREADY signal This ensures that earlier PLC software versions remain compatible 1 The CHAN_NOREADY signal is used The alarm handler reconfigures BAG_NOREADY to CHAN_NOREADY POWERONCLEAR The alarm is cleared by switching the control off and then on again RESETCLEAR When the Reset key is pressed the alarm is cleared in th...

Page 268: ...ts can be modified using machine data Screen form for suppressing special alarm outputs MD11410 MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK MD11415 MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK_2 Screen form for activating special alarm outputs MD11411 MN_ENABLE_ALARM_MASK Screen form for displaying fault and alarm buffer of SINAMICS DOs MD13150 MN_SINAMICS_ALARM_MASK References Detailed machine data description ...

Page 269: ...ay of values and states on the control s user interface allows the operating state of the axes and spindles to be evaluated Accessing the diagnostic options The information relevant when commissioning and troubleshooting diagnostics axes and spindles is displayed on the operator panel front in the operating area Diagnosis in the service display Axis spindle for each axis spindle Note System depend...

Page 270: ...put and the actual position value of active measuring system 1 or 2 Unit mm inch or degrees Contour deviation The actual contour deviation is displayed with this value variations of the following error caused by equalization operations on the speed controller due to load changes The contour deviation results from the difference between an actual position pre calculated from the position setpoint a...

Page 271: ...lied by the encoder are evaluated by the NC and displayed Unit 100 means maximum speed Speed setpoint Speed setpoint transferred to the drive speed setpoint from position controller and feed forward control Unit 100 means maximum speed setpoint Spindle speed setpoint prog Speed setpoint programmed by the user Unit rpm e g Input S1000 display 1000 rpm Display applies to spindles only Spindle speed ...

Page 272: ...s this is only displayed if a spindle is assigned to the axis The display corresponds to the NC PLC interface signal DB31 DBX16 0 to 16 2 actual gear stage References Function Manual Basic Functions Spindles S1 Displays which of the 6 parameter sets of the position controller is active A parameter set switchover takes place for example when a gear stage is changed References Function Manual Basic ...

Page 273: ...MA_REFP_CYCLE_NR and MD20700 MC_REFP_NC_START_LOCK The display corresponds to the NC PLC interface signal DB31 DBX60 4 and 60 5 referenced synchronized 1 or 2 References Function Manual Basic Functions Reference Point Approach R1 QEC learning active Indicates whether or not the learning process for quadrant error compensation for the axis is active Fixed stop reached Indicates whether or not the a...

Page 274: ... correspond to the actual factor the possible causes and remedial optimization options are as follows 0 3RVLWLRQ FRQWURO OHU 6SLQGOH VSHHG VHWSRLQW FXUUHQW UURU VLJQDO 3RVLWLRQ VHWSRLQW VSHHG VHWSRLQW 6SLQGOH VSHHG VHWSRLQW SURJ EV FRPSHQVDWLRQ YDOXH 0HDVXULQJ V VWHP 6SHHG VHWSRLQW FWXDO VSHHG YDOXH RQWURO SDUDPHWHU VHW RQWRXU GHYLDWLRQ ROORZLQJ HUURU H J IURP GLUHFW PHDVXULQJ V VWHP EV FRPSHQVDWL...

Page 275: ...r MD36030 MA_STANDSTILL_POS_TOL standstill tolerance Contour monitoring Contour deviation MD36400 MA_CONTOUR_TOL contour monitoring tolerance range Speed setpoint limitation Speed setpoint MD36210 MA_CTRLOUT_LIMIT maximum speed setpoint Position monitoring Following error MD36010 MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE exact stop fine Measuring system cannot be switched over Difference between Position actual value me...

Page 276: ...s not detected by the PLC during referencing Check status display referenced An incorrect reference point value is displayed Referencing was possibly performed with the incorrect measuring system For a main spindle drive significant fluctuations occur in the speed actual value Speed range for the encoder has been selected too high or the machine data MD36300 MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT n encoder limit frequ...

Page 277: ... 1 displaying the drive status messages e g threshold torque not reached minimum speed not reached actual speed set speed Explanations Terms The individual status displays warnings messages etc are explained in the following sections For HMI SW 6 and higher the status is shown in plain text as yes or no instead of 0 and 1 For additional information see References IAD Installation and startup guide...

Page 278: ...puts Setup mode terminal 112 HMI SW 6 3 and later The display corresponds to the status of terminal 112 on the SIMODRIVE 611 digital infeed regenerative feedback unit State 1 Central drive disable for setup mode State 0 Central drive enable no setup mode Display corresponds to machine datum MD1700 MD_TERMINAL_STATE status of binary inputs PLC pulse enable Indicates whether the pulse enable from th...

Page 279: ...ses have been enabled Display corresponds to IS DB31 DBX93 7 Enable pulses References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface Signals A2 Drive ready Display of the current status of the selected drive State 0 The drive is not ready State 1 The drive is ready Display corresponds to IS DB31 DBX93 5 Drive Ready References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface Signals A2 ...

Page 280: ... braking immediate pulse suppression They are modal DC link voltage indicates the current DC link voltage level within the drive grouping Unit Volts Speed setpoint The displayed speed setpoint represents the unfiltered total setpoint value It consists of the position controller output component and the speed feedforward branch Unit rpm Display corresponds to machine data MD1706 MD_DESIRED_SPEED sp...

Page 281: ...EMPERATURE motor temperature Speed setpoint filter 1 Status display of speed setpoint smoothing function Display corresponds to IS DB31 DBX92 3 Speed setpoint smoothing active and is shown in an updated form as of software version 6 3 and later References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface Signals A2 2 Torque Limit Display of active torque limit State 0 Torque limit 1 is active ...

Page 282: ...RIVE 611 digital are to be activated by the PLC Display corresponds to IS DB31 DBX21 0 to 21 2Parameter set selection A B C References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface Signals A2 Actual parameter set drive Display indicating which of the 8 drive parameter sets of the SIMODRIVE 611 digital is currently active Display corresponds to IS DB31 DBX93 0 to 93 2 Active parameter set A...

Page 283: ... NST DB31 DBX21 3 to 21 4 Motor selection A B References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface Signals A2 Actual motor star delta Display indicating which of the motor data sets is currently active At the moment the motor data record is used for the star delta switchover on main spindle drives The following assignment applies Display is valid only for main spindle drives Display co...

Page 284: ...to NST DB31 DBX95 7 i2 t monitoring References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface Signals A2 Heatsink temperature warning Warning signal output by drive State 0 The heat sink temperature monitoring has not responded State 1 The heatsink temperature monitoring has responded Display corresponds to IS DB31 DBX94 1 Heatsink temperature prewarning References FB1 Function Manual Basic...

Page 285: ...ions Various Interface Signals A2 Speed lower than minimum setting Status display of drive State 0 The speed actual value is higher than the minimum speed State 1 The actual speed value is smaller than the minimum speed The minimum speed corresponds to the machine data MD1418 MD_SPEED_THRESHOLD_MIN nmin for nis nmin message Display corresponds to IS DB31 DBX94 4 nactual nmin References FB1 Functio...

Page 286: ... function any memory location can be monitored to see whether a definable threshold is exceeded In addition to the threshold a tolerance band can be defined which is also taken into account when scanning for violation of the threshold value The signal can be combined with an ON delay or OFF delay time State 0 Threshold value not reached State 1 Threshold value exceeded Parameters for the variable ...

Page 287: ...response to individual alarms and remedial action please refer to References DA Diagnostic Manual 5 3 3 Service display PROFIBUS DP 840Di The user interface 840Di Start Up provides diagnostic screen forms for PROFIBUS DP and its nodes These diagnostic screens are only intended for information You cannot modify them The following detailed information is displayed PROFIBUS configuration Information ...

Page 288: ... OFFLINE CLEAR OPERATE ERROR Table 5 2 Diagnostic screen Information about slaves Function Part function Explanation Meaning Slave no DP address Configured DP address of the DP slave Assignment It is shown whether the DP slave is assigned to the NC or to the PLC NC e g one or more drives controlled by the NC PLC e g I O peripherals or an axis controlled by the PLC active on the bus Shows whether t...

Page 289: ...working with the assigned component NC or PLC Red lamp Error function no communication Synchronous It is shown whether the DP slave is running synchronously to NC on the bus Green lamp DP slave runs synchronously to NC at PROFIBUS DP i e the equidistant data exchange takes place Gray lamp DP slave is not assigned to NC but instead to PLC Red lamp Error function no communication Slots No Slot numbe...

Page 290: ...ures have occured since the NC power up This value is an indication of the quality susceptibility to faults of the PROFIBUS DP strand Encoder 1 Slave Slot Configurable routing State Current state of slot Green lamp Cyclic communication Red lamp still no cyclic communication Telegram failures It is shown how many telegram failures have occured since the NC power up This value is an indication of th...

Page 291: ...g area This error list assists developers of OEM applications in localizing sporadic errors The list has no relevance for normal operation Logbook The logbook display selected by means of soft key Logbook in the Diagnostics operating area automatically lists details of all alterations to the control that are relevant for the system e g changes in access level For SINUMERIK 840Di the logbook is dis...

Page 292: ...y operation and changing PLC signals refer to the Operator s Guide for the relevant HMI software Status display The status of the following data can be displayed on the operator panel Interface signals from the machine control panel Interface signals to the machine control panel Interface signals between the NCK and PLC Interface signals between the HMI and PLC Data blocks DB 0 127 Flags FB 0 255 ...

Page 293: ...Perform an NC RESET The axes which were controlled by the removed drive modules are now replaced by simulated axes The 611D bus with its drive modules is now in a state in which it could normally move axes but axis traversal has been disabled internally Alarm 300020 Drive 1 removed for diagnostics displays this status to the operator Restoring the initial configuration After completing the diagnos...

Page 294: ...1 DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE 1 0 DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE 2 0 DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE 3 2 DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE 4 2 DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE 5 1 DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE 6 9 Alarms 300020 Drive 1 removed for diagnostics and 300020 Drive 2 removed for diagnostics are displayed Note Before activating the function the module in question must be removed from the drive bus configuration SIMODRIVE 611 digital To do this connect the drive bus ...

Page 295: ...e numbers If the controller is engaged for the drives that are still installed these drives operate in the normal way Interpolative traversal of all axes is disabled Note If alarm 300003 Axis xx drive yy incorrect module type zz appears then you have removed only one part of a 2 axis module In this case you should check the module type in the drive configuration display NO axis type is shown for r...

Page 296: ... 1622 PROG_SIGNAL_ADDRESS Address variable signal function 1623 PROG_SIGNAL_THRESHOLD Threshold variable signal function 1624 PROG_SIGNAL_HYSTERESIS Hysteresis variable signal function 1625 PROG_SIGNAL_ON_DELAY ON Delay variable signal function 1626 PROG_SIGNAL_OFF_DELAY OFF Delay variable signal function 1700 TERMINAL_STATE Status of binary inputs 1702 MOTOR_TEMPERATURE Motor temperature 1706 DES...

Page 297: ...IT Maximum speed setpoint 36300 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT n Encoder limit frequency 36400 CONTOUR_TOL Tolerance band contour monitoring 36500 ENC_CHANGE_TOL Max tolerance for actual position value acquisition 37010 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_DEF Clamping torque 43510 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE Fixed stop clamping torque Number Identifier SA_ Description 43510 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE Fixed stop clamping torque Signal name SINUMERIK ...

Page 298: ...ive motor A B DB31 DBX93 3 4 Drive Ready DB31 DBX93 5 DB390x DBX4001 5 Speed controller integrator disabled DB31 DBX93 6 DB390x DBX4001 6 Pulses enabled DB31 DBX93 7 DB390x DBX4001 7 Motor temperature prewarning DB31 DBX94 0 DB390x DBX4002 0 Heat sink temperature prewarning DB31 DBX94 1 DB390x DBX4002 1 Ramp up function completed DB31 DBX94 2 DB390x DBX4002 2 _ Md_ Mdx DB31 DBX94 3 DB390x DBX4002 ...

Page 299: ...ed for axes as well as for spindles with axis traversing capability The function can be implemented for several axes simultaneously and parallel to the motion of other axes Torques or the power can be adjusted to a specific setting Travel with limited torque power Force Control FOC can be activated The travel to fixed stop functions can be enabled from synchronized actions Block search with calcul...

Page 300: ...egrees Channel axis identifier Instead of the machine axis identifiers it is also possible to use channel axis identifiers if the channel axis is precisely assigned to one machine axis Restrictions Channel axis identifiers may not be used option disabled for machine axes which have an active transformation or frame If the machine axis is a coupled axis e g following axis programming is prevented a...

Page 301: ...owing programming lines have the same effect when the channel axis X is imaged on the machine axis AX1 X1 X250 Y100 F100 FXS X1 1 X250 Y100 F100 FXS X1 1 FXST X1 12 3 X250 Y100 F100 FXS X1 1 FXST X1 12 3 FXSW X1 2 mm X250 Y100 F100 FXS X1 1 FXSW X1 2 mm Programming with machine axis identifiers FXS X1 1 Selecting X1 FXST X1 10 New torque for X1 FXSW X1 5 New window for X1 Programming with channel ...

Page 302: ...acknowledgement of the PLC using the IS DB31 DBX3 1 Enable travel to fixed stop The programmed target position is then approached from the start position at the programmed velocity The fixed stop must be located between the start and target positions of the axis spindle A programmed torque limit is effective from the start of the block i e the fixed stop is also approached with reduced torque Allo...

Page 303: ... this status by a signal change from 0 1 to DB31 DBX 1 2 The axis contour deviation is explained in References FB1 Function Manual Basic Function Diagnostics tool D1 Internal processes Once the NC has detected the Fixed stop reached status it deletes the distance to go and the position setpoint is made to follow The controller enabling command remains active The PLC is then informed of the state u...

Page 304: ...ixed stop alarms the alarm 20091 Fixed stop not reached is output Function abort If the Travel to fixed stop function is aborted owing to a pulse cancellation command cancelation of PLC acknowledgments or a Reset in the approach block the display or suppression of alarm 20094 can be controlled via machine data MD37050m MA_FIXED_STOP_ALARM_MASK can be controlled Abort without alarm The travel to fi...

Page 305: ..._STOP_ALARM_REACTION were set IS Mode group ready DB11 DBX6 3 remains active Alarm suppression after new programming Travel to fixed stop can be used for simple measuring processes For example it is possible to carry out a check for tool breakage by measuring the tool length by traversing onto a defined obstacle To do so the fixed stop alarm must be suppressed When the function for clamping workpi...

Page 306: ... related synchronized action travel to fixed stop can be connected during an approach motion Programming example Changing the clamping torque and fixed stop monitoring window The clamping torque and the monitoring window can be changed with the commands FXST x and FXSW x The changes take effect before traversing movements in the same block Programming of a new fixed stop monitoring window causes a...

Page 307: ...ed via a setpoint the limit stop monitor is activated In static and block related synchronized actions the same commands FXS FXST FXSW can be used as in the normal parts program run The values assigned can result from a calculation Ramp for torque limitation with MD37012 A ramp has been implemented so that the setting of a torque limit is not to jerky For this in the machine data MD37012 MA_FIXED_...

Page 308: ...is must stop at a fixed limit then the fixed stop is approached if it has not yet been reached If the target block is located in the program section in which the axis must not stop at a fixed limit then the axis leaves the fixed stop if it is still positioned there If the desired fixed stop status is reached alarm message 10208 press NC Start to continue the program is output The program can be co...

Page 309: ... the Stop condition Search target found in its block display If FXS travel to fixed stop is located between the beginning of the program and the search target the instruction is not really executed by the NC The motion is only simulated up to the programmed end point The user can log the turning on and turning off of FXS in the parts program If necessary the user can start an ASUB in order to acti...

Page 310: ... assigned the same values again VA_FXS Real machine status Variable VA_FXS always describes the real machine status In this way the actual existing machine status of the corresponding axis with VA_FXS is displayed Setpoint actual status comparison The two system variables AA_FXS and VA_FXS can be used to compare the setpoint and actual states in the parts program The SERUPRO ASUB routine is then a...

Page 311: ...is sequence is comparable to the program fxsSeruproAsup mpf Every axis is taken into account and the torque last programmed before the search target is applied The user can treat FXS separately in a SERUPRO ASUP The following then applies Every FXS action executed in SERUPRO ASUP automatically takes care of AA_FXS X VA_FXS X This deactivates FXS REPOS for axis X Deactivate FXS REPOS FXS REPOS is d...

Page 312: ...nly when the axis has reached the fixed stop The status of the setting data is displayed via the operator panel front in the Parameters area The commands FXS x FXST x and FXSW x effect a block synchronous change in these setting data If FXST x and FXSW x are not programmed then if Travel to fixed stop is activated the defaults from the following machine data is copied to the corresponding setting ...

Page 313: ...s the status of the travel to fixed stop function It has the following coding Query of the system variables in the part programs initiates a preprocessing stop As a result of the status query in the parts program it is possible for example to react to an erroneous operational sequence of the Travel to fixed stop function Example MD37050 MA_FIXED_STOP_ALARM_MASK 0 No alarm is generated in response ...

Page 314: ...th functions are acting on positioning axes Contour monitoring The axis contour monitoring function is inoperative while Travel to fixed stop is active Positioning axes When Travel to fixed stop is applied toPOSA axes block changes are made independently of the fixed stop motion Vertical axes The Travel to fixed stop function can be used for vertical axes even when alarms are active Should the tra...

Page 315: ...Pulses or using IS DB31 DBX21 7 Pulse enable is known as pulse blocking in the following The machine data MD37002 MA_FIXED_STOP_CONTROL can be used to influence the interaction of travel to fixed stop and pulse blocking Bit 0 Response in case of pulse blocking at stop as follows Once the pulse blocking is canceled again the drive will press at the limited torque again The torque is actuated step l...

Page 316: ...op Without ramp The torque limit is changed without taking into account the ramp if FXS is activated with FXS 1 to make sure that the reduction is activated immediately especially for synchronized actions The drive needs to be de energized as quickly as possible in the event of a fault Selection of FXS with G64 In the machine data MD37060 MA_FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK Bit 0 must be 0 Do not wait for PLC...

Page 317: ...odal activation FOCON FOCOF The activation of the function after POWER_ON and RESET is determined by the machine data MD37080 MA_FOC_ACTIVATION_MODE FOCON Activation of the modally effective torque force limitation FOCOF Disable torque force limitation The modal activation acts beyond the program end If already programmed it is effective with FXST set torque force FXST can be programmed irrespecti...

Page 318: ...ronized actions The language commands FOC FOCON FOCOF can also be programmed in synchronized actions as the commands for travel to fixed stop Determine FOC status The activation status can be read at any time via the status variable AA_FOC If FXS is also activated the status is not changed Determine torque limit status The system variables VA_TORQUE_AT_LIMIT can be used at any time to read in syst...

Page 319: ...on occurs If the acceleration limitation is not adapted accordingly the end of block position is possibly reached later than specified in MD36040 MA_STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME The machine data MD36042 MA_FOC_STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME is introduced for this and monitored in this status Possible application link and container axes All axes that can be traversed in a channel i e also link axes and container a...

Page 320: ...n at the programmed velocity At the same time the clamping torque specified via FXST x is transferred to the drive via the interface and this limits its effective torque In addition the acceleration is reduced accordingly in the NC automatically acc to FXST x Fixed stop reached As soon as the axis reaches the fixed stop the axial contour deviation increases If the threshold entered in the machine ...

Page 321: ...ing recognized then the torque limitation in the drive is canceled via the digital interface and IS DB31 DBX62 4 Activate travel to fixed stop is reset Then a block change is executed Figure 6 3 Fixed stop is not reached 9 B 6 9 B 6 9 B 6 9 B 6 0 0 B B6723B7 5 6 2 QGVWRS FRUUHFWO DSSURDFKHG ROORZLQJ HUURU ORFN FKDQJH ORFN ZLWK 6 6 FWLYDWH 6 LVWRU 6 6 UHDFKHG 9 B 6 9 B 6 9 B 6 QGVWRS LV QRW UHDFKHG...

Page 322: ... out A programmed traverse motion can then be executed This motion must lead away from the fixed stop or else the stop or even the machine may sustain damage A block change is executed after the target position has been reached Figure 6 4 Fixed stop deselection Enabling the fixed stop alarms With the machine data MD37050 MA_FIXED_STOP_ALARM_MASK enabling the fixed stop alarms can be established as...

Page 323: ...l not abort the function As a result the drive will press against the fixed stop again without any further operating action when the machine is restarted The rise time of the torque corresponds to the time needed by the current controller of the drive to reach the limitation again If the pulses are deleted when a deselection is active waiting for PLC acknowledgments the torque limit will be reduce...

Page 324: ...travel motion to POS Y 150 direction of the stop started N11 IDS 2 WHENEVER once the stop has been recognized AA_FXS Y 4 DO AA_FXS Y 4 the torque is FXST Y 30 increased to 30 N12 IDS 3 WHENEVER after reaching the stop AA_FXS Y 1 DO the torque becomes dependent FXST Y R0 on R0 controlled N13 IDS 4 WHENEVER deselection in dependence R3 1 AND on R3 and AA_FXS Y 1 DO reverse FXS Y 0 FA Y 1000 POS Y 0 ...

Page 325: ...A_FXS or a separate flag here R1 in the condition will ensure that the function is not activated more than once programming example parts program fragment Block related synchronized actions By programming a block related synchronized action travel to fixed stop can be connected during an approach motion Programming example N10 R1 0 N20 IDS 1 WHENEVER R1 0 AND AA_IW AX3 7 DO R1 1 FXS AX1 1 FXST AX1...

Page 326: ... FIXED_STOP_WINDOW_DEF Default for fixed stop monitoring window 37030 FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD Threshold for fixed stop detection 37040 FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR Fixed stop detection via sensor 37050 FIXED_STOP_ALARM_MASK Enabling the fixed stop alarms 37052 FIXED_STOP_ALARM_REACTION Reaction to fixed stop alarms 37060 FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK Monitoring of PLC acknowledgments for travel to fixed stop 37070 FI...

Page 327: ...Axis spindle disable DB31 DBX1 3 DB380x DBX1 3 Controller enable DB31 DBX2 1 DB380x DBX2 1 Enable travel to fixed stop DB31 DBX3 1 DB380x DBX3 1 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Activate travel to fixed stop DB31 DBX62 4 DB390x DBX2 4 Fixed stop reached DB31 DBX62 5 DB390x DBX2 5 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D ...

Page 328: ...F1 Travel to fixed stop 6 5 Data lists Basic Functions 328 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 ...

Page 329: ...es setpoint actual value systems closed loop control 7 1 Brief description The description of functions explains how to parameterize a machine axis in relation to Actual value measuring systems Setpoint system Operating accuracy Travel ranges Axis velocities Control parameters ...

Page 330: ...defined in machine data MD32000 MA_MAX_AX_VELO maximum axis velocity The maximum permissible spindle speed is specified using machine data MD35100 MA_SPIND_VELO_LIMIT maximum spindle speed For an explanation please refer to References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Spindles S1 With a high feedrate resulting from programmed feedrates and feedrate override the maximum path velocity is limited t...

Page 331: ...ional resolution selected For the standard assignment of machine data MD10200 MN_INT_INCR_PER_MM computational resolution for linear positions 1000 incr mm or MD10210 MN_INT_INCR_PER_DEG computational resolution for angular positions 1000 incr deg The following value range can be programmed with the specified resolution If the computational resolution is increased decreased by a factor then the va...

Page 332: ...t of measurement of rotary axes is always degrees If the computational resolution is increased decreased by a factor of 10 the ranges of values change accordingly The traversing range can be limited by software limit switches and working areas References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Axis Monitoring Protection Zones A3 The traversing range for rotary axes can be limited via machine data Refe...

Page 333: ...ents mm or degrees The coarse resolution of these two values determines the positioning accuracy of the control The input resolution interpolator and position control cycle selections have no effect on this accuracy As well as limiting using MD32000 the control limits the maximum path velocity in relation to the situation and according to the following formula 7 2 4 Block diagram of resolutions an...

Page 334: ... B38 6 B08 7 QSXW GLVSOD UHVROXWLRQ LV VSHFLILHG E WKH RSHUDWRU SDQHO EHLQJ XVHG QWHUQDO XQLW PP RU GHJUHHV QWHUQDO LQFUHPHQWV PP RU GHJUHHV GHFLPDO SODFHV DUH HOLPLQDWHG Q FRGHU HV 1R FWXDO YDOXH UHVROXWLRQ HQFRGHU LQFUHPHQWV PP RU GHJUHHV 0RWRU 6SHHG VHWSRLQW UHVROXWLRQ ULYH XQLW 6FDOLQJ H DPSOH 0DFKLQH GDWD LQSXW DQG GLVSOD LQ FP IRU EDVLF PHWULF V VWHP H J IRU 0 326B 0 7B3 86 VW VRIWZDUH OLPLW...

Page 335: ..._DISPLAY_RESOLUTION Machine data MD9011 MM_DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_INCH can be used to configure the display resolution of position values using the inch system This allows you to display up to six decimal places with the inch setting For the programming of parts programs the input resolutions listed in the Programming Guide apply The desired computational resolution is defined via machine data MD10200...

Page 336: ...etting data Input output units Machine and setting data that possess a physical quantity are interpreted in the input output units below depending on whether the metric or inch system is selected N20 G0 X 1 0000 Y 1 0000 Traverse axes to position X 1 0000 mm Y 1 0000 mm N25 G0 X 5 0002 Y 2 0003 Traverse axes to position X 5 0002 mm Y 2 0003 mm Physical quantity Input output units for standard basi...

Page 337: ...SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK activation of scaling factors and MD10230 MN_SCALING_FACTORS_USER_DEF n Scaling factors of physical quantities allow you to set the adaptation between the newly selected input output units and the internal units Physical quantity Internal unit Linear position 1 mm Angular position 1 degree Linear velocity 1 mm s Angular velocity 1 deg s Linear acceleration 1 mm s2 Angular acc...

Page 338: ...itial state The internal unit is mm s The scaling factor for the linear velocities is to differ from the standard setting For this in the machine data MD10220 MN_SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK the bit number 2 must be set MD10220 MN_SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK H4 bit no 2 as hex value The scaling factor for the linear velocities is to differ from the standard setting For this in the machine data MD10220 MN_SCALI...

Page 339: ...ist Example 2 In addition to the change in Example 1 the machine data input output of linear accelerations must be in ft s2 instead of m s2 initial state The internal unit is mm s2 Index 4 defines the linear acceleration in the Scaling factors of physical quantities list 0 6 1 B 7256B86 5B Q 0 6 1 B 7256B86 5B Q 0 6 1 B 7256B86 5B Q P PP V PP V PP V PLQ QSXW RXWSXW XQLW VHOHFWHG QWHUQDO XQLW 0 6 1...

Page 340: ...t via the following machine data on a channel specific basis MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 12 reset position for G group 13 When changing the measuring system via the HMI user interface the reset position is automatically preconfigured for compatibility with the new measuring system via G700 or G710 Displaying length related data on the HMI Length related data is displayed on the HMI in the config...

Page 341: ...remains active after subsequent G70 G71 G700 G710 commands If the feedrate is to apply in the new G70 G71 G700 G710 context it must be re programmed 2 System variables and machine data specifying lengths in the parts program are read and written in the programmed measuring system Differences during the reading and writing of machine data and system variables The following differences exist between...

Page 342: ...on Therefore the traversing motion of the X axis takes place in the measuring system of the configured initial state Example 2 The metric measuring system is explicitly programmed with G71 within the synchronized action This means the traversing motion of the X axis takes place in the metric measuring system N220 SETAL 61000 N230 ENDIF N240 M30 Program code Comment N100 R1 0 N110 G0 X0 Z0 N120 WAI...

Page 343: ...e FRAMES G G P P Basic frames G G P P Work offsets external G G P P Axial preset offset G G P P Operating range limit G25 G26 G G P P Protection zones P P P P Tool offsets G G P P Length related machine data G G P P Length related setting data G G P P Length related system variables G G P P GUD G G G G LUD G G G G PUD G G G G R parameters G G G G Siemens cycles P P P P Jog handwheel increment fact...

Page 344: ...ng system The initial setting of the measuring system basic system is defined using the following machine data MD10240 MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC basic system metric Depending on the basic system all length related data is interpreted either as metric or inch measurements The relevant softkey on the HMI in the Machine operating area is used to change the measuring system of the controller The cha...

Page 345: ...dently of the protection level currently set Note The availability of the softkey and therefore its functionality can be configured using the compatibility machine data MD10260 MN_CONVERT_SCALING_SYSTEM If several NCUs are linked by NCU link the switchover has the same effect on all linked NCUs If the prerequisites for a switchover are not fulfilled on one of the NCUs linked no switchover will tak...

Page 346: ...es Machine data Jog and handwheel factors After the changeover all of the above data is available in physical quantities Data for which no unique physical units are defined is not converted automatically This includes R parameters GUDs Global User Data LUDs Local User Data PUDs Program global User Data Analog inputs outputs Data exchange via FC21 In this case the user is requested to take into acc...

Page 347: ... MN_CC_TDA_PARAM_UNIT MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM MD10292 MN_CC_TOA_PARAM_UNIT MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM A physical unit can be configured using these machine data All length related user defined tool data are automatically converted to the new measuring system according to the input on switchover Reference point The reference point is retained It is not necessary to repeat referencing Input resolution and comp...

Page 348: ... when the measuring system is changed since all internal positions always refer to mm Data backup Data sets which can be separately read out of the control and have data where the system of units is relevant receive when reading as a function of machine data MD10260 MN_CONVERT_SCALING_SYSTEM an INCH or METRIC identification corresponding to machine data MD10240 MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC This spe...

Page 349: ...rence radius for each of the rotary axes involved You can do this by programming the modal NC address FGREF rotary axis reference radius The unit of the reference radius depends on the G70 G71 G700 G710 setting In order to include the axes in the calculation of the path feedrate they must all be specified in the FGROUP command In order to ensure compatibility with the behavior with no FGREF progra...

Page 350: ...120 G91 G1 G710 F100 Feedrate 100mm min or 100 degrees min N130 DO R1 AC_TIME N140 X10 Feedrate 100 mm min path 10 mm R1 approx 6 s N150 DO R2 AC_TIME N160 X10 A10 Feedrate 100 mm min path 14 14 mm R2 approx 8 s N170 DO R3 AC_TIME N180 A10 Feedrate 100 degrees min path 10 degrees R3 approx 6 s N190 DO R4 AC_TIME N200 X0 001 A10 Feedrate 100 mm min path 10 mm R4 approx 6 s N210 G700 F100 Feedrate 2...

Page 351: ...tem variables For the display in the user interface in synchronized actions or with a preprocessing stop in the part program via the system variables Without preprocessing stop in the part program via system variable If no values are programmed the default 360 mm 2π 57 296 mm corresponding to 1 mm per degree will be read in both variables For linear axes the value in both variables is always 1 mm ...

Page 352: ...m via system variables AA_FGROUP axis Returns the value 1 if the specified axis affects the path velocity in the current main run record by means of the basic setting or through FGROUP programming Otherwise the variable returns the value 0 AC_FGROUP_MASK Returns a bit key of the channel axes programmed with FGROUP which are to affect the path velocity PA_FGROUP axis Returns the value 1 if the spec...

Page 353: ...or machining processes with high accuracy requirements and an indirect measuring system for high speed positioning tasks The number of encoders used is recorded in the machine data MD30200 MA_NUM_ENCS number of encoders In the case of two actual value branches the actual value is acquired for both branches The active measuring system is always used for position control absolute value calculation a...

Page 354: ...do this Switchover only takes place if a permissible deviation between the actual values and the two measuring systems has not been violated The associated tolerance is entered in the machine data MD36500 MA_ENC_CHANGE_TOL Max tolerance on position actual value switchover On switchover the current difference between position measuring system 1 and 2 is traversed immediately Monitoring The permissi...

Page 355: ...come simulation axes The setpoint and actual value can be set to the reference point value with reference point approach The machine data MD30350 MA_SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT output of axis signals with simulation axes can be used to define whether the axis specific interface signals are to be output on the PLC during the simulation Actual value correction If actual value corrections performed by the NC ...

Page 356: ...lt MD30110 MA_CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR n Setpoint assignment Drive number module number System Value Meaning 840D sl x Index x of MD13050 MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_ADDRESS x should be entered which refers to the connected drive MD30110 MA_CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR n x refers to MD13050 MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_ADDRESS x Note The machine data is of no significance if the drive is simulated MD30130 MA_CTRLOUT_TYPE n 0 MD30120 MA_CTRLO...

Page 357: ...it module System Value Meaning 840D sl x Number of the encoder interface within the PROFIdrive telegram Examples PROFIdrive telegram 103 x 1 1st encoder interface G1_ZSW G1_XIST1 G1_XIST2 x 2 2nd encoder interface G2_ZSW G2_XIST1 G2_XIST2 PROFIdrive telegram 118 x 1 1st encoder interface G2_ZSW G2_XIST1 G2_XIST2 x 2 2nd encoder interface G3_ZSW G3_XIST1 G3_XIST2 Note For SINAMICS S120 encoder 1 G1...

Page 358: ...s encoder 2 is independent If encoder 2 is selected for position control then the actual value corrections are performed on both encoders as encoder 1 is not independent This means that the machine data only has an effect on the passive encoder of a machine axis 2 The passive encoder is dependent The encoder actual value is changed by the active encoder In combination with MD35102 MA_REFP_SYNC_ENC...

Page 359: ...nchronize the position controller with the relevant transmission ratios Since a gear stage change is not always carried out automatically and there are also several ways to request a gear stage change the position controller is not always incorporated via parameter sets Gear type Activation Adaptation Installation location Motor load gear Parameter set Fixed configuration Gear unit Measuring gear ...

Page 360: ... To do this the tool side position before and after a gear change are set equal for a change in the ratio since the mechanical position does not or hardly changes during a gear stage change Recommendation To avoid 21612 Controller enable reset during motion changeover should be carried out only at zero speed It is still permissible and expedient to switch the axis or spindle to speed control or fo...

Page 361: ...ust determine the travel direction of the feed axis before starting work Control direction Before the position control is started up the speed controller and current controller of the drive must be started up and optimized Travel direction With the machine data MD32100 MA_AX_MOTION_DIR travel direction the direction of motion of the axis can be reversed without affecting the control direction of t...

Page 362: ...INUMERIK 840D sl the maximum speed setpoint is defined as a percentage 100 means maximum speed setpoint or maximum speed for PROFIdrive drives manufacturer specific setting parameters in the drive e g p1082 for SINAMICS The output of the spindle speed is implemented in the NC for SINUMERIK 840D sl Data for 5 gear stages are realized in the control These stages are defined by a minimum and maximum ...

Page 363: ...alid actual value resolution The following axis specific machine data are used for the purpose which are partially specified from the drive MD31000 31010 31020 31025 The control calculates the actual value resolution from the settings made in the MD The control parameter sets of the position control are identified as servo parameter sets The machining process of the machine forms the basis of the ...

Page 364: ...W_PITCH mm rev mm rev MD31050 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM n Load rev 1 Load rev MD31060 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA n Motor rev if infeed gear available 1 Motor rev MD31070 MA_DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM n Encoder rev Encoder rev Encoder rev Encoder rev MD31080 MA_DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA n Motor side encoder Motor rev Motor rev Load rev Does not apply to this combination The encoder on the motor side is a built...

Page 365: ...asuring gear numerator MD31000 MA_ENC_IS_LINEAR n Direct measuring system linear scale MD31010 MA_ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST n Distance between reference marks on linear scales MD31020 MA_ENC_RESOL n Encoder pulses per revolution for rotary encoder MD31040 MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT n Encoder is connected directly at the machine MD34320 MA_ENC_INVERS n Length measuring system is in the opposite sense Additional ma...

Page 366: ...as follows For encoders with rotary axis the following applies The internal pulse multiplication is defined by MD31025 MA_ENC_PULSE_MULT NewConfig dependent machine data Additional machine data without index Meaning MD31064 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_DENOM Intermediate gear denominator MD31066 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_NUMERA Intermediate gear numerator MD32000 MA_MAX_AX_VELO Maximum axis velocity Note These mac...

Page 367: ...dapt the actual value resolution to the calculation resolution the control calculates the quotients from the internal increments mm and the encoder increments mm as follows SINUMERIK example Linear axis with rotary encoder 2048 Impulse on motor internal multiplication 2048 0 6B527B 0 0 1 B 6B 1 5 0 1 B 5 B32 17B 67 OLQHDU HQFRGHU 0 1 B 19 56 LQ WKH RSSRVLWH GLUHFWLRQ RDG JHDU 7DEOH DOO VFUHZ LQHDU...

Page 368: ...0 MD31040 MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT 0 0 MD31020 MA_ENC_RESOL 0 2048 MD31025 MA_ENC_PULSE_MULT 2048 MD31030 MA_LEADSCREW_PITCH 10 MD31080 MA_DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA 0 1 MD31070 MA_DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM 0 1 MD31060 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA 0 5 MD31050 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM 0 1 MD10200 MN_INT_INCR_PER_MM 10000 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B180 5 Q 5 9 B B5 7 2B180 5 Q 5 9 B B5 7 2B 120 Q 17B 1 5B3 5B00 6 5 B3 7 5 9 B 1 B5 ...

Page 369: ...encoder on the machine In order to adapt the actual value resolution to the calculation resolution the control calculates the quotients from the internal increments mm and the encoder increments mm as follows PP LQFU PP QWHUQDO LQFUHPHQWV PP QFRGHU LQFUHPHQWV PP 6B527B Q Q 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B180 5 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B 120 6 5 B3 7 1 B 6B 5 7 1 B5 62 1 B 6B 1 5 0 1R RI VSLQGOH UHYV 1R RI HQFRGHU UHYV RDG JH...

Page 370: ...es the quotients from the internal increments degree and the encoder increments degree as follows Example for rotary axis with encoder on motor 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B180 5 Q 17B 1 5B3 5B00 6 5 B3 7 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B 120 Q 1 B5 62 Q 1 B38 6 B08 7 Q QWHUQDO LQFUHPHQWV PP QFRGHU LQFUHPHQWV PP Q Q 1 B5 62 1 B 6B 5 7 1 B 6B 1 5 6B527B 5 9 B B5 7 2B180 5 5 9 B B5 7 2B 120 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B180 5 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B 120...

Page 371: ... degree MD30300 MA_IS_ROT_AX 1 MD31000 MA_ENC_IS_LINEAR 0 0 MD31040 MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT 0 0 MD31020 MA_ENC_RESOL 0 2048 MD31025 MA_ENC_PULSE_MULT 2048 MD31080 MA_DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA 0 1 MD31070 MA_DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM 0 1 MD31060 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA 0 5 MD31050 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM 0 1 MD10210 MN_INT_INCR_PER_DEG 1000 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B180 5 Q 5 9 B B5 7 2B180 5 Q 5 9 B B5 7 2B 120 Q 17B 1 5...

Page 372: ...e actual value resolution to the calculation resolution the control calculates the quotients from the internal increments degree and the encoder increments degree as follows 6B527B Q Q 1 B 6B 1 5B 1 B5 62 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B180 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B 120 5 1 B 6B 5 7 0 1R RI ORDG UHYV 1R RI HQFRGHU UHYV 5HVROYHU JHDULQJ RDG JHDU 5RWDU WDEOH RDG QFRGHU 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B180 5 Q 17B 1 5B3 5B 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B 120 Q...

Page 373: ...ncrements mm and the encoder increments mm as follows Q 1 B 6B 5 7 1 B 6B 5 7 Q 1 B5 62 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B180 5 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B 120 5 9 B B5 7 2B180 5 5 9 B B5 7 2B 120 Q 1 B 6B 5 7 1 B 6B 5 7 1 B 6B 5 7 1 B 6B 5 7 5 9 B B5 7 2 B180 5 5 9 B B5 7 2 B 120 0 1XPEHU RI PRWRU UHYROXWLRQV 1XPEHU RI HQFRGHU UHYROXWLRQV 1R RI PRWRU UHYV 1R RI VSLQGOH UHYV QFRGHU 0HDV JHDU 0RWRU RDG JHDU QWHUPHGLDWH JHDU 7RRO...

Page 374: ...feedforward control backlash friction compensation with further machine data and leadscrew error compensation see References FB2 Function Manual Extended Functions Compensations K3 For a description of jerk limitation see References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Acceleration B2 0 0 B B 5 B 1 0 0 B B 5 B02 0 0 B B 5 B7 0 0 0 B326 75 B 1 Q 0 32B7 3 0 1B0 7 B 1 0 1B0 7 B7 0 Q 0 0 B 5 7B 203B 1 ...

Page 375: ...is necessary MD32200 MA_POSCTRL_GAIN n However if the servo gain factor Kv is too high instability overshoot and possibly impermissibly high loads on the machine will result The maximum permissible servo gain factor Kv depends on the following Design and dynamics of the drive rise time acceleration and braking capacity Machine quality elasticity oscillation damping Position control cycle or speed ...

Page 376: ...tation The dynamic response adaptation is realized by entering a new equivalent time constant It is calculated from the difference in the equivalent time constant of the dynamically weakest axis and the axis to be adapted MD32910 MA_DYN_MATCH_TIME n difference in the equivalent time constant Example of a dynamic response adaptation of 3 axes without speed precontrol With an equivalent time constan...

Page 377: ...eters sets The position control can operate with 6 different servo parameter sets They are used as follows 1 Fast adaptation of the position control to altered machine characteristics during operation e g a gear change of the spindle 2 Matching the dynamics of an axis to another axis e g during tapping Axis 1 MD32910 MA_DYN_MATCH_TIME 0 ms Axis 2 MD32910 MA_DYN_MATCH_TIME 30 ms 20 ms 10 ms Axis 3 ...

Page 378: ... stages 1 to 5 are referred to as interpolation parameters The following machine data can be changed by switching over the parameter set during operation Denominator load gearbox MD31050 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM n Numerator load gearbox MD31060 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA n Servo gain factor Kv MD32200 MA_POSCTRL_GAIN n Backlash compensation MD32452 MA_BACKLASH_FACTOR n Feedforward control factor MD32...

Page 379: ...ssigned its own parameter set Dependent on the NC PLC interface signal DB31 DBX16 0 16 2 actual gear stage the corresponding parameter set is activated For more information on gear stages for spindles see References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Spindles S1 DB31 DBX16 0 16 2 actual gear stage Active parameter set 000 1 Gear stage 2 Index 1 001 1 Gear stage 2 Index 1 010 2 Gear stage 3 Index ...

Page 380: ... to activate and deactivate the feedforward control for all axes using instructions FFWON and FFWOF which does not affect the following machine data MD32630 FFW_ACTIVATION_MODE Control response with POWER ON RESET REPOS etc In the case of POWER ON and RESET as well as with Enable machine data the setting data of the feedforward control are read in anew see the appropriate values of the machine dat...

Page 381: ...e data p1414 p1415 p1416 and p1421 Another option would be to trace the speed setpoint and actual value at a constant acceleration using an oscilloscope and to measure the follow on time of the speed actual value This start value e g 1 5 ms is now entered MD32810 MA_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME 0 0015 The axis then travels to and fro and the operator monitors a greatly magnified characteristic of the posi...

Page 382: ...GAIN adapted using MD32910 MD32620 MA_FFW_MODE MD32610 MA_VELO_FFW_WEIGHT MD32810 MA_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME or MD32800 MA_EQUIV_CURRCTRL_TIME dependent on the mechanical system and drive MD32400 MA_AX_JERK_ENABLE MD32402 MA_AX_JERK_MODE MD32410 MA_AX_JERK_TIME The servo gain display KV in the axis service screen form is used for checking Unequal axis data of an interpolation group If identical value...

Page 383: ...of machine vibrations Functionality The filter effect of the position setpoints must be as strong as possible without impermissibly affecting contour accuracy The smoothing behavior of the filter must also be as symmetrical as possible i e if the same contour was to be traveled in both forward and reverse the characteristic rounded by the filter should be as similar as possible in both directions ...

Page 384: ...rsing response of the axis e g based on positioning processes with servo trace 2 Modify the filter time in MD32410 MA_AX_JERK_TIME 3 Activate the modified time via Enable machine data or RESET on the machine control panel Disabling Disabling the jerk filter 1 Disable filter calculation MD32410 MA_AX_JERK_ENABLE 0 2 Activate the interlock via Enable machine data or RESET on the machine control pane...

Page 385: ...s smaller values than would be appropriate based on the filter effect Path accuracy is better than the displayed servo gain KV suggests Therefore on resetting MD32400 MA_AX_JERK_MODE 1 to MD32400 MA_AX_JERK_MODE 2 the displayed servo gain KV can be reduced while retaining the same filter time although the path accuracy improves Axes that interpolate with each other must be set identically Once an ...

Page 386: ...36040 MA_STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME MD36400 MA_CONTOUR_TOL 3 Activate the position control loop as a proportional plus integral action controller by setting the following machine data MD32220 MA_POSCTRL_INTEGR_ENABLE set value 1 MD32210 MA_POSCTRL_INTEGR_TIME integral time sec Effect of integral time Tn 0 The control error is corrected quickly however the control loop can become instable Tn The control...

Page 387: ...ONTOUR_TOL Example Setting result after several iterative processes for KR and Tn Each of the following quantities following error actual velocity actual position and position setpoint has been recorded by servo trace When traversing in JOG mode the characteristic of the individual data shown in the following figure was then drawn Set machine data MD32220 MA_POSCTRL_INTEGR_ENABLE 1 MD32210 MA_POSC...

Page 388: ...ycle 10200 INT_INCR_PER_MM Computational resolution for linear positions 10210 INT_INCR_PER_DEG Computational resolution for angular positions 10220 SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK Activation of scaling factors 10230 SCALING_FACTORS_USER_DEF Scaling factors of physical quantities 10240 SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC Basic system metric 10250 SCALING_VALUE_INCH Conversion factor for switchover to inch system 10260...

Page 389: ...ad gearbox 31060 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA Numerator load gearbox 31064 DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_DENOM Intermediate gear denominator 31066 DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_NUMERA Intermediate gear numerator 31070 DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM Measuring gear denominator 31080 DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA Measuring gear numerator 31090 JOG_INCR_WEIGHT Weighting of increment for INC handwheel 31200 SCALING_FACTOR_G70_G71 Factor for converting ...

Page 390: ...930 POSCTRL_OUT_FILTER_ENABLE Activation of low pass filter at position controller output 33000 FIPO_TYPE Fine interpolator type 34320 ENC_INVERS n Length measuring system is inverse 35100 SPIND_VELO_LIMIT Maximum spindle speed 36200 AX_VELO_LIMIT n Threshold value for velocity monitoring 36210 CTRLOUT_LIMIT n Maximum speed setpoint 36400 AX_JERK_ENABLE Axial jerk limitation 36410 AX_JERK_TIME Tim...

Page 391: ...defined User defined auxiliary functions User defined auxiliary functions are either extended predefined auxiliary functions or user specific auxiliary functions Extension of predefined auxiliary functions Extension of predefined auxiliary functions refers to the address extensions parameter The address extension defines the number of the spindle to which the auxiliary function applies The spindle...

Page 392: ...iary function is output to the NC PLC interface and when it is output relative to the traversing motion programmed in the same parts program block Group assignment An auxiliary function can be assigned to a particular auxiliary function group The output behavior can be defined separately for each auxiliary function group This becomes active if no auxiliary function specific output behavior has bee...

Page 393: ...ion should be undertaken for the end of the part program M17 M2 and M30 to the PLC MD20800 MC_SPF_END_TO_VDI subprogram end to PLC For the predefined M function M40 M45 only limited redefinition of the output specification is possible M special function Address extension Value Value range Meaning Value range Type Meaning Number 8 0 implicit 0 99 INT Function 5 Remarks The address extension is 0 fo...

Page 394: ...LE_NAME MD20094 MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR MD20095 MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR MD20096 MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO MD22200 MC_AUXFU_M_SYNC_TYPE MD22530 MC_TOCARR_CHANGE_M_CODE MD22532 MC_GEOAX_CHANGE_M_CODE MD22534 MC_TRAFO_CHANGE_M_CODE MD22560 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE S functions Application Spindle speed Further information S spindle function Address extension Value Value range Meaning Value ran...

Page 395: ...2230 MC_AUXFU_H_SYNC_TYPE Output time of the H functions T functions Application Tool selection Further information H aux function Address extension Value Value range Meaning Value range Type Meaning Number 8 0 99 Any 2147483648 2147483647 INT Any 3 0 3 4028 exp38 2 3 4 REAL Remarks The functionality must be implemented by the user in the PLC user program 2 3 4 8 See Meaning of footnotes at the en...

Page 396: ... tool offset Further information Initial setting D1 After a tool change the default tool cut can be parameterized via MD20270 MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT Basic position of the tool cut without programming Deselection of the tool offset D0 D function specific machine data MD22250 MC_AUXFU_D_SYNC_TYPE Output time of the D functions DL functions D tool offset Address extension Value Value range Meaning V...

Page 397: ...CORR_DEFAULT basic setting of the additive offset without a program Deselection of the additive tool offset DL 0 DL function specific machine data MD22252 MC_AUXFU_DL_SYNC_TYPE output time DL functions F functions 0 6 INT Selection of the additive tool offset 1 Remarks The additive tool offset selected with DL refers to the active D number F feedrate Address extension Value Value range Meaning Val...

Page 398: ...t to the interface channel 2 The type for the values can be selected by the user via MD22110 MC_AUXFU_H_TYPE_INT 3 Because of the limited display options on the operator panel screens the REAL type values displayed are restricted to 999 999 999 9999 to 999 999 999 9999 The NC calculates internally but with complete accuracy 4 The REAL values are rounded and output to the PLC when setting the machi...

Page 399: ...nagement 0 99 with tool management 0 maximum spindle number 0 to be replaced by the value of the master spindle number or master tool holder 7 If tool management is active the auxiliary function M6 Tool change can only be programmed once in a part program block irrespective the address extensions that are programmed 8 Maximum number of auxiliary functions per part program block ...

Page 400: ...nt of predefined auxiliary functions MD22050 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_TYPE n type of predefined auxiliary functions MD22060 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_EXTENSION n address extension for predefined auxiliary functions MD22070 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_VALUE n value of predefined auxiliary functions MD22080 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_SPEC n output behavior of predefined auxiliary functions 8 2 1 Overview Predefined auxiliary functions Signi...

Page 401: ...2 M 1 41 4 Gear stage 2 13 M 1 42 4 Gear stage 3 14 M 1 43 4 Gear stage 4 15 M 1 44 4 Gear stage 5 16 M 1 45 4 Spindle speed 17 S 1 1 3 General auxiliary functions Part 2 System function Index n Type Address extension Value Group Feed 18 F 0 1 1 Cutting edge selection 19 D 0 1 1 DL 20 L 0 1 1 Tool selection 21 T 0 1 1 Stop associated 22 M 0 1 3 1 Conditional stop associated 23 M 0 1 4 1 End of sub...

Page 402: ...45 74 Spindle speed 44 S 2 1 73 Spindle specific auxiliary functions spindle 3 System function Index n Type Address extension Value Group Spindle right 45 M 3 3 75 Spindle left 46 M 3 4 75 Spindle stop 47 M 3 5 75 Spindle positioning 48 M 3 19 75 Axis mode 49 M 3 70 2 75 Automatic gear stage 50 M 3 40 77 Gear stage 1 51 M 3 41 77 Gear stage 2 52 M 3 42 77 Gear stage 3 53 M 3 43 77 Gear stage 4 54 ...

Page 403: ... 81 Automatic gear stage 74 M 5 40 83 Gear stage 1 75 M 5 41 83 Gear stage 2 76 M 5 42 83 Gear stage 3 77 M 5 43 83 Gear stage 4 78 M 5 44 83 Gear stage 5 79 M 5 45 83 Spindle speed 80 S 5 1 82 Spindle specific auxiliary functions spindle 6 System function Index n Type Address extension Value Group Spindle right 81 M 6 3 84 Spindle left 82 M 6 4 84 Spindle stop 83 M 6 5 84 Spindle positioning 84 M...

Page 404: ...9 Gear stage 5 103 M 7 45 89 Spindle speed 104 S 7 1 88 Spindle specific auxiliary functions spindle 8 System function Index n Type Address extension Value Group Spindle right 105 M 8 3 90 Spindle left 106 M 8 4 90 Spindle stop 107 M 8 5 90 Spindle positioning 108 M 8 19 90 Axis mode 109 M 8 70 2 90 Automatic gear stage 110 M 8 40 92 Gear stage 1 111 M 8 41 92 Gear stage 2 112 M 8 42 92 Gear stage...

Page 405: ...ioning 132 M 10 19 96 Axis mode 133 M 10 70 2 96 Automatic gear stage 134 M 10 40 98 Gear stage 1 135 M 10 41 98 Gear stage 2 136 M 10 42 98 Gear stage 3 137 M 10 43 98 Gear stage 4 138 M 10 44 98 Gear stage 5 139 M 10 45 98 Spindle speed 140 S 10 1 97 Spindle specific auxiliary functions spindle 11 System function Index n Type Address extension Value Group Spindle right 141 M 11 3 99 Spindle left...

Page 406: ...ear stage 2 160 M 12 42 104 Gear stage 3 161 M 12 43 104 Gear stage 4 162 M 12 44 104 Gear stage 5 163 M 12 45 104 Spindle speed 164 S 12 1 103 Spindle specific auxiliary functions spindle 13 System function Index n Type Address extension Value Group Spindle right 165 M 13 3 105 Spindle left 166 M 13 4 105 Spindle stop 167 M 13 5 105 Spindle positioning 168 M 13 19 105 Axis mode 169 M 13 70 2 105 ...

Page 407: ... speed 188 S 14 1 109 Spindle specific auxiliary functions spindle 15 System function Index n Type Address extension Value Group Spindle right 189 M 15 3 111 Spindle left 190 M 15 4 111 Spindle stop 191 M 15 5 111 Spindle positioning 192 M 15 19 111 Axis mode 193 M 15 70 2 111 Automatic gear stage 194 M 15 40 113 Gear stage 1 195 M 15 41 113 Gear stage 2 196 M 15 42 113 Gear stage 3 197 M 15 43 11...

Page 408: ... gear stage 218 M 17 40 119 Gear stage 1 219 M 17 41 119 Gear stage 2 220 M 17 42 119 Gear stage 3 221 M 17 43 119 Gear stage 4 222 M 17 44 119 Gear stage 5 223 M 17 45 119 Spindle speed 224 S 17 1 118 Spindle specific auxiliary functions spindle 18 System function Index n Type Address extension Value Group Spindle right 225 M 18 3 120 Spindle left 226 M 18 4 120 Spindle stop 227 M 18 5 120 Spindl...

Page 409: ...5 125 Spindle speed 248 S 19 1 124 Spindle specific auxiliary functions spindle 20 System function Index n Type Address extension Value Group Spindle right 249 M 20 3 126 Spindle left 250 M 20 4 126 Spindle stop 251 M 20 5 126 Spindle positioning 252 M 20 19 126 Axis mode 253 M 20 70 2 126 Automatic gear stage 254 M 20 40 128 Gear stage 1 255 M 20 41 128 Gear stage 2 256 M 20 42 128 Gear stage 3 2...

Page 410: ...l selection 280 T 20 1 148 Tool holder specific auxiliary functions M6 auxiliary functions System function Index n Type Address extension Value Group Tool change 281 M 1 6 1 149 Tool change 282 M 2 6 1 150 Tool change 283 M 3 6 1 151 Tool change 284 M 4 6 1 152 Tool change 285 M 5 6 1 153 Tool change 286 M 6 6 1 154 Tool change 287 M 7 6 1 155 Tool change 288 M 8 6 1 156 Tool change 289 M 9 6 1 15...

Page 411: ...ontrolled axis mode ext mode MD20094 MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR M function for switching over to controlled axis mode Note The value 70 is always output to the PLC 3 The value is set using machine data MD22254 MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE additional M function for program stop 4 The value is set using machine data MD22256 MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M1_VALUE additional M function for conditional stop 5 The value i...

Page 412: ... 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Spindle stop 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Spindle positioning 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Axis mode 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Automatic gear stage 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Gear stage 1 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Gear stage 2 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Gear stage 3 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0...

Page 413: ... a constant path velocity can be maintained in conjunction with an auxiliary function with normal acknowledgment if the auxiliary function is output by the PLC during the traversing motion and before reaching the end of the block 1 Acknowledgement quick with OB40 An auxiliary function with quick acknowledgment is output to the NC PLC interface before the next OB1 cycle The auxiliary function speci...

Page 414: ...the traversing motions programmed in the part program block have been completed path and or block related positioning axis movements 8 Not output after block search types 1 2 4 Block search types 1 2 4 The auxiliary function collected during the block search is not output 9 Collection during block search with program test type 5 SERUPRO For a block search with program test the auxiliary function i...

Page 415: ...achine data MD22040 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_GROUP n group assignment of predefined auxiliary functions If an auxiliary function is not assigned to any group then a value of 0 should be entered into the machine data For the pre defined auxiliary functions with the following indices n the group assignment cannot be changed 0 1 2 3 4 22 23 24 17 Nibbling on 18 Nibbling Note In the case of auxiliary functions...

Page 416: ...uxiliary functions the value of the address extension is the spindle number to which the auxiliary function applies The setting is done via the following machine data MD22060 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_EXTENSION n address extension for predefined auxiliary functions Grouping together auxiliary functions To assign an auxiliary function for all spindles of a channel to the same auxiliary function group the val...

Page 417: ...ram block end with an exact stop The auxiliary functions are output at the beginning of the current parts program block The traversing motion of the actual part program block path and or positioning axis motion is only started after acknowledgment of the auxiliary functions by the PLC Output duration one OB1 cycle normal acknowledgment after one OB1 cycle Output duration one OB40 cycle quick ackno...

Page 418: ...he block change is performed after acknowledgment of the auxiliary functions by the PLC Output duration one OB1 cycle normal acknowledgment after one OB1 cycle Output duration one OB40 cycle quick acknowledgment after one OB40 cycle Examples of different output behavior The following figures illustrate the differing behavior regarding Output and acknowledgment of the auxiliary function Spindle res...

Page 419: ...7 0BP40 2BA0 419 0 W Y 0 W Y 0 W Y 0 W Y LV PRWLRQ 4XLW GLWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH LV PRWLRQ 4XLW GLWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH LV PRWLRQ 4XLW GLWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH LV PRWLRQ 4XLW GLWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH 0 6 B2XWSXW RSWLRQ 0 6 B2XWSXW RSWLRQ 0 6 B2XWSXW RSWLRQ 0 6 B2XWSXW RSWLRQ ...

Page 420: ...GOH UHVSRQVH LV PRWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH 4XLW 2XWSXW 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH LV PRWLRQ 4XLW 2XWSXW ORFN FKDQJH 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH LV PRWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH 4XLW 2XWSXW HIDXOW VHWWLQJ HIDXOW VHWWLQJ LV PRWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH 4XLW 2XWSXW 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH HIDXOW VHWWLQJ 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH 0 2XWSXW RSWLRQ 0 2XWSXW RSWLRQ 0 6 2XWSXW RSWLRQ 0 2XWSXW RSWLRQ 0 6 2XWSXW RSWLRQ 0 W Y 0 W Y 0 W Y 0 Y 0 W Y W ...

Page 421: ...l 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 421 LV PRYHPHQW ORFN FKDQJH 2XWSXW 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH HIDXOW VHWWLQJ LV PRYHPHQW ORFN FKDQJH 2XWSXW 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH HIDXOW VHWWLQJ LV PRYHPHQW 2XWSXW ORFN FKDQJH HIDXOW VHWWLQJ 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH 2XWSXW EHKDYLRU 2XWSXW EHKDYLRU 2XWSXW EHKDYLRU FN FN FN W W W Y Y Y 0 0 0 0 6 0 6 ...

Page 422: ...pindle that the auxiliary function refers to is entered in the address extension parameter The relevant predefined auxiliary functions can be extended for the following system functions Example Extension of the predefined auxiliary function for the system function spindle right for the second and third spindle of the channel System function Type Address extension 1 Value Tool change M 1 6 Spindle ...

Page 423: ...number of user defined auxiliary functions 8 3 1 2 Group assignment The handling of the auxiliary functions for a block search is defined using the group assignment of an auxiliary function The 168 auxiliary function groups available are subdivided into predefined and user definable groups Every user defined auxiliary function is assigned as standard to the 1st auxiliary function group The assignm...

Page 424: ...ons If all the auxiliary functions of the same type and value are assigned to the same auxiliary function group a value of 1 must be entered for the address extension parameter Example All user specific auxiliary functions with the value 8 are assigned to the tenth auxiliary function group Value MD22030 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE n value of user defined auxiliary functions The functionality of the valu...

Page 425: ...ry functions can be parameterized via the machine data MD22035 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_SPEC n output behavior of user defined auxiliary functions For a description of the individual output parameters see the Output behavior Page 417 section of the predefined auxiliary functions The information given there can be applied analogously to the output behavior of user defined auxiliary functions MD22000 MC_AUXF...

Page 426: ...on of a user defined auxiliary function with one of the predefined auxiliary functions mentioned is set in the machine data MD22254 MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE additional M function for program stop MD22256 MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M1_VALUE additional M function for conditional stop Group assignment The group assignment of an associated user defined auxiliary function is always the group assignment of the corre...

Page 427: ...ciated M00 M01 active feedback signal DB21 DBX30 5 activate associated M01 activation signal Boundary conditions Please note the following boundary conditions A user defined auxiliary function may not be multiply associated Predefined auxiliary functions e g M3 M4 M5 etc may not be associated Example Associating the user defined auxiliary function M123 with M0 MD22254 MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE 123 T...

Page 428: ...functions MD22252 MC_AUXFU_DL_SYNC_TYPE output time for DL functions The following output behaviors can be parameterized MD MC_AUXFU_xx_SYNC_TYPE value For a description of the various output behaviors see the section titled Output behavior Page 417 Example Output of auxiliary functions with different output behaviors in a part program block with traverse movement Output behavior for which paramet...

Page 429: ...utputs to PLC 8 5 Type specific output behavior Basic Functions Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 429 Parts program block Time sequence for auxiliary function output Program code N10 G01 X100 M07 H5 T5 6WDUW 1 W 7 0 ...

Page 430: ...riority Output behavior Defined via Highest auxiliary function specific Part program instruction QU see Programmable output duration Page 433 Auxiliary function specific MD22035 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_SYNC n MD22080 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_SYNC n Group specific MD11110 MC_AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC n Lowest Not defined Default output behavior Output duration one OB1 cycle Priority Output behavior Defined via Highest Auxil...

Page 431: ...ess extension is programmed the address extension is implicitly set 0 Predefined auxiliary functions with the address extension 0 always refer to the master spindle of the channel Program code Comment DEF SPINDEL_NR 1 First spindle in the channel DEF DREHRICHTUNG 3 Clockwise direction of rotation N100 M SPINDEL_NR DREHRICHTUNG corresponding to M1 3 Note If you use symbolic names to program an auxi...

Page 432: ...Basic Functions 432 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 H5 Output to PLC H0 5 H 5 379 Output to PLC H0 5 379 H17 3 5 Output to PLC H17 3 5 H coolant 13 8 Output to PLC H12 13 8 H HFF13 Output to PLC H0 65299 H B1110 Output to PLC H0 14 H5 3 21 Error Program code Comment ...

Page 433: ...The output behavior of the auxiliary functions is parameterized as follows M100 Output duration one OB1 cycle slow acknowledgment Output during motion M200 Output duration one OB1 cycle slow acknowledgment Output prior to motion The following figure shows the time sequence of the part program Please note the time difference during the processing of parts program blocks N20 and N30 Program code Com...

Page 434: ...to PLC 8 8 Programmable output duration Basic Functions 434 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 ORFN QXPEHU D LV D LV 6WUREH IURP 1 DQG DFNQRZOHGJPHQW E EDVLF 3 SURJUDP 3 F FOH WLPH 2 0 FKDQJH 6 0 FKDQJH 6 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 ...

Page 435: ...nctions are within the following data areas in the NC PLC interface Change signals for auxiliary function transfer from NC channel DB21 DBB58 DBB67 Transferred M and S functions DB21 DBB68 DBB112 Transferred T D and DL functions DB21 DBB116 DBB136 Transferred H and F functions DB21 DBB140 DBB190 Decoded M signals M0 M99 DB21 DBB194 DBB206 dynamic M functions References A detailed description of th...

Page 436: ...e made irrespective of whether such auxiliary functions have been acknowledged Parameter assignment Suppression of the block change delay with quick auxiliary functions is set via the machine data MD22100 MC_AUXFU_QUICK_BLOCKCHANGE block change delay with quick auxiliary functions Boundary conditions Synchronism of auxiliary functions that are output without a block change delay is no longer ensur...

Page 437: ... MN_M_NO_FCT_STOPRE n M function with preprocessing stop Example The user defined M function M88 is intended to trigger a preprocessing stop Parameter assignment MD10713 MN_M_NO_FCT_STOPRE 0 88 Application Parts program extract Boundary conditions If a subroutine called indirectly via an M function in a part program in one of the following ways no preprocessing stop is performed MD10715 MN_M_NO_FC...

Page 438: ...Possible applications include Addition of auxiliary functions after block search Restoring the initial state to position a part program Types of auxiliary functions that can be overstored The following types of auxiliary functions can be overstored M special function S spindle speed T tool number H aux function D tool offset number DL additive tool offset F feed Duration of validity An overstored ...

Page 439: ...ock search can be configured via bit 8 of the machine data MD22080 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_SPEC n output behavior of predefined auxiliary functions where n system function index 0 32 MD22035 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_SPEC n output behavior of user defined auxiliary functions where n auxiliary function index 0 254 MD11110 MN_AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC n output behavior of the auxiliary functions in a group where n group index...

Page 440: ...e enables must therefore be derived from the interface signals of the traverse commands in the PLC user program DB31 DBX64 6 64 7 traverse command minus plus In this case the spindle specific auxiliary functions M3 M4 and M5 are not suitable because they might not be output to the PLC until after the spindle positioning References For detailed information on the block search please refer to Functi...

Page 441: ...SSIGN 4 MD22000 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 0 5 MD22000 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 1 5 MD22000 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 2 6 MD22000 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 3 6 MD22010 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE 0 M MD22010 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE 1 M MD22010 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE 2 M MD22010 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE 3 M MD22020 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION 0 0 MD22020 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION 1 0 MD22020 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION 2 0 MD22020 MC...

Page 442: ...p which can be queried on a group specific basis by way of the system variable below AC_AUXFU_M_TICK n time stamp of the active M auxiliary function 8 13 4 Determining the output sequence Function The following predefined procedure is provided to simplify the process of determining the output sequence of M auxiliary functions for the programmer AUXFUMSEQ VAR INT _NUM_IN VAR INT _M_IN VAR INT _EXT_...

Page 443: ...ut M7 Coolant 2 ON M8 Coolant 1 ON M9 Coolants 1 and 2 OFF Group assignment Group 5 M7 M9 Group 6 M8 M9 Part program section During block searches the auxiliary functions are collected on the basis of specific groups The last auxiliary function in an auxiliary function group is output to the PLC following a block search Group 5 M7 Group 6 M9 If they are output in the sequence M7 M9 no coolant is t...

Page 444: ...System variables The spindle specific auxiliary functions are always stored in the following system variables during block searches irrespective of the parameter assignment described above For later output of the spindle specific auxiliary functions the system variables can be read in an AS for example and output after the action blocks are output Bit Value Meaning 2 0 The output of the spindle sp...

Page 445: ...UB is started Parts program ASUB Note The contents of the system variables P_S P_DIR and P_SGEAR may be lost after block search due to synchronization operations Program code Comment N05 M3 S200 Spindle 1 N10 G4 F3 N15 SPOS 111 Spindle 1 is positioned to 111 degrees in the ASUB N20 M2 4 S2 300 Spindle 2 N25 G4 F3 N30 SPOS 2 IC 77 Spindle 2 traverses incrementally by 77 degrees N55 X10 G0 Destinati...

Page 446: ...EPOSA in the ASUB Boundary conditions Collected S values The meaning of an S value in the parts program depends on the feed type that is currently active If the feed operation is changed e g for a tool change before output of the system variable P_SEARCH_S the original setting from the target block in the parts program must be restored to avoid use of the wrong type of feed Collected direction of ...

Page 447: ... a description of the system variables see Querying system variables Page 461 Output control Whether an auxiliary function is output to the PLC during a type 5 block search SERUPRO and or collected on a group specific basis in the following system variables can be configured via bits 9 and 10 of the machine data MD22080 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_SPEC n output behavior of predefined auxiliary functions where...

Page 448: ...up to a maximum of 20 packages 2 packages per channel 10 channels can be processed within an IPO cycle across all channels This encoding defines how many auxiliary function packages and within these how many auxiliary functions have been processed during the same IPO cycle Auxiliary functions which have been collected in one IPO cycle all have the same sequence counter Auxiliary functions which ha...

Page 449: ...ange of values 0 MAXNUM_GROUPS MAXNUM_CHANNELS 1 The global list is structured on the basis of the sequence in which the search target was found It is intended to be used as a system proposal for auxiliary functions to be output in the following ASUB at the end of SERUPRO If an auxiliary function is not to be output the corresponding group index is to be set to 0 OREDO OLVW RI DX LOLDU IXQFWLRQV K...

Page 450: ...ram This affects the groups of auxiliary functions for any spindle configured in the system whereby the spindle number corresponds to an auxiliary function s address extension Deleting obsolete auxiliary functions In the functions below the auxiliary functions from group a are deleted for the spindle concerned For the following spindle when a generic coupling such as COUPON TRAILON EGON etc is swi...

Page 451: ...ions can be output with channel synchronization Querying the last auxiliary function collected The index of the last auxiliary function collected in the global list can be queried using the system variable AN_AUXFU_LIST_ENDINDEX Note Within the context of the axis interchange and axis container rotation functions the auxiliary functions for programming the spindle must always be specified in a way...

Page 452: ...ram blocks required for synchronized auxiliary function output Function AUXFUSYNC Function The function AUXFUSYNC generates a complete part program block as string from the global list of auxiliary functions at each call The part program block either contains auxiliary functions or commands to synchronize auxiliary function outputs WAITM G4 etc The function triggers a preprocessing stop Syntax PRO...

Page 453: ...ed by setting the corresponding group index GROUPINDEX n to 0 The function must be called before calling AUXFUSYNC The function triggers a preprocessing stop Syntax PROC AUXFUDEL CHAR TYPE INT EXTENSION REAL VALUE INT GROUP Parameters Function AUXFUDELG Function The function AUXFUDELG deletes all auxiliary functions of the specified auxiliary function group from the global list of auxiliary functi...

Page 454: ... available Program code Comment N10 DEF STRING 400 ASSEMBLED N20 DEF STRING 31 FILENAME _N_CST_DIR _N_AUXFU_SPF N30 DEF INT GROUPINDEX 10 N40 DEF INT NUM N60 DEF INT ERROR N90 N140 AUXFUDEL M 2 3 5 M2 3 5th auxiliary function group delete N150 N170 AUXFUDELG 6 Delete the collected auxiliary function of the 6 group N180 N190 IF ISFILE FILENAME N210 DELETE ERROR FILENAME Delete the FILENAME file N22...

Page 455: ...R 0 Error evaluation N400 SETAL 61000 ERROR N410 ENDIF N430 ENDLOOP N440 N450 LABEL1 N460 N480 CALL FILENAME Process a generated subroutine N490 N510 DELETE ERROR FILENAME Delete the file again after execution N520 IF ERROR 0 N530 SETAL 61000 ERROR N540 ENDIF N550 N560 M17 Program code Comment N0610 DEF STRING 400 ASSEMBLED N0620 DEF STRING 31 FILENAME _N_CST_DIR _N_AUXFU_SPF N0630 DEF INT GROUPIN...

Page 456: ...ized The synchronization ensures that all delete requests were processed in all channels and a consistent list is available Example WAITM 99 1 2 3 N0890 LOOP N0920 AUXFUSYNC NUM GROUPINDEX ASSEMBLED Procedure to generate auxiliary function blocks from the global auxiliary function list N0930 N0940 IF NUM 1 All auxiliary functions of the channel are processed N0960 GOTOF LABEL1 N0970 ENDIF N0980 N1...

Page 457: ...LED SPOS SPI AC_AUXFU_EXT GROUPINDEX LAUF IC 0 N1260 ELSE N1270 ASSEMBLED ASSEMBLED M AC_AUXFU_EXT GROUPINDEX LAUF N1280 N1290 IF ISQUICK N1300 ASSEMBLED ASSEMBLED QU N1310 ENDIF N1320 N1330 ASSEMBLED ASSEMBLED AC_AUXFU_VALUE GROUPINDEX LAUF N1340 N1350 IF ISQUICK N1360 ASSEMBLED ASSEMBLED N1370 ENDIF N1380 ENDIF N1400 ENDIF N1420 ENDFOR N1430 N1450 WRITE ERROR FILENAME ASSEMBLED Write an auxiliar...

Page 458: ...tion Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 N1570 ENDLOOP N1580 N1590 LABEL1 N1600 N1620 CALL FILENAME Process a generated subroutine N1630 N1650 DELETE ERROR FILENAME Delete the file again after execution N1660 IF ERROR 0 N1670 SETAL 61000 ERROR N1680 ENDIF N1690 N1700 M17 Program code Comment ...

Page 459: ...nd this number is output MD22532 MC_GEOAX_CHANGE_M_CODE M code when switching the geometry axes Number of the M code which is output when the geometry axes on the NC PLC interface are switched MD22534 MC_TRAFO_CHANGE_M_CODE M code in the case of transformation changes Number of the M code which is output during a transformation switch of the geometry axes at the NC PLC interface Output behavior In...

Page 460: ...C are identified by the NC as transferred and output to the PLC There is no functional acknowledgement for these auxiliary functions All M auxiliary functions collected after a block search are also displayed so that the operator knows which auxiliary functions will be output after a start following a block search PLC activities In the case of auxiliary function groups that are managed by the PLC ...

Page 461: ...he part program and via synchronized actions AC_AUXFU_ n value Auxiliary function is managed by the PLC and has been directly applied by the PLC Black font on gray background Auxiliary function is managed by the PLC and the function acknowledgement has taken place Black font on gray background system variables Meaning AC_AUXFU_PREDEF_INDEX n value Index of the last auxiliary function collected for...

Page 462: ...n collected for an auxiliary function group search or the last auxiliary function to be output Typ e INT n Group index 0 to 63 Note This variable can be used to determine whether the auxiliary function should be output with a fast acknowledgement AC_AUXFU_STATE n or M function specific AC_AUXFU_M_STATE n value Output state of the last auxiliary function collected for an auxiliary function group se...

Page 463: ...nual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 463 Example All M auxiliary functions of the 1st group will be stored in the order they are output id 1 every AC_AUXFU_M_STATE 0 2 do AC_FIFO 0 0 AC_AUXFU_M_VALUE 0 References For more information on the system variables refer to List Manual system variables ...

Page 464: ...unction for the tool change default 6 MD22560 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE auxiliary function for tool change If no address extension is programmed the auxiliary function refers to the master spindle or the master tool holder of the channel Definition of the master spindle MD20090 MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND Part program instruction SETMS Definition of the master tool holder MD20124 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOL...

Page 465: ... following parameters Bit0 Output duration one OB1 cycle normal acknowledgment Bit1 Output duration one OB40 cycle quick acknowledgment Auxiliary functions M17 or M2 M30 end of subroutine In its own parts program block If one of the auxiliary functions M17 M2 or M30 is programmed as the only auxiliary function in a part program block and an axis is still in motion the auxiliary function is not out...

Page 466: ...averse movement all auxiliary functions are output in a block immediately irrespective of their parameterized output behavior Bi t Value Description 1 0 The auxiliary function M01 conditional stop is always output to the PLC A quick acknowledgement is ineffective because M01 is permanently assigned to the first auxiliary function group and is therefore always output at the end of the block 1 The a...

Page 467: ... the 2nd spindle of the channel Output behavior Output duration one OB1 cycle normal acknowledgment Output prior to motion Parameter assignment Parameter assignment M4 Requirements Machine data index 1 second user defined auxiliary function auxiliary function group 5 Type and value M4 spindle left Address extension 2 as appropriate for the 2nd spindle of the channel Output behavior Output duration...

Page 468: ...the 2nd spindle of the channel Output behavior Output duration one OB1 cycle normal acknowledgment Spindle response following acknowledgment Output at block end Parameter assignment MD22000 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 1 5 MD22010 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE 1 M MD22020 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION 1 2 MD22030 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE 1 4 MD22035 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_SPEC 1 H51 MD22000 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 2 5 MD22010 MC...

Page 469: ...Spindle 2 Second spindle Gear stages Spindle 1 5 gear stages Spindle 2 No gear stages Switching functions for cooling water on off Spindle 1 ON M50 OFF M51 Spindle 2 ON M52 OFF M53 Requirements Spindle 1 master spindle Note Default assignments The auxiliary functions M3 M4 M5 M70 and M1 3 M1 4 M1 5 M1 70 of spindle 1 master spindle are assigned as standard to the second auxiliary function group Al...

Page 470: ... to the tenth auxiliary function group for this reason M2 3 M2 4 M2 5 M2 70 All S2 values are assigned to auxiliary function group 11 The auxiliary functions M2 3 M2 4 M2 5 M2 70 tenth auxiliary function group and S2 values auxiliary function group 11 should have the following output behavior Output duration one OB40 cycle quick acknowledgment Output prior to motion Cooling water It is not permiss...

Page 471: ...FU_ASSIGN_VALUE 6 40 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 6 9 and analogously for aux functions 8 to 11 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE 11 M Description of auxiliary function 12 M1 45 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION 11 1 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE 11 45 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 11 9 MN_AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC 9 H22 Output behavior of auxiliary function group 10 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE 12 M Description of auxiliary function 13 M2 3 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN...

Page 472: ..._TYPE 17 M Description of auxiliary function 18 M50 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION 17 0 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE 17 50 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 17 12 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE 18 M Description of auxiliary function 19 M51 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION 18 0 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE 18 51 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 18 12 MN_AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC 12 H21 Specification of auxiliary function group 13 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE 19 M Descripti...

Page 473: ...ic setting of tool cutting edge without programming 20800 SPF_END_TO_VDI Subroutine end Stop at PLC 22000 AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP Group assignment of user defined auxiliary functions 22010 AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE Type of user defined auxiliary functions 22020 AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION Address extension for user defined auxiliary functions 22030 AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE Value of user defined auxiliary functions 22035 ...

Page 474: ...INUMERIK 828D Activate associated M01 DB21 DBX30 5 DB3200 DBX14 5 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D M function 1 5 change DB21 DBX58 0 4 DB2500 DBX4 0 4 M function 1 5 not decoded DB21 DBX59 0 4 S function 1 3 change DB21 DBX60 0 2 DB2500 DBX6 0 S function 1 3 quick DB21 DBX60 4 6 T function 1 3 change DB21 DBX61 0 2 DB2500 DBX8 0 T function 1 3 quick DB21 DBX61 4 6 D function 1 3 chang...

Page 475: ...t int DB21 DBB124 125 T function 3 integer DB21 DBB126 127 Extended address D function 1 8 bit int DB21 DBB128 DB2500 DBB5004 D function 1 8 bit int DB21 DBB129 DB2500 DBD5000 Extended address D function 2 8 bit int DB21 DBB130 D function 2 8 bit int DB21 DBB131 Extended address D function 3 8 bit int DB21 DBB132 D function 3 8 bit int DB21 DBB133 Extended address DL function 8 bit int DB21 DBB134...

Page 476: ... M function M40 M47 DB21 DBB199 DB2500 DBB1005 Dynamic M function M48 M55 DB21 DBB200 DB2500 DBB1006 Dynamic M function M56 M63 DB21 DBB201 DB2500 DBB1007 Dynamic M function M64 M71 DB21 DBB202 DB2500 DBB1008 Dynamic M function M72 M79 DB21 DBB203 DB2500 DBB1009 Dynamic M function M80 M87 DB21 DBB204 DB2500 DBB1010 Dynamic M function M88 M95 DB21 DBB205 DB2500 DBB1011 Dynamic M function M96 M99 DB...

Page 477: ...s an independent multi channel NC Channel gaps When channels are configured placeholder channels can be provided in order to create as uniform a configuration as possible over machines in a series Only the channels that are actually used are then activated Program test The following options are available for testing or moving in position a new part program Program execution without setpoint output...

Page 478: ...status Responses to operator and program actions Event driven program calls Asynchronous subroutines ASUBs interrupt routines Interrupt inputs allow the NC to interrupt the the current part program execution so that it can react to more urgent events in interrupt routines or ASUBs Single block With the single block function the user can execute a part program block by block There are 3 types of se...

Page 479: ...ata Subroutine call with M T and D functions For certain applications it may be advantageous to replace M T or D functions as well as a few NC language commandsSPOS SPOSA by a subroutine call This can be used for example to call the tool change routine Relevant machine data can be used to define and control subroutines having M T or D functions For example for a gear stage change Program runtime p...

Page 480: ...tions independently of the mode group Machine axes and spindles are assigned to a channel They differ as follows Geometry axes can be operated in the path grouping Using the master spindle they can perform functions such as G96 G961 G331 G332 etc Channel axes that are not defined as geometry axes can be moved as path axes synchronous axes positioning axes PLC axes and command axes Special axes hav...

Page 481: ...roup specific interface signals The exchange of mode group specific signals to from the mode group is transferred to DB11 in the user interface In this way the mode group can be monitored and controlled from the PLC or NCK The following table represents all the mode group specific interface signals Change in mode group A configuration change of a mode group with respect to its assigned channels re...

Page 482: ...he machine tool are activated channels with mode group number greater than 0 Special case Channel 1 must always be available If MD10010 MN_ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP 0 0 is specified the control automatically sets MD10010 MN_ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP 0 1 mode group 1 Example configurations MD10010 MN_ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP 0 1 MD10010 MN_ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP 1 2 MD10010 MN_ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MO...

Page 483: ...out contour violation Any auxiliary functions not yet output to the PLC are no longer output The preprocessing pointers are set to the interruption point and the block pointers are set to the beginning of the appropriate part programs All initial settings e g the G functions are set to the parameterized values All alarms with Channel reset criterion are canceled If all the channels of the mode gro...

Page 484: ...e mode group can be active at the same time JOG in Automatic JOG in AUTOMATIC is an extension of AUTOMATIC mode intended to simplify use JOG can be executed without leaving AUTOMATIC mode if boundary conditions so permit JOG Jogging manual axis traversal The axes can be traversed manually with the handwheel or the traversing keys Channel specific signals and interlocks are effective in ASUBs and w...

Page 485: ...election AUTOMATIC MDI or JOG is transferred to interface signals DB11 DBX4 0 2 strobe mode in the PLC but is not activated at this point Activation and priorities The desired mode of the mode group is activated via the interface signals DB11 DBX0 0 2 mode type If several modes are selected at the same time the following priority is in effect Display The current mode of the mode group is displayed...

Page 486: ...e machine functions TEACH IN REPOS or REF from the user interface is stored under the interface signal DB11 DBX5 0 2 strobe machine function The desired machine functions TEACHIN REPOS or REF are activated with the interface signals DB11 DBX1 0 2 machine function The display of the active machine function TEACHIN REPOS or REF can be seen in the interface signal DB11 DBX7 0 2 active machine functio...

Page 487: ... for submode TEACH IN TEACH IN is not permissible for leading or following axes of an active axis grouping e g for gantry axis grouping or a gantry axis pair Coupled axis grouping of master and slave axis JOG in AUTOMATIC details JOG in AUTOMATIC mode is permitted if the mode group is in RESET state and the axis is jog capable RESET for the mode group means All channels in RESET state All programs...

Page 488: ...witched internally to JOG unless DRF is active An ongoing JOG movement is not complete until the end position of the increment has been reached if this has been set or the movement has been aborted with Delete distance to go In this way an increment can be stopped using Stop and then moved to the end using Start The NCK remains in Internal JOG during this time A partial increment is possible but i...

Page 489: ... state i e it is not possible to jog immediately in the middle of a stopped program The user can jog in this situation by pressing the JOG key or the Reset key in all channels of the mode group Selecting AUTOMATIC disables the INC keys and the user can must press the INC keys again to select the desired increment If the NCK switches to Internal JOG the selected increment is retained If the user at...

Page 490: ...hese interlocking functions are not related to any particular technology or machine Almost all the interlocks can be activated in every mode depending on the operating status 9 3 2 Mode change Introduction A mode change is requested and activated via the mode group interface DB11 A mode group will either be in AUTOMATIC JOG or MDA mode i e it is not possible for several channels of a mode group to...

Page 491: ...disable A mode change can be prevented by means of interface signal DB11 DBX0 4 Mode change disable This suppresses the mode change request The user must configure a message to the operator indicating that mode change is disabled No signal is set by the system Mode change from MDA to JOG If all channels of the mode group are in Reset state after a mode change from MDA to JOG the NC switches from J...

Page 492: ...nterpolator for each channel which calculates the path points such that all the machining axes of the channel are controlled simultaneously from path axes Selection and deselection of tool cutting edges and their length and radius compensations for a tool in a specific channel For more information on tool offset refer to References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Tool Offset W1 Channel specifi...

Page 493: ...ve only after a new POWER ON Container axes and link axes An axis container combines a group of axes in a container These axes are referred to as container axes This involves assigning a pointer to a container slot ring buffer location within the relevant container to a channel axis One of the axes in the container is located temporarily in this slot Each machine axis in the axis container must be...

Page 494: ...lect gear stage Positioning corresponds to M19 For several channels the spindle started by the PLC is active in the channel to which it is assigned at the start For more information about the special spindle interface see References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Spindles S1 PLC controlled single axis operations An axis can also be controlled from the PLC instead of from a channel For this pu...

Page 495: ...ansmitted to the HMI NC Start disable and global Start disable have the same effect on the internal counter for starts that have been sent but not executed OPI variable startRejectCount Bypassing global Start disable The interface signal DB21 DBX7 5 PLC NCK allows the PLC to temporarily bypass a global Start disable Messages If desired a message can be issued when a Start attempt occurs while a gl...

Page 496: ...hout calculation 9 5 1 Program execution without setpoint outputs Function In the Program test status a part program is executed without the output of axis or spindle setpoints The user can use this to check the programmed axis positions and auxiliary function outputs of a part program This program simulation can also be used as an extended syntax check Selection This function is selected via the ...

Page 497: ...interrupted when this function is active so the axes do not have to be referenced when the function is switched off CAUTION The signals for exact stop DB31 DBX60 6 60 7 exact stop coarse fine mirror the actual status on the machine They are only canceled during program testing if the axis is pushed out of its set position the set position remains constant during program testing With signal DB21 DB...

Page 498: ... block types The following different types of single block are provided Decoding single block With this type of single block all blocks of the part program even the pure computation blocks without traversing motions are processed sequentially by NC Start Action single block initial setting With this type of single block the blocks that initiate actions traversing motions auxiliary function outputs...

Page 499: ...line on the operator interface Because of the single block mode as soon as the part program processing has processed a part program block the following interface signal is set DB21 DBX35 3 program status interrupted Processing without single block stop Despite the selected single block mode a processing without the single block stop can be set for specific program runs e g for internal ASUBs User ...

Page 500: ...363 Application Value Meaning 0 Dry run feedrate is the maximum of the programmed feedrate and setting data SD42100 Default setting SD42100 becomes effective only when the stored value is greater than the programmed feedrate 1 Dry run feedrate is the minimum of the programmed feedrate and SD42100 SD42100 becomes effective only when the stored value is less than the programmed feedrate 2 The value ...

Page 501: ...face signal DB21 DBX0 6 activate dry run feed Display Active dry run feedrate mode is indicated by a reversal in the relevant field in the status line on the operator interface 9 5 4 Skip part program blocks Function When testing or breaking in new programs it is useful to be able to disable or skip certain part program blocks during program execution For this the respective records must be marked...

Page 502: ... control menu The selection sets the following interface signal DB21 DBX26 0 skip block selected This does not activate the function Activation The function is activated via the interface signal DB21 DBX2 0 activate skip block Display Activated Skip block function is indicated by a reversal of the relevant field on the operator interface Note The Skip part programs function remains active during b...

Page 503: ...n only 840D sl Up to SW 4 4 no compile cycles are supported from SW 4 4 and higher only selected compile cycles CC are supported for the workpiece simulation The machine data of the supported compile cycles are aligned once after the control has powered up An alignment with simulation start does not take place CC commands in the part program Language commands in the part program of compile cycles ...

Page 504: ...proached in any situation On NC Start the start position of the target block or the end position of the block before the target block is approached This is traversed up to the end position Processing is true to contour Type 4 Block search with calculation at block end point Block search with calculation at block end point is used to enable a target position e g tool change position to be approache...

Page 505: ...et found 9 7 1 Sequence for block search of Type 1 2 and 4 Time sequence The block search Types 1 2 and 4 proceeds as follows 1 Activate search via input in HMI Advanced or HMI Embedded 2 Search target found or alarm if target cannot be found 3 NC Start for output of action blocks 4 NC Start for program continuation Figure 9 2 Time sequence of interface signals Block search active DB21 DBX33 4 Act...

Page 506: ...iliary function outputs and tool T D spindle S and feedrate programming commands During block search with calculation contour or block end point actions such as M function outputs are accumulated in so called action blocks These blocks are output on an NC Start after Search target found Single block processing MD10702 MN_IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK By setting bit 3 1 it is possible to prevent a stop a...

Page 507: ...tem variable P_EP programmed end position In the ASUB the system variable provides P_EP programmed end position the current actual position of a channel axes in the work piece coordinate system P_EP current actual position of the channel axis System variable AC_RETPOINT repositioning point in the ASUB In the ASUB the system variable provides AC_RETPOINT repositioning point in the ASUB the actual p...

Page 508: ...fter block search To allow activation of PLC actions starting of ASUBs call up of PLC functions after the end of the block search at a defined point there is the NCK PLC interface signal DB21 DB32 6 last action block active 1 This means that all action blocks are processed and that actions are possible by the PLC ASUB FC or the operator overstoring mode change after JOG REPOS This allows the PLC t...

Page 509: ...be found in Bit Value Meaning 2 0 Output of spindle auxiliary functions M3 M4 M5 M19 M70 in action blocks 1 Output of the auxiliary functions is suppressed in the action blocks The spindle programmings that accumulated during the block search can be output at a later point in time e g via ASUB The program data for this is stored in the following system variables P_SEARCH_S P_SEARCH_SDIR P_SEARCH_S...

Page 510: ... simply used in all search types 9 7 3 Automatic start of an ASUB after a block search Parameter assignment Making the function effective The automatic ASUB start after a block search is activated by the following MD setting MD11450 MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE bit 1 1 Program to be activated In the default setting the program _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF is activated from the directory _N_CMA_DIR as ASUB after the bl...

Page 511: ... block search 1 Start block search with without calculation at contour at end of block point 2 Stop after Search target found 3 NC Start for output of action blocks 4 Last action block is activated 5 Automatic start of _N_CMA_DIR _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF default as an ASUB 6 The NC will stop after changing the last ASUB block REPOSA command and the following NC PLC interface signal is set DB21 DBX32 6 la...

Page 512: ...red in the existing machine data MD11450 MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE Cascaded block search is enabled i e several search targets can be specified with Bit 3 0 FALSE For compatibility reasons the cascaded block search can be disabled with Bit 3 1 TRUE By default the cascaded block search is set with Bit 3 0 Execution behavior Search target found restart search When the search target is reached the program e...

Page 513: ...k search NC Start for output of the action blocks Alarm 10208 NC Start Continue program execution Figure 9 3 Chronological order of interface signals Block search active DB21 DBX33 4 Action block active DB21 DBX32 3 Block search starting Search target 1 found Block search starting Search target 2 found NC Start action blocks being output Last action block Channel status Reset DB21 DBX35 7 Last act...

Page 514: ...h calculation at block end point Example with automatic tool change after block search with active tool management 1 Set machine data MD11450 MN_ SEARCH_RUN_MODE to 1 MD11602 MN_ASUP_START_MASK Bit 0 1 ASUB Start from stopped state 2 Select ASUB BLOCK_SEARCH_END from PLC via FB4 Reference FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Basic PLC Program P3 3 Load and select part program WORKPIECE_1 4 Search t...

Page 515: ...sult Alarm 10208 is displayed i e other actions can now be performed by the operator 9 Manual operator actions JOG JOG REPOS overstoring 10 Continue part program with NC Start Figure 9 4 Approach movement for search to block end point target block N220 Type 2 block search with calculation at contour Example with automatic tool change after block search with active tool management Note Search to co...

Page 516: ... with CUTTER_1 tool N100 G0 G40 X200 Y200 Deselect radius compensation N110 Z100 D0 Deselect length compensation End of contour section 1 Machine contour section 2 with CUTTER_2 tool N200 T CUTTER_2 Preselect tool N210 WZW Call tool change routine N220 G0 X170 Y30 Z10 S3000 M3 D1 Approach block for contour section 2 N230 Z 5 Infeed N240 G1 G64 G42 F500 X150 Y50 Start point of contour N250 Y150 N26...

Page 517: ...ange position N560 M6 Execute tool change END M17 PROC SUCHLAUF_ENDE SAVE ASUB for calling the tool change routine after block search N1000 DEF INT TNR_AKTIV Variable for active T number N1010 DEF INT TNR_VORWAHL Variable for preselected T number N1020 DEF INT TNR_SUCHLAUF Variable for T number determined in search N1030 TNR_AKTIV TC_MPP6 9998 1 Read T number of active tool N1040 TNR_SUCHLAUF P_TO...

Page 518: ...l and synchronized actions or between several channels can take place within an NCU Channels In combination with the HMI SERUPRO is provided for the following channels For the current SERUPRO channel only 1 For all channels with the same workpiece name as the SERUPRO channel 2 For all channels with the same mode group as the SERUPRO channel 3 For all channels of the NCU 4 The scope of channels for...

Page 519: ... a SERUPRO ASUB Special points should be noted during SERUPRO ASUB with regard to Reference point approach Tool management Spindle ramp up Other functions after search target was found such as Continue machining after SERUPRO search target found REPOS offset Repositioning on contour with controlled REPOS Part program expansions for SERUPRO Activation SERUPRO is activated via the HMI SERUPRO is ope...

Page 520: ...h corresponding Alarm 16935 6 The NC stops at the beginning of the target block deselects Program test internally and displays the Stop condition Search target found in its block display 7 As required the user can start an ASUB that is traversed really This ASUB is referred to below as the SERUPRO ASUB 8 The user presses Start The spindles are started Then the path axes start a REPOS operation tha...

Page 521: ...chine data MD10708 MN_SERUPRO_MASK can be used to control the SERUPRO behavior as follows Note After program testing has been deactivated a REPOS operation is initiated that is subject to the same restrictions as a SERUPRO approach operation Any adverse effects can be inhibited using an ASUB Bit Valu e Meaning 0 0 The search stops at M0 1 The search is not stopped for M0 1 0 The search is interrup...

Page 522: ... machine data MD22621 MC_ENABLE_START_MODE_MASK_PRT NC PLC interface signal Block search via program test is active The block search via program test is displayed using the NC PLC interface signal DB21 DBX318 1 1 The interface signal is set from the start of the block search until the target block is inserted into the main run 4 0 The overrides channel axis spindle specified via the NC PLC interfa...

Page 523: ... Acknowledgement of FC9 only after completion of REPOS block The ASUB can only be signaled as complete from the FC9 block with ASUB Done if the REPOS block has also been completed Deselection of assigned REPOS operation after Item 8 The start of the ASUB deselects the assigned REPOS operation Therefore the ASUB should be ended with REPOSA in order to retain the REPOS operation Deleting an unwanted...

Page 524: ...nd Alarm 10208 Press NC Start to continue the program appears 5 The user presses Start again 6 The NCK executes the REPOS movement and continues the part program at the target block 9 8 1 REPOS MD11470 REPOS occurs according to machine data MD11470 MN_REPOS_MODE_MASK Case A The REPOS operation moves all axes from the current position to the start of the target block in a single block MD11470 MN_RE...

Page 525: ... movements of some axes can also be controlled independently of SERUPRO approach during the REPOS operation Set REPOS response Machine data MD11470 MN_REPOS_MODE_MASK can be used to set bits that specify the behavior of the NC during repositioning CAUTION The REPOS operation moves all axes from the current position to the start of the target block in a single block with the appropriate setting of ...

Page 526: ...ned at 11 before the REPOS operation the programmed operation in the interruption block target block for SERUPRO specifies 27 Any number of blocks later this axis is programmed to move incrementally through 5 with N1010 POS A IC 5 FA A 1000 With interface signal DB31 DBX10 0 REPOSDELAY the axis does not traverse in the REPOS operation and is moved to 32 with N1010 The user may have to deliberately...

Page 527: ...t on SERUPRO approach Prefer or ignore REPOS Further REPOS adaptations can be made by setting the bits in MD11470 MN_REPOS_MODE_MASK MD11470 MN_REPOS_MODE_MASK Bit 3 1 for block search via program test SERUPRO Bit 4 1 for each REPOS Note If neither bit 3 nor bit 4 is set non path axes are repositioned in the residual block in this phase Bit 5 1 Modified feedrates and spindle speeds are valid immed...

Page 528: ...ng of REPOS VDI signals With the 0 1 edge of the channel specific VDI signal PLC NCK DB21 DBX31 4 REPOSMODEEDGE the level signals of DB21 DBX31 0 31 2 REPOSPATHMODE0 till 2 and DB31 DBX10 0 REPOSDELAY are transferred to the NC The levels relate to the current block in the main run There are two different cases Case A One repositioning block of a currently active REPOS operation is contained in the...

Page 529: ... does not affect the final REPOS unless this signal applies to the REPOS blocks In Case A the signal is only allowed in the stopped state Response to RESET NCK has acknowledged the PLC signal If the level of the signals DB21 DBX31 4 REPOSMODEEDGE 1 and DB21 DBX319 0 REPOSMODEEDGEACKN 1 and a RESET occurs in this situation then the interface signal of the NCK DB21 DBX319 1 319 3 Repos Path Mode Ack...

Page 530: ...ly influenced with the following channel specific VDI interface signals from the PLC DB21 DBX31 0 31 2 REPOSPATHMODE0 to 2 channel specific DB21 DBX31 4 REPOSMODEEDGE channel specific DB31 DBX10 0 REPOSDELAY axis spindle This axial interface does not affect machine axes that form a path DB31 DBX72 0 REPOSDELAY axis spindle These signals are available in the respective DB of the HMI or PLC REPOS ac...

Page 531: ... 0 Repos Delay with DB31 DBX70 2 Repos Delay Ackn in the following way A part program is stopped at N20 time 2 in figure The NCK stops according to the braking ramp After the PLC has specified the REPOSPATHMODE the NCK accepts the REPOSPATHMODE with the 0 1 edge of REPOSMODEEDGE at Time 3 Repos Path Mode Ackn remains set until the ASUB is initiated Time 4 The REPOS command is started in the ASUB T...

Page 532: ...s Path Mode Ackn again Time 5 If no REPOSPATHMODE has been preselected via a VDI signal the programmed REPOS mode is displayed Repos Path Mode Ackn is canceled when the residual block is activated Time 6 The part program block N30 following the block at Time 2 is resumed Interface signal DB31 DBX70 2 Repos Delay Ackn is defined in the same way DB31 DBX70 1 Repos offset valid 1 if DB21 DBX319 1 319...

Page 533: ...r to set interface signal DB31 DBX70 0 REPOS offset to the value 0 Within the range of validity the axis can also be traversed using FC18 whereby the IS DB31 DBX70 0 REPOS offset is continuously updated Displaying the range of validity The range of validity of the REPOS offset is indicated with interface signal DB31 DBX70 1 REPOS offset valid It is indicated whether the REPOS offset calculation wa...

Page 534: ... Subsequent status changes are ignored If the SERUPRO operation is ended with Search target found DB31 DBX76 4 path axis refers to the target block 9 8 1 2 Repositioning on contour with controlled REPOS Approach modes Influence path axes individually During SERUPRO approach a REPOS operation is initiated in order to reposition to the contour A large number of axes which the user can control by mea...

Page 535: ... 2 to 3 RMN is used to approach the abort location by the shortest route in order to process just the distance to go from C 3 and 3 4 The user starts a SERUPRO operation at the interruption block and uses the JOG keys to move in front of the problem component of the target block RMI and RMB are always approached with RMI and RMB and the target block thus repeated once completely Selecting REPOS mo...

Page 536: ...using system variable AC_REPOS_PATH_MODE Note RMN is a general REPOS extension and it is not restricted to SERUPRO For SERUPRO RMI and RMB are identical With DB21 DBX31 0 31 2 REPOSPATHMODE0 to 2 the path as a whole is controlled The path axes cannot be changed individually The behavior of the other axis types can be changed individually using interface signal DB31 DBX10 0 REPOSDELAY This REPOS of...

Page 537: ...EED_MODE is effective for the following channel axes in the main run throughout the entire SERUPRO operation PLC axes Command axes Positioning axes Reciprocating axes The functions of MD22600 MC_SERUPRO_SPEED_MODE and MD22601 MC_SERUPRO_SPEED_FACTOR apply only to SERUPRO and not to program testing In this case no axes spindles are moved Mode of functioning with DryRun An active SERUPRO SPEED FACTO...

Page 538: ...ference point approach is programmed between the program start and the search target this will be ignored by the NC SERUPRO approach does not take this G74 statement into account Tool management If tool management is active the following setting is recommended Set MD18080 MA_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK BIT 20 0 The tool management command generated during the SERUPRO operation is thus not output to the P...

Page 539: ...tool T number on the spindle N570 ENDIF N580 GETSELT TNR_VORWAHL Read T number of preselected tool of the master spindle Execute tool change only if tool not yet current N590 IF TNR_AKTUELL TNR_VORWAHL Approach tool change position N600 G0 G40 G60 G90 SUPA X450 Y300 Z300 D0 N610 M206 Execute tool change N620 ENDIF N630 M17 PROC ASUPWZV2 N1000 DEF INT TNR_SPINDEL Variable for active T number N1010 ...

Page 540: ...ion has finished completely The user starts the SERUPRO ASUB via function block FC 9 in order to ramp up the spindle The start after M0 in the ASUB does not change the spindle status SERUPRO ASUB automatically stops before the REPOS part program block The user presses START The spindle accelerates to the target block state if the spindle was not programmed differently in the ASUB N1085 ASUP_ENDE1 ...

Page 541: ...e channel seruproMasterChan has reached a search target If no search target is reached the Wait phase is left If the search target is reached the SERUPRO operation is also ended in the channel The serupro MasterChan channel must have been started in normal SERUPRO mode No wait phase occurs Self Acting SERUPRO is ended by M30 of the part program The channel is now in Reset state again A SERUPRO app...

Page 542: ...areas can also be defined in areas of the part program in which the NCK is not allowed to resume processing The last block processed before the search suppressed target area is used as a search pointer Input program section The IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK language commands mark search suppressed sections of the program These language commands cannot be used in synchronized actions IPTRLOCK Freezes the...

Page 543: ... levels Nesting of search suppressed program sections in 2 program levels An interruption in a search suppressed program section of the above program always returns N10030 G4 F1 block With implicit IPTRUNLOCK Nesting of search suppressed program sections in two program levels with implicit IPTRUNLOCK The implicit IPTRUNLOCK in subprogram 1 ends the search suppressed area Table 9 1 Interpretation o...

Page 544: ...00 again Table 9 2 Interpretation of the blocks in an illustrative sequence Subprogram1 is prepared for the block search N10010 IPTRLOCK Program level 1 N10020 R1 R1 1 N10030 G4 F1 Hold block of the search suppressed program section starts as in previous example N20030 RET N10060 R2 R2 2 N10070 RET End of search suppressed program section N100 G4 F1 Main program is continued Table 9 3 Interpretati...

Page 545: ...er is not active for couplings that were activated or deactivated via synchronized actions Example To declare axial master value coupling as search suppressed A program abort within search suppressed program section N200 N500 always provides the interrupt pointer with N100 Table 9 4 N100 G0 X100 N200 EGON Y NOC X 1 1 search suppressed program section starts N300 LEADON A B 1 N400 EGOFS Y N500 LEAD...

Page 546: ...pproach of SERUPRO Example 1 Position a Z axis by specifying an X axis setpoint When block G1 F100 Z AA_IM X is interpreted the preceding STOPRE block ensures synchronization with the main run The correct setpoint of the X axis is thus read via AA_IM to move the Z axis to the same position Example 2 Read and correctly calculate external zero offset Via an implicit STOPRE before N50 the NCK can rea...

Page 547: ...nd in a sequence of such commands Part program command EXTCALL Part program command GETSELT GETEXET Tool change and active fine tool offset FTOCON 3 On the following commands executions Finishing of Type 1 search Search without calculation and Type 2 search with calculation Search at contour end point Note Type 2 search Block search at contour start point has the same behavior 9 8 6 2 SPOS in targ...

Page 548: ...raverse gantry axis couplings Tangential control Tangential follow up of individual axes Axis functions Axis enable Autonomous axis operations Axis transfer Gear stage change During program test not fully automatically Overlaid movements Superimposed motion interpolation For more information about these functions see the following subsections 9 8 8 1 Travel to fixed stop FXS FXS The functionality ...

Page 549: ... characteristic cannot be implemented with FOC REPOS Example A program moves axis X from 0 to 100 and activates FOC every 20 increments for 10 increments at a time This torque characteristic is usually generated with non modal FOC and cannot therefore be traced by FOC REPOS FOC REPOS will traverse axis X from 0 to 100 with or without FOC according to the last programming 9 8 8 3 Synchronous spindl...

Page 550: ...pproach The coupling is also active with Search target found The path from the current point to the end point is carried out for SERUPRO approach with the active coupling LEADON The following specifications apply for the simulation of axial master value couplings 1 Simulation always takes place with setpoint coupling 2 SERUPRO approach takes place with active coupling and an overlaid motion of the...

Page 551: ...ial Function Speed Torque Coupling TE3 Master Slave The system ASUB is called progevent spf and must be available in the _N_CMA_DIR directory The contents might be as follows progevent spf X Master axis Y Slave axis NCK variables Description P_SEARCH_MASLD X Slave Position offset between slave and master axis when the link is closed P_SEARCH_MASLC X Slave Current status of a master slave link was ...

Page 552: ...on Manual Special Functions M3 Axis Couplings and ESR PGA Job Planning Programming Manual Path Behavior and Motion Synchronous Actions Gantry axes Mechanically linked machine axes can be moved without a mechanical offset using the gantry axis function This operation is simulated correctly with SERUPRO For further information about the functionality of gantry axes refer to References FB3 Function M...

Page 553: ...ble reset during motion is activated Autonomous axis operations Autonomous single axis operations are axes controlled by the PLC that can also be simulated on SERUPRO During SERUPRO operation as in normal operation the PLC can take over or give up control of an axis If required this axis can also be traversed using FC18 The PLC takes over control of the axis before the approach block and is respon...

Page 554: ...rk even if the axis involved is to be in speed control mode at the target block In other cases the automatic gear stage change is denied with an alarm if for example the axis was involved in a transformation or coupling between the gear stage change and the target block 9 8 8 7 Superimposed motion Only SERUPRO If overlaid movements are used only the block search via program test SERUPRO can be use...

Page 555: ...yed with the axial VDI interface bit DB31 DBX70 1 REPOS offset valid Value 0 DB31 DBX70 0 REPOS offset has not been calculated as valid Value 1 DB31 DBX70 0 REPOS offset has been calculated as valid 9 8 8 9 Making the initial settings more flexible Initial setting initial SERUPRO setting Machine data MD20112 MC_START_MODE_MASK defines the initial setting of the control for part program start with ...

Page 556: ...SERUPRO is still active in the main run Note P_SEARCHL is set at the beginning of the SERUPRO operation and reset on RESET As a result P_SEARCHL continues to be set in the SERUPRO ASUB and in the residual part program and can continue to be evaluated In contrast the P_ISTEST variable is set only in the SERUPRO operation and is thus suitable for search specific adaptation of programs Program sensit...

Page 557: ... be displayed in the HMI during the simulation e g with SERUPRO For more information refer to References LIS2 Lists Book 2 Section Variables 9 8 10 Restrictions Conditional use SERUPRO supports the following NC functions subject to certain restrictions NCK functionality Restrictions Master slave for drives and SERUPRO Selective enabling and disabling of the master slave link with MASLON active Axi...

Page 558: ...ription of Functions Status messages Each channel reports its current program operation status to the PLC with interface signals These signals are in turn divided up into mode group specific and channel specific signals 9 9 1 Initial settings Machine data Defined conditions can be set via machine data for the program operation or certain implementations of the NC language scope MD settings Initial...

Page 559: ...ds to the default setting for previous controls such as SINUMERIK 840D and 840Di If only certain options are enabled and not all operations are available 1 All the language commands are known Language commands for non enabled options are already recognized at the beginning of the program interpretation and lead to the alarm 12553 option function is not active 2 Only those language commands are kno...

Page 560: ...ollowing program is started Example of whether STRINGIS result is programmable or not The result of STRINGIS number coded return value three digit Number coding of the basic information 1st digit from the left 000 Name is unknown programming is denied with Alarm 12550 100 Name is known but cannot be programmed triggers alarm 12533 200 Name symbol is known but interpretation is not possible 2xx Nam...

Page 561: ...m can be selected only if the relevant channel is in the Reset state Start command channel status There are two possible START commands for initiating processing of a part program or part program block The channel specific interface DB21 DBX7 1 NC Start which is usually controlled from the machine control panel key NC Start starts program execution in the same channel With the NC instruction START...

Page 562: ...not be present DB21 DBX7 4 NC Stop axes plus spindle must not be present DB21 DBX7 7 Reset must not be present DB10 DBX56 1 Emergency stop may not be present No axis or NCK alarm must be active For a further explanation of the individual signals see Chapter 5 Execution of command The parts program or the parts program block is automatically executed and the the following interface signals are set ...

Page 563: ...s PG Programming Guide Fundamentals see Li st of Instructions Execution of command After execution of the STOP command the IS DB21 DBX35 3 Program status interrupted is set Processing of the interrupted program can continue from the point of interruption with the command START The following actions are executed when the STOP command is triggered Part program execution is stopped at the next block ...

Page 564: ... group reset DB21 DBX7 7 Reset For a further explanation of the individual interface signals please see References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions NC PLC interface signals Z1 A RESET command can be used to interrupt an active part program or a part program block in MDA After execution of the Reset command the interface signal DB21 DBX35 7 Channel status Reset is set The part program cannot be ...

Page 565: ...ted DB21 DBX35 2 Program status stopped DB21 DBX35 1 Program status wait DB21 DBX35 0 Program status running For a further explanation of the individual interface signals please see References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions NC PLC interface signals Z1 The effect of commands signals The program status can be controlled by activating different commands or interface signals The following table s...

Page 566: ...ual signals see Chapter 5 The effect of commands signals The channel status can be modified through the activation of various commands or interface signals The following table shows the resulting channel status when these signals are set assumed status before the signal is set Channel status active The Channel status active signal is obtained when a part program or part program block is being exec...

Page 567: ... M30 in a block X M00 M01 in a block X IS Single block X IS Delete distance to go X Auxiliary functions output to PLC but not yet acknowledged X Wait instruction in program X Table 9 7 Responses to operator or program actions Situation Channel status Program status Active mode Operator or program action Situation after the action R V A N V S W A A M J 1 x x x RESET 4 2 x x x RESET 5 3 x x x RESET ...

Page 568: ...pical program sequence Sequence Command Conditions must be satisfied before the command Comments 1 Load program via the operator interface or part program 2 Select AUTOMATIC mode 3 Program preselection Channel preselected Preselected channel in RESET state User ID sufficient for program preselection 4 NC start for preselected channel NC start disable not available Reference point approached in all...

Page 569: ...6 5HDG LQ GLVDEOH 6 LV FRQWUROOHU HQDEOH 6 HHG 6723 6 6SLQGOH FRQWUROOHU HQDEOH 6 6SLQGOH 6723 6 3URJUDP VWDWXV UXQQLQJ 6 3URJUDP VWDWXV LQWHUUXSWHG 6 3URJUDP VWDWXV VWRSSHG IURP 1 6 3URJUDP VWDWXV DERUWHG IURP 1 6 7UDYHO FRPPDQG D LV IURP 1 6 DFW VWRS ILQH IURP 1 6 6SLQGOH VWDWLRQDU IURP 1 6 6SLQGOH LQ VHWSRLQW UDQJH IURP 1 6SLQGOH UDPS XS LV UXQQLQJ 3URJUDP 1 0 6 0 I 1 0 I LQN YLD 3 XVHU SURJUDP...

Page 570: ...Application The function is used if the processing of subsequent workpieces is to be done through an automatic program restart e g in case of turning machine with bar loader changer Activation The jump back takes place only when the following NC PLC interface signal is set DB21 DBX384 0 control program branching 1 If the signal is at 0 then no jump back is exected and the program processing is con...

Page 571: ...ming The function is called in the main or the part program via the command GOTOS Example Note In order that the setting of bit 8 can become effective the measurement of the current program runtime must be active MD27860 bit 1 1 Bit Valu e Description In case of a program restart through the function jump back to start of program the workpiece counter 7 0 AC_TOTAL_PARTS is not incremented 1 AC_TOT...

Page 572: ... single part program block A part program section after a start label A part program section between a start label and end label A part program section between a start label and the key word ENDLABEL References PGA Job Planning Programming Manual Chapter Program Coordination 9 9 11 2 Individual part program block Functionality Via REPEATB B Block in part program block N150 the part program process...

Page 573: ...40 is repeated exactly once After the last repetition the part program is continued with the part program block N160 following the REPEATinstruction Note Label search direction The part program block identified by the label can appear before or after the REPEATB statement The search initially commences toward the start of the program If the label is not found a search is made in the direction of t...

Page 574: ...tition the part program is continued with the part program block N170 following the REPEATinstruction Syntax REPEAT Label P n Labe l Start label to which the instruction REPEAT branches Type String P Number of repetitions n Number of repetitions Type Integer N100 N120 START_1 Start label START__1 N130 N140 END_1 End label END_1 N150 N160 REPEAT START_1 END_1 P n Repetition START_1 until END_1 N170...

Page 575: ...following the REPEATinstruction Syntax REPEAT Start_Label End_Label P n Start_Labe l Start label to which the instruction REPEAT branches Beginning of the part program section that is repeated Type String End_Label End of the part program section that is repeated Type String P Number of repetitions n Number of repetitions Type Integer N100 N120 START_1 Start label START__1 N130 N140 ENDLABEL End l...

Page 576: ... selected with the machine data MD20108 MC_PROG_EVENT_MASK see chapter Parameterization User program In the default setting the program _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF is activated after the triggering event occurs If a different application program is to be activated then it must be entered in the machine date MD11620 MN_PROG_EVENT_NAME see chapter Parameterization The application program activated by the even...

Page 577: ... program 5 Processing of the program part of the main program Sequence during activation through part program end Initial state 1 Block with end of part program is changed 2 Control activates reset sequence with evaluation of machine data MD MC_RESET_MODE_MASK MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE 3 Implicit call of _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF as ASUB 4 Control activates reset sequence with evaluation o...

Page 578: ...Initial state 1 Control activates reset sequence with evaluation of machine data MD MC_RESET_MODE_MASK MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE 2 Implicit call of _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF as ASUB 3 Control activates reset sequence with evaluation of machine data MC_RESET_MODE_MASK MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE The G code reset position continues to be set with machine data Channel any Mode a...

Page 579: ...chine data MC_RESET_MODE_MASK MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE The G code reset position continues to be set with machine data Signal chart The following diagrams show the signal chart of the NC PLC interface signals DB21 DBB35 Program status and Channel status in case of event driven program call Figure 9 9 Signal chart in case of activation through part program start and part program en...

Page 580: ...responding bit remains for at least the duration of a complete PLC cycle Note DB21 DBX35 4 Program status aborted and DB21 DBX35 7 Channel status reset are only received if event driven use program is complete Between program end and the start of the event driven application program these states are not imported This is also the case between an operator panel reset and the start of the application...

Page 581: ...ROG_EVENT_NAME The specified program must be present in one of the cycle directories The following search path is run when an event set with MD20108 occurs 1 _N_CUS_DIR for user cycles 2 _N_CMA_DIR for manufacturer cycles 3 _N_CUS_DIR for standard cycles The first found program with the given name is called Bit Value Description 0 1 Activation through part program start 1 1 Activation through part...

Page 582: ...vent driven user program 1 The occurrence of an event set with MD20108 does not lead to the activation of the event driven user program Bit Value Description In the event driven user program 0 after an activation through part program start 0 the single block processing is effective 1 the single block processing is suppressed 1 after an activation through part program end 0 the single block process...

Page 583: ...hine data MD20192 MC_PROG_EVENT_IGN_PROG_STATE Bit Value Description In the event driven user program 0 after an activation through part program start 0 the read in disable is effective 1 the read in disable is suppressed 1 after an activation through part program end 0 the read in disable is effective 1 the read in disable is suppressed 2 after an activation through operator panel reset 0 the rea...

Page 584: ... 3 upon an activation through power up 0 is not suppressed 1 suppressed Note The system variables AC_STAT and AC_PROG are not affected by this function i e in the running event driven user program AC_STAT is set to active and AC_PROG to running NC PLC interface signals DB21 DBX35 0 7 Program status and Channel status also remain unaffected Bit Value Description The event driven user program is 1 u...

Page 585: ...ent driven user program Scan for triggering event The event which causes the activation of the user program can be queried in the user program with the following system variable P_PROG_EVENT event driven program call active Query of the current channel The application program is basically processed in the channel in which the corresponding event has occurred The current channel is queried in the u...

Page 586: ...vents set with MD20108 Parameter assignment Programming Note The power up event occurs in all channels at the same time MD20108 MC_PROG_EVENT_MASK H0F Call of _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF for Part program start Part program end Operator panel reset Ramp Up Program code Comment PROC PROG_EVENT DISPLOF IF P_PROG_EVENT 1 Processing for part program start MY_GUD_VAR 0 Initialize GUD variable RET ENDIF IF P_PROG_...

Page 587: ...rogram _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF from the directory _N_CMA_DIR should be started automatically with the RESET key and processed till the end regardless of whether the read in disable is activated or deactivated ENDIF RET ENDIF RET MD20108 MC_PROG_EVENT_MASK H04 Call of _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF for Operator panel reset Program code Comment PROC PROG_EVENT DISPLOF N10 DRFOF Deactivate DRF offsets N20 M17 Program c...

Page 588: ...SUP DB10 DBB1 DELDISTOGO_SYNC immediate IS Delete distance to go DB21 DBX6 2 and axial PROGRESETREPEAT delayed IS Clear number of subprogram passes DB21 DBX6 3 PROGCANCELSUB delayed IS Program level abort DB21 DBX6 4 SINGLEBLOCKSTOP delayed In the stop delay area NC stops at the end of the 1st block outside the stop delay area Sinlge block is active before the stop delay area IS NC Stop at block l...

Page 589: ...lock in the stop delay section then begins with override 0 and the described alarm situation occurs PROGMODESLASHON delayed IS DB21 DBB26 Activate switch over skip block PROGMODESLASHOFF delayed IS DB21 DBB26 deactivate skip block PROGMODEDRYRUNON delayed IS DB21 DBX0 6 Activate DryRun PROGMODEDRYRUNOFF delayed IS DB21 DBX0 6 Deactivate DryRun BLOCKREADINHIBIT_ON delayed IS DB21 DBX6 1 Activate re...

Page 590: ...d G4 is permitted in the stop delay area Other part program commands that cause a stop in the meantime e g WAITM are not permitted and trigger the alarm 16954 A stop delay section entered with an override of 0 will not be accepted VDI interface signals from the PLC Hard stop event Alarms with NOREADY response Hard stop event Stop key Soft stop event Read in disable Soft stop event Single BLock Sof...

Page 591: ...rrupted by the routine if it is not specifically declared to be locked against interruption It is possible to continue the subroutine at the point of interruption at a later stage Definition of interrupt routines The command SETINT or an interrupt signal via the PI service ASUB must be assigned to a part program which is supposed to act as interrupt routine This turns the part program into an inte...

Page 592: ...e rapid NC inputs interrupt signals see References Functions Manual Basic Functions PLC Basic program P3 Functions Manual Extended functions Digital and analog NCK I Os A4 Call of interrupt routines During program operation It is possible to call the interrupt routines when the mode groups are present in program operation This means that the processing is done either in the mode type AUTOMATIC or ...

Page 593: ...rrupt routine in program operation Decelerating the axes Upon activation all machine axes are decelerated to a standstill according to the acceleration ramp MD32300 MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL and the axis positions are stored Reorganization In addition to decelerating the axes the previously decoded calculation blocks are calculated back to the interruption block i e all the variables frames and G codes are ...

Page 594: ...ypical 1 Before the re approach to the contour the controller stops and goes to program status Stopped The following NC PLC interface signal is set DB21 DBX318 0 ASUB is stopped 2 The operator presses the START key Thereupon the signal DB21 DBX318 0 is reset and the re approach motion starts 3 At the end of the re approach motion the FC9 signal ASUB done is set and the path of the interrupted part...

Page 595: ...EPOS in the ASUB The ASUB processing is stopped before the approach block The approach movement can be initiated with the Start key Start key Once the ASUB has been executed processing of the interrupted program is resumed Manual mode channel stopped Interrupt PLC Control system assumes the status internal program execution mode for the addressed channel not evident externally and then activates t...

Page 596: ...nditions In the default setting an ASUB start is prevented under the following conditions Stop by means of Stop key M0 M01 Not all axes are referenced yet read in disable is active DB21 DBX6 1 1 Via the following machine data the ASUP Start can also be enabled for these conditions MD11602 MN_ASUP_START_MASK ignore stop conditions for ASUB Bit Value Description 0 0 Mode group signals are applicable...

Page 597: ...e is cancelled The value of the machine data MD20116 MC_IGNORE_INHIBIT_ASUP is evaluated In case MD20116 0 then an ASUB is triggered internally immediately the blocks of the ASUB Program are changed only with the cancellation of the read in disable With the triggering of ASUB the path is decelerated immediately except with the option of BLSYNC A resetting of the read in disable is done in the ASUP...

Page 598: ... the machine data MD11604 MN_ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL MD11602 is considered from the priority given here till the highest priority Behavior when the read in disable is set Via the following channel specific machine data it can be set for each interrupt signal whether the assigned interrupt routines are processed without interruption despite a set read in disable DB21 DBX6 1 1 or whether the read in d...

Page 599: ...s for ASUB Bit 2 1 Bit Value Description In case of a single block processing 0 after an activation the interrupt routine is assigned to the interrupt signal 1 0 the single block processing is effective 1 the single block processing is suppressed 1 after an activation the interrupt routine is assigned to the interrupt signal 2 0 the single block processing is effective 1 the single block processin...

Page 600: ...ontour the retraction direction is also to be mirrored MD21202 MC_LIFTFAST_WITH_MIRROR fast retraction with mirroring The distance for the fast retraction is stored for the 3 geometry axes in the machine data MD21200 MC_LIFTFAST_DIST Traversing path for fast retraction from the contour The maximum axis acceleration MD32300 MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL effective during the LIFTFAST motion is reduced by a factor...

Page 601: ...NT instructions are in the part program and therefore several signals can be simultaneously received the assigned interrupt routines must be allocated priorities that define the sequence in which the interrupt routines are executed PRIO value There are priorities from 1 to 128 Priority 1 corresponds to the highest priority Example The interrupt routines are executed in the sequence of the priority...

Page 602: ...erences Programming Manual Job Planning Chapter Flexible NC Programming Interrupt routine ASUB Value Description 0 Repositioning with REPOS not possible because not called in ASUB ASUB ran from reset status ASUB ran from JOG 1 Repositioning with REPOS possible in ASUB Command Description SAVE If the SAVE command has been used to define the interrupt routine the G codes frames and transformations p...

Page 603: ... Recommended settings MD11600 MN_BAG_MASK H11 MD11602 MN_ASUP_START_MASK H111 MD11604 MN_ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL 7 9 10 5 Examples Activation of an interrupt routine via synchronous action 1 Define number of active digital inputs outputs MD10350 MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS 3 MD10360 MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS 3 2 Generate short circuit with the following MD setting MD10361 MN_FASTIO_DIG_SHORT_CIRCUIT 0 ...

Page 604: ...D11610 MN_ASUP_EDITABLE activation of a user specific ASUP program Bit 0 and bit 1 specify which of the internal system routines are to be replaced by the user specific ASUB Bit 2 defines in which directory the user specific routine is to be searched first in case of activation DANGER The machine manufacturer is responsible for the contents of ASUB routines used to replace ASUP SYF supplied by Sie...

Page 605: ...hat despite a set single block processing the internal ASUB or the user specific _N_ASUP_SPF is processed without interruption MD10702 MN_IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK Prevent single block stop 9 11 3 Programming Determine cause of ASUB activation The reason that led to the activation is specified in bit code through the AC_ASUP system variable and can be read in part program and synchronized actions Th...

Page 606: ... Continuation in case of system ASUP REPOS or RET depending upon MD20114 MC_MODESWITCH_MASK interruption of MDA through mode change Bit 0 0 RET Bit 0 1 REPOS 10 Program continuation during TEACHIN or after TEACHIN deactivation Continuation With system ASUB RET 11 Overstore selection Continuation With system ASUB REPOS 12 Alarm with reaction correction block with REPOS Continuation With system ASUB...

Page 607: ...oning is not possible MD10702 bits 6 and 7 If a stop occurs in a block at the end of block which cannot be reorganized and or repositioned in this situation Jog mode cannot be selected 2 Example Change after JOG operation to a STOPRE block MD10702 bits 6 and 7 If AUTO mode is changed to Jog mode while a STOPRE block is active in addition to system ASUB2 a continuation start will be followed by one...

Page 608: ...ing of part program blocks and maintains the relationship between the current block display and the variable values display 9 12 2 Single block stop Suppression using SBLOF Single block off Programs characterized by the SBLOF language command are executed completely in one block as with every type of single block SBLOF is also valid in the called subroutines SBLOF Example for subroutine without st...

Page 609: ...ted system internally in REORG REPOS can process the system ASUP in one step through the programming of SBLOF Example ASUP SPF Constraints The current block display can be suppressed in cycles with DISPLOF IfDISPLOF is programmed together withSBLOF then the cycle call continues to be displayed on single block stops within the cycle The preset behavior of asynchronous subroutines in single block mo...

Page 610: ...zero offset and tool offsets is to be executed invisibly N10 G1 X10 G90 F200 N20 X 4 Y6 N30 CYCLE1 N40 G1 X0 N50 M30 N100 PROC CYCLE1 DISPLOF SBLOF Suppress single block N110 R10 3 SIN R20 5 N120 IF R11 0 N130 SETAL 61000 N140 ENDIF N150 G1 G91 Z R10 F R11 N160 M17 N100 PROC ZO SBLOF DISPLOF N110 CASE P_UIFRNUM OF 0 GOTOF _G500 1 GOTOF _G54 2 GOTOF _G55 3 GOTOF _G56 4 GOTOF _G57 DEFAULT GOTOF END ...

Page 611: ...1 at a Tool selection block 12 At a GET block 13 During a single block type 2 Sequence If an ASUB is activated during the single block for example execution of the ASUB is completed The deceleration movement does not take place until after the end of the ASUB or the first IPO block in which single block suppression is not activated If the velocity is too large for the deceleration to be performed ...

Page 612: ...oup channel must be classified as a single block control channel KS while the other mode group channels must be classified as dependent channels KA via interface signal Type A or type B single block behavior can be selected for KA channels Type A determines Stop analogous to STOP key Type B determines Stop analogous to stop at block limit Channel classification In one channel KS in a mode group th...

Page 613: ...l KS stops at the end of the block due to single block Channels KA receive a STOP analogous to STOP key All channels are stopped deceleration phase of all KAs Type B NST DB11 DBX1 6 1 single block type B all channels are stopped All channels receive a start Channel KS stops at the end of the block Channels KA receive a STOPATEND analogous with NST DB21 DBX7 2 NC stop at the block limit All channel...

Page 614: ...be understood as selection signals from the operator interface and do not activate the selected function Activation These signal states must be transferred to another area of the data block to activate the selected function With program control by the PLC the signals are to be set directly Feedback The activated functions are partly signaled back to the PLC from the NCK Table 9 9 Program control I...

Page 615: ...skip levels in the NC program Programming Blocks which are not to be executed in every program pass e g program test blocks can be skipped according to the following schematic DRF selection DB21 DBX24 3 DB21 DBX0 3 DB21 DBX33 3 PRT program test DB21 DBX25 7 DB21 DBX1 7 DB21 DBX33 7 Program code Comment N005 Block skipped DB21 DBX2 0 1st skip level 0 N005 Block skipped DB21 DBX2 0 1st skip level 1 ...

Page 616: ... the IPO buffer DRAM For some applications it may be meaningful not to use the full buffer capacity in order to minimize the interval between preparation and interpolation SD42990 The number of blocks in the interpolation buffer can be restricted dynamically to a smaller value than in MD28060 MC_MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE number of NC blocks in the IPO buffer DRAM minimum 2 blocks with the setting data SD...

Page 617: ...t be minimized e g when actual positions in the part program must be read and processed for other purposes Example Note If SD42990 SC_MAX_BLOCKS_IN_IPOBUFFER is set in the part program the interpolation buffer limitation takes effect immediately if the block with the SD is being preprocessed by the interpreter This means that the limitation of the IPO buffer may take effect a few blocks before the...

Page 618: ...mber of prepared blocks in the NCK preprocessing buffer in the relevant processing state If a preprocessing stop is processed the number of display blocks is reduced to zero and increases again after the stop is acknowledged In the case of REORG events e g mode change ASUB start the display blocks stored for Look Ahead are deleted and preprocessed again afterwards Processed values Values processed...

Page 619: ... to the HMI via a configurable upload buffer Maximum size of upload buffer is obtained by multiplying MD28402 MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF 0 MD28402 MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF 1 1 by the block length configured in MD28400 MC_MM_ABSBLOCK The number of blocks before the current block is configured in MD28402 MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF 0 and the number of blocks after the current block is configured in...

Page 620: ...lay the last displayed value is retained G code DIACYCOFA AX axis specific diameter programming This G code deactivates the axis specific diameter programming during the cycle execution In this way computations in the cycle can always be done in the radius In the position display and in the basic block display this continues according to the state of the diameter programming before DIACYCOFA AX In...

Page 621: ...p identifiers and comments are omitted Block number and labels are transferred from the original block but omitted if DISPLOF is active The number of decimal places is defined in display machine data MD 9004 MD 9010 and MD 9011 via the HMI Programmed axis positions are represented as absolute positions in the coordinate system WCS ENS specified in MD9424 MM_MA_COORDINATE_SYSTEM coordinate system f...

Page 622: ...24 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER tool holder number is active the T number is always output with address extension If no address extension has been programmed the number of the master spindle or the master toolholder is used instead T spindle_number tool_holder For the Spindle programming via S M3 M4 M5 M19 M40 M45 and M70 or MD 20094 MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR M function for switching over in th...

Page 623: ... program blocks If intermediate blocks e g tool radius compensation G41 G42 radius chamfer RNDM RND CHF CHR are generated in the course of contour preprocessing these are assigned the display information from the part program block on which the motion is based With the EXECTAB command processing a table of contour elements the block generated by EXECTAB is shown in the display block For the EXECST...

Page 624: ...rograms from the part program The external subroutine is called through the part program command EXTCALL with specification of a call path optional and the subroutine identifier see Execution from external subroutines Page 625 Parameter assignment A reloading memory FIFO buffer must be reserved in the dynamic NC memory for executing a program in the Executing from external mode main program or sub...

Page 625: ... external subroutines Function Individual machining steps for producing complex workpieces may involve program sequences that require so much memory they cannot be stored in the NC memory In such cases the user has the option of executing the program sequences as subroutines from an external program memory in the Execution from external source mode with the help of the EXTCALL part program instruc...

Page 626: ...path The absolute path results from linking the following characters The path name preset in SD42700 The character as a separator The subprogram path or identifier programmed in EXTCALL If the called subprogram is not found at the preset path the data specified in the EXTCALL call is then searched for in the user memory directories The search ends when the subprogram is found for the first time If...

Page 627: ...ogram to subsequently loaded is on the local drive in the directory user sinumerik data prog WKS DIR WST1 WPD The subprogram path is preset in SD42700 SD42700 SC_EXT_PROG_PATH LOCAL_DRIVE WKS DIR WST1 WPD Program code N010 PROC MAIN N020 N030 EXTCALL ROUGHING N040 N050 M30 Program code N010 PROC ROUGHING N020 G1 F1000 N030 X Y Z N040 N999999 M17 Note Without the path being specified in the SD42700...

Page 628: ...rt This is possible through the appropriate setting of machine data MD20110 MD20150 MD20152 and MD20112 The control system response after can be set with Power up POWER ON MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK Definition of control default settings after reset parts program end MD20144 MC_TRAFO_MODE_MASK Selection of the kinematic transformation function MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES initial setting of the G...

Page 629: ... ZLWK 0 HR D LV H FKDQJH DFWLYH DFFRUGLQJ WR 0 0 ELW 0 ELW 7UDQVIRUPDWLRQ DFWLYH 0DVWHU WRRO KROGHU LQLWLDO VWDWH DFFRUGLQJ WR 0 0 B722 B0 1 0 17B722 2 5 5HIHUHQFH D LV DFFRUGLQJ WR 0 0 B 0 7 5B B QLWLDO VWDWH IRU PDVWHU VSLQGOH DFFRUGLQJ WR 0 0 B63 1 B B0 67 5B63 1 OHFWURQLF JHDU LV QRW DFWLYDWHG DVLF IUDPH LV GHVHOHFWHG 0DVWHU YDOXH FRXSOLQJ LV QRW DFWLYDWHG HRPHWU D LV DVVLJQPHQW DFFRUGLQJ WR 0...

Page 630: ...DGRSWV LWV UHVHW SRVLWLRQ RU UHWDLQV LWV FXUUHQW SRVLWLRQ UHIHU WR WDEOHV EHORZ LW HIDXOW 7KH FXUUHQW VHWWLQJV DUH UHWDLQHG 3DUWV SURJUDP VWDUW FRGHV DFFRUGLQJ WR 0 7RRO OHQJWK FRPSHQVDWLRQ RII 7UDQVIRUPDWLRQ RII RXSOHG PRWLRQ RII 7DQJHQWLDO WUDFNLQJ RII 6 QFKURQRXV VSLQGOH RII HRPHWU D LV DVVLJQPHQW DFFRUGLQJ WR 0 0DVWHU YDOXH FRXSOLQJ RII LDO UHYROXWLRQDO IHHGUDWH RII 5HVHUYHG EDVLF IUDPH RII 0D...

Page 631: ...machine data in the table Selection of RESET and power up response has the following significance MD20152 MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE i i G code group 1 0 1 MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES i The value stored in MD20150 is active The last active current value is active Note In MD20110 bits set to 1 cause settings to be retained in MD20112 bits set to 0 cause settings to be retained Machine data Meaning MD201...

Page 632: ...itial setting of the G groups MD20152 MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE Reset behavior of G groups G code initial state on RESET MD20152 specifies for each entry in MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES whether the setting in accordance with MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES is adopted again MD20152 0 or the current setting is retained MD20152 1 on reset part program end MD21330 MC_COUPLE_RESET_MODE_1 Coupling cancellation...

Page 633: ...assignment Last active transformation should be kept after POWER ON This functionality is activated using the MD setting MD20144 MC_TRAFO_MODE_MASK Bit 1 1 In addition the following bits must be set MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK bit 0 1 and bit 7 1 For the significance of MD20144 and 20110 see System settings for power up RESET part program end and part program start Page 628 NC language command WAIT...

Page 634: ...ing power up and at the start of the part program MD20152 MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE 52 1 Obtain TOFRAME via reset MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK HC1 Obtain transformation and tool offset via reset MD20144 MC_TRAFO_MODE_MASK H02 Obtain transformation via POWER OFF Program code Comment Example with activation of the frame which aligns the WCS in the tool direction when powering up and resetting with part prog...

Page 635: ...er details see also machine data MD20700 MC_REFP_NC_START_LOCK MD34110 MA_REFP_CYCLE_NR Axes with incremental encoders and without actual value buffering It is to be assumed that axes with incremental encoders and without actual value buffering are clamped with sufficient speed in the event of a power failure to prevent them drifting from their last position setpoint Note If machine data MD20700 M...

Page 636: ...gram the substitute subprogram is called Therefore the NC replaces the function by a subprogram call This results in the following advantages When adapting to the production process an existing tested and proven part program can still be used unchanged The changes required are then shifted into the user specific subroutines The functionality can be implemented within the substitute subprogram with...

Page 637: ...O_FCT_ CYCLE Index M function number MD10716 MC_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME Index subprogram name The M function and the corresponding replacement subprogram are connected through the same index Example M function M101 is replaced by subprogram SUB_M101 and M function M102 by SUB_M102 System variable for transferring information For a freely selectable M function information regarding the M function that ...

Page 638: ...TERN_LANGUAGE 0 User specific M functions parameterized via machine data must also not be replaced by a subprogram as they also trigger system functions Note For an M function replacement with transfer of information via system variable the address extension and function value of the M function must be programmed as constant values Permissible programming M function value M function value M addres...

Page 639: ...n the machine data MD20095 MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR M function for switchover to controlled axis mode external mode MD22254 MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE Additional M function for program stop MD22256 MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M1_VALUE Additional M function for conditional stop MD26008 MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE Definition of M functions for nibble specific MD26012 MC_PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION Activation of punching and n...

Page 640: ...2 System variable for the call time System variable P_SUB_STAT can be used to read whether the substitution is active and if so when the replacement subprogram referred to the block was called up Bit Value Meaning 0 0 The D or DL number is available in the subprogram in the form of a system variable initial state 1 The D or DL number is calculated directly in the block Note This function is only a...

Page 641: ...D22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 1 AND D or DL together with T or M function programmed in a block Parameterization Meaning MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 0 Tool change with T function MD10717 MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME MY_T_CYCLE Name of the subprogram to replace the T function MD10719 MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE 0 Call time End of block Programming Comment N110 D1 D1 N120 G90 G0 X100 Y100 Z50 D1 is active N130 D2...

Page 642: ...S_QUICK 0 TRUE if the M function was programmed with quick output to the PLC C_T_PROG TRUE if the T function was programmed C_T For C_T_PROG TRUE contains the value of the T function C_TE Contains for C_T_PROG TRUE C_TS_PROG TRUE the value of the address extension of the T function C_TS_PROG TRUE if for the T or TCA replacement a tool identifier has been programmed C_TS For C_TS_PROG TRUE contains...

Page 643: ...Subprogram SUB_M6 Machine data Meaning MD10715 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE 2 6 Tool change with M6 MD10716 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME 2 SUB_M6 Replacement subprogram for M6 MD10718 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR 2 Information transfer using system variables Programming Comment PROC MAIN N10 T1 D1 M6 M6 is replaced by subroutine SUB_M6 N90 M30 Programming Comment PROC SUB_M6 N110 IF C_T_PROG TRUE IF address T is programm...

Page 644: ... Parameterization Main program Parameterization Meaning MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 1 Tool change prepared with T function MD10717 MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME MY_T_CYCLE Replacement subprogram MD10719 MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE 0 Transfer of the D DL number Program code Comment N210 D1 N220 G90 G0 X100 Y100 Z50 D1 is active N230 D2 X110 Z0 T5 D1 remains active programmed D2 is transferred to the subprogram...

Page 645: ...th address T The subprogram is called at the start of the block The tool management is not active Axis B is an indexing axis with Hirth gearing Parameterization Configuration Meaning MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 1 Tool change with M function MD22560 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE 6 M code for tool change MD10715 MC_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE 3 6 M function to be replaced MD10716 MC_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME 3 MY_T_CYCLE Repl...

Page 646: ...T function Programming Comment PROC MAIN N10 G01 F1000 X10 T1 5 D1 T and D function replaced by calling D_T_SUB_PROG at start of block N90 M30 Programming Comment N1000 PROC D_T_SUB_PROG DISPLOF SBLOF N4100 IF C_T_PROG TRUE IF address T is programmed N4120 POS B CAC C_T Approach the indexing position N4130 T C_TE C_T Select tool T selection N4140 ENDIF ENDIF N4300 IF C_T_PROG TRUE IF address D is ...

Page 647: ...rogram MD11717 MN_FCT_CYCLE_NAME D_SUB_PROG Address T replaced with subprogram MD10717 MN_FCT_CYCLE_NAME T_SUB_PROG M function M6 replaced with subprogram MD10715 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE 0 6 MD10716 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME 0 M6_SUB_PROG MD10718 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR 0 MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 1 MD22560 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE 6 Resolution A conflict is resolved corresponding to the following table The f...

Page 648: ...d If the leading spindle is changed to another channel a gear stage change or positioning of this spindle does not call the replacement subprogram A programmed gear stage change must result in a real gear stage change For this purpose the programmed and active gear stage must differ In a block only one spindle function can be replaced Multiple replacements lead to the termination of the program pr...

Page 649: ...variable P_SUB_STAT Block processing If the replacement subprogram is called at the block start after processing the replacement subprogram the block that initiated the call is processed The replaced commands are no longer processed If the replacement subprogram is called at the block end the block that initiated calling the replacement subprogram is first processed without the commands to be repl...

Page 650: ...e depends on the configured output behavior of the auxiliary function to the PLC see below MD22080 Output before or during motion Subprogram call at the start of the block Output after motion Subprogram call at the end of the block MD22080 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_SPEC 12 16 output behavior for M41 M45 System variable to transfer information The replacement subroutine is provided with all of the informatio...

Page 651: ...n MD30465 MA_AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK bit 1 1 Time that the replacement subprogram is called SPOS SPOSA The time of the call cannot be set The replacement subprogram is always called at the block start M19 The call time depends on the configured output behavior of the auxiliary function to the PLC see below MD22080 Output before or during motion Subprogram call at the start of the block Output after mot...

Page 652: ...s the axis identifier of the following spindle of the active coupling which had triggered the replacement operation Note If the variable is called outside the replacement subprogram program processing is cancelled with an alarm P_SUB_AXFCT Contains the active replacement types corresponding to MD30465 MA_AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK P_SUB_SPOS TRUE if the SPOS replacement is active P_SUB_SPOSA TRUE if the S...

Page 653: ... H21 M41 Output prior to motion MD22080 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_SPEC 13 H21 M42 Output prior to motion MD22080 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_SPEC 13 H21 M43 Output prior to motion MD22080 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_SPEC 15 H21 M44 Output prior to motion MD22080 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_SPEC 16 H21 M45 Output prior to motion MD30465 MA_AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK AX5 H0001 Replace gear change commands Programming Comment PROC MAIN N110 COUPON S2 S1...

Page 654: ... spindles N1170 M1 P_SUB_GEAR M2 P_SUB_GEAR N1180 DELAYFSTON End of stop delay area N1190 COUPON S2 S1 Close the synchronous spindle coupling N1200 ENDIF N9999 RET Programming Comment N1000 PROC LANG_SUB DISPLOF SBLOF N1010 DEF AXIS _LA Bit memory for leading axis leading spindle N1020 DEF AXIS _CA Bit memory for following axis following spindle N1030 DEF INT _GEAR Bit memory for gear stage N1100 ...

Page 655: ...ommands MD22080 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_SPEC 9 H0021 Output of M19 to the PLC before motion Setting Data Meaning SD43240 SA_M19_SPOS AX5 260 Spindle position for M19 260 SD43250 SA_M19_SPOSMODE AX5 4 Position approach mode for M19 Approach in the positive direction ACP Programming Comment PROC MAIN N210 COUPON S2 S1 Activate synchronous spindle coupling N220 SPOS 1 100 Position leading spindle with SPOS N...

Page 656: ... LABEL1_CONT LABEL1_ACP SPOS 1 ACP P_SUB_SPOSIT SPOS 2 ACP P_SUB_SPOSIT GOTOF LABEL1_CONT LABEL1_ACN SPOS 1 ACN P_SUB_SPOSIT SPOS 2 ACN P_SUB_SPOSIT LABEL1_CONT N2250 ELSE Positioning the spindle using M19 N2270 M1 19 M2 19 Leading and following spindles N2280 ENDIF End replacement SPOS SPOSA N2285 DELAYFSTOF End of stop delay area N2290 COUPON S2 S1 Activate synchronous spindle coupling N2410 ELS...

Page 657: ...1_IC 2 GOTOF LABEL1_AC 3 GOTOF LABEL1_DC 4 GOTOF LABEL1_ACP 5 GOTOF LABEL1_ACN DEFAULT GOTOF LABEL_ERR LABEL1_DC SPOS _LSPI DC P_SUB_SPOSIT SPOS _CSPI DC P_SUB_SPOSIT GOTOF LABEL1_CONT LABEL1_IC DELAYFSTOF SPOS _LSPI IC P_SUB_SPOSIT SPOS _CSPI IC P_SUB_SPOSIT DELAYFSTON GOTOF LABEL1_CONT LABEL1_AC SPOS _LSPI AC P_SUB_SPOSIT SPOS _CSPI AC P_SUB_SPOSIT GOTOF LABEL1_CONT LABEL1_ACP SPOS _LSPI ACP P_S...

Page 658: ...lete replacement subprogram can be protected against interruptions such as NC stop read in inhibit etc using the DELAYFSTON and DELAYFSTOF commands Replacements do not occur recursively i e the function that has led to the replacement subroutine call is no longer replaced if it is programmed again in the replacement subroutine Value Meaning 0 The replacement subprogram behaves like a normal subpro...

Page 659: ...e PLC The auxiliary function is only output if the auxiliary function is reprogrammed in the replacement subprogram Block search response The replacement subprogram is also called in the search modes Block search with calculation and Block search with calculation in the program test mode SERUPRO Any special features must be realized in the replacement subprogram using the system variable P_SEARCH ...

Page 660: ...n be performed in the replacement subprogram In a block in which the replacement subprogram is called at the block end the following should be observed No modal subprogram call should be active No subprogram return jump should be programmed No program end should be programmed Example of Non modal synchronized actions MD30465 MA_AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK bit 0 1 gear stage change If in block N1010 the fun...

Page 661: ...ific system variables Time since the last control power up The timers for measuring the time since the last control power up are always active and can be read via NC specific system variables Program runtimes The timers for measuring the program runtimes are only available in the AUTOMATIC operating mode can be read via channel specific system variables Some of the timers are always active others ...

Page 662: ...IME is not reset when starting an event controlled program PROG_EVENT The program runtime is only counted further if it involves a start M30 or a search PROG_EVENT The behavior of AC_ACT_PROG_NET_TIME for GOTOS and override 0 can be parameterized using MD27850 refer to Section Parameter assignment Tip With AC_PROG_NET_TIME_TRIGGER AC_ACT_PROG_NET_TIME can be manipulated further AC_OLD_PROG_NET_TIM...

Page 663: ...RIGGER in the NC program the time measurement can be enabled and disabled again 1 AC_PROG_NET_TIME_TRIGGER 2 starts the measurement and in so doing sets AC_ACT_PROG_NET_TIME to 0 2 AC_PROG_NET_TIME_TRIGGER 1 ends the measurement and copies the value from AC_ACT_PROG_NET_TIME into AC_OLD_PROG_NET_TIME In order to exploit all trigger options specific values for AC_PROG_NET_TIME_TRIGGER are filled wi...

Page 664: ...ning AC_OPERATING_TIME Total runtime of NC programs in Automatic mode in s In the automatic mode the runtimes of all programs between NC start and end of program reset are summed up The default is not to count in NC STOP and override 0 Continued counting can be activated at an override of 0 via MD27860 The value is automatically reset to 0 every time the control powers up AC_CYCLE_TIME Runtime of ...

Page 665: ... 1 0 Timer for AC_CYCLE_TIME not active 1 Timer for AC_CYCLE_TIME active 2 0 Timer for AC_CUTTING_TIME not active 1 Timer for AC_CUTTING_TIME active Bit Value Meaning 0 0 AC_ACT_PROG_NET_TIME is not reset to 0 in case of a jump with GOTOS to the program start initial setting 1 With a jump with GOTOS to the start of the program AC_ACT_PROG_NET_TIME is reset to 0 the value is first saved in AC_OLD_P...

Page 666: ...r AC_CUTTING_TIME is active 0 Timer for AC_CUTTING_TIME counts only for the active tool 1 Timer for AC_CUTTING_TIME counts independent of the tool 8 Only for bit 1 1 timer for AC_CYCLE_TIME is active 0 AC_CYCLE_TIME is not reset to 0 in case of a jump with GOTOS to the program start 1 AC_CYCLE_TIME is reset to 0 in case of a jump with GOTOS to the program start 9 Only for bit 0 1 1 timer for AC_OP...

Page 667: ... Activating the measurement for the total runtime and the processing time with an active tool including measurement with a program test MD27860 MC_PROCESSTIMER_MODE H25 Activating the measurement for the total runtime and the machining time independent of the tool including measurement with a program test MD27860 MC_PROCESSTIMER_MODE Ha5 Activating the measurement for the processing time with an a...

Page 668: ...C_PROG_NET_TIME_TRIGGER 2 N20 mySubProgrammA N30 DO AC_PROG_NET_TIME_TRIGGER 3 N40 mySubProgrammB N50 DO AC_PROG_NET_TIME_TRIGGER 4 N60 mySubProgrammC N70 DO AC_PROG_NET_TIME_TRIGGER 1 N80 mySubProgrammD N90 M30 System variable Description AC_REQUIRED_PARTS Number of the workpieces to be produced setpoint number of workpieces In this counter the number of workpieces at which the actual workpiece c...

Page 669: ...ificance 0 1 AC_REQUIRED_PARTS is active 1 0 Alarm signal output in case of AC_ACTUAL_PARTS AC_REQUIRED_PARTS 1 Alarm signal output in case of AC_SPECIAL_PARTS AC_REQUIRED_PARTS 4 1 AC_TOTAL_PARTS is active 5 0 AC_TOTAL_PARTS is increased by the value 1 through M02 M30 1 AC_TOTAL_PARTS is incremented by the value 1 through the M command defined with MD27882 0 6 0 AC_TOTAL_PARTS is also active for ...

Page 670: ...ing procedure and the identity comparison set with MD27880 are not conducted for all the activated counters Examples Activation of the workpiece counter AC_REQUIRED_PARTS MD27880 MC_PART_COUNTER H3 AC_REQUIRED_PARTS is active Display alarm at AC_REQUIRED_PARTS AC_SPECIAL_PARTS Activation of the workpiece counter AC_TOTAL_PARTS MD27880 MC_PART_COUNTER H10 MD27882 MC_PART_COUNTER_MCODE 0 80 AC_TOTAL...

Page 671: ...3 MD27882 MC_PART_COUNTER_MCODE 0 80 MD27882 MC_PART_COUNTER_MCODE 1 17 MD27882 MC_PART_COUNTER_MCODE 2 77 AC_REQUIRED_PARTS is active Display alarm at AC_REQUIRED_PARTS AC_SPECIAL_PARTS AC_TOTAL_PARTS is active the counter is incremented by the value 1 with each M02 MC_PART_COUNTER_MCODE 0 has no significance AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is active the counter is incremented by a value of 1 with each M17 AC_SP...

Page 672: ... modes in the MD27880 MC_PART_COUNTER with bit 0 1 MD27882 MC_PART_COUNTER_MCODE 0 41 MD27882 MC_PART_COUNTER_MCODE 1 42 MD27882 MC_PART_COUNTER_MCODE 2 43 Program code Comment N100 AC_REQUIRED_PARTS 10 value 0 stop counting N200 M41 M43 Not counting N300 M42 N500 AC_REQUIRED_PARTS 52 Value 0 Counting in accordance with MD27880 activated N501 M43 Counting N502 M42 M41 Counting ...

Page 673: ...PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB Setting data to be updated 10711 NC_LANGUAGE_CONFIGURATION Manner of handling the languages whose related option or function is not activated 10713 M_NO_FCT_STOPRE M function with preprocessing stop 10715 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE M function to be replaced by subroutine 10716 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME Subroutine name for M function replacement 10717 T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME Name of the tool chang...

Page 674: ...Channel axis name in channel channel axis no 0 7 20090 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND Initial setting of master spindle in channel 20100 DIAMETER_AX_DEF Geometry axis with transverse axis function 20106 PROG_EVENT_IGN_SINGLEBLOCK Prog events ignore the single block 20107 PROG_EVENT_IGN_INHIBIT Prog events ignore the read in disable 20108 PROG_EVENT_MASK Event driven program calls 20109 PROG_EVENT_MASK_PRO...

Page 675: ...r G96 G961 20800 SPF_END_TO_VDI Subprogram end to PLC 21000 CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST Circle end point monitoring constant 21010 CIRCLE_ERROR_FACTOR Circle end point monitoring factor 21100 ORIENTATION_IS_EULER Angle definition for orientation programming 21110 X_AXIS_IN_OLD_X_Z_PLANE Coordinate system for automatic Frame definition 21200 LIFTFAST_DIST Traversing path for fast retraction from the contour...

Page 676: ...n 22030 AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE Auxiliary function value 22200 AUXFU_M_SYNC_TYPE Output timing of M functions 22210 AUXFU_S_SYNC_TYPE Output timing of S functions 22220 AUXFU_T_SYNC_TYPE Output timing of T functions 22230 AUXFU_H_SYNC_TYPE Output timing of H functions 22240 AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE Output timing of F functions 22250 AUXFU_D_SYNC_TYPE Output timing of D functions 22400 S_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RE...

Page 677: ...MC_ Description 27860 PROCESSTIMER_MODE Activate the runtime measurement 27880 PART_COUNTER Activate the workpiece counter 27882 PART_COUNTER_MCODE Workpiece counting via M command Number Identifier MA_ Description 30465 AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK Substitution of NC language commands 30550 AXCONF_ASSIGN_MASTER_CHAN Reset position of channel for axis change 30600 FIX_POINT_POS Fixed value positions of axes...

Page 678: ...on teach in DB11 DBX1 0 DB3000 DBX1 0 Machine function REPOS DB11 DBX1 1 Machine function REF DB11 DBX1 2 DB3000 DBX1 2 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Selected mode AUTOMATIC DB11 DBX4 0 Selected mode MDI DB11 DBX4 1 Selected JOG mode DB11 DBX4 2 Selected machine function teach in DB11 DBX5 0 Selected machine function REPOS DB11 DBX5 1 Selected machine function REF DB11 DBX5 2 Active...

Page 679: ...s spindles DB21 DBX7 4 DB3200 DBX7 4 Reset DB21 DBX7 7 REPOSPATHMODE DB21 DBX31 0 2 REPOSMODEEDGE DB21 DBX31 4 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D DRF selected DB21 DBX24 3 DB1700 DBX0 3 Select NCK associated M01 DB21 DBX24 4 M01 selected DB21 DBX24 5 DB1700 DBX0 5 Dry run feedrate selected DB21 DBX24 6 DB1700 DBX0 6 REPOSPATHMODE 0 2 DB21 DBX25 0 2 Feedrate override selected for rapid tr...

Page 680: ...atus Interrupted DB21 DBX35 6 DB3300 DBX3 6 Channel status Reset DB21 DBX35 7 DB3300 DBX3 7 Interrupt handling active DB21 DBX36 4 Channel ready DB21 DBX36 5 Read in enable is ignored DB21 DBX37 6 Stop at the end of block with SBL is suppressed DB21 DBX37 7 Number of the active G function of G function group 1 n 8 bit int DB21 DBB208 271 DB3500 DBB0 63 Workpiece setpoint reached DB21 DBX317 2 DB33...

Page 681: ...0 681 9 17 3 6 Signals to NC 9 17 3 7 Signals from axis spindle Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D REPOSDELAY DB31 DBX10 0 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D REPOS offset DB31 DBX70 0 REPOS offset valid DB31 DBX70 1 REPOS Delay Ackn DB31 DBX70 2 REPOSDELAY DB31 DBX72 0 Path axis DB31 DBX76 4 DB390x DBX1002 4 ...

Page 682: ...K1 Mode group channel program operation reset response 9 17 Data lists Basic Functions 682 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 ...

Page 683: ...ce coordinate system WCS on the BCS Special axes In contrast to geometry axes no geometrical relationship is defined between the special axes Path axes Path axes are interpolated together all the path axes of a channel have a common path interpolator All the path axes of one channel have the same acceleration phase constant travel phase and delay phase Positioning axes Positioning axes are interpo...

Page 684: ...nse to a program command Link axis Link axes are axes which are physically connected to another NCU and whose position is controlled from this NCU Link axes can be assigned dynamically to channels of another NCU Link axes are not local axes from the perspective of a particular NCU The axis container concept is used for the dynamic modification of the assignment to an NCU Axis replacement with GET ...

Page 685: ...e basic coordinates system BKS has the following properties The geometry axes form a perpendicular Cartesian coordinate system The BCS is derived from a kinematic transformation of the MCS BZS The basic zero system BZS is the basic coordinate system with a basic offset SZS The settable zero system SZS is the workpiece coordinate system with a programmable frame from the viewpoint of the WCS The wo...

Page 686: ...e basic and the workpiece coordinate systems is activated The magnitudes of the offsets can be set by the following for each of the axes involved PLC Operator Panel Part program Activated offsets take effect at the instant the first motion block of the relevant axes is processed after offset activation The offsets are superimposed on the programmed path no interpolation The velocity at which the z...

Page 687: ...ollowing components Features in relation to axes The rough and fine offsets scaling and mirroring can be programmed for geometry and special axes A rotation can also be programmed for geometry axes Frame components Programmable with Offset Rough offset TRANS ATRANS additive translation component CTRANS zero offset for multiple axes G58 axial zero offset Fine offset CFINE G59 axial zero offset Rota...

Page 688: ...s fine offset is retained Fine offset with G59 G59 is used for axial overwriting of the additively programmed translations for the specified axes that were programmed with ATRANS Frame rotations Orientations in space are defined via frame rotations as follows Rotation with ROT defines the individual rotations for all geometry axes Solid angles with ROTS AROTS CROTS define the orientation of a plan...

Page 689: ... global basic frames frames for other channels can be pre assigned from a channel Properties of the NCU global basic frames Can be read and written from all channels Can be activated only in the channels Offsets scaling and mirroring for channel and machine axes All global and channel specific basic frames are chained and therefore a complete basic frame is obtained As standard there is at least o...

Page 690: ...A0 Adjustable frames Adjustable frames can be defined as either global NCU or channel specific frames Consistency When writing reading and activating frames e g using channel coordination the user is solely responsible for achieving consistent behavior within the channels Cross channel activation of frames is not supported ...

Page 691: ...ure 10 3 Local and external machine axes link axes 3RVLWLRQLQJ D HV RPPDQG D HV 5HFLSURFDWLQJ D HV 3 D HV 6 QFKUR QRXV D HV LQHDU D HV 5RWDU D HV HRPHWU D HV 6SHFLDO D HV K D Q Q H O D H V 3DWK D HV LQHPDWLF WUDQVIRUPDWLRQ 0 D F K L Q H D H V 6SLQGOH D HV DQWU D HV RXSOHG PRWLRQ D HV XLGH YDOXH FRXSOLQJ D HV HHGUDWH GHWHU PLQHG SDWK D HV 5283 2ULHQWDWLRQ D HV 0 D F K L Q H D H V RFDO PDFKLQH D LV ...

Page 692: ...ms Frames 10 2 Axes Basic Functions 692 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 10 2 2 Machine axes Meaning Machine axes are the axes that actually exist on a machine tool Figure 10 4 Machine axes X Y Z B S on a Cartesian machine ...

Page 693: ...al axis is assigned to a channel Geometry axes and additional axes are always traversed in their channel 10 2 4 Geometry axes Meaning The three geometry axes always make up a fictitious rectangular coordinate system By using FRAMES offset rotation scaling mirroring it is possible to image geometry axes of the workpiece coordinate system WCS on the BCS Application Geometry axes are used to program ...

Page 694: ...e The geometry axes names themselves remain unchanged Geometry axes can be replaced either individually or as a group in one command Supplementary conditions As a basic rule any channel axis designated as a geometry axis can be replaced by another channel axis In this case the following restrictions apply Rotary axes may not be programmed as geometry axes A geometry axis which has the same name as...

Page 695: ...The system treats tool length compensations as not yet applied for the following geometry axes All geometry axes which have been newly added to the geometry axis grouping All geometry axes which have changed their positioning within the geometry axis grouping Geometry axes which retain their position within the geometry axis grouping after a replacement operation also retain their status with resp...

Page 696: ...ificance 0 The current configuration of the geometry axes remains unchanged on reset and program start With this setting the response is identical to older software versions without geometry axis replacement 1 The configuration of the geometry axis remains unchanged during reset or parts program end as a function of machine data MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and during parts program start as a functi...

Page 697: ...sformations 3 axis 4 axis 5 axis and nutation transformation TRAANG oblique axis TRANSMIT TRACYL References FB3 Function Manual Special Functions 3 Axis to 5 Axis Transformation F2 FB2 Function Manual Extension Functions Kinematic Transformation M1 Example In the example below it is assumed that there are 6 channel axes with channel axis names XX YY ZZ U V W and three geometry axes with names X Y ...

Page 698: ... MD AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB is effective i e XX YY and ZZ become geometry axes GEOAX 1 U 2 V 3 W U V and W become the first second and third geometry axes G1 X10 Y10 Z10 XX 25 Channel axes U V W each traverse to position 10 XX traverses to position 25 GEOAX 0 V V is again removed from the geometry axis grouping U and W remain geometry axes The second geometry axis is no longer assigned GEOAX 1 U 2...

Page 699: ...axes are interpolated separately each positioning axis has its own axis interpolator Each positioning axis has its own feedrate and acceleration characteristic Positioning axes can be programmed in addition to path axes even in the same block Path axis interpolation path interpolator is not affected by the positioning axes Path axes and the individual positioning axes do not necessarily reach thei...

Page 700: ...tion Manual Synchronized Actions 10 2 9 Main axes Significance A main axis is an axis that is interpolated by the main run This interpolation can be started as follows From synchronized actions as command axes due to an event via block related modal or static synchronized actions From the PLC via special function blocks in the PLC basic program named as a concurrent positioning axis or a PLC axis ...

Page 701: ...opping or interrupting the axis Continuing the axis continue sequence of motion Resetting the axis to its basic status 10 2 10 Synchronized axes Significance Synchronous axes are components of the path axes which are not referenced in order to calculate the tool path velocity They are interpolated together with path axes all path axes and synchronous axes of one channel have a common path interpol...

Page 702: ...feedrate should be valid on the circuit 2 axes are path axes and the infeed axis is a synchronous axis N05 G00 G94 G90 M3 S1000 X0 Y0 Z0 N10 FGROUP X Y Axes X Y are path axes Z is a synchronous axis N20 G01 X100 Y100 F1000 Progr feedrate 1000 mm min Feedrate of axis X 707 mm min Feedrate of axis Y 707 mm min N30 FGROUP X Axis X is a path axis axis Y is a synchronous axis N20 X200 Y150 progr Feedra...

Page 703: ...PDFKLQH D LV WK PDFKLQH D LV WK PDFKLQH D LV WK PDFKLQH D LV UG PDFKLQH D LV QG PDFKLQH D LV VW PDFKLQH D LV KDQQHO KDQQHO WK FKDQQHO D LV WK FKDQQHO D LV WK FKDQQHO D LV WK FKDQQHO D LV WK FKDQQHO D LV UG FKDQQHO D LV QG FKDQQHO D LV VW FKDQQHO D LV KDQQHO KDQQHO 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW KDQQHO D LV QDPHV 0DFKLQH D HV XVHG LQ WKH FKDQQHO LV FRQWDLQHU QDPHV HRPHWU D HV XVHG LQ WKH FKDQQHO HRPHWU D LV Q...

Page 704: ...channel axes may also be defined which are not assigned to any machine axis As a result gaps can occur in the numbering sequence of the channel axes Any channel axis gaps must be explicitly enabled MD11640 MN_ENABLE_CHAN_AX_GAP 1 Without being enabled a value of 0 in machine data MD20070 MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED ends the assignment of possibly existing additional machine axes to channel axes Referenc...

Page 705: ...is that is not on the NCU from which it is traversed The identifier of a local machine axis is not entered in the machine data for the logical machine axis image of the traversing NCU but the NCU and machine axis identifier of the NCU to which it is physically connected As an example machine axis AX1 of NCU2 should be traversed from NCU1 NCU1 MD10002 MN_AXCONF_LOGIC_MACHAX_TAB n NC2_AX1 Preconditi...

Page 706: ...ece zero W The workpiece zero W defines the workpiece coordinate system in relation to the machine zero M The programmed part program blocks are executed in the workpiece coordinate system WCS Reference point R The position of the reference point R is defined by cam switches Reference point R calibrates the position measuring system With incremental encoders the reference point must be approached ...

Page 707: ...K2 Axis Types Coordinate Systems Frames 10 3 Zeros and reference points Basic Functions Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 707 Example Zeros and reference points on a turning machine 7 0 5 ...

Page 708: ...must be approached each time the control is activated so that the control can transfer all position values to the coordinate system Figure 10 7 Position of coordinate systems by machine zero M and workpiece zero W Figure 10 8 Position of reference point in relation to machine zero 0 0 0DFKLQH FRRUGLQDWH V VWHP 0 6 0DFKLQH HUR 6SLQGOH RUNSLHFH OHQJWK RUNSLHFH FRRUGLQDWH V VWHP 6 RUNSLHFH HUR 0DFKLQ...

Page 709: ...ctions of the coordainate axes are determined using the Right Hand Rule The coordinate system is related to the workpiece and programming takes place independently of whether the tool or the workpiece is being traversed When programming it is always assumed that the tool traverses relative to the coordinate system of the workpiece which is intended to be stationary Figure 10 9 Right hand rule Figu...

Page 710: ...ation and the FRAMES A kinematic transformation is used to derive the BCS from the MCS If no kinematic transformation is active the BCS is the same as the MCS The basic frame maps the BCS onto the BKS An activated adjustable FRAME G54 G599 ENS is derived from the BNS The WCS which is the basis for programming is defined by the programmable FRAME MCS Machine Coordinat System BCS Basic Coordinate Sy...

Page 711: ...IIVHW UDPH FKDLQ 6 6 6HWWDEOH HUR 6 VWHP 6 DVLF HUR 6 VWHP 6 RUNSLHFH RRUGLQDWH 6 VWHP 6 DVLF RRUGLQDWH 6 VWHP 0 6 0DFKLQH RRUGLQDWH 6 VWHP KDLQHG V VWHP IUDPHV IRU 3 527 35 6 7 VFUDWFKLQJ HUR RIIVHW H WHUQDO KDLQHG ILHOG RI EDVLF IUDPHV FKDQQHO VSHF DQG RU 1 8 JOREDO WR VHWWDEOH IUDPH FKDQQHO VSHF RU 1 8 JOREDO 6 VWHP IUDPH IRU 72527 72 5 0 ZRUNSLHFHV 6 6 6 6 6 0 6 DQGZKHHO 5 RIIVHW VXSHULPSRVHG ...

Page 712: ...9 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 10 4 2 Machine coordinate system MCS Machine coordinate system MCS The machine coordinate system MCS is made up of all physically available machine axes Figure 10 12 MCS with machine axes X Y Z B C 5 axis milling machine Figure 10 13 MCS with machine axes X Z turning machine 0 ...

Page 713: ...ystem BCS consists of three mutually perpendicular axes geometry axes as well as other special axes which are not interrelated geometrically Machine tools without kinematic transformation BCS and MKS always coincide when the BCS can be mapped onto the MCS withouth kinematic transformation e g TRANSMIT face transformation 5 axis transformation and up to three machine axes On such machines machine a...

Page 714: ...the MCS and BCS Machine kinematics The workpiece is always programmed in a two or three dimensional right angled coordinate system WCS However such workpieces are being programmed ever more frequently on machine tools with rotary axes or linear axes not perpendicular to one another Kinematic transformation is used to represent coordinates programmed in the workpiece coordinate system rectangular i...

Page 715: ...fset external between BCS and BZS Setting the offset values The offset values are set PLC By describing system variables Via the operator panel From menu Current zero offsets NC Program By assigning to system variable AA_ETRANS axis Activation of the offset values The 0 1 edge of the following PLC signal activates the previously defined offset values DB31 DBX3 0 accept external zero offset The 0 1...

Page 716: ...cremental zero offset for geometry and additional axes in the basic coordinate system through handwheel The DRF offset can be read via the axis specific system variable AC_DRF Axis References FB2 Function Manual of Extension Functions Jog with without Handwheel H1 Section DRF offset Overlaid movements The Superimposed motion for the programmed axis can only be accessed from synchronized actions vi...

Page 717: ... Bit 1 1 The external zero offset in the active system frame is deleted in the data management through the following machine data setting MD24006 MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK Bit 1 0 The following frames are active after RESET System frame for MD24006 MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK Bit 4 1 workpiece reference point MD24006 MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK Bit 5 1 cycles Suppression The NC program instruction SUPA suppres...

Page 718: ...ns 718 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 10 4 5 Basic zero system BZS Basic zero system BZS The basic zero system BZS is the basic coordinate system with a basic offset Figure 10 17 Basic offset between BCS and BZS DVLF FRRUGLQDWH V VWHP 6 DVLF HUR V VWHP 6 DVLF RIIVHW ...

Page 719: ...ure 10 18 Example of the use of the basic offset The following settings apply The user can change the basic offset from the part program by means of an operator action and from the PLC If the basic offset is to take effect immediately an ASUB can be started via the PLC using FC9 in order to execute the appropriate G code Note Recommendation to the machine manufacturer Use the 3rd basic offset onwa...

Page 720: ...value display in WCS or SZS The actual values of the axes in the machine coordinate system MCS or the WCS can be displayed on the HMI operator interface For displays in WCS the actual values can also be displayed in relation to the SZS The corresponding parameterization takes place through the machine data MD9424 MM_MA_COORDINATE_SYSTEM coordinate system for actual value display Value Significance...

Page 721: ...e coordinate system WCS Workpiece coordinate system WCS The workpiece coordinate system WCS is the programming basis Figure 10 20 Programmable FRAME between SZS and WCS Code excerpt Actual value display Axis X WCS Actual value display Axis X SZS N10 X100 100 100 N20 X0 0 0 N30 P_PFRAME CTRANS X 10 0 10 N40 X100 100 110 6HWWDEOH HUR V VWHP 6 6 RUNSLHFH FRRUGLQDWH V VWHP 6 3URJUDPPDEOH 5 0 ZLWK 3B3 ...

Page 722: ...el axes geometry special and machine axes Rotations ROT are only included in the calculation for geometry axes A channel specific frame is only active in the channel in which the frame is defined Example of the data structure of a channel specific frame Geometry axes X Y Z Special axes A Machine axes AX1 Global frame A global frame contains the frame values for all machine axes A global frame is a...

Page 723: ...ained in the frame is performed using a defined algorithm 10 5 2 Frame components 10 5 2 1 Translation Programming The program commands below are used to program the translation Axis TRANS FINE ROT MIRROR SCALE AX1 10 0 0 1 0 1 AX2 0 0 0 0 1 1 AX3 0 0 0 0 0 1 AX4 2 0 0 1 0 2 AX5 0 0 0 0 1 1 Command Comment P_UIFR 1 CTRANS x 10 y 10 P_UIFR 1 x tr 10 Frame components TRANS x 10 y 10 Prog frame only ...

Page 724: ...is achieved through component specification FI finex P_UIFR P_UIFRNUM x FI Fine offestting can be programmed only if MD18600 MN_FRAME_FINE_TRANS 1 if this is not the case then each assignment of a fine offset to a settable frame and to the basic frame with the alarm FRAME fine offset not possible A fine offset changed by the operator does not apply until after activation of the corresponding frame...

Page 725: ...ion about the coordinate axes is determined by means of a right hand rectangular coordinate system with axes X Y and Z If the rotary motion is in a clockwise direction when looking in the positive direction of the coordinate axis the direction of rotation is positive A B and C identify rotations whose axes are parallel to X Y and Z Rotations 5LJKW KDQG UHFWDQJXODU FRRUGLQDWH V VWHP ...

Page 726: ...d from the English Rotations with a RPY angle are carried out in the order Z Y X Data from RPY angles can only be unambiguously calculated back from the following value ranges For data outside the specified value ranges a modulo conversion is made referred to the value of the particular range limit Value Meaning 1 RPY notation 2 Euler angle R Roll rotation around X P Pitch rotation around Y Y Yaw ...

Page 727: ...the value of the particular range limit On writing and reading frame rotation components these limits should be observed so the same results are achieved on writing and reading or on repeated writing Programming The program commands below are used to program the rotation P_UIFR 1 CROT x 10 y 10 ROT x 10 y 10 P_UIFR 1 x rt 10 0 x 180 180 y 180 180 z 180 RPY example P_UIFR 1 crot x 10 y 90 z 40 retu...

Page 728: ...ME CROT x 10 CRPL 2 30 0 P_PFRAME CRPL 3 30 0 CMIRROR y CRPL Rotation in any plane rotary axis Axis around which the rotation is performed Type INT Value Meaning 0 Rotation in the active plane 1 Rotation around Z 2 Rotation around Y 3 Rotation around X angle of rotation Angle in degrees through which the rotation is performed Type REAL It is strongly recommended to observe the specified angular ra...

Page 729: ...729 10 5 2 4 Scaling Programming The program commands below are used to program the scaling P_UIFR 1 CSCALE x 1 y 1 SCALE x 1y 1 P_UIFR 1 x sc 1 10 5 2 5 Mirroring Programming The program commands below are used to program a mirroring P_UIFR 1 CMIRROR x 1 y 1 MIRROR x 1y 1 P_UIFR 1 x mi 1 6 F D O L Q J 0LUURULQJ ...

Page 730: ...E A spindle can only be assigned to one rotary axis at a time The CROT function can therefore not be programmed withSPI as only geometry axes are permitted forCROT The channel axis identifier or machine axis identifier of the axis belonging to the spindle is always output when decompiling frames even when axis identifiers have been programmed in the part program with SPI If the spindle is assigned...

Page 731: ...3 1 Overview The following frame types are available System frames see diagram Basic frames P_NCBFR n P_CHBFR n Adjustable frames P_UIFR n programmable frame P_PFRAME n Apart from the programmable frame all types have a frame in the data management data management frame and an active frame For a programmable frame there is only one active frame V Position vector in BCS V Position vector in WCS 0LU...

Page 732: ... IUDPHV 3 B6 78 7 UHVHW 7UDQVIRUPDWLRQ FKDQJH 2 FWLYH WRWDO IUDPH E FKDLQLQJ DOO DFWLYH IUDPHV LQ WKH VSHFLILHG VHTXHQFH 8VHU LQWHUIDFH DWD PDQDJHPHQW IUDPHV 6WDWLF PHPRU RI WKH 1 DVLF IUDPHV GMXVWDEOH IUDPHV FWLYDWLRQ RI GDWD PDQDJHPHQW IUDPHV E 3DUW SURJUDP FWLYH IUDPHV KDQQHO 3B 5 3B75 5 3B 3 5 3B722 5 3B 7 5 3B6 7 5 3B3 57 5 1 8 RGHU 1 1 3B8 5 3B8 5 Q 3B 5 Q 1 8 3B 5 3B1 5 3B1 5 Q 3B 7 5 0 3B5...

Page 733: ... immediately Activating system frames System frames are activated by programming the corresponding system function in the part program Operator control at SINUMERIK Operate Activating data management frames The behavior when activating data management frames can be set using the following machine data MD24050 MC_FRAME_SAA_MODE save and activate data management frames Note Modifying system frames o...

Page 734: ...and all basic frames can be configured NCU globally or channel specifically A combination of these is also possible with basic frames Global frames affect all channels on an NCU All channels have read and write access to the NCU Global frames only have axial frame components such as translations scales and mirrors of individual axes Each channel can read or modify global frames for any machine axi...

Page 735: ...ystem still includes the current settable frame The system frame for the zero offset external is only available if it has been configured otherwise the zero offset external is interpolated as a superimposed motion of the axis as it has been up to this point The current complete frame is calculated according to the formula below 6 3 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 0 6 0 6 5HIHUHQFH SRLQW RIIVHW DQGZKHHO 5 RIIVHW V...

Page 736: ... only be displaced linearly but also rotated mirrored compressed or expanded The position indicator for axis setpoints is done in WCS or in ENS The configuring is done via HMI machine data Always only one display coordinate system is active in the channel For this reason only one relative frame is provided which generates both the relative coordinate systems in the same ratio The HMI displays the ...

Page 737: ...gram BTSS and via synchronous actions The setting of a relative reference point via the operator panel is done via the general command interface for the workpiece and tool measuring The system frame P_RELFR for relative coordinate systems is calculated and activated as follows AC_MEAS_TYPE 14 PI services _N_SETUDT 6 7 An example for setting the relative axis positions is given in References FB2 Fu...

Page 738: ...he WCS is therefore modified by cycles A user who uses Stop to interrupt a cycle however does not wish to traverse in the cycle coordinate system but in the programmed WCS This is why the SZS is used for the display For reasons of compatibility the SZS is made configurable The following machine data can be used to set whether the ENS is with or without the programmable frame the transformation fra...

Page 739: ...also depends on the configuration 10 5 4 4 Manual traverse in the SZS coordinate system Previously geometry axes have been traversed manually in JOG mode in the WCS In addition there is also the option to carry out this manual operation in the SZS coordinate system The AC_JOG_COORD variable enables the user to switch between manual traversing in the WCS and SZS The user can now select if he wants ...

Page 740: ...able frame G153 Non modal suppression of the following frames System frame for cycles Programmable frame System frame for TOROT and TOFRAME workpieces Active settable frame All channel specific and NCU global basic frames System frames for PAROT PRESET scratching ext ZO SUPA Implicit preprocessing stop and non modal suppression of frames analog G153 and additional handwheel offsets DRF ext Zero of...

Page 741: ...UPPRESS_MODE Positions during frame suppression When the bit is set the position for the display or the variables is calculated without frame suppression so that no further jumps in the position occur Bit Significance 0 Positions for display BTSS are without frame suppression 1 Position variables are without frame suppression 6 3 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 0 6 0 6 LQHPDWLF WUDQVIRUPDWLRQ DQGZKHHO 5 RIIVHW VX...

Page 742: ...on of a G500 G54 to G599 instruction For NCU global frames the changed frame only becomes active in those channels of the NCU which execute a G500 G54 to G599 instruction The variable is used primarily for storing write operations from HMI or PLC These frame variables are saved by the data backup Current settable frame P_IFRAME The predefined frame variable P_IFRAME can be used to read and write t...

Page 743: ...tion of a G500 G54 G599instruction For NCU global frames the changed frame only becomes active in those channels of the NCU which execute a G500 G54 G599instruction The variable is used primarily for storing write operations to the basic frame on HMI or PLC The variable can also be read and written in the program P_UBFR is identical to P_CHBFR 0 One basic frame always exists in the channel by defa...

Page 744: ...lete basic frame is calculated again Programming global frames Global frames are programmed analogously as are channel specific frames i e global basic frames are programmed with P_NCBFR n and global settable frames with P_UIFR n Geometry axis channel axis and machine axis identifiers can be used as axis identifiers for frame program commands If there is no machine axis for the channel axis on the...

Page 745: ...et With SW 5 1 attempts to program a channel axis which is also a link axis is rejected with alarm 14092 Channel 1 block 2 axis 3 is wrong axis type An axis can be programmed only if it physically exists on the NCU 10 5 5 5 Complete basic frame P_ACTBFRAME The chained complete basic frame is determined by the variable The variable is read only P_ACTBFRAME corresponds to P_NCBFRAME 0 P_NCBFRAME n P...

Page 746: ...act out of an oblique hole MIRROR Mirrorings of a geometry axis were thus far up to SW P4 related to a defined reference axis only using the machine data MD10610 MN_MIRROR_REF_AX reference axis for the mirroring From the user s point of view this definition is hard to follow When mirroring the z axis the display showed that the x axis was mirrored and the y axis had been rotated about 180 degrees ...

Page 747: ...lations is retained G58 X Y Z A G59 is used to axially overwrite the additively programmed translations for the specified axes that were programmed with ATRANS G59 X Y Z A Example G58 and G59 can only be used if MD24000 MC_FRAME_ADD_COMPONENTS frame components for G58 G59 TRUE Otherwise Alarm 18311 Channel 1 block 2 frame instruction not permissible is output The function can also only be used in ...

Page 748: ...AM Only system frames required for system functions should be configured in the interests of memory space Per channel each system frame occupies approx 1 KB SRAM und approx 6 KB DRAM The system frame for PRESET and scratching and the system frame for cycles are the default Channel specific system frames are configured as bit codes in accordance with the table below Coarse or absolute translation F...

Page 749: ...r with a G500 G54 to G599 instruction Active system frames The active system frames are the frames which are active in the main run An appropriate current system frame exists for each current system frame in the data management Only with the activation of the data management frame are the values taken into account with regard to the preprocessing 5 1 Frame for cycles 6 0 Frame for selection and de...

Page 750: ...rns a zero frame if the system frame is not configured through MD28082 P_WPFRAME In the part program the variable P_WPFRAME can be used to read and write the current system frame for setting workpiece reference points The variable returns a zero frame if the system frame is not configured through MD28082 P_CYCFRAME In the part program the variable P_CYCFRAME can be used to read and write the curre...

Page 751: ...me component is changed The current complete frame is calculated according to the formula below For MD24030 MC_FRAME_ACS_SET 0 the frame is calculated as follows P_ACSFRAME P_PARTFRAME P_SETFRAME P_EXTFRAME P_ISO1FRAME P_ISO2FRAME P_ISO3FRAME P_ACTBFRAME P_IFRAME P_TOOLFRAME P_WPFRAME For MD24030 MC_FRAME_ACS_SET 1 the frame is calculated as follows P_ACSFRAME P_PARTFRAME P_SETFRAME P_EXTFRAME P_I...

Page 752: ...e new geometry axes The aspects described in the chapter Frames for selection and deselection of transformations are relevant to TRANSMIT TRACYL and TRAANG References FB1 Description of Functions Basic Machine Axes Coordinate System Frames K2 Chapter Frame for selection and deselection of transformations MD10602 MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE 2 The current complete frame is calculated again when the g...

Page 753: ...current settable frame is to be retained MD10602 MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE 1 Several channel axes can become geometry axes on a transformation change Example Channel axes 4 5 and 6 become the geometry axes of a 5 axis transformation The geometry axes are thus all substituted before the transformation The current frames are changed when the transformation is activated The axial frame components of...

Page 754: ..._CHBFRAME 0 ctrans x 1 y 2 z 3 a 4 b 5 c 6 P_IFRAME ctrans x 1 y 2 z 3 a 4 b 5 c 6 crot z 45 P_PFRAME ctrans x 1 y 2 z 3 a 4 b 5 c 6 crot x 10 y 20 z 30 TRAORI Geo axis 4 5 6 sets transformer P_NCBFRAME 0 ctrans x 4 y 5 z 6 cax 1 cay 2 caz 3 P_ACTBFRAME ctrans x 8 y 10 z 12 cax 2 cay 4 caz 6 P_PFRAME ctrans x 4 y 5 z 6 cax 1 cay 2 caz 3 crot x 10 y 20 z 30 P_IFRAME ctrans x 4 y 5 z 6 cax 1 cay 2 c...

Page 755: ...electing transformations the contour frame is connected to the axial frames With transformations TRANSMIT TRACYL and TRAANG the virtual geometry axis is subject to special treatment TRANSMIT Transmit expansions The machine data below can be used to take the axial complete frame of the TRANSMIT rotary axis i e the translation fine offset mirroring and scaling into account in the transformation MD24...

Page 756: ...geometry axes accept their axial components when the transformation is selected Translations When selecting TRANSMIT translations of the virtual axis are deleted Translations of the rotary axis can be taken into account in the transformation Rotations Rotation before the transformation is taken over Mirroring Mirroring of the virtual axis is deleted Mirroring of the rotary axis can be taken into a...

Page 757: ...nsformer MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 256 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 0 1 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 1 6 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 2 3 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 3 0 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 4 0 MA_ROT_IS_MODULO AX6 TRUE MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 0 1 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 1 6 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 2 3 MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 0 0 0 MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 1 0 0 MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 2 0 0 MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 0 0 MC_TRANSMIT_...

Page 758: ...3 c 4 N830 P_UIFR 1 P_UIFR 1 crot x 10 y 20 z 30 N840 P_UIFR 1 P_UIFR 1 cmirror x c N850 N860 P_CHBFR 0 ctrans x 10 y 20 z 30 c 15 N870 Tool selection clamping compensation plane selection N890 T2 D1 G54 G17 G90 F5000 G64 SOFT N900 Approach start position N920 G0 X20 Z10 N930 N940 if P_BFRAME CTRANS X 10 Y 20 Z 30 C 15 N950 setal 61000 N960 endif N970 if P_BFRAME P_CHBFR 0 N980 setal 61000 N990 en...

Page 759: ...al 61000 N1200 endif N1240 if P_ACTFRAME CTRANS X 11 Y 0 Z 22 CAZ 33 C 19 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X C N1250 setal 61001 N1260 endif N1270 N1280 N1290 P_UIFR 1 x tr 11 N1300 P_UIFR 1 y tr 14 N1310 N1320 g54 N1330 Set frame N1350 ROT RPL 45 N1360 ATRANS X 2 Y10 N1370 Four edge roughing N1390 G1 X10 Y 10 G41 OFFN 1 allowance 1 mm N1400 X 10 N1410 Y10 N1420 X10 N1430 Y 10 N1440 Tool change N1460 G...

Page 760: ...ndif N1730 if P_ACTFRAME TRANS X 21 Y 0 Z 22 CAZ 33 C 19 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X C N1740 setal 61001 N1750 endif N1760 N1770 TRAFOOF N1780 N1790 if P_BFRAME CTRANS X 10 Y 20 Z 30 C 15 N1800 setal 61000 N1810 endif N1820 if P_BFRAME P_CHBFR 0 N1830 setal 61000 N1840 endif N1850 if P_IFRAME TRANS X 11 Y 2 Z 3 C 4 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X C N1860 setal 61000 N1870 endif N1880 if P_IFRAME P...

Page 761: ... 1 N2040 TRANS x10 y20 z30 N2041 ATRANS y200 N2050 G0 X20 Y0 Z10 N2051 if P_IFRAME CTRANS X 1 Y 0 Z 3 CAY 2 N2052 setal 61000 N2053 endif N2054 if P_ACTFRAME CTRANS X 11 Y 20 Z 33 CAY 2 CFINE Y 200 N2055 setal 61002 N2056 endif N2060 TRAFOOF N2061 if P_IFRAME P_UIFR 1 N2062 setal 61000 N2063 endif N2064 if P_ACTFRAME CTRANS X 11 Y 2 Z 33 CFINE Y 0 N2065 setal 61002 N2066 endif LDPHWHU G ...

Page 762: ...nsions The expansions described below are only valid for the following machine data settings MD10602 MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE 1 MD10602 MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE 2 The selection of transformation TRACYL produces a virtual geometry axis on the peripheral surface coupled via the rotary axis which is only taken into account in the contour frame but does not have a reference to an axial frame All c...

Page 763: ...E_FRAMES 3 from 0 to 8 MN_NCBFRAME_RESET_MASK HFF MC_CHBFRAME_RESET_MASK HFF MN_MIRROR_REF_AX 0 No scaling when mirroring MN_MIRROR_TOGGLE 0 MN_MM_FRAME_FINE_TRANS 1 Fine offset MC_FRAME_ADD_COMPONENTS TRUE G58 G59 is possible TRACYL with groove side offset is 3rd transformer MC_TRAFO_TYPE_3 513 TRACYL MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_3 0 1 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_3 1 5 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_3 2 3 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_3 3 2 MC_T...

Page 764: ...y0 z 10 b0 G90 F50000 T1 D1 G19 G641 ADIS 1 ADISPOS 5 N600 N610 if P_BFRAME CTRANS X 10 Y 20 Z 30 B 15 N620 setal 61000 N630 endif N640 if P_BFRAME P_CHBFR 0 N650 setal 61000 N660 endif N670 if P_IFRAME TRANS X 1 Y 2 Z 3 B 4 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X B N680 setal 61000 N690 endif N700 if P_IFRAME P_UIFR 1 N710 setal 61000 N720 endif N730 if P_ACTFRAME TRANS X 11 Y 22 Z 33 B 19 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z...

Page 765: ...0 P_UIFR 1 x tr 11 N970 P_UIFR 1 y tr 14 N980 N990 g54 N1000 N1010 if P_BFRAME CTRANS X 10 Y 0 Z 30 CAY 20 B 15 N1020 setal 61000 N1030 endif N1040 if P_BFRAME P_CHBFR 0 N1050 setal 61000 N1060 endif N1070 if P_IFRAME TRANS X 11 Y 0 Z 3 CAY 2 B 4 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X B N1080 setal 61000 N1090 endif N1100 if P_IFRAME P_UIFR 1 N1110 setal 61000 N1120 endif N1130 if P_ACTFRAME TRANS X 21 Y 0...

Page 766: ...EOAX_CHANGE_MODE 2 Translations When selecting TRAANG translations of the virtual axis are deleted Rotations Rotation before the transformation is taken over N1250 endif N1260 if P_IFRAME TRANS X 11 Y 2 Z 3 B 4 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X B N1270 setal 61000 N1280 endif N1290 if P_IFRAME P_UIFR 1 N1300 setal 61000 N1310 endif N1320 if P_ACTFRAME TRANS X 21 Y 22 Z 33 B 19 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIR...

Page 767: ...K H4041 Basic frame is not deselected after RESET MC_RESET_MODE_MASK H41 Basic frame is deselected after RESET MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 7 2 G54 is the default setting MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 7 1 G500 is the default setting MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES 0 MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES 3 MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES 10 from 5 to 100 MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES 3 from 0 to 8 MN_NCBFRAME_RESET_MASK HFF MC_CHBFRAME_RESET_...

Page 768: ...AANG is 2nd transformer MC_TRAFO_TYPE_2 1024 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 0 4 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 1 3 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 2 0 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 3 0 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 4 0 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 0 4 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 1 0 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 2 3 MC_TRAANG_ANGLE_2 85 MC_TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_2 0 2 MC_TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_2 0 2 MC_TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_2 0 0 0 MC_TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_2 1 0 ...

Page 769: ... setal 61000 N1020 endif N1030 if P_IFRAME P_UIFR 1 N1040 setal 61000 N1050 endif N1060 if P_ACTFRAME TRANS X 11 Y 22 Z 33 B 44 C 20 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X C N1070 setal 61000 N1080 endif N1090 N1100 TRAANG 1 N1110 N1120 if P_BFRAME CTRANS X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CAX 10 B 40 C 15 N1130 setal 61000 N1140 endif N1150 if P_BFRAME P_CHBFR 0 N1160 setal 61000 N1170 endif N1180 if P_IFRAME CTRANS X 1 Y 2 ...

Page 770: ...N1400 X 10 N1410 Y10 N1420 X10 N1430 Y 10 N1440 Tool change N1460 G0 Z20 G40 OFFN 0 N1470 T3 D1 X15 Y 15 N1480 Z10 G41 N1490 Four edge finishing N1510 G1 X10 Y 10 N1520 X 10 N1530 Y10 N1540 X10 N1550 Y 10 N1560 Deselect frame N1580 Z20 G40 N1590 TRANS N1600 N1610 if P_BFRAME CTRANS X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CAX 10 B 40 C 15 N1620 setal 61000 N1630 endif N1640 if P_BFRAME P_CHBFR 0 N1650 setal 61000 N1660 end...

Page 771: ...switch on the automatic adaptation of active frames thus preventing alarm 16440 MD24040 MC_FRAME_ADAPT_MODE Bitmask for adapting the active frames with reference to the axis constellation The following settings apply N1690 endif N1700 if P_IFRAME P_UIFR 1 N1710 setal 61000 N1720 endif N1730 if P_ACTFRAME TRANS X 21 Y 34 Z 33 CAX 11 B 44 C 20 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X CAX C N1740 setal 61001 N1...

Page 772: ...ata management frames Using axial machine data it is defined between which axes mapping is realized If frame mapping is e g active for machine axes AX1 and AX4 and the axial frame of axis AX1 is changed in a channel specific data management frame e g basic frame P_CHBFR x translation fine translation scaling mirroring then this frame data for AX1 and AX4 is transferred to all channel specific data...

Page 773: ... written for AXn or AXm The frame data are always accepted and taken for the other axis All parameterized mapping relationships are always evaluated When writing an axial frame of axes AXn all mapping relationships are evaluated and the frame data accepted for all directly and indirectly involved axes The mapping is global across all channels When writing an axial frame of axis AXn or AXm for a ch...

Page 774: ...E AX4 AX7 Mapping relationship to itself with AX1 as channel axis of channels 1 2 and 3 AX1 K1 K2 K3 MAPPED_FRAME AX1 AX1 Mapping relationship between two axes the channel axes in two channels are AX1 K1 K2 AX4 K3 K4 MAPPED_FRAME AX1 AX4 Chained mapping relationships where multiple channel axes can be written in the same channel AX4 K1 AX7 K2 AX8 K2 AX5 K1 MAPPED_FRAME AX4 AX7 MAPPED_FRAME AX7 AX8...

Page 775: ...he Channel active state The activation must then be explicitly programmed in each channel in the part program G500 G54 G599 Or the next time that the channel state changes it becomes active after Channel reset Example The following channels and channel axes are parameterized at a control Channel 1 Z Geometry axis AX1 Machine axis of geometry axis Z Channel 2 Z Geometry axis AX4 Machine axis of geo...

Page 776: ...hould be used The new complete frame is a chain of the old complete frame and the calculated frame The new frame in the frame chain is therefore Target frame is nth channel basic frame P_CHBFRAME n Target frame is P_IFRAME N120 N220 Channel synchronization for consistent activation of new frame data N130 N230 Activating the new frame data N140 N240 Checking the zero point of the Z axis for 10 mm P...

Page 777: ...nt frame The SETFRAME is calculated accordingly by means of frame inversions DEF INT RETVAL DEF FRAME TMP TC_DP1 1 1 120 Type TC_DP2 1 1 20 0 TC_DP3 1 1 10 z length compensation vector TC_DP4 1 1 0 y TC_DP5 1 1 0 x TC_DP6 1 1 2 Radius T1 D1 g0 x0 y0 z0 f10000 G54 P_CHBFRAME 0 crot z 45 P_IFRAME x tr sin 45 P_IFRAME y tr sin 45 P_PFRAME z rt 45 Measure corner with four measuring points AC_MEAS_VALI...

Page 778: ...roach measuring point 4 g1 x 4 y1 Store measuring point 4 AC_MEAS_LATCH 3 1 Set position setpoint of the corner AA_MEAS_SETPOINT x 0 AA_MEAS_SETPOINT y 0 AA_MEAS_SETPOINT z 0 Define setpoint angle of intersection AC_MEAS_CORNER_SETANGLE 90 AC_MEAS_WP_SETANGLE 30 Measuring plane is G17 AC_MEAS_ACT_PLANE 0 Select tool AC_MEAS_T_NUMBER 1 AC_MEAS_D_NUMBER 1 Set measuring type on corner 1 AC_MEAS_TYPE ...

Page 779: ...n the frame chain This function is used to calculate and possible activate this frame INT ADDFRAME FRAME STRING if RETVAL 0 setal 61000 RETVAL endif if AC_MEAS_WP_ANGLE 30 setal 61000 AC_MEAS_WP_ANGLE endif if AC_MEAS_CORNER_ANGLE 90 setal 61000 AC_MEAS_CORNER_ANGLE endif Transform measured frame and write in accordance with P_SETFRAME in such a way that a complete frame is produced as a result of...

Page 780: ...agement frame then the frame is not operative until it is explicitly activated in the part program The function does not set any alarms but returns the error codes via the return value The cycle can react according to the error codes Parameter 1 Type FRAME Additively measured or calculated frame Parameter 2 Type STRING Strings for current frames P_CYCFRAME P_ISO4FRAME P_PFRAME P_WPFRAME P_TOOLFRAM...

Page 781: ...ffset can be specified through HMI and PLC via BTSS or programmed in the part program via the axis specific system variable AA_ETRANS Axis Value Activation The activation of the external zero offset takes place through the interface signal DB31 DBX3 0 accept external zero offset Behavior After the activation the respective specified axis specific amount of the external zero offset is traversed out...

Page 782: ... table The zero offset is entered in a system frame P_PARTFR In this case the translatory component of this frame is overwritten Other contents of this frame remain intact To be able to use this system frame the bit 2 must be set in the machine data MD28082 MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK Alternatively there is the option to enter this offset into the basic frame identified by machine data MD20184 MC_TOCA...

Page 783: ...fixed relative to the zero point of the workpiece the orientation remains unchanged in space If the coordinate system needs to be fixed relative to the workpiece i e not only offset relative to the original position but also rotated according to the rotation of the table then PAROT can be used to activate such a rotation in a similar manner to the situation with a rotary tool With PAROT the transl...

Page 784: ...the toolholder Language command PAROT is not rejected if no orientational toolholder is active However such a call then produces no frame changes Machining in direction of tool orientation Particularly on machines with tools that can be oriented traversing should take place in the tool direction typically when drilling without activating a frame e g using TOFRAME or TOROT on which one of the axes ...

Page 785: ...oint TCP is not affected by the change of orientation i e the path remains a straight line and its direction is determined by the tool orientation at the start of the block If MOVT is programmed linear or spline interpolation must be active G0 G1 ASPLINE BSPLINE CSPLINE Otherwise an alarm is produced If a spline interpolation is active the resultant path is generally not a straight line since the ...

Page 786: ...ate system Which axis is first and which second is then unambiguously defined for both programmed axes the definition corresponds to those found in the plane definition of G17 G18 G19 The angle programmed with the axis letter of an axis of the plane then specifies the axis around which the other axis of the plane must be rotated in order to move this into the line of intersection which the rotated...

Page 787: ...terfering It is often particularly practical to retain a zero offset with which the reference point in the workpiece is defined The language command TOROT is then also used This command overwrites only the rotation component in the programmed frame and leaves the remaining components unchanged The rotation defined with TOROT is the same as that defined with TOFRAME TOROT is like TOFRAME independen...

Page 788: ...changed If a rotating frame is already active before language command TOFRAME or TOROT is activated a request is often made that the newly defined frame should deviate as little as possible from the old frame This is the case for example if a frame definition needs to be modified slightly because the tool orientation cannot be set freely on account of Hirth toothed rotary axes The language command...

Page 789: ...he X direction i e a mean value is taken from the direction for 1 and the negative direction for 2 If one of the G codes TOFRAMEX TOFRAMEY TOROTX TOROTY is programmed in place of TOFRAME Z or TOROT Z the descriptions for adapting the axis directions perpendicular to the main direction are also valid for the cyclically exchanged axes The assignments in the table below are then valid Example N100 de...

Page 790: ...dy use all the basic frames PAROT TOROT and TOFRAME have previously changed the rotation component of the programmable frame In this case it is not possible to shut down PAROT or TOROT separately On RESET the programmable frame is deleted which means the after changing the operating mode to JOG the rotation component of PAROT and TOROT is no longer available The user must also have unrestricted ac...

Page 791: ...e G code group as PAROT and appears therefore in the G code display TOROT and TOFRAME The system frame for TOROT and TOFRAME is configured with bit 3 in machine data MD28082 MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK This system frame is located before the programmable frame in the frame chain The SZS coordinate system is located before the programmable frame TOROTOF TOROTOF is the switch off command for TOROT and T...

Page 792: ...90 TC_CARR17 1 0 Z components of 3rd offset vector N200 TC_CARR18 1 0 X components of 4th offset vector N210 TC_CARR19 1 0 Y component of 4th offset vector N220 TC_CARR20 1 15 Z components of 4th offset vector N230 TC_CARR21 1 A Reference for 1st axis N240 TC_CARR22 1 B Reference for 2nd axis N250 TC_CARR23 1 M Toolholder type N260 X0 Y0 Z0 A0 B45 F2000 N270 TCARR 1 X0 Y10 Z0 T1 TCOABS Selection o...

Page 793: ...end of the subprogram BIT0 1 With the end of the subprogram the adjustable frame G function and values active before the subprogram call are reactivated Basic frames P_CHBFR and P_NCBFR The behavior of the basic frame can be set using MD10617 MN_FRAME_SAVE_MASK BIT1 BIT1 0 If the active basic frame is changed by the subprogram the change remains effective even after the end of the subprogram BIT1 ...

Page 794: ... than zero Channel specific frames are saved in data block _N_CHANx_UFR In certain circumstances alarms could be triggered when reintroducing saved data if the frame affiliates be they NCU global or channel specific have been changed using machine data Data backup always takes place in accordance with the axis configuration set in the machine data not in accordance with the currently valid geometr...

Page 795: ...e data MD32074 MA_FRAME_OR_CORRPOS_NOTALLOWED Frame or HL correction is not permissible Frame Frame conditions after POWER ON Programmable frame Deleted Settable frames Are retained depending on MD24080 MC_USER_FRAME_POWERON_MASK Bit 0 1 MD20152 MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE 7 1 Complete basic frame Retained depending on MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK bit 0 and bit 14 Individual basic frames can be deleted with...

Page 796: ...ARR PAROT TOROT and TOFRAME depends on the G Code RESET setting The setting is made with machine data MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK definition of initial control settings after RESET TP End MD20152 MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE RESET response of G groups MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES RESET position of G groups Bit Significance 0 System frame for actual value setting and scratching is active after RESET 1 Syste...

Page 797: ..._VALUES 52 2 TOROT MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 52 3 TOFRAME MD20152 MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE 52 1 TOROT and TOFRAME system frames are retained as before the RESET MD20110 Significance Bit 0 1 and bit 14 0 Chained complete basic frame is deleted Bit 0 1 and bit 14 1 The complete basic frame is derived on the basis of MD24002 MC_CHBFRAME_RESET_MASK active channel specific basic frame after RESET and MD...

Page 798: ...em frames Retained depending on MD24006 MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK and MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES External zero offset Retained DRF offset Retained Bit Significance 0 System frame for actual value setting and scratching is deleted during RESET 1 System frame for zero offset external is deleted during RESET 2 Reserved for TCARR and PAROT see MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 3 Reserved for TOROT and TOF...

Page 799: ...e value they had before the block search In case of cascaded block searches the frames are set to the status of the previous block search SERUPRO The SERUPRO function is not supported 10 5 12 6 REPOS There is no special treatment for frames If a frame is modified in an ASUB it is retained in the program On repositioning with REPOS a modified frame is included provided the modification was activate...

Page 800: ...ive plane Settable frame G54 G57 Kinematic transformation Active tool offset To change between work coordinate system and machine coordinate system via the user interface To change the work coordinate system by operator action e g changing the settable frame or the tool offset 10 6 2 Use of workpiece related actual value system Requirements basic settings The settings described in the previous Sec...

Page 801: ...ction Manual Expansion Functions Kinematic Transformation M1 FB3 Function Manual Special Functions Axis Couplings and ESR M3 Section Coupled Motion Chapter Master Value Coupling FB3 Function Manual Special Functions Tangential Control T3 UDPH IRU F FOHV SURJUDPPDEOH IUDPH WUDQVIRUPDWLRQV RPH SRVLWLRQ RIIVHW UDPH FKDLQ 6 6 6HWWDEOH HUR 6 VWHP 6 DVLF HUR 6 VWHP 6 RUNSLHFH RRUGLQDWH 6 VWHP 6 DVLF RRU...

Page 802: ...ues for Active frame zero offsets Parameters operating area and Active tool length compensation Parameters operating area one of the following actions is used to activate these changes in the display Press the RESET key Reselect Zero offset by the part program Tool offset by the part program Reset Zero offset by overstoring Tool offset by overstoring Part program start MD9440 If the HMI machine da...

Page 803: ...re added to the MCS Kinematic transformation DRF offset zero offset external Active frame Active tool offset of the current tool Switchover by PLC The actual values can be displayed in the WCS SZS BZS or MCS via the PLC The PLC can define which coordinate system corresponds to the workpiece coordinate system on a machine On MMC power on the MCS is preset With the signal DB19 DBB0 7 MCS WCS switcho...

Page 804: ... milling machine with rotary table 1 Machine axis X1 Linear axis 2 Machine axis Y1 Linear axis 3 Machine axis Z1 Linear axis 4 Machine axis B1 Rotary table for turning for multiface machining 5 Machine axis W1 Rotary axis for tool magazine tool revolver 6 Machine axis C1 Spindle 1 Geometry axis X 1 channel 2 Geometry axis Y 1 channel 3 Geometry axis Z 1 channel 1 Special axis B 1 channel 2 Special...

Page 805: ...NAME_TAB 1 Y1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 2 Z1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 3 B1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 4 W1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 5 C1 MD20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB 0 1 MD20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB 1 2 MD20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB 2 3 MD20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB 0 X MD20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB 1 Y MD20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB 2 Z MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 0 1 M...

Page 806: ...AX_NAME_TAB 3 B MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 4 WZM MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 5 S1 MD30300 IS_ROT_AX 3 1 MD30300 IS_ROT_AX 4 1 MD30300 IS_ROT_AX 5 1 MD30310 ROT_IS_MODULO 3 1 MD30310 ROT_IS_MODULO 4 1 MD30310 ROT_IS_MODULO 5 1 MD30320 DISPLAY_IS_MODULO 3 1 MD30320 DISPLAY_IS_MODULO 4 1 MD20090 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND 1 MD35000 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX AX1 0 MD35000 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX AX2 0 ...

Page 807: ...X_NAME_TAB 4 MD10000 MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 5 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 MD18602 MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES 1 MD28081 MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES 1 Machine data for channel 1 Value Machine data for channel 1 Value MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 0 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 1 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 2 X Y Z MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 0 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 1 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 2 X Y Z MC_AXCONF_MACHAX...

Page 808: ...mation change Code excerpt Comment N100 P_NCBFR 0 CTRANS x 10 Activation of the NC global basic frame N130 P_NCBFRAME 0 CROT X 45 Activation of the NC global basic frame with rotation alarm 18310 since rotations of NC global frames are not permitted Code excerpt Comment N100 P_NCBFR 0 CTRANS x 10 The NCU global basic frame is also active in second channel N510 G500 X10 Activate basic frame N520 P_...

Page 809: ...d The most common application will be that the geometry axes do not change before and after the transformation and that the frames are to stay as they were before the transformation Machine data MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE 1 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 0 CAX MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 1 CAY MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 2 CAZ MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 3 A MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 4 B MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAM...

Page 810: ...z 30 TRAORI Geo axis 4 5 6 sets transformer P_NCBFRAME 0 ctrans x 4 y 5 z 6 cax 1 cay 2 caz 3 P_ACTBFRAME ctrans x 8 y 10 z 12 cax 2 cay 4 caz 6 P_PFRAME ctrans x 4 y 5 z 6 cax 1 cay 2 caz 3 crot x 10 y 20 z 30 P_IFRAME ctrans x 4 y 5 z 6 cax 1 cay 2 caz 3 crot z 45 TRAFOOF Geo axis 1 2 3 sets transformation deactivation P_NCBFRAME 0 ctrans x 1 y 2 z 3 a 4 b 5 c 6 P_CHBFRAME 0 ctrans x 1 y 2 z 3 a...

Page 811: ...value display 9440 ACTIVE_SEL_USER_DATA Active data frames are immediately operative after editing 9449 WRITE_TOA_LIMIT_MASK Applicability of MD9203 to edge data and location dependent offsets 9450 MM_WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT Limit value for wear fine 9451 MM_WRITE_ZOA_FINE_LIMIT Limit value for offset fine Number Identifier MN_ Description 10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB Machine axis name 10600 FRAME_AN...

Page 812: ...frame for pickup of the table offset 21015 INVOLUTE_RADIUS_DELTA End point monitoring for evolvents involutes 22532 GEOAX_CHANGE_M_CODE M code for replacement of geometry axes 22534 TRAFO_CHANGE_M_CODE M code for transformation change 24000 FRAME_ADD_COMPONENTS Frame components for G58 and G59 24002 CHBFRAME_RESET_MASK RESET response of channel specific basic frames 24004 CHBFRAME_POWERON_MASK Res...

Page 813: ...d PAROT Identifier Description AA_ETRANS axis External work offset AA_IBN axis Actual value in basic zero coordinate system BZS AA_IEN axis Actual value in settable zero point coordinate system SZS AA_OFF axis Overlaid motion for programmed axis AC_DRF axis Handwheel overlay of an axis AC_JOG_COORD Coordinate system for manual traversing P_ACSFRAME Active frame between BCS and SZS P_ACTBFRAME Acti...

Page 814: ...ctive system frame for ISO G51 Scale P_NCBFR n Global basic frame of the data management can be activated via G500 G54 G599 P_NCBFRAME n Current NCU basic frame 0 to 15 NCU basic frames can be set through MD18602 MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES P_NCBFRMASK Global basic frame mask P_PARTFR Data management frame for TCARR and PAROT P_PARTFRAME Active system frame for TCARR and PAROT with orientational too...

Page 815: ... 0 2 D function modification DB21 DBX62 0 2 T function 1 DB21 DBB118 119 DB2500 DBD2000 D function 2 DB21 DBB129 DB2500 DBD5000 Number of active function G group 1 8 bit int DB21 DBB208 DB3500 DBB0 Number of active function G group 2 8 bit int DB21 DBB209 DB3500 DBB1 Number of active function G group 29 8 bit int DB21 DBB236 DB3500 DBB28 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Accept zero off...

Page 816: ...K2 Axis Types Coordinate Systems Frames 10 9 Data lists Basic Functions 816 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 ...

Page 817: ...he emergency stop request to the NC is transmitted via the NC PLC interface on the PLC In response to an emergency stop command the NC decelerates all axes and spindles as quickly as possible with setpoint value 0 i e braking at the current limit of the drives In the case of an emergency stop all machine functions controlled by the PLC can be brought to a safe state that can be set by the machine ...

Page 818: ...human error etc Normal operation Stadard EN ISO 12000 2 In accordance with the basic safety requirement of the EC Machinery Directive regarding emergency stop machines must be equipped with an energency stop device Exceptions No emergency stop device is required on machines Where an emergency stop device would not reduce the risk either because the shutdown time would not be reduced or because the...

Page 819: ...In special cases Foot operated switches without protective covers Emergency stop button and control Actuation of the emergency stop button or a signal derived directly from the button must be routed to the controller PLC as a PLC input In the PLC user program this PLC input must be forwarded to the NC on the interface signal DB10 DBX56 1 Emergency stop Resetting of the emergency stop button or a s...

Page 820: ...ing ramp in event of errors The maximum braking ramp that can be achieved thereby is defned by the maximum brake current of the respective drive The maximum brake current is achieved by setting a setpoint 0 fast braking 2 Reset interface signal DB11 DBX6 3 Mode group ready 3 Set the interface signal DB10 DBX106 1 Emergency stop active 4 Alarm 3000 emergency off is shown 5 After the expiry of a par...

Page 821: ...influenced by the emergency stop sequence in the NC If individual outputs must assume a specific state in the case of emergency stop the machine manufacturer must transmit the desired state to the NC in the PLC user program via interface signals DB10 DBB4 7 Note The responsibility for interrupting the power supply rests with the machine manufacturer Note If the sequence in the NC is not to be exec...

Page 822: ... state is only reset if the interface signal DB10 DBX56 2 acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP is set followed by the interface signal DB11 DBX0 7 mode group reset Hence it can be noted that the interface signal DB10 DBX56 2 acknowledge emergency stop and the interface signal DB21 DBX7 7 Reset together are set at least for so long till the interface signal DB10 DBX106 1 emergency stop active is reset Figure...

Page 823: ...ion control active DB11 DBX6 3 Mode group ready the following interface signal is reset DB10 DBX106 1 Emergency stop active the alarm 3000 emergency off is deleted Part program processing is interrupted in all channels of the NC PLC and NCK I Os The PLC user program must switch the PLC and NCK I Os back to the state for operation of the machine POWER OFF ON supply off on The emergency stop state c...

Page 824: ...4 PULSE_SUPPRESSION_DELAY Time for pulse suppression Number Identifier MA_ Description 36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME Length of the braking ramp for error states 36620 SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME Cutout delay servo enable Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Emergency stop DB10 DBX56 1 DB2600 DBX0 1 Acknowledge Emergency Stop DB10 DBX56 2 DB2600 DBX0 2 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 82...

Page 825: ... the spindle in other words to longitudinal axis Z Figure 12 1 Position of the transverse axis in the machine coordinate system Properties Every geometry axis of a channel can be defined as a transverse axis A transverse axis is a linear axis for the following functions which can be permitted and activated at the same time or separately Programming and display in the diameter Reference axis for co...

Page 826: ...s In this way dimensional information can be taken directly from the technical drawing without conversion Programming and display in the diameter Reference axis for G96 G961 G962 Permissible axis type Geometry axis Linear channel axes Geometry axis Selection in the channel one m of 3 m of n one one of 3 Specific effect Machine data Channel MD20100 Axis MD30460 Channel MD20100 Programming DIAM chan...

Page 827: ...ffsets are entered programmed and displayed in radius format Programmed end positions are converted to radius values internally The absolute interpolation parameters e g I J K for circular interpolation G2 and G3 are converted to radius values internally Measurement results that were determined by touch trigger probe in the workpiece coordinate system are stored as diameter measurements Setpoints ...

Page 828: ...axis specific diameter programming is permitted An axis can be simultaneously defined in MD20100 and in MD30460 bit 2 For this the channel specific MD20100 has a higher priority than the axis specific MD30460 With MD20100 the function G96 G961 G962 is assigned to the transverse axis during power up MD20100 the channel specific diameter programming DIAMON DIAMOF DIAM90 DIAMCYCOF is assigned to the ...

Page 829: ...ram call prog event If G96 G961 G962 is the basic position after power up a transverse axis must be defined using MD20100 MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF otherwise the alarm message 10870 is output Reference axis for G96 G961 G962 retained MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK bit 18 1 for RESET or end of parts program MD20112 MC_START_MODE_MASK bit 18 1 for start of parts program A reference axis for G96 G961 G962 can a...

Page 830: ...ter programming ON DIAMOF Diameter programming OFF in other words radius programming ON DIAM90 Diameter or radius programming depending on the reference mode Diameter programming ON in connection with absolute dimensioning G90 Radius programming ON in connection with incremental dimensioning G91 DIAMCYCOF Radius programming for G90 and G91 ON for the HMI the last active G code of this group remain...

Page 831: ...n synchronized actions For axis replacement in synchronized actions a transverse axis takes the status of the axis specific diameter programming with it into the new channel if the following applies to the transverse axis with MD30460 bit2 1 axis specific diameter programming is permitted it is not subordinated to the channel specific diameter programming in the releasing channel The active dimens...

Page 832: ...f the measuring functions MEAS measuring with delete distance to go and MEAW measuring without delete distance to go P_EP Transverse axis AA_IW Transverse axis DIAM90 DIAM90A AX After activation of the reference mode dependent diameter programming the following data are always displayed in relation to diameter regardless of the operating mode G90 G91 Actual value Actual values read with reference ...

Page 833: ...of the specified increment is traversed Radius programming from MD20100 MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF and MD30460 MA_BASE_FUNCTION_MASK bit 2 is taken into account as follows depending on MD20360 MC_TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK Displaying position values in the diameter Position values of the transverse axis are always displayed as a diameter value if bit 0 1 is set by MD27100 MC_ABSBLOCK_FUNCTION_MASK MD20360 MC...

Page 834: ...ere is no conversion during a change of diameter to radius programming or vice versa Settable response of geometry axes for traveling with handwheel If the geometry axis is traveled as a transverse axis in the channel for handwheel traveling MD11346 MN_HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE 1 the response of the handwheel traveling can be changed via MD20624 MC_HANDWH_CHAN_STOP_COND bit15 Bit 15 0 Only the half pat...

Page 835: ...0 DIAM90 Dimensions X G90 AC in the diameter G91 IC in the radius N70 Y200 Y continuing axis specific modal diameter programming N75 G91 Y20 U DIC 40 Dimensions Y in the diameter U non modally IC in the diameter N80 X50 Y100 Dimensions X in the radius G91 Y in the diameter N85 G90 X100 U200 Dimensions X in the diameter U in the radius N90 DIAMCHANA Y Y accepts the channel status DIAM90 N95 G91 X10...

Page 836: ...xis with transverse axis function 20110 RESET_MODE_MASK Definition of control basic setting after power up and RESET part program end 20112 START_MODE_MASK Definition of the control basic settings for NC start 20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES n Reset G groups 20152 GCODE_RESET_MODE n G code basic setting at RESET end of parts program 20360 TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK Definition of tool parameters 20624 HANDWH...

Page 837: ...med by the basic program at the start of the PLC cycle OB1 This ensures for example that the signals from the NCK remain constant throughout a cycle Event driven signal exchange NCK PLC PLC functions that have to be executed as a function of the workpiece program are triggered by auxiliary functions in the workpiece program If a block with auxiliary functions is executed the type of auxiliary func...

Page 838: ... are acquired and conditioned by the basic program A defined bit field is used to transfer the message signals to the basic program where they are evaluated and if message events occur entered in the PLC s interrupt buffer by means of the ALARM S SQ functions If an HMI e g SINUMERIK Operate is being used the messages are transferred to the HMI and displayed PLC HMI data exchange In this type of da...

Page 839: ...emory submodule No No Bit memories 32768 32768 Timers 512 512 Counter 512 512 Clock memory 8 8 System functions SFB 0 5 32 52 54 75 0 5 32 52 54 75 SFC 0 7 11 15 17 24 28 34 36 44 46 47 49 52 54 59 64 69 72 74 81 101 0 7 11 15 17 24 28 34 36 44 46 47 49 52 54 59 64 69 72 74 81 101 Program data blocks OB 1 10 20 21 32 35 40 55 57 80 82 85 87 100 121 122 1 10 20 21 32 35 40 55 57 80 82 85 87 100 121...

Page 840: ...Communication Number of MPI connections 32 32 PROFIBUS Supported operating modes Master Slave Master Slave Number of PROFIBUS slaves max 125 max 125 Number of PROFIBUS slots per slave max 247 max 247 Max net data consistency over SFC 14 15 128 128 Interfaces P K bus for centralized I O none none PROFIBUS DP interface 1 1 Coexistent MPI DP interface 1 1 PROFINET interface none none Type of control ...

Page 841: ...14 126 127 0 7 11 15 17 24 28 34 36 44 46 47 49 52 55 59 64 74 81 84 101 103 105 109 112 114 126 127 Program data blocks OB 1 10 20 21 32 35 40 55 57 61 80 82 83 85 87 100 121 122 1 10 20 21 32 35 40 55 57 61 80 82 83 85 87 100 121 122 1 10 20 21 32 35 40 55 57 61 80 82 83 85 87 100 121 122 FB 0 2048 0 2048 0 2048 FC 0 2048 0 2048 0 2048 DB 1 2048 1 2048 1 2048 Max block length DB 64 KB 64 KB 64 K...

Page 842: ...28 PROFINET Number of PROFINET I O devices max 128 max 256 max 256 Number of CBA interconnection partners 32 32 32 Number of CBA interconnections non cyclic 96 127 127 Number of CBA interconnections cyclic 300 300 300 Released PN ports PN P1 PN P2 3 2 2 2 Max net data consistency across SFC 14 15 254 254 254 Interfaces P K bus for centralized I O none none none PROFIBUS DP interface 1 1 1 Coexiste...

Page 843: ...C can also access Furthermore information from SDB2000 is also conditioned CPI interface and transmitted to the NCK and the PLC basic program This is necessary in order to control drives and PROFIsafe modules on the PROFIBUS A memory area defined by the PLC is available for these data structures Its size is limited by the maximum number of slots This means that during loading SDBs with fewer slave...

Page 844: ...41 21xx MCI 2 Board 840Di PLC 317 2DP with IBC32 V 2 1 10 20 72 41 23xx PLC 319 HW of the 840Dsl PLC 319 3PN DP V 2 4 2 24 90 13 V 2 6 5 26 90 13 V 2 7 2 27 90 06 1 Firmware release Version of the SIMATIC CPU and specification of the SIMATIC hotfix from which the SINUMERIK PLC CPU is derived e g V 2 1 HF10 or V 2 7 HF2 2 The last two positions of the software version are used within SINUMERIK to a...

Page 845: ...ices Tool management Star delta switchover m n Safety Integrated Program diagnostics S Meaning Remark 0 RUN P The PLC program can be changed without activation of the password 1 RUN Only read access operations are possible using a programming device PG It is not possible to make changes to the PLC program until the password has been set 2 STOP Processing the PLC program is stopped and all PLC outp...

Page 846: ...served for FCs and FBs Data blocks DB 1 to DB 62 and DB 71 to DB 80 are reserved The number range 1000 to 1099 is also reserved in addition for DB The data blocks of channels axes spindles and tool management functions that are not activated may be assigned as desired by the user I O range The PLC has an I O address volume of 8192 bytes each for inputs and outputs The address ranges starting at 40...

Page 847: ...ect SINUMERIK components from the hardware catalog you must run the Toolbox setup program first Hardware expansions for STEP7 and Starter The current version of hardware expansions for STEP 7 can also be found under eSupport Example of current hardware allocations PLC to NCU Table 13 1 Hardware expansions NCU MLFB Comparable SIMATIC CPU MLFB included Selecting from STEP 7 hardware catalog SINUMERI...

Page 848: ...K must not be changed as process interrupts e g auxiliary functions of the NCK to PLC may in this case no longer function Slot 5 the integrated Ethernet CP 840D sl Slot 6 the integrated HMI 840D sl The integrated drive is linked on the internal PCI bus PROFIBUS protocol Currently this bus does not support I O access and SFCs are not supported for this bus If you are using a different NCU you can c...

Page 849: ...SINUMERIK 840D sl 13 4 Startup hardware configuration of the PLC CPUs Basic Functions Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 849 Figure 13 1 Hardware configuration on the SINUMERIK 840D sl and SINAMICS Properties dialog box ...

Page 850: ...essage frame type in the NC machine data may not tally at all with this setting In the context of an NC axis message frame type 106 means 2 encoders DSC Object 8 contains the ALM via which for example enables have to be activated by the PLC user program Object 7 contains the CU device 0 The manual for the NCU7x0 contains a further description of these objects Axis expansions with the NX10 and NX15...

Page 851: ...dress is assigned by default for the port X127 As such the PLC can be reached via this port from a STEP 7 project If needed the Ethernet address on the CP 840D can be changed to the Ethernet address of the port X120 or X130 Then a cable connection to the PG of this port is also necessary Connection of central I O devices The physical connection for a connection to an IM361 does not exist No centra...

Page 852: ...is the main basic program version 1 4 The concrete version of the basic program can be scanned for the object properties of the library or the program folder in the comment field General The OB source programs including standard parameterization interface symbols and data block templates for the handheld unit and M decoding functions are included in the SIMATIC project or SIMATIC library of the ba...

Page 853: ... program More complex communication functions with the NCK e g read write NC data tool management acknowledgments etc are activated and executed via blocks FCs and FBs of the basic program The machine program can be created in various STEP 7 creation languages e g AWL KOP FUP S7 HIGRAPH S7GRAPH SCL The complete machine program must be generated and compiled in the correct sequence This means that ...

Page 854: ...ntains an entry SINUMERIK arc which must be selected to create a series commissioning file After selection of the archive select the File Archive menu item The relevant series archive will then be generated If the project contains several programs the program path can be selected A series archive is set up for the selected program path All blocks contained in the program path are incorporated into...

Page 855: ...up FileName As String Option As Long Container As S7Container As Long Option parameter Return parameter value Use in script 0 Normal series IBN file with general reset Bit 0 1 Series IBN file without general reset When project contains SDBs this option is inoperative A general reset is then always executed Bit 1 1 Series IBN file with PLC restart 0 OK 1 Function unavailable call Magic function bef...

Page 856: ... in the user project then these should not be transferred with the blocks of the basic PLC program OB 1 OB 40 OB 82 OB 86 OB 100 FC 12 and DB 4 This may have been modified by the user and should not be overwritten The new basic program must be linked with the user program The following procedure must be taken into account 1 Generate the text or source file of all user blocks before copying the bas...

Page 857: ...riables selected in an older software version need not be reselected when the software is upgraded 13 5 8 I O modules FM CP modules Special packages for STEP 7 are generally required for more complex I O modules Some of these special packages include support blocks FCs FBs stored in a STEP7 library The blocks contain functions for operating the relevant module which are parameterized and called by...

Page 858: ...eset A system data block SDB 0 has been loaded with a modified MPI address This has caused an MPI bus conflict due to dual assignment of addresses Disconnect all MPI cables to other components Create the link Direct_PLC with the programmer Correct the MPI address 3 All four LEDs on the PLC flash DI disaster A system error has occurred in the PLC Measures The diagnostic buffer on the PLC must be re...

Page 859: ... an integrated PLC signals can be exchanged between the NCK and PLC directly via a dual port RAM Data exchange with the control panel Data exchange with the operator panel HMI OP usually takes place via the internal software based C bus Alternatively external HMI or OP systems can also be connected on Ethernet or the MPI bus In the event of connection to the Ethernet bus the integrated CP provides...

Page 860: ...c program interrupt driven and then transferred to the user interface at the start of OB 1 If the relevant NC block contains auxiliary functions that require that NCK processing is interrupted e g M06 for tool change the basic program stops the decoding of the NCK block initially for one PLC cycle The user can then use the read disable interface signal to halt the block execution until the tool ch...

Page 861: ...ntact from one bus segment to another The HMI is always the active partner client and the PLC is always the passive partner server Data transmitted or requested by the HMI are read from and written to the HMI PLC interface area by the PLC operating system timing cycle control point From the viewpoint of the PLC application the data are identical to I O signals Interface MCP PLC interface HHU PLC E...

Page 862: ...ine data no of channels axes etc The advantage of this approach is that the minimum amount of PLC RAM required for the current machine configuration is used 13 7 1 PLC NCK interface General The PLC NCK interface comprises a data interface on one side and a function interface on the other The data interface contains status and control signals auxiliary functions and G functions while the function i...

Page 863: ...RQ VHOHFWLRQ IRU WRRO PDJD LQH FNQRZOHGJPHQW IRU WRRO PDQDJHPHQW 3RVLWLRQLQJ D LV LQGH LQJ D LV 6WDUW FRQFXUUHQW D LV VSLQGOH 6WDUW 68 XQFWLRQ LQWHUIDFH DWD LQWHUIDFH 7RRO PDQDJHPHQW 7RRO PDQDJHPHQW RE IRU VSLQGOH DQG WXUUHW RE IRU ORDGLQJ XQORDGLQJ ORFDWLRQV LV VSLQGOH 6LJQDOV IURP D LV 6LJQDOV WR D LV LV VSLQGOH KDQQHO 6LJQDOV IURP FKDQQHO 6LJQDOV WR FKDQQHO KDQQHO 0RGH JURXS 0 6LJQDOV IURP 0 6L...

Page 864: ... can mean that data is not always consistent PLC NCK signals The group of signals from the PLC to NCK includes Signals for modifying the digital and analog I O signals of the NCK Keyswitch and emergency stop signals Figure 13 5 PLC NCK interface RQWURO RI GLJLWDO 1 RXWSXWV WH RQWURO RI GLJLWDO 1 LQSXWV RQ ERDUG LQSXWV RQ ERDUG RXWSXWV LV WDEOHV H VZLWFK HPHUJHQF 6723 FWXDO YDOXHV IRU GLJLWDO 1 LQS...

Page 865: ...e can be specified by the PLC The PLC can also transfer a signal or value to the NCK even if there is no hardware for this channel on the NCK side Outputs All signals or values to be output are also transferred to the PLC The NCK can also transfer signals or values to the PLC even if there is no hardware for this channel on the NCK side The values transferred by the NCK can be overwritten by the P...

Page 866: ...he associated interface bits set for the duration of one cycle For G functions only the groups selected via machine data are entered in the interface data block The S values are also entered together with the related M signals M03 M04 M05 in the spindle specific interface The axis specific feedrates are also entered in the appropriate axis specific interface When the tool management magazine manag...

Page 867: ... value M value S value An axial F value is entered via the M S F distributor of the basic program if it is transferred to the PLC during the NC machining process The M and S value are also entered via the M S F distributor of the basic program if one or both values require processing 3URJUDP FRQWURO 7UDYHUVH VLJQDOV 2 D HV WHV 3URJUDP FRQWURO IURP 0 3URJUDP FKDQQHO VWDWXV HR D HV VWDWXV 0 6 7 YDOX...

Page 868: ... into account by the HMI This group of signals includes for example display actual values in MCS or WCS key disable etc These are exchanged with the HMI via a separate interface data block DB19 WHV 1 6WDWXV VLJQDOV ULQGLQJ 7HFKQRORJ RQWURO VLJQDOV 5HVHUYH YDOXHV RI 0 6 DQG GLVWULEXWRUV RI EDVLF SURJUDP LV VSLQGOH GULYH 6WDWXV VLJQDOV 0 6 YDOXH 6WDWXV VLJQDOV 6HW JHDU VWHS LDO YDOXH 6WDWXV VLJQDOV ...

Page 869: ...tes and state transitions in a diagnostics status list Communication events and I O module diagnostics data for modules with diagnostic functions are also entered Diagnostics events which lead to a system stop are also entered with a time stamp in a diagnostic buffer circular buffer in the chronological order of their occurrence The events entered in the diagnostic buffer are automatically transmi...

Page 870: ...user Acknowledgment signals are therefore not required for this type of message An entry is made in the diagnostic status list for incoming and outgoing messages The HMI maintains an up to date log of existing operating messages using the identifiers operating message arrived and operating message gone Interrupt messages are used to display error states on the machine which will usually lead to th...

Page 871: ...xtendAlMsg FALSE the earlier process of the FC 10 with the DB 2 is active as bit field data block The known restrictions regarding the number of channels and axes are applicable On the other hand in case of ExtendAlMsg TRUE the extension of the FC 10 becomes active The DB 2 and DB 3 are created as usual The user must set or reset the bits in DB 2 The parameter setting via message and alarm and a p...

Page 872: ...asic program The value 0 is set by default for second decade The structuring of the DB 2 in UDT1002 can be recoginzed basic program In case of new alarm functions the UDT1002 must be assigned symbolically to the DB2 At the start of DB 2 there are bit fields for signals without alarm generation This is followed by an array of size 64 integer for additional info of the user area 0 Thereafter follow ...

Page 873: ... are connected to the CP 840D sl Ethernet bus see Figure below Where the connection of further keys and displays is required for customized operator panels an additional keyboard interface machine control panel without operating unit can be used For each keyboard interface 64 pushbuttons switches etc and 64 display elements can be connected via ribbon cable The signals sent from the MCP are copied...

Page 874: ... switch position of the MCP component e g DIP 192 DIP 17 MCP interface in the PLC The signals from the machine control panel are routed by default via the I O interface to the PLC area A distinction must be made between NC and machine specific signals NC specific key signals are distributed to the relevant mode group NCK axis and spindle specific interface by FC19 or FC24 FC25 FC26 depending on th...

Page 875: ...gram is modular in design i e it is structured according to NCK functions In the operating system a distinction is made between the following levels of execution Start up and synchronization OB 100 Cyclic mode OB 1 Process interrupt handling OB 40 Diagnostic interrupt module failure processing OB 82 OB 86 Each section of the basic program as illustrated in the figure below must be called by the us...

Page 876: ...e 13 12 Structure of the basic program 70B LU 70B7UDQV 3B35 0 3B 7 0 3B 0 3URFHVV LQWHUUXSW FOLF PDFKLQLQJ 6WDUW XS KDQQHO LV VSLQGOH X LOLDU IXQFWLRQV 8VHU SURJUDP 8VHU SURJUDP 8VHU SURJUDP JURXSV 70 352 VDIH X LO IXQFWLRQV FRQ HV VSLQGOHV 5HDG ZULWH YDU 3 VHUYLFHV 5HVWDUW UURU DQG VWDWXV PHVVDJHV 6WDU GHOWD 8 LVSOD FRQWURO 70 0 3 68 0 3 8 2 2 2 70 1 3 2 6DIHW ...

Page 877: ...ommences cyclic execution at the start of OB 1 Synchronization The PLC is synchronized with the HMI and NCK and CP during power up Sign of life After a correct initial start and the first complete OB1 cycle initial setting cycle the PLC and NCK continuously exchange sign of life signals If the sign of life from the NCK fails to materialize the PLC NCK interface is initialized and the signal NCK CP...

Page 878: ...e below The M S T H D and F values sent by the NCK are output together with the accompanying change signals to the CHANNEL DB interface via the auxiliary G functions see List Manual The function value and the extended address are transferred to the appropriate data word The accompanying modification signal is activated to 1 for one PLC cycle When the modification signal is reset the acknowledgment...

Page 879: ...nsmitted to the parameterized I O areas either directly to the PLC or indirectly via an internal procedure using the basic program User messages The acquisition and processing of the user error and operational messages is performed by an FC in the basic program 13 8 3 Time interrupt processing OB 35 The user must program OB 35 for time alarm processing The default time base setting of OB 35 is 100...

Page 880: ...r the failure will be displayed in the alarm messages as exact cause of error in a future HMI software version in the diagnostics No FC 125 FB 125 is necessary for this diagnostic display because the information is called directly from the HMI via the corresponding SZL functions of the PLC operating system via the communication channels to the PLC This saves the relatively large block in the PLC a...

Page 881: ...e signals sent by the PLC to the NCK are divided into control signals and tasks that are transferred by FCs to the NCK Control signals The control signals from the PLC to the NCK are frozen cyclic updating by the basic program is suspended Jobs from PLC to NCK The FCs and FBs which are used to pass jobs to the NCK must no longer be processed by the PLC user program as this could lead to incorrect ...

Page 882: ...ch are controlled by a trigger signal e g via parameter Req Start etc and which supply an execution acknowledgment as an output parameter e g via parameter Done NDR Error etc A variable compiled of other signals which produce the trigger for the function call should be set Start conditions may be reset only as a function of the states of parameters Done NDR and Error This control mechanism may be ...

Page 883: ... identifiers symbols point to address data which must be stored in a global DB To allow generation of this DB PC software is supplied with the basic program with which the required variables can be selected from a table which is also supplied The selected variables are first collected in a second project related list Command Generate DB creates a AWL file which must be linked to the program file f...

Page 884: ...hapter Block descriptions Page 925 13 8 8 Symbolic programming of user program with interface DB General The compiled UDT blocks from these two files are stored in the CPU program of the basic program A UDT is a data type defined by the user that can for example be assigned to a data block generated in the CPU Symbolic names of virtually all the interface signals are defined in these UDT blocks Th...

Page 885: ... of a STEP 7 editor command when the UDT block is opened UDT assignments UDT number Assignment to interface DB Significance UDT 2 DB 2 Interrupts Messages UDT 10 DB 10 NCK signals UDT 11 DB 11 Mode group signals UDT 19 DB 19 HMI signals UDT 21 DB 21 to DB 30 Channel signal UDT 31 DB 31 to DB 61 Axis spindle signals UDT 71 DB71 Tool management Load unload locations UDT 72 DB 72 Tool management Chan...

Page 886: ...re grouped for this purpose The signal list contains 16 groups with 16 bits each as decoded signals There is only one decoding list and one signal list i e this is a cross channel function The M functions are decoded Once they are entered in the decoding list then the associated bit in the signal list is set When the bit is set in the signal list the read in disable in the associated NCK channel i...

Page 887: ...art Structure of decoding list The source file for the decoding list MDECLIST AWL is supplied with the basic program DB 75 is created when the STL source is compiled There must be an entry in decoding list DB 75 for every group of M functions to be decoded A maximum of 16 groups can be created 16 bits are available in each group in the list of decoded signals The assignment between the M function ...

Page 888: ...or an M signal decoded in the list At the same time a read in disable is set in the channel in which the M function has been output Example Three groups of M commands are to be decoded in the following example M2 1 to M2 5 M3 12 to M3 23 M40 55 Assignment of groups Group Extended M address First M address in group Last M address in group 1 MSigGrp 1 MExtAdr MSigGrp 1 MFirstAdr MSigGrp 1 MLastAdr 2...

Page 889: ...program sets up DB76 signal list Example parameters Group Decoding list DB 75 Signal list Extended M address First M address in group Last M address in group DB 76 1 2 1 5 DBX 0 0 DBX 0 4 2 3 12 23 DBX 2 0 DBX 3 3 3 40 55 55 DBX 4 0 DATA_BLOCK DB 75 TITLE VERSION 0 0 STRUCT MSigGrp ARRAY 1 16 OF STRUCT MExtAdr INT MFirstAdr DINT MLastAdr DINT END_STRUCT END_STRUCT BEGIN MSigGrp 1 MExtAdr 2 MSigGrp...

Page 890: ...c machine data in the NCK The user can then process these machine data after the power up of the PLC OB 100 This enables for example user options machine expansion levels machine configurations etc to be implemented The interface for reading these data lies in the DB 20 However DB20 is set up by the basic program during power up only when user machine data are used i e sum of GP parameters UDInt U...

Page 891: ...ng user program the data in DB20 should be accessed in symbolic form wherever possible e g by means of a structure definition in the UDT Interrupts 400120 Delete DB 20 in PLC and restart Explanation DB length is not the same as the required DB length Response Interrupt display and PLC Stop To correct or avoid errors Delete DB 20 followed by RESET Continuation After cold restart MD14510 MN_USER_DAT...

Page 892: ... OB 100 CALL FB 1 DB 7 MCPNum 1 MCP1In P E0 0 MCP1Out P A0 0 MCP1StatSend P A8 0 MCP1StatRec P A12 0 MCP1BusAdr 6 MCP1Timeout S5T 700MS MCP1Cycl S5T 200MS NCCyclTimeout S5T 200MS NCRunupTimeout S5T 50S BP parameters to scan runtime l gp_par UDInt 4 l gp_par UDHex 2 l gp_par UDReal 1 DB 20 address data 0 0 123 2 0 456 4 0 789 6 0 1011 8 0 b 16 12 9 0 b 16 AC 10 0 1 234560e 02 TYPE UDT 20 STRUCT UDI...

Page 893: ...de in the symbol table to allow data access in symbolic form Access operations in user program list includes only symbolic read access Note ARRAY OF BOOL are always sent to even numbered addresses For this reason an array range of 0 to 15 must generally be selected in the UDT definition or all Boolean variables specified individually Symbol Operand Data type UData DB 20 UDT 20 L UData UDInt 0 L UD...

Page 894: ...ponents Activation Each component is activated either via the number of machine control panels MCPNum parameter or in the case of the handheld unit via the HHU parameter The MCP and HHU connection settings are entered in FB1 parameters MCPMPI MCPBusType or BHG BHGMPI Handheld unit HT2 In the handheld unit the addressing is done via a parameter of the GD parameter set This was necessary for reasons...

Page 895: ...name is defined via switches on the MCP or terminal box Figure 13 16 840D sl Ethernet connection Relevant parameters FB 1 MCP HHU MCPNum 1 or 2 number of MCPs HHU 5 via CP 840D sl MCP1In MCP2In BHGIn MCP1Out MCP2Out BHGOut MCP1StatSend MCP2StatSend BHGStatSend MCP1StatRec n r MCP2StatRec n r BHGStatRec MCP1BusAdr MCP2BusAdr BHGInLen n r MCP1Timeout n r MCP2Timeout n r BHGOutLen n r MCP1Cycl n r MC...

Page 896: ...ddress and Op1 2KeyStop can also be modified in the cyclic operation by writing the FB 1 Instance DB DB 7 The transport of the user data of the direct control keys runs in the same way as in the case of Ethernet MCP The data transport can also be stopped and restarted via writing the DB 7 parameter Op1 2KeyStop During the Stop phase the address of the direct control key module TCU index or the MCP...

Page 897: ...e parameter IdentMcpBusType currently has no significance for a user program and is to be left in its default value After resetting the Strobe signal by the basic program valid output information becomes available to the user The resetting of the Strobe signals by the basic program can last for several PLC cycles up to 2 seconds The output parameters should show the user the size of the data areas...

Page 898: ...low are used for further parameterization There is no PROFIBUS variant of the HHU For this reason an Ethernet connection is shown for the HHU in this figure The Profibus slave address must be stored in the parameter MCP1BusAdr and MCP2BusAdr Enter the pointer to the configured diagnostic address e g P A8190 0 in MCPxStatRec IdentMcpStrobe IdentMcpBusProfilNo Value MCP BHG HT8 HT2 B 16 0 Direct con...

Page 899: ...12 If the PLC does not switch to the stop state following the failure of or a fault on the MCP an alarm message will be generated via the basic program The interrupt is deleted when the station recovers Relevant parameters FB 1 MCP HHU MCPNum 1 or 2 number of MCPs HHU 5 via CP 840D sl MCP1In MCP2In BHGIn MCP1Out MCP2Out BHGOut MCP1StatSend n r MCP2StatSend n r BHGStatSend MCP1StatRec MCP2StatRec B...

Page 900: ... connection is shown for the HHU in this diagram The PROFIBUS slave address must be stored in the MCP1BusAdr and MCP2BusAdr Enter the pointer to the configured diagnostic address e g P A8190 0 in MCPxStatRec Figure 13 18 840D sl PROFIBUS connection on the MPI DP port Relevant parameters FB1 MCP HHU MCPNum 1 or 2 number of MCPs HHU 5 via CP 840D sl MCP1In MCP2In BHGIn MCP1Out MCP2Out BHGOut MCP1Sta...

Page 901: ...arameterizing the MCP in HW Config the addresses should be placed in the input and output mapping area These start addresses must also be stored in the pointer parameters MCPxIn and MCPxOut of FB1 This is because signals are transferred between the MCP and basic program via these parameters The MCP is also monitored using parameter MCPxIn The is the reason that parameter MCPxBusAdr is not relevant...

Page 902: ...f the MCP the DB77 data area specified for MCP1 MCP2 or HHU can be used for the MCP pointer on FB1 The MCP slave bus address must be set correctly under MCPxBusAdr as this is used as the basis for monitoring A user program copy routine to copy the signals of the active MCP from the I O area configured in HW Config to DB77 This enables a number of MCPs on the PROFIBUS to be switched via signals Set...

Page 903: ...ent is taking place when the checkback is in DB 10 byte 104 relevant bits 0 1 2 are set to 1 Switching off the MCP IE flashing General behavior and general conditions After POWER ON the MCPs always flash and indicate the completion of the power up sequence and that the system is waiting for a connection to be established default setting of the MCP When establishing a connection to the MCP e g the ...

Page 904: ...Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions 904 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 Example Extract from OB100 based on the example for MCP1 CALL RUN_UP gp_par MCP1StatSend P A 8 0 deactivate MCP flashing SET R A 11 6 S A 11 7 ...

Page 905: ...BA0 905 13 9 SPL for Safety Integrated Rather than being a function of the basic program SPL is a user function The basic program makes a data block DB 18 available for Safety SPL signals and runs a data comparison to ensure the consistency of SPL program data in the NCK References FBSI Description of Functions Safety Integrated ...

Page 906: ...ificance FB 15 Basic program FB 1 FC 2 FC 3 FC 5 Basic program FC 0 29 Reserved for Siemens FB 0 29 Reserved for Siemens FC 30 999 1 Free for user assignment FB 30 999 1 Free for user assignment FC 1000 1023 Reserved for Siemens FB 1000 1023 Reserved for Siemens FC 1024 upper limit Free for user assignment FB 1024 upper limit Free for user assignment 1 The actual upper limit of the block number FB...

Page 907: ...7 Version identifier 18 Reserved for basic program 19 HMI interface 20 PLC machine data 21 30 CHANNEL 1 n Interface NC channels BP 31 61 AXIS 1 m Interfaces for axes spindles or free for user assignment BP 62 70 Free for user assignment 71 74 Tool management BP 75 76 M group decoding 77 Data block for MCP signals 78 80 Reserved for Siemens 81 999 1 see below ShopMill ManualTurn 1000 1099 Reserved ...

Page 908: ...nment overview Basic Functions 908 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 13 10 4 Assignment Timers Timer No Significance T 0 T 512 1 User area 1 The actual upper limit of the timer number DB depends on the PLC CPU on which the selected NCU is located ...

Page 909: ...Must be loaded 1006 DB 2 3 17 Are generated by the BP 632 OB 1 40 100 82 86 Must be loaded 398 Total 55698 PLC NCK PLC HMI interface DB 10 PLC NCK signals Must be loaded 262 DB 11 Signals PLC Mode group Is generated by BP 56 DB 19 PLC HMI signals Is generated by BP 434 DB 21 to DB 30 PLC channel signals Are generated by BP as a function of NC MD for each DB 416 DB 31 to DB 61 PLC axis or spindle s...

Page 910: ...D variables Load for PI services 76 DB p Read GUD variables One instance DB per FB 5 call 166 DB 15 General communication Global data block for communication 146 FB 7 PI services 2 Load for PI services 76 DB o PI services 2 One instance DB per FB4 call every 144 FC 21 Transfer Load with dual port RAM 164 m n FB 9 Switchover M to N Load with M to N 58 Safety Integrated FB 10 Safety relay Load with ...

Page 911: ...ing memory Minimum configuration 1 spindle 2 axes and T MCP see above Basic program base 54688 Interface DBs 1612 MCP 92 Total 56392 Block type no Function Remark Block size bytes Working memory Maximum configuration 2 channels 4 spindles 4 axes T MCP see above Basic program base 54688 see above Interface DBs 2768 see above MCP 92 see above Error operating messages 66 see above ASUBs 1 ASUB initia...

Page 912: ...ors and compilers for STL complete scope of the language incl SFB SFC calls LAD FBD Creation and editing of assignment lists symbol editor Data block editor Input and output of blocks ON OFF line Insertion of modifications and additions ON and OFF line Transfer of blocks from programming device to the PLC and vice versa Configuring Parameterizing tool HW Config for CPU and I O device parameterizat...

Page 913: ...diagnostics displays Hardcopy function Cross reference list Program overview Assignment plan I O M T Z D Archiving of utility routines Allocation of the output statuses of individual blocks Comparison of blocks Rewiring STEP 5 STEP 7 converter Option packages Programming in S7 HIGRAPH S7 GRAPH SCL These packages can be ordered from the SIMATIC sales department Additional packages for configuration...

Page 914: ...re them as an ASCII file AWL in the machine CPU program This process is shown in the figure NC VAR selector For storing the files created by NC VAR selector a catalog is to be implemented via the Windows Explorer with any catalog name The selected data of the NC VAR selector data VAR and data AWL files must be stored in this catalog Thereafter the AWL file is to be transferred and compiled via the...

Page 915: ...y means of the STEP 7 compiler the programmer is able to read or write NCK variables via the basic program function blocks PUT and GET using the STEP 7 file The list of selected variables is also stored as an ASCII file file extension var SINUMERIK 840D NC variables including machine and setting data ncv_NcData mdb Machine data for 611D drive ncv_611d mdb Machine data for 611D linear drive ncv_611...

Page 916: ... Variables or in the Variables Help file integrated in NC VAR selector 13 12 2 2 Description of functions Overview The figure below illustrates how the NC VAR selector is used within the STEP 7 environment Figure 13 21 Application of NC VAR selector in the STEP 7 environment The NC VAR selector is used to generate a list of selected variables from a list of variables and then to generate an awl fi...

Page 917: ...block must be included in the STEP 7 symbol table Basic display Basic menu After the NC VAR selector has been selected started the basic display with all input options upper menu bar appears on the screen All other displayed windows are placed within the general window Figure 13 22 Basic display with basic menu Project menu item All operator actions associated with the project file file of selecte...

Page 918: ...he appropriate project with extension var to be selected Figure 13 24 Selection window for existing projects If after selection of the project new variables are to be added a complete list of NC variables must be selected No complete list need be called if the user only wishes to delete variables from the project Storing a project The variable list is stored using the Project Save or Save As menu ...

Page 919: ...ge alias names Find variables These actions can also be canceled again under Edit Undoing actions Operator actions relating to the creation of the project file transfer variables delete variables change alias names can be undone in this menu NC variables menu item The basic list of all variables is saved in NC Var Selector path Data Swxy xy stands for software version no e g SW 5 3 xy 53 This list...

Page 920: ...tion required is requested Displaying subsets Double click on any table field with the exception of variable fields to display a window in which filter criteria can be preset Figure 13 26 Window with filter criteria for displaying list of variables There are three options Display all data Input area block and name incl combinations Display MD SE data number The following wildcards can also be used...

Page 921: ... case the user must ensure that the alias name is unambiguous Alias input can always be activated by the user in the Options menu An alias name can then be entered every time a variable is transferred It is also possible to edit alias names at a later point in time by double clicking on the S7 variable name field This action can also be undone under the Edit menu item Figure 13 27 Screen with comp...

Page 922: ...action can also be undone under the Edit menu item Storing a selected list Once variables have been selected they can be stored under a project name The files are stored on a project specific basis A window is displayed for the file to be stored The project path and name for the file must be selected in the window Note Deleting of variables results in a change of the absolute addresses of the poin...

Page 923: ...ect Settings Under this menu item the DB number and the symbol for this DB number for which the code is created is entered Under the Mass System tab a selection is made to determine how the unit system variables are calculated in the PLC Under the Generate tab the project creation is defined for the relevant target system Generate Under this menu item the STEP 7 file from the selected variable lis...

Page 924: ...to the call of STEP 7 Before transferring a new AWL file the file window of the AWL file is to be closed in the KOP FUP AWL Editor Option menu item The following can be selected under the Option menu item The current language The mode for alias input always 24 characters Help menu item The information below can be viewed by selecting the corresponding submenu item The Operator s Guide The Descript...

Page 925: ...pports cold starts A warm restart is not provided i e following system initialization the operating system runs organization block OB 100 and always commences cyclic execution at the start of OB 1 Users need only supply the FB 1 parameters that are relevant to their applications The preset values in the associated instance DB 7 do not need to be assigned The block can only be called in OB 100 Outp...

Page 926: ...l S5TIME S5T 200MS MCPMPI BOOL FALSE MCP1Stop BOOL FALSE MCP2Stop BOOL FALSE MCP1NotSend BOOL FALSE MCP2NotSend BOOL FALSE MCPSDB210 BOOL FALSE MCPCopyDB77 BOOL FALSE MCPBusType BYTE B 16 0 HHU INT 0 Handheld unit interface 0 No HHU 1 HHU on MPI 2 HHU on OPI BHGIn POINTER Transmit data of the HHU BHGOut POINTER Receive data of the HHU BHGStatSend POINTER Status DW for sending HHU BHGStatRec POINTE...

Page 927: ...OB 40 IRAuxfuE BOOL FALSE Evaluate DL function in OB 40 UserVersion POINTER Pointer to string variable indicated in version screen display OpKeyNum INT Op1KeyIn POINTER Op1KeyOut POINTER Op1KeyBusAdr INT Op2KeyIn POINTER Op2KeyOut POINTER Op2KeyBusAdr INT Op1KeyStop BOOL Op2KeyStop BOOL Op1KeyNotSend BOOL Op2KeyNotSend BOOL OpKeyBusType BYTE IdentMcpBusAdr INT IdentMcpProfilNo BYTE IdentMcpBusType...

Page 928: ...o A124 0 or M0 0 to M252 0 or DBn DBX0 0 to DBXm 0 Currently no significance MCP1StatRec MCP2StatRec I POINTER A0 0 to A124 0 or M0 0 to M252 0 or DBn DBX0 0 to DBXm 0 Currently no significance MCP1BusAdr MCP2BusAdr I INT 1 126 192 223 DP slave PROFIBUS address Ethernet MCP DIP Setting MCP1Timeout MCP2Timeout I S5time Recommendation 700 ms Cyclic sign of life monitoring for machine control panel M...

Page 929: ... 0 to M252 0 or DBn DBX0 0 to DBXm 0 Available owing to compatibility BHGStatRec I POINTER A0 0 to A124 0 or M0 0 to M252 0 or DBn DBX0 0 to DBXm 0 Available owing to compatibility BHGInLen I BYTE HHU default B 16 6 6 Byte Available owing to compatibility BHGOutLen I BYTE HHU default B 16 14 20 Byte Available owing to compatibility BHGTimeout I S5time Recommendation 700 ms Available owing to compa...

Page 930: ...program control etc TRUE Active HWheelMMC I BOOL TRUE Handwheel selection via HMI FALSE Handwheel selection via user program ExtendAlMsg I BOOL Activation extension of the FC10 see Section Structure and Functions of the basic program MsgUser I INT 0 32 Number of user areas for messages DB 2 UserIR I BOOL Local data expansion OB40 required for processing of signals from user IRAuxfuT I BOOL Evaluat...

Page 931: ...E b 16 55 b 16 55 Ethernet IdentMcpBusAdr I INT 1 254 only IE devices IdentMcpProfilNo I BYTE 0 1 Profile of a device 0 complete device 1 only direct control keys IdentMcpBusType I BYTE b 16 5 only IE devices IdentMcpStrobe I BOOL Activate query MaxBAG O INT 1 10 Number of mode groups MaxChan O INT 1 10 Number of channels MaxAxis O INT 1 31 Number of axes ActivChan O ARRAY 1 10 OF BOOL Bit string ...

Page 932: ...on is resumed automatically and the error message reset by the GP Call example for 840D sl An example call for the FB 1 in OB 100 appears below This example is part of the diskette with basic program for 840D sl ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 100 VAR_TEMP OB100_EV_CLASS BYTE OB100_STRTUP BYTE OB100_PRIORITY BYTE OB100_OB_NUMBR BYTE OB100_RESERVED_1 BYTE OB100_RESERVED_2 BYTE OB100_STOP WORD OB100_RESERVED_...

Page 933: ...Variable addressing For some NC variables it is necessary to select area no and or line or column from the NC VAR selector For these variables it is possible to select a basic type i e area column row is filled with 0 by default The contents of the area number line and column specified by the NC VAR selector are checked for a 0 in the FB If a 0 is present the value is transferred to the input para...

Page 934: ...r1 ANY Unit1 BYTE Column1 WORD Line1 WORD Addr2 ANY Unit2 BYTE Column2 WORD Line2 WORD Addr3 ANY Unit3 BYTE Column3 WORD Line3 WORD Addr4 ANY Unit4 BYTE Column4 WORD Line4 WORD Addr5 ANY Unit5 BYTE Column5 WORD Line5 WORD Addr6 ANY Unit6 BYTE Column6 WORD Line6 WORD Addr7 ANY Unit7 BYTE Column7 WORD Line7 WORD Addr8 ANY Unit8 BYTE Column8 WORD Line8 WORD END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Error BOOL NDR BOOL Stat...

Page 935: ...r I INT 1 8 corresponds to use of Addr1 to Addr8 Number of variables to be read Addr1 to Addr8 I ANY DBName VarName Variable identifiers from NC Var selector Unit1 to Unit8 I BYTE Area address optional for variable addressing Column1 to Column8 I WORD Column address optional for variable addressing Line1 to Line8 I WORD Line address optional for variable addressing Error A BOOL Negative acknowledg...

Page 936: ... try NC RESET 1 8 4 Insufficient local user memory available Read var is longer than specified in RD1 to RD8 in high byte number of var in which error occurred 0 5 Format conversion error Error on conversion of var type double Var is not within S7 REAL area 0 6 FIFO full Job must be repeated since queue is full 0 7 Option not set BP parameter NCKomm is not set 1 8 8 Incorrect target area RD RD1 to...

Page 937: ...20 AWL must be compiled and transferred to the PLC Parameterization of FB 2 with instance DB 110 1 Activation of function 2 Positive acknowledgment Receive new data 3 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 4 Signal change by means of FB 5 Not permissible 6 Negative acknowledgment Error has occurred error code in the output parameter State Area Block Name Typ e No Byte S7 Name C ...

Page 938: ...ob U I 7 6 Manual error acknowledgment U M 102 0 Error pending R M 100 0 Terminate job CALL FB 2 DB 110 Req M 100 0 NumVar 3 Read 3 variables Addr1 NCVAR C1AxConfMachAxUsed1 Addr2 NCVAR C1AxConfMachAxUsed2 Addr3 NCVAR C1SpindDefMasterSpind Error M102 0 NDR M100 1 State MW104 RD1 P DB99 DBX0 0 BYTE 1 RD2 P DB99 DBX1 0 BYTE 1 RD3 P M110 0 INT 1 DATA_BLOCK DB 120 VERSION 0 0 STRUCT C1_RP_rpa0_0 STRUC...

Page 939: ...cified in the target area for read data e g P M100 0 REAL 2 If the basic program recognizes REAL 2 as the target type when reading a double variable the data is applied to the PLC data area as a 64 bit floating point number Addr1 NCVAR C1_RP_rpa0_0 Line1 W 16 1 Addr2 NCVAR C1_RP_rpa0_0 Line2 W 16 2 Error M 1 0 NDR M 1 1 State MW 2 RD1 P M 4 0 REAL 1 RD2 P M 24 0 REAL 1 Classification of data types...

Page 940: ... it is necessary to select area no and or line or column in the NC VAR selector For these variables it is possible to select a basic type i e area column row is filled with 0 by default The contents of the area number line and column specified by the NC VAR selector are checked for a 0 in the FB If a 0 is present the value is transferred to the input parameter The user must supply the required par...

Page 941: ...up 2 C 2 N B A T Group 3 V H Note Especially when reading several long strings the number of usable variables can be less than 8 FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 3 VAR_INPUT Req BOOL NumVar INT Addr1 ANY Unit1 BYTE Column1 WORD Line1 WORD Addr2 ANY Unit2 BYTE Column2 WORD Line2 WORD Addr3 ANY Unit3 BYTE Column3 WORD Line3 WORD Addr4 ANY Unit4 BYTE Column4 WORD Line4 WORD Addr5 ANY Unit5 BYTE Column5 WORD Line5 W...

Page 942: ...rk Req I BOOL Job start with positive signal edge NumVar I INT 1 to 8 corresponds to use of Addr1 to Addr8 Number of variables to be written Addr1 to Addr8 I ANY DBName VarName Variable identifiers from NC Var selector Unit 1 to Unit 8 I BYTE Area address optional for variable addressing Column 1 to Column 8 I WORD Column address optional for variable addressing Line 1 to Line 8 I WORD Line addres...

Page 943: ...r in a job 0 3 Negative acknowledgment job not executable Internal error try Check job NC RESET 1 8 4 Data areas or data types do not match or string is empty Check data to be written in SD1 to SD8 in high byte number of the Var in which error occurred 0 6 FIFO full Job must be repeated since queue is full 0 7 Option not set BP parameter NCKomm is not set 1 8 8 Incorrect target area SD SD1 to SD8 ...

Page 944: ...ariables have been written 3 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 4 Signal change by means of FB 5 Not permissible 6 Negative acknowledgment Error has occurred error code in output parameter state Area Block Name Type Byte S7 Name C 1 RP rpa 5 DOUBLE 4 rpa_5C1RP C 1 RP rpa 11 DOUBLE 4 rpa_11C1RP C 1 RP rpa 14 DOUBLE 4 rpa_14C1RP Symbol Operand Data type NCVAR DB 120 DB 120 DAT...

Page 945: ...e 3 variables Addr1 NCVAR rpa_5C1RP Addr2 NCVAR rpa_11C1RP Addr3 NCVAR rpa_14C1RP Error M102 0 Done M100 1 State MW104 SD1 P DB99 DBX0 0 REAL 1 SD2 P DB99 DBX4 0 REAL 1 SD3 P M110 0 REAL 1 DATA_BLOCK DB 120 VERSION 0 0 STRUCT C1_RP_rpa0_0 STRUCT SYNTAX_ID BYTE B 16 82 area_and_unit BYTE B 16 41 column WORD W 16 1 line WORD W 16 0 block type BYTE B 16 15 NO OF LINES BYTE B 16 1 type BYTE B 16 F len...

Page 946: ...tive edge change at control input Req Successful execution of the job is displayed by means of a logical 1 in status parameter Done Any errors are indicated by Error and State The PI data block DB16 contains internal descriptions of the possible PI services A name must then be assigned to this DB in the signal list On calling the FB 4 DB Name PI Name is transferred as the actual parameter for PISe...

Page 947: ...State WORD END_VAR Signal Ty pe Type Range of values Remark Req I BOOL Job request PIService I ANY DBName VarName Standard is PI VarName PI service description1 Unit I INT 1 Area number Addr1 to Addr4 I ANY DBName VarName Reference to strings specification according to selected PI service WVar1 to WVar10 I WORD 1 INTEGER or WORD variables Specification according to selected PI service Error A BOOL...

Page 948: ...e 3 Negative acknowledgment job not executable Internal error try NC RESET 6 FIFO full Job must be repeated since queue is full 7 Option not set BP parameter NCKomm is not set 9 Transmission occupied Job must be repeated 13 0x0d ANY data reference incorrect String date required has not been parameterized 14 0x0e PIService parameter reference incorrect No valid PI description 15 0x0f String too lon...

Page 949: ...EACE Create tool cutting edge CREATO Generate tool DELECE Delete a tool cutting edge DELETO Delete tool MMCSEM Semaphores for various PI services TMCRTO Create tool TMFDPL Empty location search for loading TMFPBP Empty location search TMGETT T number for the specified tool identifier with duplo number TMMVTL Prepare magazine location for loading unload tool TMPOSM Position magazine location or too...

Page 950: ...anagement Program Memory PI service CANCEL Function Execute Cancel Has the effect that the function Cancel corresponding to the key on HMI is executed Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI ASUP Assign interrupt Unit INT 1 10 Channel WVar1 WORD 1 8 Interrupt number WVar2 WORD 1 8 Priority WVar3 WORD 0 1 LIFTFAST WVar4 WORD 0 1 BLSYNC Addr1 STRING Path name Addr2 STRING P...

Page 951: ... limit An FB 4 error checkback message is output if these conditions are not fulfilled state 3 PI service DIGION Function Digitizing on Selecting digitizing in the specified channel PI service DIGIOF Function Digitizing off Deactivating digitizing in the specified channel Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI CONFIG Reconfiguration Unit INT 1 WVar1 INT 1 Classification ...

Page 952: ...collision free approach path PI service LOGIN Function Create password Transfers the parameterized password to the NCK The passwords generally consist of 8 characters If required blanks must be added to the string of the password Example Password STRING 8 SUNRISE PI service LOGOUT Function Reset password The password last transferred to the NCK is reset Parameterization Signal Type Value range Mea...

Page 953: ...me and program name must be entered as described in the Programming Manual Job Planning File and Program Management Section Program Memory Please also refer to example of FB 4 for notation of path and program names Possible block types Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI NCRES Trigger NC RESET Unit INT 0 0 WVar1 WORD 0 0 Block types Workpiece directory WPD Main progra...

Page 954: ...n this case parameter D number number of cutting edge to be created has a value range of 00001 00009 If a positive T number is specified as a parameter and the tool for the T number entered does not exist then the PI service is aborted If a value of 00000 is entered as the T number model of absolute D numbers then the D number values can range from 00001 31999 The new cutting edge is set up with t...

Page 955: ...ontents is created for tool offsets in the TO block D1 with zero contents is also created for the OEM cutting edge data in the TUE block if one is present If a TU block exists it will contain the data set for the tool Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI CRCEDN Create new cutting edge Unit INT 1 10 TOA WVar1 INT T number of tool for which cutting edge must be created A...

Page 956: ... of absolute D numbers then the D number values can range from 00001 31999 If the specified cutting edge does not exist then the PI service is aborted in both cases PI service DELETO Function Delete tool Deletes the tool assigned to the transferred T number with all cutting edges in TO in some cases TU TUE and TG type 4xx TD and TS blocks Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ...

Page 957: ...kback value Done TRUE Semaphore has been set critical function can be called Checkback value Error TRUE with state 3 Semaphore was already set critical function cannot be called at the present time The operation must be repeated later Parameter WVar1 FunctionNumber This function number represents a PI service WVar2 SemaphorValue NOTICE On completion of the operation reading data of this PI service...

Page 958: ...ck under TnumWZV PI service TMFDPL Function Empty location search for loading dependent on parameter assignment Location_number_to 1 Magazine_number_to 1 Searches all magazines in the specified area channel for an empty location for the tool specified with a T number After execution of the PI the magazine and locations numbers found during the search are listed in the configuration block of the ch...

Page 959: ...eneral PI services PI service TMGETT Function Determine T number for the specified tool identifier with duplo number Determining the T number for a specified tool identifier with duplo number Whether a T number from the PI service was found is displayed in the variable resultNrOfTools in the TF block If the specified tool does not exist then the number 0 is returned If the number 1 is returned the...

Page 960: ...ing point buffer storage e g spindle 3 Relocation within a magazine 4 Relocation between different magazines 5 Relocation between magazine and buffer storage 6 Relocation within buffer storage The following variables from the TM block are used to monitor case 1 3 4 5 magCmd area no TO unit line magazine number magCmdState acknowledgment The following variables from the TMC block are used to monito...

Page 961: ...zine is traversed to the position for unloading and the tool is then removed The magazine location for the tool is marked as being free in the TP block The tool can be specified either using a T number or by means of the location and magazine numbers An unused specification has the value 1 PI service TMPOSM Function Position magazine location or tool dependent on parameter assignment A magazine lo...

Page 962: ...rrelevant i e values 0001 0001 PI service TMPCIT Function Set increment value for workpiece counter Incrementing the workpiece counter of the spindle tool Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI TMPOSM Position magazine location or tool Unit INT 1 10 TOA Addr1 STRING max 32 characters Tool identifier WVar1 INT T number WVar2 INT Duplo number WVar3 INT Location_number_from...

Page 963: ...to their setpoint initial values This only relates to tools with active monitoring Compare the NC Speech Command RESETMON Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI TMRASS Reset active status Unit INT 1 10 TO area Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI TRESMO Reset monitoring values Unit INT 1 10 TO area WVar1 WORD max max ToolNumber 0 Applies to a...

Page 964: ...ia which tool data is to be compared are highlighted comparison operator data parDataT filled with the corresponding comparison types to be executed and the comparison values are entered in the operand data The PI service is then initiated and after its successful return the variable service from the TF block is used to read out the number of hits in the variable resultNrOfTools and the result lis...

Page 965: ...tions in magazine M1 starting at magazine M1 and location P1 in this magazine are searched M1 P1 M2 1 Locations starting at magazine M1 and location P1 up to magazine M2 are searched M1 1 M2 P2 Locations starting at magazine M1 up to magazine M2 location P2 are searched M1 1 M2 1 Locations starting at magazine M1 up to and including magazine M2 are searched 1 1 1 1 All magazine locations are searc...

Page 966: ...ain 2 Backwards from the last location of the search domain 3 symmetric to the real magazine location which is before the location specified with Magazine Number_ID and Location Number_ID WVar8 INT 0 1 2 3 KindofSearch 0 Find all tool with this property cutting edge specifically 1 Search for the first tool found with this property cutting edge specifically 2 Browse all cutting edges to find all to...

Page 967: ...older location and if no tool offset with regard to this toolholder is active Positioning is programmed by programming WVar1 the toolholder whose multitool should be positioned and either With WVar2 tool number or With Addr1 and WVar3 tool identifier duplo number or With WVar4 multitool location number WVar3 INT 2 MD17504 MN_MAX_ TOOLS_PER_ MULTITOOL Number of locations in the multitool WVar4 INT ...

Page 968: ...ogrammed WVar1 INT 1 999 Number of the toolholder WVar2 INT 1 32000 Tool number T number of the tool to be positioned in the multitool 1 The tool number is irrelevant Addr1 and WVar3 must then be programmed WVar3 INT 1 32000 Duplo number of the tool to be positioned in the multitool 1 Duplo number is irrelevant then WVar2 must be programmed WVar4 INT 1 999 Multitool location number of the location...

Page 969: ...programmed location is free in one of them to accept the programmed tool WVar4 INT 1 999 Multitool location number of the location to which the system should be positioned 1 do not search for an empty location but search for an empty location within the multitool Parameterization Symbol Operand Data type PI DB 16 DB 16 STR DB 124 DB 124 DATA_BLOCK DB 126 Unassigned user DB as instance for FB 4 FB ...

Page 970: ...of block parameters When parameter CnvtToken is activated a variable pointer token can be generated for this GUD variable as an option This pointer is generated via the NC VAR selector for system variables of the NC Only this method of generating pointers is available for GUD variables Once a pointer has been generated for the GUD variable then it is possible to read and write via FB 2 and FB 3 GE...

Page 971: ...eading a double variable the data is applied to the PLC data area as a 64 bit floating point number FB 5 can only write GUD variables if basic program parameter NCKomm has been set to TRUE in OB 100 FB 1 DB 7 see FB 1 RUN_UP Basic program start up section Page 925 FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 5 Server name KNOW_HOW_PROTECT VERSION 3 0 VAR_INPUT Req BOOL Addr ANY Variables name string Area BYTE Area NCK 0 cha...

Page 972: ...nnel no Index1 I INT Field index 1 of variable Variable has the value 0 if no field index is used Index2 I INT Field index 2 of variable Variable has the value 0 if no field index is used CnvtToken I BOOL Activate generation of a 10 byte variable token VarToken I ANY DBName VarName Address to a 10 byte token see example Error O BOOL Negative acknowledgment of job or execution of job impossible Don...

Page 973: ...since queue is full 0 7 Option not set BP parameter NCKomm is not set 0 8 Incorrect target area SD RD may not be local data 0 9 Transmission occupied Job must be repeated 0 10 Error in addressing Unit contains value 0 0 11 Address of variable invalid Address check or variable name area unit 1 8 13 0x0d ANY data reference incorrect String NcVar data required has not been parameterized 0 15 0x0f Str...

Page 974: ...FB 5 with instance DB 111 Data block for GUD variable DATA_BLOCK DB_GUDVAR Assignment to symbol table STRUCT GUDVar1 STRING 32 GUDVAR1 Name is defined by user GUDVar1Token STRUCT SYNTAX_ID BYTE area_and_unit BYTE column WORD line WORD block type BYTE NO OF LINES BYTE type BYTE length BYTE END_STRUCT END_STRUCT BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK Unassigned user DB as instance for FB 5 DATA_BLOCK DB 111 FB 5 BEGI...

Page 975: ...ontrol panel key S M 100 0 Activate req U M 100 1 Done completed message R M 100 0 Terminate job U I 7 6 Manual error acknowledgment U M 102 0 Error pending R M 100 0 Terminate job CALL FB 5 DB 111 Req M 100 0 Starting edge for reading Area B 16 2 Channel variable Unit B 16 1 Channel 1 Index1 0 No field index Index2 0 No field index CnvtToken TRUE Conversion into 10 byte token VarToken DB_GUDVAR G...

Page 976: ...UCT BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK Unassigned user DB as instance for FB 5 DATA_BLOCK DB 111 FB 5 BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK Unassigned user DB as instance for FB 3 DATA_BLOCK DB 112 FB 3 BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK A user defined channel variable from channel 1 must be read with conversion into a variable pointer to allow subsequent writing of this variable Function FC VariablenCall VOID U I 7 7 Unassigned machine cont...

Page 977: ...d subsequent parameters These are defined in FB 7 from WVar1 to WVar16 FB 4 in the VAR_INPUT from WVar1 to WVar10 All the other parameters are identical to FB 4 This PI server can be used for all PI services that have been implemented with FB 4 In addition the PI services listed below can only be executed with FB 7 CALL FB 5 DB 111 Req M 100 0 Starting edge for reading Addr DB_GUDVAR GUDVarS Area ...

Page 978: ...function FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 7 Var_INPUT Req BOOL PIService ANY Unit INT Addr1 ANY Addr2 ANY Addr3 ANY Addr4 ANY WVar1 WORD WVar2 WORD WVar3 WORD WVar4 WORD WVar5 WORD WVar6 WORD WVar7 WORD WVar8 WORD WVar9 WORD WVar10 WORD WVar11 WORD WVar12 WORD WVar13 WORD WVar14 WORD WVar15 WORD WVar16 WORD END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Error BOOL Done BOOL State WORD END_VAR ...

Page 979: ...PI service stores a result in variables magCMCmdPar1 and magCMCmdPar2 the service must be protected by the semaphore mechanism PI service MMCSEM with the function number for _N_TMFDPL in cases where several control units or PLCs are operating on one NC The search area can be predefined in the following way by setting parameters MagazineNumber_From LocationNumber_From MagazineNumber_To LocationNumb...

Page 980: ...ing at magazine M1 up to and including magazine M2 are searched 1 1 1 1 All magazine locations are searched Note Before and after this PI service the MMCSEM PI service must be called up with the associated parameter WVar1 for this PI service See PI service MMCSEM for more information Parameterization Signal Type Range of values Significance PIService ANY PI TMFPBP Empty location search Unit INT 1 ...

Page 981: ... unit switchover WVar7 INT 0 1 7 Number of required half locations to left WVar8 INT 0 1 7 Number of required half locations to right WVar9 INT 0 1 7 Number of required half locations in upward direction WVar10 INT 0 1 7 Number of required half locations in downward direction WVar11 INT Number of required location type WVar12 INT 0 4 Specifies the required search direction 0 Empty location search ...

Page 982: ...CP being reactivated when the NCU is restarted input parameters MCP1BusAdr 255 address of 1st MCP and MCP1STOP TRUE deactivate 1st MCP must be set when FB1 is called in OB100 Approvals When one MCP is switched over to another any active feed or axis enables will be retained Declaration of the function Active mode Operator can control and monitor Passive mode Operator can monitor HMI header only No...

Page 983: ...ed operation deactivated for OP without M N capability ActivEnable I BOOL Function is not supported Control panel switchover Interlocking via MMCx_SHIFT_LOCK in DB 19 MCPEnable I BOOL Activate MCP switchover TRUE MCP is switched over with operator panel FALSE MCP is not switched over with operator panel This can be used to permanently link an MCP See also MMCx_MSTT_SHIFT_LOCK in DB 19 Alarm1 Q BOO...

Page 984: ...T OPMixedMode FALSE ActivEnable TRUE MCPEnable TRUE Enable for MCP switchover Note Input parameter MCPEnable must be set to TRUE to enable the MCP switchover The default value of these parameters is set in this way and need not be specially assigned when the function is called CALL RUN_UP gp_par MCPNum 1 MCP1In P I 0 0 MCP1Out P Q 0 0 MCP1StatSend P Q 8 0 MCP1StatRec P Q 12 0 MCP1BusAdr 255 Addres...

Page 985: ...M 100 1 Edge trigger flag 2 JC smth2 U M 100 2 Switchover takes place R M 100 2 Reset auxiliary flag 1 JC smth2 U M 100 3 Comparison has taken place SPB MCP Call MCP program Route the stored override to the interface of the switched MCP until the override values match L EB 28 Buffer storage open T DB21 DBB 4 Route override interface L EB 3 Override input byte for feed i Match JC smth2 No jump S M ...

Page 986: ...rs to the value 0 the output Out0 is deactivated without delay and outputs Out1 Out2 and Out3 deactivated via the parameterized timer values parameters TimeValue1 TimeValue2 TimeValue3 The outputs are activated again without delay if inputs In1 to In3 take the value 1 and a positive edge change is detected at one of the acknowledgement inputs Ack1 Ack2 To bring the outputs to their basic setting v...

Page 987: ...er FirstRun is also missing in the function diagram The mode of operation is described above Declaration of the function FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 10 VAR_INPUT In1 BOOL TRUE Input 1 In2 BOOL TRUE Input 2 In3 BOOL TRUE Input 3 Ackn1 BOOL Ack 1 signal Ackn2 BOOL Ack 2 signal TimeValue1 TIME T 0ms TimeValue for output 1 TimeValue2 TIME T 0ms TimeValue for output 2 TimeValue3 TIME T 0ms TimeValue for output 3...

Page 988: ...3 I BOOL Input 3 Ackn1 I BOOL Acknowledge input 1 Ackn2 I BOOL Acknowledge input 2 TimeValue1 I TIME Time value 1 for OFF delay TimeValue2 I TIME Time value 2 for OFF delay TimeValue3 I TIME Time value 3 for OFF delay Out0 O BOOL Output instantaneous no delay Out1 O BOOL Output delayed by TimeValue1 Out2 O BOOL Output delayed by TimeValue2 Out3 O BOOL Output delayed by TimeValue3 FirstRun I O BOOL...

Page 989: ... enable signals of the parameterized axis must be set to enable e g the controller inhibit feed enable signals Furthermore the signal at the axis spindle DB31 DBX28 7 PLC controlled axis is to be set to status 1 by the user program for the complete duration of the test Before activating the signal DB31 DBX28 7 PLC controlled axis the axis is to be switched as neutral axis e g DB31 DBX8 0 8 3 assig...

Page 990: ...t for the holding time DBX 62 5 1 TV_FXShold Deselect brake test open brake DBX 71 0 0 TV_BTactiv Output test ok Function_BLOCK FB 11 VAR_INPUT Start BOOL Start of brake test Ackn BOOL Acknowledge error Bclosed BOOL Brake closed input single channel PLC Axis INT Testing axis no TimerNo TIMER Timer from user TV_BTactiv S5TIME TimeValue brake test active TV_Bclose S5TIM TimeValue close brake TV_Feed...

Page 991: ...er MoveAxis has been set TV_FXSreched I S5TIME Monitoring time value fixed stop reached TV_FXShold I S5TIME Monitoring time value test brake CloseBrake A BOOL Request close brake MoveAxis A BOOL Request initiate traversing motion Done A BOOL Test successfully completed Error A BOOL Error has occurred State A BYTE Error status State Significance 0 No error 1 Start conditions not fulfilled e g the a...

Page 992: ...s occurred S M 110 7 Brake test running S M 110 6 Next step JCN m001 L DBB 68 AW W 16 F T MB 115 flag channel state L B 16 10 T DBB 8 Request neutral axis m001 U DBX 68 6 Checkback signal axis is neutral U M 110 6 FP M 110 1 R M 110 6 S M 110 5 Next step S DBX 28 7 Request PLC monitored axis U DBX 63 1 Checkback signal axis monitored by PLC U M 110 5 FP M 110 2 R M 110 5 S M 111 0 Start brake test...

Page 993: ...ror M 111 4 Error has occurred State MB 112 Error status OPEN Axis3 Brake test Z axis U M 111 2 Moveaxis FP M 111 5 FC18 Start S M 111 7 Start FC18 O M 111 3 Test successfully completed O M 111 4 Error has occurred FP M 110 3 R DBX 28 7 Request PLC monitored axis UN DBX 63 1 Checkback signal axis monitored by PLC U M 111 0 Start brake test for FB U M 110 7 Brake test running FP M 110 4 R M 111 0 S...

Page 994: ...es from being calculated The ring buffer specified by the user must have an ARRAY structure specified as in the source code The array can have any number of elements A size of 250 elements is recommended The ClearBuf parameter is used to clear the ring buffer and set the BufAddr pointer I O parameter to the start The instance DB related to the FB is a DB from the user area and is to be transferred...

Page 995: ...BOOL Signal_5 BOOL Signal_6 BOOL Signal_7 BOOL Signal_8 BOOL NewCycle BOOL Var1 BYTE Var2 INT Var3 INT BufDB INT ClearBuf BOOL DataAdr POINTER Area pointer to testing word TestVal WORD Value for triggering AndMask WORD AND mask to the testing word END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT TestIsTrue BOOL END_VAR VAR_IN_OUT BufAddr INT END_VAR TITLE Ring buffer DB for FB 29 VERSION 1 0 STRUCT Field ARRAY 0 249 OF STRUCT ...

Page 996: ...lue range Remark Func I INT 0 1 2 Function 0 Switch off 1 Signal recorder 2 Data trigger Parameters for function 1 Signal_1 to Signal_8 I BOOL Bit signals checked for change NewCycle I BOOL See the Signal recorder description above Var1 I BYTE Additional value Var2 I INT Additional value Var3 I INT Additional value BufDB I INT Ring buffer DB no ClearBuf I BOOL Delete ring buffer DB and reset point...

Page 997: ... FB with parameters in the user program In function 1 it is advisable to clear the ring buffer with the ClearBuf parameter When the recording phase with function 1 is completed read out the ring buffer DB in STEP7 with the function opening the data block in the data view The content of the ring buffer DB can now be analyzed Call example FUNCTION FC 99 VOID TITLE VERSION 0 0 BEGIN NETWORK TITLE NET...

Page 998: ...rst in OB 1 The following example contains the standard declarations for OB 1 and the calls for the basic program FC2 the transfer of the MCP signals FC19 and the acquisition of error and operating messages FC10 FUNCTION FC 2 VOID no parameters ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 1 VAR_TEMP OB1_EV_CLASS BYTE OB1_SCAN_1 BYTE OB1_PRIORITY BYTE OB1_OB_NUMBR BYTE OB1_RESERVED_1 BYTE OB1_RESERVED_2 BYTE OB1_PREV_CYC...

Page 999: ... NC possible in each IPO cycle a bit in the local data of OB 40 GP_IRFromNCK is set by the basic program when the FB 1 parameter UserIR TRUE This data is not set on other events process interrupts through I Os This information makes it possible to branch into the associated interrupt routine in the user program in order to initiate the necessary action To be able to implement high speed job driven...

Page 1000: ...n the related channel DB the change signal and the function value are available for the user Das Änderungssignal dieser interrupt driven function is reset to zero in the cyclic basic program section after the execution of at least one full OB1 cycle max approx two OB1 cycles Tool change With the tool management option the tool change command for revolver and the tool change in the spindle is suppo...

Page 1001: ... in Stop mode The PLC is placed in STOP mode only for incoming events Exceptions of the parameter PLC Stop are the Profibus MCPs parameterized at FB 1 must be connected to the DP1 Bus ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 40 VAR_TEMP OB40_EV_CLASS BYTE OB40_STRT_INF BYTE OB40_PRIORITY BYTE OB40_OB_NUMBR BYTE OB40_RESERVED_1 BYTE OB40_MDL_ID BYTE OB40_MDL_ADDR INT OB40_POINT_ADDR DWORD OB40_DATE_TIME DATE_AND_TIME...

Page 1002: ...TRUE END_VAR ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 82 VAR_TEMP OB82_EV_CLASS BYTE OB82_FLT_ID BYTE OB82_PRIORITY BYTE OB82_OB_NUMBR BYTE OB82_RESERVED_1 BYTE OB82_IO_FLAG BYTE OB82_MDL_ADDR INT OB82_MDL_DEFECT BOOL OB82_INT_FAULT BOOL OB82_EXT_FAULT BOOL OB82_PNT_INFO BOOL OB82_EXT_VOLTAGE BOOL OB82_FLD_CONNCTR BOOL OB82_NO_CONFIG BOOL OB82_CONFIG_ERR BOOL OB82_MDL_TYPE BYTE OB82_SUB_NDL_ERR BOOL OB82_COMM_FAULT ...

Page 1003: ... DATE_AND_TIME END_VAR BEGIN CALL FC 5 PlcStop FALSE END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 86 VAR_TEMP OB86_EV_CLASS BYTE OB86_FLT_ID BYTE OB86_PRIORITY BYTE OB86_OB_NUMBR BYTE OB86_RESERVED_1 BYTE OB86_RESERVED_2 BYTE OB86_MDL_ADDR WORD OB86_RACKS_FLTD ARRAY 0 31 OF BOOL OB86_DATE_TIME DATE_AND_TIME END_VAR BEGIN CALL FC 5 PlcStop TRUE END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK ...

Page 1004: ...ibed in FC 8 TM_TRANS transfer block for tool management Page 1008 Declaration of the function STL Representation Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the TM_TRANS2 function Parameters shown in bold differ from FC 8 FUNCTION FC 6 VOID VAR_INPUT Start BOOL TaskIdent BYTE TaskIdentNo BYTE NewToolMag INT NewToolLoc INT OldToolMag INT OldToolLoc INT Status IN...

Page 1005: ...t call the block again If the Ready parameter is set to FALSE the error code in the Error parameter must be interpreted If the error code 0 then this job must be repeated in the next PLC cycle e g Start remains set to TRUE This means that the transfer job has not yet been completed see example FC 7 call and timing diagram The Start parameter does not need a signal edge for a subsequent job An erro...

Page 1006: ...ction also causes the same T command to be resent to the tool management interface if the previous T is programmed again Declaration of the function STL representation Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the TM_REV function TaskIdent 4 TaskIdentNo channel NewToolMag Magazine number of the revolver NewToolLoc Original location of the tool OldToolMag Magaz...

Page 1007: ...ive signal for selected revolver FALSE 1 Activation of function by means of a positive edge 2 Positive acknowledgment Tool management has been transferred 3 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 4 Signal change using FC 5 This signal chart is not permissible The job must generally be terminated since the new tool positions must be conveyed to the tool management in the NCK 6 Ne...

Page 1008: ... loading point 5 Parameter TaskIdent 1 and TaskIdentNo 5 Furthermore the current tool positions and status data list of Status parameter in the following text are also transmitted for this transfer function In the case of a transfer without a so called old tool e g on loading the value 0 is assigned to parameters OldToolMag OldToolLoc CALL FC 7 Tool management transfer block for Revolver Start m 2...

Page 1009: ...er failure during an active command or independent changes in the position by the PLC block FC 8 TM_TRANS with TaskIdent 4 or 5 is called This call does not require interface activation by tool management If parameter TaskIdent 5 the tool management reserves the location in addition to changing the position The location is only reserved if the tool has been transported from a real magazine to a bu...

Page 1010: ..._FUNCTION Signal Typ e Type Value range Comment Start I BOOL 1 Start of transfer TaskIdent I BYTE 1 5 Interface or tank identifier 1 Loading unloading location 2 Spindle change position 3 Revolver change position 4 Asynchronous transfer 5 Asynchronous transfer with location reservation TaskIdentNo I BYTE 1 Number of associated interface or channel number The upper nibble can specify the interface ...

Page 1011: ...d Error A INT 0 65535 Error checkback 0 No error has occurred 1 Unknown TaskIdent 2 Unknown TaskIdentNo 3 Illegal task signal Interface SS active of selected revolver FALSE Other values The number corresponds to the error message of the tool management function in the NCK caused by this transfer 1 Activation of function by means of a positive edge 2 Positive acknowledgment Tool management has been...

Page 1012: ... tool The proposed new tool is disabled by the tool management function in the NCK A new command is then output by the tool management with a duplo tool The positions in parameters NewToolMag NewToolLoc OldToolMag and OldToolLoc correspond to the original tool positions Status 3 An error occurred The tool positions must not have been changed Any changes to the magazine positions which have taken p...

Page 1013: ...tool search is carried out The positions in parameters NewToolMag NewToolLoc OldToolMag and OldToolLoc correspond to the original tool positions Status 103 The new tool can be inserted This status is permitted only in the tool change preparation when the PLC may reject the new tool e g in case of MD20310 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK bit 4 1 for the possibility request changed parameter from PLC once ag...

Page 1014: ...ace remains at 1 Further processing is required by the user program in the PLC e g continuation of magazine positioning This item of status information is generally used to transfer changes in position of one or both tools while the operation is still in progress Call example CALL FC 8 Tool management transfer block Start m 20 5 Start 1 transfer trigger TaskIdent DB61 DBB 0 TaskIdentNo DB61 DBB 1 ...

Page 1015: ... set to logic 0 by the user once the ASUB has been terminated Done or if an error has occurred For the purpose of job processing every FC ASUB requires its own WORD parameter Ref from the global user memory area This parameter is for internal use only and must not be changed by the user The parameter Ref is initialized with the value 0 in the first OB 1 cycle and for this reason every FC 9 must be...

Page 1016: ...1 ASUB completed Error A BOOL 1 Interrupt switched off StartErr A BOOL 1 Interrupt number not assigned or deleted Ref I O WORD Global variable MW DBW 1 word per FC 9 for internal use 1 Activation of function 2 ASUP active 3 Positive acknowledgment ASUB ended 4 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 5 Signal change using FC 6 Not permitted If function activation is reset prior to...

Page 1017: ...rface directly from the status information in DB 2 irrespective of an interrupt acknowledgment 1 If parameter ToUserIF is set to FALSE signals are not transferred to the user interface In this case the user must take measures in his PLC program to ensure that these signals are influenced in the interface 2 If parameter ToUserIF is set to TRUE all signals listed above are sent to the user interface...

Page 1018: ...gnals Declaration of the function STL Representation Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the AL MSG function to DB 21 s dbx 6 0 Setting the blocking condition Resetting is done via FC AL_MSG if M 50 0 outputs the signal 0 Note In DB 2 a 1 signal must be present for several OB1 cycles to ensure that a message can also be displayed on the HMI There is an u...

Page 1019: ... case the basic program supplies parameter Chan with the channel number The PLC user knows which channel has new auxiliary functions available The new auxiliary functions can be determined by the auxiliary function change signals in the channel concerned Declaration of the function Explanation of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the AUXFU function Example CALL FC 10...

Page 1020: ... By setting parameter Row to 0 it is possible to suppress the display e g if several variables in one or several PLC cycles need to be entered in the string without any display output If several lines are to be updated simultaneously transfer of the characters to the lines lasts for several OB 1 cycles Parameter Row 1 then the lines are updated one by one each with 16 characters per line Variable ...

Page 1021: ...Declaration of the function STL representation Note Numerical conversion If the numerical converter is used to display information then it is better to avoid performing a conversion in every PLC cycle for the sake of reducing the PLC cycle time The conversion routine can be used independently of the display control This is to be queried in parameter row 0 although the convert parameter should be s...

Page 1022: ...justified string address 1 32 64 Digits BYTE Number of decimal places 1 3 END VAR VAR OUTPUT Error BOOL Conversion or string error END VAR Signal Typ e Type Value range Remark Row I BYTE 0 B 16 F Display line binary evaluation 0 no display output 1 Line 1 2 Line 2 3 Line 1 and line 2 to be changed 4 Line 3 5 Line 1 and line 3 to be changed 8 Line 4 B 16 F automatic change of all 4 lines ChrArray I...

Page 1023: ... places after the decimal point refer to the Digits Parameter B 16 13 String up to 32 64 characters Addr must be a pointer to a STRING B 16 30 REAL64 12 characters 10 digits plus a sign and a decimal point for places after the decimal point refer to the Digits Parameter StringAddr I INT 1 32 64 Right justified address within variable ChrArray Digits I BYTE for REAL data type 1 4 for REAL64 data ty...

Page 1024: ... disp is declared as String 32 in HT2 String 64 and completely assigned with characters Ranges of values of data types Data type Representable numerical range BOOL 0 1 BYTE 0 255 WORD 0 65535 INT 32768 to 32767 DWORD 0 9999999 DINT 9999999 to 9999999 REAL Digits 1 999999 9 to 999999 9 REAL Digits 2 99999 99 to 99999 99 REAL Digits 3 9999 999 to 9999 999 REAL Digits 4 999 9999 to 999 9999 REAL Digi...

Page 1025: ...13 Row MB 26 ChrArray strdat disp Convert M 90 1 Addr P M 20 0 Number to be converted DataType MB 28 Data type of the variables StringAddr MW 30 Digits B 16 3 3 decimal places Error M 90 2 Step 1 Deleting the interface signal DB31 DBX21 5 motor selection done in the related axis DB and registering the changeover process via A with DB31 DBX21 3 motor selection Step 2 As soon as the checkback messag...

Page 1026: ...nctions Manual Basic Functions Speeds Reference Actual value syst Regulation G2 Error message If the parameter SpindleIFNo is not in the permissible range the PLC is stopped with output of interrupt message number 401702 Special features When parameterizing TimeVal with the value 0 a default value of 100 ms is used With a value of less than 50 ms the minimum setting of 50 ms is applied The block m...

Page 1027: ...DBX61 5 this triggers alarm 25050 Contour monitoring Once the star delta changeover has been initiated with FC 17 it cannot be delayed by the user e g by waiting until the star delta contactors change over during the course of operation The user can implement this signal interaction with PLC logic Declaration of the function STL representation Description of formal parameters The table below lists...

Page 1028: ...n the logic 1 state until the function has been acknowledged positively or negatively by InPos 1 or Error 1 The output parameters are deleted when the relevant trigger signal is reset and the function terminated To be able to control an axis or spindle via the PLC it must be activated for the PLC This can for example be achieved by calling the FC SpinCtrl with activation of the Start or Stop param...

Page 1029: ...y at least one PLC cycle This also applies when the assignment in data byte 8 on the axial interface has been changed Abort The function cannot be aborted by means of parameter Start or Stop but only by means of the axial interface signals e g delete distance to go The axial interface also returns status signals of the axis that may need to be evaluated e g exact stop traverse command InPos on spi...

Page 1030: ...00 MA_SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO position control activation speed is taken InPos Is set to 1 when position is reached with Exact stop fine Error With positioning error 1 State Error code Start Initiation signal for start rotation Stop Initiation signal for stop rotation Funct 2 Rotate spindle Mode Positioning mode 5 direction of rotation M4 Positioning mode 5 direction of rotation M3 AxisNo Number of mac...

Page 1031: ...cillation with gear stage change M43 Pos 4 Oscillatio n Pos 4 Oscillation with gear stage change M44 Pos 5 Oscillatio n Pos 5 Oscillation with gear stage change M45 Start Initiation signal Funct 4 Indexing axis Note With Funct 4 Indexing axis The modulo conversion can be compared with approaching the indexing position via POS AX CIC value in the part program Mode Positioning mode 0 1 2 3 4 AxisNo ...

Page 1032: ...ata InPos Is set to 1 when position is reached with Exact stop fine Error With positioning error 1 State Error code Start Initiation signal for start rotation Stop Initiation signal for stop rotation Funct 9 Rotate spindle with gear stage selection Mode Positioning mode 5 direction of rotation M4 Positioning mode 5 direction of rotation M3 AxisNo Number of machine axis FRate Spindle speed InPos Se...

Page 1033: ...ark Start I BOOL Start spindle control from PLC Stop I BOOL Stop spindle control from PLC Funct I BYTE 1 to B 16 0B 1 Position spindle 2 Rotate spindle 3 Oscillate spindle 4 Indexing axis 5 Positioning axis metric 6 Positioning axis inch 7 PosAxis metric with handwheel override 8 PosAxis inch with handwheel override 9 Rotate spindle with automatic gear stage selection A Rotate spindle with constan...

Page 1034: ... table containing info about FRate InPos Q BOOL 1 Position reached or function executed Error A BOOL 1 error State Q BYTE 0 to 255 Error code State Significance Errors caused by PLC handling 1 B 16 1 Several axis spindle functions have been activated simultaneously 20 B 16 14 A function has been started without the position being reached 30 B 16 1e The axis spindle has been transferred to the NC w...

Page 1035: ...ossible corresponds to MMC alarm 16820 127 B 16 7f Absolute value Plus not possible corresponds to MMC alarm 16810 128 B 16 80 No transverse axis available for diameter programming corresponds to MMC alarm 16510 130 B 16 82 Software end switch Plus corresponds to MMC alarm 20070 131 B 16 83 Software end switch Minus corresponds to MMC alarm 20070 132 B 16 84 Working area limit Plus corresponds to ...

Page 1036: ...l edge with start or stop 2 Positive acknowledgment Function executed Position reached 3 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 4 Signal change using FC 1 Activation of function by means of a positive signal edge with start or stop 2 Negative acknowledgment Error has occurred 3 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 4 Signal change using FC 6WDUW UU UURU 6WDUW...

Page 1037: ...tate MB114 reset with T12 start U M113 0 Error U I 6 4 Key T12 R M 100 0 Start Start with T13 U I 6 3 Key T13 AN F 112 0 Restart only when InPos or Error 0 AN F 113 0 S M 100 0 CALL FC 18 Start M100 0 Stop FALSE Funct B 16 1 Position spindle Mode B 16 2 Shortest path AxisNo 5 Pos MD104 FRate MD108 InPos M112 0 Error M113 0 State MB114 CALL FC 18 Start M100 0 Stop FALSE Funct B 16q Rotate spindle M...

Page 1038: ... Mode B 16 0 AxisNo 5 Pos 0 0 FRate MD108 InPos M112 0 Error M113 0 State MB114 CALL FC 18 Start M100 0 Stop FALSE Not used Funct B 16 4 Traverse indexing axis Mode B 16 0 Position absolutely AxisNo 4 Pos MD104 Default setting in REAL 1 0 2 0 FRate MD108 InPos M112 0 Error M113 0 State MB114 CALL FC 18 Start M100 0 Stop FALSE Not used Funct B 16 5 Position axes Mode B 16 1 Position incrementally A...

Page 1039: ...t with this HMI signal Machine functions for INC and axis travel keys When the MCS is selected the signals are transferred to the interface of the selected machine axis When the WCS is selected the signals are transferred to the geo axis interface of the parameterized channel When the system is switched between MCS and WCS the active axes are generally deselected The handwheel selection signals fr...

Page 1040: ...zed mode group number of the MCP block in the axis tables of the relevant MCP To afford this flexibility tables for axis numbers are stored in DB 10 For the first machine control panel MCP the table starts from the byte 8 symbolic name MCP1AxisTbl 1 22 and for the second Machine control panel MCP starting from the byte 32 symbolic name MCP2AxisTbl 1 22 for the second MCP Here the machine axis numb...

Page 1041: ...UT FeedHold BOOL SpindleHold BOOL END_VAR BEGIN END_FUNCTION Signal Typ e Type Range of values Remark BAGNo I BYTE 0 b 16 0A and b 16 10 b 16 1A No of mode group to which the mode signals are transferred BAGNo b 16 10 means access to the second machine control panel ChanNo I BYTE 0 B 16 0A Channel no for the channel signals SpindleIFNo I BYTE 0 31 B 16 1F Number of the axis interface declared as a...

Page 1042: ...11 DBX0 2 REPOS DB11 DBX1 1 REF DB11 DBX1 2 TEACH IN DB11 DBX1 0 INC 1 10 000 INC Var DB11 DBX2 0 2 5 Source MCP Key Destination Interface DB parameter ChanNo Direction key DB21 DBX12 7 Direction key DB21 DBX12 6 Rapid traverse override DB21 DBX12 5 Direction key DB21 DBX16 7 Direction key DB21 DBX16 6 Rapid traverse override DB21 DBX16 5 Direction key DB21 DBX20 7 Direction key DB21 DBX20 6 Rapid...

Page 1043: ...parameter SpindleIFNo Source MCP Keys Destination Interface DB parameter ChanNo NC start DB21 DBX7 1 NC stop DB21 DBX7 3 RESET DB21 DBX7 7 Single BLock DB21 DBX0 4 Source MCP Keys Destination FC output parameters Feed stop Feed enable Parameter FeedHold linked with memory LED are controlled Spindle stop Spindle enable Parameter SpindleHold linked with memory LED are controlled Destination MCP LED ...

Page 1044: ...ble DB10 DBB8 and followed as required Example The spindle is defined as the 4th axis and must be selected via axis key 9 Destination MCP LED Source Interface DB parameter ChanNo NC start DB21 DBX35 0 NC stop DB21 DBX35 2 or DB21 DBX35 3 Single Block DB21 DBX0 4 Note Direction key LEDs are controlled by operating the direction keys Axis selection and WCS MCS LEDs are controlled by operating the re...

Page 1045: ...ocessed only when Enable 1 The following functions for the data exchange between PLC and NCK are supported 1 Signal synchronized actions at the NCK channel 2 Signals synchronized actions from NCK channel 3 Fast data exchange PLC NCK Read function in NCK 4 Fast data exchange PLC NCK Write function in NCK 5 Update control signals to NCK channel 6 Update control signals to axes data byte 2 of the use...

Page 1046: ...e transferred to from the NC as soon as FC 21 is processed The following signals are relevant Signal Typ e Type Value range Comment Enable I BOOL 1 FC 21 active Funct I BYTE 1 7 1 Synchronized actions at channel 2 Synchronized actions from channel 3 Read data 4 Write data 5 Control signals to channel 6 7 Control signals to axis S7Var I ANY S7 data storage area Depends on Funct IVAR1 I INT 0 Depend...

Page 1047: ...TEMP myAny ANY END_VAR BEGIN NETWORK Deactivate synchronized actions with ID3 ID10 and ID31 in NC channel 1 SYAK OPEN DB21 SET S DBX 300 2 ID3 S DBX 301 1 ID10 S DBX 303 6 ID31 L B 16 1 T MB11 SPA TRAN Synchronized actions from NCK channel 1 SYVK L B 16 2 T MB11 TRAN CALL FC 21 Enable M 10 0 if TRUE FC 21 active Funct MB 11 S7Var myAny Not used IVAR1 1 Channel no IVAR2 0 Error M 10 1 ErrCode MW 12...

Page 1048: ...a consistency is only ensured for 1 and 2 byte access in the NCK and in the PLC For the 2 byte consistency this is true only for the data type WORD or INT but not for the data type BYTE In the case of longer data types or transfer of fields which should be transferred consistently a semaphore byte must be programmed in parameter IVAR2 that can be used by FC 21 to determine the validity or consiste...

Page 1049: ...tions Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 1049 Data exchange with semaphore in PLC schematic of FC21 6HPDSKRUH 6HPDSKRUH 6HPDSKRUH 6HPDSKRUH UU RGH UURU UU RGH UURU XQFW UU RGH UURU UU RGH UURU XQFW HV QR HV QR ZULWH 7UDQVIHU GDWD IURP 3 WR 1 7UDQVIHU GDWD IURP 1 WR 3 UHDG ...

Page 1050: ...Read data 4 Write data S7Var I ANY S7 data area except local data Source destination data storage area IVAR1 I INT 0 4095 Position offset IVAR2 I INT 1 4095 Semaphore byte Transfer without semaphore 1 Error O BOOL ErrCode O INT 20 Alignment error 21 illegal position offset 22 Illegal semaphore byte 23 No new data to be read 24 Cannot write data 25 Local data parameterized for S7Var 6HPDSKRUH 6HPDS...

Page 1051: ... transfer from NC to PLC with data written via synchronized actions Byte 0 serves as the semaphore ID 1 WHENEVER A_DBB 0 0 DO A_DBR 4 AA_IM X A_DBB 0 1 Data transfer from PLC to NC with data read via synchronized actions Byte 1 serves as the Semaphore ID 2 WHENEVER A_DBB 1 1 DO R1 A_DBR 12 A_DBB 1 0 CALL FC 21 Enable M 10 0 if TRUE FC 21 active Funct B 16 3 Read data S7Var P M 100 0 DWORD 1 IVAR1 ...

Page 1052: ...t control signals at high speed in between cyclic data transfers The data byte 2 of application interface DB31 is transferred to the NC The transfer is performed for all activated axes This allows the controller enable to be transferred outside the PLC cycle for example The following signals are relevant CALL FC 21 Enable M 10 0 if TRUE FC 21 active Funct B 16 3 Read data S7Var P M 104 0 WORD 1 IV...

Page 1053: ...election with special positioning input Offset 0 a new setpoint position is calculated from the setpoint and special positions and the number of magazine locations according to the following formula New setpoint position setpoint pos special pos 1 neg modulo locations The new setpoint position corresponds to the location number at which the magazine must be positioned so that the setpoint position...

Page 1054: ...NT ReqPos INT ActPos INT Offset BYTE Start BOOL END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Cw BOOL Ccw BOOL InPos BOOL Diff INT Error BOOL END_VAR BEGIN END_FUNCTION Signal Typ e Type Range of values Remark MagNo I INT 1 Magazine number ReqPos I INT 1 Setpoint location ActPos I INT 1 Actual location Offset I BYTE 0 Offset for special positioning Start I BOOL Start of calculation Cw A BOOL 1 Move magazine clockwise Ccw A ...

Page 1055: ...nterface so that the modes support selection from the MCP or HMI Transfer of HMI signals to the interface can be deactivated by setting the value of the parameter MMCToIF to FALSE in FB 1 DB 7 MMCToIF can also be activated deactivated in the cyclic program by setting and resetting e g R gp_par MMCToIF The following specifications apply to the feed override axis travel keys and INC keys depending o...

Page 1056: ...indleDir permitting for example FC 18 to be parameterized A spindle enable signal is also switched via parameter SpindleHold One possible method of moving a spindle directly is to preselect it as an axis so that it can be traversed via axis direction keys If the machine control panel fails the signals it outputs are preset to zero this also applies to FeedHold and SpindleHold output signals Multip...

Page 1057: ...s numbers must be entered byte by byte here It is permissible to enter a value of 0 in the axis table Checks are not made to find impermissible axis numbers meaning that false entries can lead to a PLC Stop For FC 24 the maximum possible number of axis selections can also be restricted This upper limit is set for the 1 Machine control panel in DB10 DBW30 symbolic name MCP1MaxAxis or for the 2 Mach...

Page 1058: ...onal FC 18 call Signal Type Type Range of values Remark BAGNo I BYTE 0 b 16 0A and b 16 10 b 16 1A No of mode group to which the mode signals are transferred BAGNo b 16 10 means access to the second machine control panel ChanNo I BYTE 0 B 16 0A Channel no for the channel signals SpindleIFNo I BYTE 0 31 B 16 1F Number of the axis interface declared as a spindle FeedHold A BOOL Feed stop from MCP mo...

Page 1059: ...s also set with this HMI signal Machine functions for INC and axis travel keys When the MCS is selected the signals are transferred to the interface of the selected machine axis When the WCS is selected the signals are transferred to the geo axis interface of the parameterized channel The handwheel selection signals from the MMC are decoded and activated in the machine axis or the Geo axis interfa...

Page 1060: ...s of the relevant MCP To afford this flexibility tables for axis numbers are stored in DB 10 For the first machine control panel MCP the table starts at byte 8 symbolic name MCP1AxisTbl 1 22 and for the second Machine control panel MCP starting from the byte 32 symbolic name MCP2AxisTbl 1 22 for the second MCP The machine axis numbers are entered here bytewise It is permissible to enter a value of...

Page 1061: ...ion declaration Signal Typ e Type Value range Comment BAGNo I BYTE 0 b 16 0A and b 16 10 b 16 1A No of mode group to which the mode signals are transferred BAGNo b 16 10 means access to the second machine control panel ChanNo I BYTE 0 B 16 0A Channel no for the channel signals SpindleIFNo I BYTE 0 31 B 16 1F Number of the axis interface declared as a spindle FeedHold A BOOL Feed stop from MCP moda...

Page 1062: ...n INC Coordinate system WCS or MCS Axial traverse key Axis selection Feed override Parameter Ty pe Type Value range Comment BAGNo I BYTE 1 MCP B 16 00 B 16 0A Upper nibble Number of the MCP whose signals are to be transferred 0 1 MCP 1 2 MCP Lower nibble Number of the mode group in which the mode group specific interface signals are to be transferred The mode group specific signals are not process...

Page 1063: ... 0 or values greater than 6 the maximum value is taken implicitly Transfer of the traversing key signals depending upon the active coordinate system The traversing key signals for 6 axes lie in the HT 8 input data area below EB n 2 Bit 0 Bit 5 positive traversing direction EB n 3 Bit 0 Bit 5 negative traversing direction The switchover of the coordinate system is done via the input signal EB n 0 B...

Page 1064: ...raversing of machine axes in WCS In case of active WCS AB n 0 Bit 0 1 the traversing of the machine axes can be locked For this the following output signals are to be set in the PLC user program AB n 3 Bit 7 1 For WCS no machine axes Requirement to the FC 26 not to transfer any traversing key signals for the machine axes The traversing key signals for the axes 1 3 of the machine axis table are tra...

Page 1065: ...informs the NCK about the activation of the mode group interface for the INC machine function once after the power up with DB10 DBX57 0 INC inputs active in the mode group area Handwheel selection The hand wheel selection signals are evaluated by HMI and transferred to the corresponding NC PLC interface signals of the machine or geometric axes Geometry axes DB21 DBB 12 n 4 Bit 0 to Bit 2 with n 0 ...

Page 1066: ... DB11 DBX0 2 REPOS DB11 DBX1 1 REF DB11 DBX1 2 TEACH IN DB11 DBX1 0 INC 1 10 000 INC Var DB11 DBX2 0 DBX 2 5 Source MCP Aim Geometry axis of the prog channel Parameter ChanNo Traversing key DB21 DBX12 7 Traversing key DB21 DBX12 6 Rapid traverse override DB21 DBX12 5 Traversing key DB21 DBX16 7 Traversing key DB21 DBX16 6 Rapid traverse override DB21 DBX16 5 Traversing key DB21 DBX20 7 Traversing ...

Page 1067: ...T variant FC 26 HT8 variant Associated blocks DB 7 no of MOGs channels axes DB 7 pointer of machine control panel DB 8 storage for the next cycle Resources used None Source MCP Aim Prog axes corresponding to the table in DB 10 DBB 8 13 1 MCP or DBB 32 37 2 MCP Feed override DB31 DBB0 Source MCP Aim Programmed channel Parameter ChanNo NC start DB21 DBX7 1 NC stop DB21 DBX7 3 RESET DB21 DBX7 7 Singl...

Page 1068: ...are also copied between locations using the various pointers in DB 7 gp_par These local variables are handled in the block for reasons of efficiency Some values are initialized for the start up MCS WCS switchover with edge evaluation axis selections direction keys and rapid traverse overlay is determined in the Global_IN network for further processing in the block User specific changes must take p...

Page 1069: ...sfers data to the Ethernet CP for transfer via a configured connection The specified functions correspond to the functions of the library SIMATIC_NET_CP of the S7 300 CPU in STEP 7 In general the online help of these functions applies for these functions and therefore a detailed description is not provided here The functions AG_SEND AG_RECV can be used for data exchange with another station via th...

Page 1070: ...xx with CP343 1 The protocols TCP and UDP are supported TCP is the preferred protocol 13 13 31 FC 1006 AG_RECV receives data from the Ethernet CP Function The FC block AG_RECV receives data transferred via a configured connection from the Ethernet CP The specified functions correspond to the functions of the library SIMATIC_NET_CP of the S7 300 CPU in STEP 7 In general the online help of these fun...

Page 1071: ... value W 16 8110 must be connected to parameter LADDR In the basic program this function is available under the FC number 1006 this FC corresponds to the FC number FC 6 in the library SIMATIC_NET_CP The block can also be used in a SIMATIC CPU 3xx with CP343 1 The protocols TCP and UDP are supported TCP is the preferred protocol Signal Typ e Type Value range Remark ID I INT Connection ID LADDR I WO...

Page 1072: ...ed actions are channel specifically transferred from the NC to the PLC M functions from channel 1 DB 21 M functions from channel 2 DB 22 etc The signal length is one PLC cycle Note The spindle specific M functions below are not decoded M3 M4 M5 and M70 Address in DB 21 Variable Type Comment DBX 194 0 7 M_Fkt_M0 M7 BOOL M signals M0 M7 DBX 195 0 7 M_Fkt_M8 M15 BOOL M signals M8 M15 DBX 196 0 7 M_Fk...

Page 1073: ...not state that the part program has been terminated To determine definitely the end of a part program in the channel the following interface signal must be evaluated DB21 DBX33 5 M02 M30 active The channel status must be RESET The auxiliary function output could arise from an asynchronous subroutine ASUB or a synchronized action and has nothing to do with the real end of the parts program in this ...

Page 1074: ...T_GR_23 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 23 DBB 231 G_FKT_GR_24 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 24 DBB 232 G_FKT_GR_25 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 25 DBB 233 G_FKT_GR_26 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 26 DBB 234 G_FKT_GR_27 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 27 DBB 235 G_FKT_GR_28 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 28 DBB 236 G_FKT_GR_29 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 29 DBB 237 G_FKT...

Page 1075: ...rface signals show signals are divided into predefined groups When a message occurs disappears or is acknowledged the number entered in the message number column is transferred to the HMI Text can be stored in the HMI for each message number References Lists sl Book2 see Section PLC Messages DB 2 Startup manual Chapter Alarm and message texts Note The number of user areas can be parameterized via ...

Page 1076: ...ause here a high speed copying takes place the routine given below is for smaller data quantities because the supply of ANY parameter to the SFCs consumes additional time Example 13 15 2 ANY and POINTER The following programming examples show the programming mechanism They demonstrate how input output and transit variables VAR_INPUT VAR_OUTPUT VAR_IN_OUT are accessed by data types POINTER or ANY w...

Page 1077: ...dressed via the POINTER ANY This access operation is described at the end of the relevant program sequence in the example With data type ANY it is also possible to execute a check or branch when the variable is accessed based on the data type and the number of elements involved Example Code Comment FUNCTION FC 99 VOID VAR_INPUT Row BYTE Convert BOOL Activate numerical conversion Addr POINTER Point...

Page 1078: ...res and arrays that are addressed via the POINTER ANY This access operation is described at the end of the relevant program sequence in the example With data type ANY it is also possible to execute a check or branch when the variable is accessed based on the data type and the number of elements involved Example T typ L W AR1 P 2 0 Retrieve amount T Amount L W AR1 P 4 0 Retrieve DB number T dbchr L...

Page 1079: ... to select Addr1 to Addr4 LAR1 Retrieve pointer from instance DB L DIW AR1 P 0 0 Retrieve DB number T dbchr L DID AR1 P 2 0 Offset part of pointer LAR1 OPEN DB dbchr Open DB of variables L B AR1 P 40 0 Retrieve byte value using pointer with address offset 40 ANY L P Addr1 LAR1 Retrieve ANY from instance DB L DIB AR1 P 1 0 Retrieve type T typ L DIW AR1 P 2 0 Retrieve amount T Amount L DIW AR1 P 4 0...

Page 1080: ...AR_TEMP dbchr WORD Number WORD type BYTE Temp_addr ANY END_VAR BEGIN NETWORK TITLE L WhichAny DEC 1 L P 10 0 10 bytes per ANY I LAR2 L P Addr1 AR2 Add ANY start addresses L P Temp_addr LAR1 Retrieve pointer from VAR_TEMP L DID AR2 P 0 0 Transfer pointer value to VAR_TEM T LD AR1 P 0 0 L DID AR2 P 4 0 T LD AR1 P 4 0 L DIW AR2 P 8 0 T LW AR1 P 8 0 CALL FB 101 DB 100 ANYPAR Temp_addr ANYPAR is data t...

Page 1081: ...is can be done only by means of an ANY stored in VAR_TEMP Code Comment FUNCTIONBLOCK FB 100 VAR_INPUT DBNumber INT DBOffset INT Data type INT Number INT END_VAR VAR_TEMP dbchr WORD Temp_addr ANY END_VAR BEGIN NETWORK TITLE L P Temp_addr LAR1 Retrieve pointer from VAR_TEMP L B 16 10 ANY identifier T LB AR1 P 0 0 L Data type T LB AR1 P 1 0 L Amount T LW AR1 P 2 0 L DBNumber T LW AR1 P 4 0 L DBOffset...

Page 1082: ...ables are accessed within the multi instance enabled FB the compiler independently controls the access operation via address register AR2 However when complex program sections also have to work with address registers in the same FB e g to copy data then the old contents of AR2 must be saved before the register is changed The contents of AR2 must be restored to their original state before an instan...

Page 1083: ...e generally assigned to blocks of the basic program by means of a POINTER or ANY Such assignments must generally by made using symbolic programming methods The data block which contains the parameterizing string must be stored in the symbol list The assignment to the basic program block is then made by means of the symbolic data block name followed by a full stop and the symbolic name of the strin...

Page 1084: ...he cyclic call because they have already been written in the Instance DB Example Parameterization of FB 2 with instance DB 110 The following example shows how a useful distribution in OB 100 and OB 1 portion is to be implemented First the usual call in the cyclic program is displayed The modified version of the program call starts from here Here the call in OB 100 is displayed Code Comment FUNCTIO...

Page 1085: ... time loading of a constant in the instance data block In case of each ANY transfer constants are loaded in the data block 4 times with subsequent transfer CALL FB 2 DB 110 Req FALSE NumVar 2 Read 2 variables Addr1 NCVAR C1_RP_rpa0_0 Line1 W 16 1 Addr2 NCVAR C1_RP_rpa0_0 Line2 W 16 2 RD1 P M 4 0 REAL 1 RD2 P M 24 0 REAL 1 CALL FB 2 DB 110 Req M0 0 Error M1 0 NDR M1 1 State MW 2 Note Owing to this ...

Page 1086: ...NUM_USER_DATA_HEX Number of user data HEX 14508 MAXNUM_USER_DATA_FLOAT Number of user data FLOAT 14510 USER_DATA_INT User data INT 14512 USER_DATA_HEX User data HEX 14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT n User data FLOAT Note Machine data in integer hex format is operated in the NC as DWORD A machine data in floating point format is managed in the NC as FLOAT 8 Byte IEEE They are stored only in the NC PLC interfa...

Page 1087: ...ject that matches the currently running PLC user program When loading from the CPU the complete project data including symbols and comments is loaded into the Programming Tool PLC828 and can be processed edited using this The user must manage the data and process information according to type The declared data type must be used consistently each time that the data is accessed 14 1 2 PLC user inter...

Page 1088: ...ODUPV 5HDGLQJ ZULWLQJ 1 GDWD 3 VHUYLFHV 7RRO 0DQDJHPHQW LV VSLQGOH 1 8VHU GDWD 6LJQDOV WR 0 6LJQDOV IURP 0 6LJQDOV WR 1 6LJQDOV IURP 1 6LJQDOV WR 1 6LJQDOV IURP 1 6LJQDOV WR FKDQQHO 6LJQDOV IURP FKDQQHO 6LJQDOV WR D LV 6LJQDOV IURP D LV RE IRU ORDGLQJ XQORDGLQJ ORFDWLRQV RE IRU VSLQGOH DQG WXUUHW FNQRZOHGJHPHQW IRU ORDGLQJ XQORDGLQJ ORFDWLRQV FNQRZOHGJHPHQWV IRU VSLQGOH DQG WXUUHW LV VSLQGOH GULYH...

Page 1089: ...LC HMI These are signals for Program selection via lists Messenger control command General signals from to HMI Signals from to the maintenance planner Signals from operator panel retentive area General selection status signals from to HMI retentive area 14 1 2 2 Alarms and messages The user interface in DB1600 offers the option of displaying fault and operating messages on the HMI The firmware eva...

Page 1090: ...mum of 500 operations can be executed in the INT0 interrupt program that can be optionally used It is executed servo synchronous and allows the fastest possible reaction to process events This is the reason that interrupt capable PLC I O modules are not required Data Number Special features Main program MAIN 1 Subprograms SBRx 256 Interrupts 2 Time controlled interrupt 1 Servo synchronous interrup...

Page 1091: ...ne control panels as well as the assignment of the onboard inputs outputs to the PLC see References Manual PPU SINUMERIK 828D 14 1 5 PLC Toolbox 14 1 5 1 Star delta changeover For star delta changeover the following block is provided in the PLC Toolbox StarDelta Note This block can be used to perform a star delta changeover also for 1PH8 spindle motors with SMI connected to a SINAMICS S120 ...

Page 1092: ...rol via the factory network or the service interface References Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK 828D When calling the Programming Tool PLC828 without specifying an existing project then implicitly a new project is created with the Project1 default name This project can be immediately used to generate the PLC user program and then saved under any name and loaded into the control system Existing proj...

Page 1093: ... well as interface and debug settings be saved on a data carrier or loaded from there be loaded into the CPU or retrieved from there Data classes Data classes are especially the properties of actual values of such data blocks that the user explicitly brings into the project data blocks that are inherent to the system are not meant e g the user interface The data classes Manufacturer Individual and...

Page 1094: ...ith a higher priority at a different location in the PLC cycle and are reserved for special tasks Data block A data block is a block for data initial values actual values and comments with the following properties The data are saved in precisely the same sequence as specified by the user This means that the inner structure of the data block is defined and if several data blocks are created with th...

Page 1095: ...ram is executed Status tables are not loaded into the target system They are only intended to be able to monitor the activities of the target system or the simulated target system Cross references The following are displayed in tabular form in the cross reference window the symbolic or absolute addresses and the locations where they are used the bytes that are being used the bits that are being us...

Page 1096: ...vigate to the required directory in Windows Explorer and directly open the project from there without having to first start the Programming Tool PLC 828 Your project is in a single file with the ptp extension Note If you have created a project then you can start to write your program However you should have executed the following tasks beforehand Range check according to the target system You can ...

Page 1097: ...the main program at each location where you wish to execute the function you write the logic once in a subprogram and you then call this subprogram as often as required while executing the main program Meaningful names can be assigned to subprograms these are also assigned to the Manufacturer data class Advantages The functional sequence in the main program is very transparent Subprograms are easy...

Page 1098: ... response time Executed in the servo cycle INT_0 For extremely fast responses to events which absolutely required this In INT_0 the direct access commands that either access an internal I O image updated in the servo cycle or only the hardware of the onboard IO can be practically used Data class Manufacturer Note The size of block INT_0 is limited to 500 operations Executed before MAIN after readi...

Page 1099: ...the onboard inputs I256 0 I256 3 Addressing the onboard outputs Q256 0 Q256 3 Direct NO contact I Direct NC contact I Directly set bit value SI Directly reset bit value RI Directly assign bit value I Type Description Access in the bit format Access in the type format Access in the word format Access in the double word format can be retentive I Digital inputs and process image input read write read...

Page 1100: ...PLC828 recognizes your CPU version When generating your program you must ensure that you only use the address range valid for this CPU If you attempt to load a program that accesses addresses ranges which are not valid for this CPU then an error message is output Address ranges Access method Type of memory Min and max address numbers Bit byte bit I 0 0 255 7 1 256 0 256 3 2 Q 0 0 255 7 1 256 0 256...

Page 1101: ...nputs and the 4 onboard outputs if these are assigned to the PLC 3 Only the DB numbers are specified in the table for reasons of simplicity Their addressing depends on the DB structure and is realized according to the following scheme Figure 14 3 Access Example Explanation Bit DB3801 DBX1000 7 Bit 7 of the byte with offset 0 in subrange 1 for axis 2 in user range 38 Byte DB3801 DBB0 Byte with offs...

Page 1102: ...direct address comprises the memory type and a valid address number To access a bit in a memory area enter the byte address and the number of the bits Separate the byte from the bit using a decimal point Examples Indirect addressing Indirect addressing can only be used for data blocks with the same structure the same type These are used so that when accessing data blocks the number of the data blo...

Page 1103: ...1 then the program editor identifies INPUT1 as a local variable from SBR1 However if you refer to INPUT1 at another location in the program e g in MAIN or in a second program the program editor does not recognize INPUT1 as a local variable and treats INPUT1 as a non defined global symbol I0 0 An absolute address specifies the memory type and address number Input1 The character is located in front ...

Page 1104: ...le data type check If a data type is specified for a local or global variable the software checks that the data type of the address corresponds to the signature of the operation Note Using local and global symbols Local variables use the temporary local memory of the target system Subprograms that only use local variables and transfer parameters are easy to port and can be flexibly used If you wis...

Page 1105: ...a types it is always clear The elementary data type check is only performed when using local variables 2 No data check This mode is only available for global variables where no data types can be specified If a data type check is not active all data types of the same size are automatically assigned to the symbol Example A symbol which is assigned to address DB1400 DBD4 then the following data types...

Page 1106: ...n occur in your program or in the mode of operation of the control Working with operations to convert the data type Conversion operations convert one data type into another The Programming Tool PLC828 supports the following conversion operations to transfer values between the elementary data types 14 3 2 5 Constants Range of constants Conversion of data types Conversion operations Complete data ty...

Page 1107: ...e displayed in the binary decimal hexadecimal or ASCII format Constants in the program are considered as decimal numbers if a format identifier is not specified Examples of binary constants Examples of hexadecimal constants 2 for dual numbers 16 for hexadecimal numbers Example Numerical basis Separator Constant 2 1101 2 1101 Example Numerical basis Separator Constant 16 3FB2 16 3FB2 Note Underscor...

Page 1108: ...iece of data Initial values can be assigned to the data When loaded into the CPU for the first time the actual values of the DB are initialized with these initial values The initial values are also stored in the CPU The actual values of the data can also be read online from the control changed and also saved with the project The data block structures are just like the POUs part of the project They...

Page 1109: ...ual DB variables in the declaration view Initial values can be assigned to the variables of the data block that are saved with the data class or the project and with which the actual values of the DBs are initialized when loaded into the CPU for the first time When you define a variable you assign its name and data type The default initial value is set to zero OFF however this can also be changed ...

Page 1110: ...rotected in the data view After loading the actual values of the data block not the complete project these values become effective in the target system Example The structure of the data block in the project must match the structure of the data block in the target system If you have modified the structure of the data block or re created the DB then the complete project has to be loaded again You ca...

Page 1111: ...n the context menu select Accept initial values or Select the menu command Edit Accept initial values Loading and saving the data blocks Save involves writing the DB depending on the selection structure initial values additional blocks and tables or actual values or both together from the PC work memory to the hard disk or to another external storage medium After the project has been opened these ...

Page 1112: ...5 17 3URMHFW LQ WKH 3 3URJUDPPLQJ 7RRO LQ WKH ZRUN PHPRU DQG RQ KDUG GLVN RU H WHUQDO VWRUDJH PHGLXP ORFNV 0 1 6 5 17 3URMHFW LQ 38 6 180 5 3 0DQXIDFWXUHU QGLYLGXDO 8VHU DFWXDO YDOXHV 0DQXIDFWXUHU QGLYLGXDO VWUXFWXUH LQLWLDO YDOXHV 0DQXIDFWXUHU QGLYLGXDO 8VHU DFWXDO YDOXHV 0DQXIDFWXUHU QGLYLGXDO 0 1 17 17 17 6 5 6 5 6 5 0 1 17 17 17 6 5 6 5 6 5 ...

Page 1113: ...g for data blocks You may be able to simplify the programming if data blocks with the same structure are used in your program You can indirectly address the data blocks using the accumulators AC0 to AC3 The accumulators are used to tell the program which data block is to be handled The value in the AC is then treated as index For example for axis DBs the program text can be somewhat reduced by not...

Page 1114: ...dit Cut Copy and Edit Paste You can easily edit your data block in this way e g in Microsoft Excel Absolute input Symbolic input DB3800 AC1 DBX2 1 ToAxis AC1 ControlEnable DB9000 AC0 DBW0 Prototyp1 AC0 MyWord1 It is not permissible to use constants for indexing DB3800 1 DBX2 1 ToAxis 5 ControlEnable Indirect addressing using V addresses is also not permitted V3800 5 0002 1 V380 5 0002 1 V3800 AC0 ...

Page 1115: ...ing the menu command Target system Compile or by clicking on the symbol If any errors occur during compilation then they are displayed in the output window Position the cursor to an error message in the output window and double click on it so that you see the line in the data block with the error Loading the data block into the target system Here reference is made to Chapter Data classes Page 1119...

Page 1116: ...cur as a result of the fact that it is deselected Namely then INT100 or INT101 access the old structure of the DB After making changes to the actual values of a data block these must then be subsequently loaded into the target system The structure of the data block in the target system must match the structure of the data block in the project There are two ways of loading the actual values into th...

Page 1117: ...1119 in which loading and saving not only data blocks is explained in detail You must first open a project in the Programming Tool PLC828 before you can load the program block project and therefore its structure from the target system As the structure and initial values of the data blocks are permanently assigned the Manufacturer data class then only the check box of this data class has to be acti...

Page 1118: ...protected Description SM0 0 This bit is always switched on SM0 1 This bit is switched on in the first cycle It is used for example to call an initialization subprogram SM0 2 This bit is switched on for the length of a cycle if retentive data has been lost It can be used either as an error bit memory or as a mechanism for calling up special startup sequences SM0 3 This bit is switched on for the le...

Page 1119: ...re user related organizational units for programs and data blocks as project subcontainer They are special in so much that they mutually demarcate the contents The data and programs assigned to them can be handled as group i e as data class This applies when loading into the control and from the control as well as for data backup using export and import SM0 6 This bit represents a clock cycle It i...

Page 1120: ...er s perspective there are three data classes Load into CPU Load from CPU Open Project Save project under 3URMHFW LQ WKH 3URJUDPPLQJ 7RRO 3 3URJUDP FRGH FRPPHQWV FURVV UHIHUHQFHV V PERO DQG VWDWXV FKDUWV YDULDEOHV FRQVWDQWV VWUXFWXUHV DQG LQLWLDO YDOXHV DWD FDUULHU KDUG GLVN RU H WHUQDO VWRUDJH PHGLXP 0DQXIDFWXUHU QGLYLGXDO 8VHU DWD EORFNV RQO DFWXDO YDOXHV 0DQXIDFWXUHU QGLYLGXDO ORFNV 0 1 6 5 17 ...

Page 1121: ... The input is rewired to a free input The INT100 interrupt program can be used so that the service erection technician doesn t have to change the PLC user program of the machine manufacturer due to the rewiring which is a complex and tedious task This runs in front of the main program MAIN and writes the rewired input to the original input in the image INT100 is assigned to data class Individual a...

Page 1122: ...operation tree right click on the corresponding block and select Properties 2 Assign the block to one of the three possible data classes Here for DB9000 in addition to the data class User the Non Retain property was also selected Data blocks with this attribute are reset to the initial values after each power off and power on ...

Page 1123: ...Load data class es into the CPU Procedure 1 In the window Load into CPU select the data class es whose blocks are to be loaded 2 Select the option Blocks MAIN SUBR INT DB if program or data block changes are to be loaded into the target system 3 Select the option Data blocks only actual values if actual values of one or several data blocks are to be loaded into the target system ...

Page 1124: ...target system into the stop condition If structurally modified programs or initial values of data blocks are to be loaded into the target system or Load in the RUN operating state If neither program nor data block structures have changed The following message must be output after loading 5 Confirm this message 6 After Loading in stop condition if required switch the control back to RUN ...

Page 1125: ...values if actual values of one or several data blocks are to be loaded into the target system 4 If required save the opened project in the Programming Tool PLC828 it is then overwritten when Load from CPU A new project with the name of the project located in the target system is created 5 After a warning that the existing project will be possibly changed as a result of Load from CPU the requested ...

Page 1126: ... Compare If data classes only exist in the offline project or only in the CPU online project these are correspondingly marked The differences that exist between the offline and online existing program blocks SBRs INTs or data blocks DBs are shown as a result of the comparison Example The differences between the actual values saved offline in the project e g 22 and the actual values available in th...

Page 1127: ...ntrally changed e g IW0 to IW8 using the rewire function This means that user programs can be quickly adapted to the modified I O expansion stage Example The customer writes a PLC user program for a series of machines Due to the different machine expansion stage the I O expansion stage of several machines differs which is the reason that addresses must be individually changed in the user program U...

Page 1128: ... the dialog box rewire to rewire addresses Please proceed as follows 1 Open the dialog box Rewire in the LAD editor using the context menu Rewire or using the menu bar Edit Rewire 2 In the list Program blocks list of all of the POUs available in the project select the POUs in which the rewire operation is to be executed ...

Page 1129: ...this column enter the new name or the new address Please ensure that the type of the new address corresponds to that of the old address e g old address IW0 and new address IW4 not IB4 or old address DB9000 DBB0 and new address MB0 not MW0 Checking the validity of addresses If the name of the address symbol does not exist in the open project then this is marked with a green wavy line If the type of...

Page 1130: ...context menu right mouse button the results can be copied into other applications e g Microsoft Word Note If you wish to exit the dialog box without activating the function Rewire then use the Exit button Note The following must be taken into account when rewiring Name or number of a POU cannot be changed using the Rewire function For this purpose in the operation tree in the POU context menu clic...

Page 1131: ... display of the actual values of addresses while executing the program in the target system You can display status information in a status chart or by switching on the program status in the program editor An example for status information in the status chart and in the program editor of the Programming Tool PLC828 is shown in the following diagram Note Please note that unnecessary project componen...

Page 1132: ... of the addresses in the table status or in the program status This is the same as the function Single read as the program is not executed You can write values in the table status You can execute a certain number of cycles and display the effect in a status chart and or in the program status If the target system is in the RUN operating state you cannot execute the functions First cycle or Several ...

Page 1133: ...r you to read them You can update the status once if you switch the target system to the STOP operating state Even if the target system is in the STOP operating state you can use the Multiple cycles command to view one or more cycles Using the First cycle function you can view a single cycle whereby the bit memory of the first cycle is activated Open the status chart window and enable the chart st...

Page 1134: ...he bit is enabled The value of non boolean addresses is displayed and updated as quickly as the communication permits it Note If in the STOP operating state you have loaded a program into the target system you must switch the target system back into the RUN operating state before you can display continuous updates of the program status Note If you enable the program status many other functions in ...

Page 1135: ...ree Your program must be able to be loaded error free into the target system Your target system must be in the RUN operating state in order that the status update can be continuously displayed Otherwise only changes at the inputs and outputs if they are available are displayed As the program is not executed in the target system changes at the inputs and outputs do not have the same effects as you ...

Page 1136: ... 2 Display properties If you display the program status in LAD the boolean operations are displayed as colored blocks if the value of the address is 1 bit is enabled The actual data value from other addresses is displayed next to the address or instead of the address The display is updated if changes are read from the target system ...

Page 1137: ...several conditions that can result in an unclear signal flow display If when evaluating the status the target system is in the STOP operating state contacts can be activated however coils and boxes are not switched on because the program is not being executed If the program contains a jump operation then it is possible that the networks that you are investigating do not display the expected result...

Page 1138: ... arrangement of the window in the Programming Tool PLC828 In order to create more space for the window of the program editor or to be able to display it with another window e g the status chart the symbol table or the cross references you can adapt the arrangement and size of all of the windows shown in the Programming Tool PLC828 as follows 1 Select the window whose display you wish to adapt 2 Re...

Page 1139: ...splayed in the Actual value column Figure 14 7 Example of a status chart Single read function If you use the function Single read this is only available when the chart status is disabled to evaluate a status chart the actual values of the target system are accepted and displayed in the column Actual value However the values are not updated while the target system executes the program Chart status ...

Page 1140: ...l charts 14 4 3 3 Working with several status charts Inserting additional additional status charts To insert additional status charts In the operation tree right click on the Status chart folder and in the pop up menu select the command Insert status chart or Open the window Status chart and call the Edit menu of right click and select the command Insert contents Table Switching between the status...

Page 1141: ...ss column All memory types are valid with the exception of accumulators and data constants To edit an address field Select the required field using the cursor keys or the mouse If you enter data existing data are deleted and the new characters are entered The field is selected if you double click with the mouse or press key F2 You can then move the cursor using the cursor keys to the position that...

Page 1142: ...e column To select a complete row to cut or copy Click the number of the row once To select the complete status chart Click the upper lefthand corner once above the row numbers To insert a new row 1 Select a field or a row in the status chart 2 Open the menu Edit or click with the right mouse button on the field in order that the contact menu is displayed 3 Select the command Insert contents Row T...

Page 1143: ... or WORD are shown using an example of block variable iData7 To delete a field or a row 1 Select the field or the row and click with the right mouse button 2 Select the menu command Delete Selection If you delete a row then the following rows shift upwards by one row To jump into the next field of the table Press the TAB key Note Bit and binary values are both introduced by the number 2 and the sy...

Page 1144: ...e appropriate button in the function bar If you only require a snapshot of the values execute the function Single read Select the menu command Test Single read or Click on the appropriate button in the function bar Note When the chart status is enabled then the Single read function is deactivated Note If the chart is still empty then enabling the status chart has not effect You must first create y...

Page 1145: ...s disabled then the button for single read is activated Write all After you have entered the values in the column New value in the status chart write the required changes to the target system using the command Write all 14 4 4 Execute cycles You can specify that the target system should process a certain number of cycles of your program from 1 cycle up to 65535 cycles If you specify that the targe...

Page 1146: ... system into the STOP operating state 2 To execute several cycles select the menu command Test Several cycles This opens the dialog box Execute cycles 3 Specify how many cycles should be executed and confirm with OK Note Ensure that you switch the target system back into the RUN operating state if you wish to return to normal program processing To do this press the button RUN in the function bar o...

Page 1147: ...nals from the NCK remain constant throughout a cycle Data from the PLC are transferred by the firmware to the NKC or HMI at the end of the user program cycle All data of this interface are listed in the manual for SINUMERIK 828D PPU 14 5 1 PLC NCK interface These cyclic data include e g status signals Program running Program interrupted control signals Start Stop and auxiliary and G functions Data...

Page 1148: ...ays First they are entered with the change signals The M signals M0 to M99 are additionally decoded and the associated interface bits are set for one cycle For G commands only the groups selected via machine data are entered in the interface data block The S values are also entered together with the related M signals M03 M04 M05 in the spindle specific interface The axis specific feedrates are als...

Page 1149: ...with the following exceptions The exceptions include axial F value M and S value An axial F value is entered via the M S F distributor if it is transferred to the PLC during the NC machining process The M and S value are also entered via the M S F distributor if one or both values requires processing RQWURO VLJQDOV WR 1 FKDQQHO RQWURO VLJQDOV WR D HV LQ RUN RQWURO VLJQDOV IURP 1 FKDQQHO RQWURO VLJ...

Page 1150: ...800 2900 4500 5300 Setpoints to digital analog inputs outputs of the NCK Actual values from the digital analog inputs outputs of the NCK 3 83 LV VSLQGOH GULYH 3 D LV 6SLQGOH 7HFKQRORJ IXQFWLRQV ULYH LV LV VSLQGOH 6LJQDO WR 2IIVHW 3 D LV 6SLQGOH 7HFKQRORJ IXQFWLRQV ULYH LV LV VSLQGOH 6LJQDO IURP 2IIVHW 0 IXQFWLRQ IRU VSLQGOH 6 IXQFWLRQ IRU VSLQGOH Q Q Q ...

Page 1151: ...ds A_DBB x A_DBW x A_DBD x and A_DBR x 0 x 1023 see Parameter Manual System variables In this case the alignment of the data must be selected corresponding to its format i e a Dword starts at a 4 byte limit and a word at a 2 byte limit Bytes can be located at any offset within the data field Data consistency is guaranteed for byte word and Dword accesses When transferring several data the consiste...

Page 1152: ... has been stated under Data interface Page 1147 Data received from the HMI and destined for the NC are not automatically entered into the NC interface range In fact these signals and data must be marshaled by the user program It involves the following signals Program selection via lists Messenger control command General signals from to HMI Signals from to the maintenance planner Signals from opera...

Page 1153: ...eplaced by 0 7 for 1 8 variables Action See chapter 1 Specify each individual variable to be read or written for a write job Writing the variables Job specification Page 1153 2 Start job Job management Start job Page 1154 3 Test and wait until Job completed or Error in job Job management Waiting for end of job Page 1155 4 Evaluate the result interface of each individual variable for validity or er...

Page 1154: ...e the following data into the global job interface from offset 0 Number of variables DB1200 DBB1 1 8 Number of variables to be processed in the job Write variables DB1200 DBX0 1 0 Read variables from the NCK area DB1200 DBX0 1 1 Write variables into the NCK area Start DB1200 DBX0 1 1 Job is started for the specified number of variables A new job can only be started if the previous job was complete...

Page 1155: ... end of the job Job completed DB1200 DBX2000 0 1 job processing completed without error DB1200 DBX2000 0 0 otherwise is zero if the user resets Start Error in job DB1200 DBX2000 1 1 order had an error execution terminated DB1200 DBX2000 1 0 otherwise is zero if the user resets Start Possible error causes Number of variables DB1200 DBB1 out of the valid range Variable index DB1200 DBB1000 out of th...

Page 1156: ...identally resets the signal Start before one of the signals Job completed or Error in job is received then the result signals for this job are not updated However the job is executed DB1200 NC services r DBB3000 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Error has occurred Variable valid DBB3001 Access result DBW3002 DBD3004 Read value of the variables max 4 bytes DB120x DBX3000 0 variable va...

Page 1157: ...W1 Tool offset Page 1419 Variable numCuttEdgeParams Number of P elements of a cutting edge Variable linShift Translation of a settable work offset channel specific settable frames They only exist if MD18601 MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES 0 There are the frame indices Variable cuttEdgeParam r w DB120x DBB1000 1 DB120x DBB1001 DB120x DBW1002 Cutting edge No 1 numCuttEdgeParams ParameterNr WORD DB120x DBW...

Page 1158: ...me PRESET scratching 7 EXTSFRAME actual 2nd system frame PRESET scratching 8 PARTFRAME actual 3rd system frame TCARR and PAROT with orientable tool carrier 9 TOOLFRAME actual 4th system frame TOROT and TOFRAME 10 MEASFRAME result frame for workpiece and tool gauging 11 WPFRAME actual 5th system frame workpiece reference points 12 CYCFRAME actual 6th system frame cycles Variable linShift r DB120x D...

Page 1159: ... Data to NCK variable x data type of the variables REAL DB120x DBW3004 Read Data from NCK variable x data type of the variables REAL 0 Prior to program start 1 Not available due to error 2 Not available due to DISPLOF Variable actLineNumber r DB120x DBB1000 6 DB120x DBB1001 DB120x DBW1002 DB120x DBW1004 DB120x DBD1008 DB120x DBW3004 Read Data from NCK variable x data type of the variables INT Loca...

Page 1160: ...99 DB120x DBW1004 Magazine number 1 9999 DB120x DBD1008 DB120x DBW3004 Result Value of the NCK variable x 1 Blocked 2 free occupied 4 reserved for tool in buffer 8 reserved for tool to be loaded 16 occupied in left half location 32 occupied in right half location 64 occupied in upper half location 128 occupied in lower half location T number of the tool at this location TC_MPP6 Address Description...

Page 1161: ...ble r0078 0 1 r DB120x DBB1000 10 DB120x DBB1001 Number of the drive module DB120x DBW1002 DB120x DBW1004 DB120x DBD1008 DB120x DBW3004 Read Data from NCK variable x data type of the variables REAL Variable r0079 0 1 r DB120x DBB1000 11 DB120x DBB1001 Number of the drive module DB120x DBW1002 DB120x DBW1004 DB120x DBD1008 DB120x DBW3004 Read Data from NCK variable x data type of the variables REAL...

Page 1162: ...the drive module DB120x DBW1002 DB120x DBW1004 DB120x DBD1008 DB120x DBW3004 Read Data from NCK variable x data type of the variables REAL Variable TEMP_COMP_ABS_VALUE r w DB120x DBB1000 14 DB120x DBB1001 No of the axis 1 2 DB120x DBW1002 DB120x DBW1004 DB120x DBD1008 Write Data to NCK variable x data type of the variables REAL DB120x DBW3004 Read Data from NCK variable x data type of the variable...

Page 1163: ... 16 DB120x DBB1001 No of the axis 1 2 DB120x DBW1002 DB120x DBW1004 DB120x DBD1008 Write Data to NCK variable x data type of the variables REAL DB120x DBW3004 Read Data from NCK variable x data type of the variables REAL Variable TEMP_COMP_REF_POSITION r w DB120x DBB1000 17 DB120x DBB1001 DB120x DBW1002 Index 1 1 2 3 DB120x DBW1004 DB120x DBD1008 Write Data to NCK variable x data type of the varia...

Page 1164: ...gnals DB1200 DBX5000 0 1 or DB1200 DBX5000 1 1 The signals are written by the PLC operating system therefore they can only be read by the user A job has been completed if both acknowledgement signals are zero They become zero if the user resets the signal Start DB1200 DBX4000 1 after the job end Job completed DB1200 DBX5000 0 1 job processing completed without error DB1200 DBX5000 0 0 otherwise is...

Page 1165: ...ts the signal Start job execution starts After the PLC firmware signals Job completed the user resets the signal Start By resetting the signal Start the PLC firmware resets the signal Job completed After the PLC firmware signals Error in job the user resets the signal Start By resetting the signal Start the PLC firmware resets the signal Error in job If the user accidentally resets the signal Star...

Page 1166: ...then kept An initialization may only be performed when the channel is inactive If a power up is configured as the initiating event for the events triggered program call initialization must only be started after the end of the event triggered program Relevant PI parameters for PI services 1 and 2 PI service LOGOUT Reset password The password last transferred to the NCK is reset Relevant PI paramete...

Page 1167: ...s been selected If a target location is specified then a check is made as to whether the location with the specified target location number is free and suitable for the particular tool For a target magazine number 1 a search is made in a buffer for the tool corresponding to the assignment obtained from TC_MDP2 Examples When using buffers to return the tool for example Toolboy and or shifter an exp...

Page 1168: ...cular bit Note Although the name user alarms is used in the following it is only defined as to whether it involves a message or an alarm when entering the particular cancel criterion in bits 6 and 7 of machine data MD14516 x DB1600 Activating alarm r w Data block PLC HMI interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Activation of Alarm No DBB 0 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 7...

Page 1169: ...s are signaled together in one byte of the user interface This byte is structured as follows The setpoints are configured bit coded in machine data MD14516 x 0 x 247 whereby x user alarm number 700000 References Parameter Manual SINUMERIK 828D The codings of the clear criteria and the corresponding priorities are DB1600 Variable for alarm r32 w32 Data block PLC HMI interface DBD 1000 Variable for ...

Page 1170: ... 0 then disappear automatically from the display Alarms with clear criterion 0 1 are cleared by the acknowledgement bit Ack Alarms with clear criterion 1 0 are not influenced when the acknowledgement bit is set and can only be cleared by a power on Note If none of bits 0 to 4 are set for an alarm message in the machine data then this defines that it involves a so called display message that has no...

Page 1171: ...are just of a secondary nature However if one or several messages alarms are acknowledged and therefore cleared then a corresponding number of alarms messages that have been received move up in the HMI 14 6 4 PLC axis control 14 6 4 1 Overview Target The PLC can control eight axes or spindles via data blocks of the user interface the axis spindle is specified by its DB number DB380x PLC NCK interf...

Page 1172: ... the PLC axis control is called travel command present then the function is only started after this movement has ended No error code is output in this situation Axis disable With the axis disable set an axis controlled via PLC axis control will not move Only a simulated actual value is generated Behavior as with NC programming 14 6 4 2 User interface Preparing the NC axis as PLC axis axis intercha...

Page 1173: ...s are explained in the following Table 14 2 DB3900 3907 Signals from axis spindle r Data block NCK PLC interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBB 0008 PLC axis spindle Neutral axis spindle Axis interchang e possible New type requested from PLC NC axis spindle 6WDWXV QHXWUDO D LV VSLQGOH 1 D LV DQG D LV LQWHUFKDQJH SRVVLEOH 3 UHVHWV DFWLYDWLRQ VLJQDO 3 HQDEOHV D LV LV LV DVV...

Page 1174: ...tic gear selection Constant cutting rate Direction of rotation as for M4 Handwheel override Traversing dimension inches not metric Distance condition shortest distance DC Distance condition incremental IC DBB 3003 Indexing position Distance condition abs pos direction ACP Distance condition abs neg direction ACN DBD 3004 Position REAL with indexing axis DINT DBD 3008 Feedrate velocity REAL if 0 th...

Page 1175: ...Direction of rotation as for M4 0 DBX3003 0 Absolute negative direction 0 1 DBX3003 1 Absolute positive direction 0 1 DBD3004 Setpoint position setpoint distance REAL for incremental Setpoint distance DBD3008 Feedrate velocity REAL If 0 the value from MD35300 MA_SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO position control activation speed is taken DBX3000 7 Start 0 1 Reset does not result in a stop DBX2 2 Delete distance ...

Page 1176: ...C cycle The spindle comes to a standstill Spindle stationary the Fault signal is set In this case fault number 115 is output DB380x PLC NCK control signals Valid values Remark DBX3002 0 Incremental 0 Direction of rotation as for M4 1 Direction of rotation specified by M4 0 Direction of rotation specified by M3 DBX3002 1 Shortest distance 0 DBX3002 5 Direction of rotation as for M4 0 1 DBX3003 0 Ab...

Page 1177: ... DBB3003 DBB3003 Error number DBX1 4 Axis spindle stationary Function activated by user with a positive edge of Start Signals Positioning axis active and Position reached are signaled back Position reached is in this case irrelevant The user stops spindle rotation by resetting Start and setting Stop The spindle stops and the Spindle stationary signal is set The user then resets Stop Reset of Stop ...

Page 1178: ...cillation with gear stage change M42 3 Oscillation with gear stage change M43 4 Oscillation with gear stage change M44 5 Oscillation with gear stage change M45 DBD3008 Feedrate velocity REAL When oscillating no significance The oscillation speed is taken from machine data MD35400 MA_SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO DBX3000 5 Start spindle oscillation 0 1 It is not permissible that the start directly follows ...

Page 1179: ...irrelevant and is therefore not shown The user stops spindle oscillation by resetting Start and setting Stop The spindle stops and the Spindle stationary signal is set The user then resets Stop Reset of Stop causes Positioning axis active to be reset Stop is reset in the user program and Start is again set incorrectly in the same PLC cycle This means that Positioning axis active is not reset but t...

Page 1180: ...n 1 Indexing axis ON DBD3004 Setpoint position setpoint distance DINT for incremental Setpoint distance DBD3008 Feedrate velocity REAL if 0 the value is taken from machine data POS_AX_VELO unit as set in machine data DBX3000 7 Start positioning axis 0 1 Reset does not result in a stop DBX2 2 Delete distance to go spindle reset 0 1 Interrupt signal exits the function DB390x NCK PLC status signals R...

Page 1181: ...al is reset Signals Positioning axis active and Position reached are signaled back Position reached is in this case irrelevant The user stops spindle oscillation by resetting Start and setting Stop The spindle stops and the Spindle stationary signal is set The user then resets Stop Reset of Stop causes Positioning axis active to be reset 6SLQGOH VWDWLRQDU 6WRS 6WDUW UURU 3RVLWLRQ UHDFKHG 3RVLWLRQL...

Page 1182: ...ch 0 Traversing dimension metric DBD3002 3 Handwheel override 0 Override OFF DBD3004 Setpoint position setpoint distance REAL for incremental Setpoint distance DBD3008 Feedrate velocity REAL if 0 the value is taken from machine data POS_AX_VELO unit as set in machine data DBX3000 7 Start positioning axis 0 1 Reset does not result in a stop DBX2 2 Delete distance to go spindle reset 0 1 Interrupt s...

Page 1183: ...hed and Axis stationary are possibly withdrawn Positive acknowledgement Position reached 1 and Positioning axis active 1 Reset of function activation after receipt of acknowledgment Signal change via function Positioning is interrupted by delete distance to go signal duration min 1 PLC cycle The signals Position reached and Error are reset the Error number can be read in this case 30 UURU HOHWH GL...

Page 1184: ...ch 1 Traversing dimension inch DBD3002 3 Handwheel override 0 Override OFF DBD3004 Setpoint position setpoint distance REAL for incremental Setpoint distance DBD3008 Feedrate velocity REAL if 0 the value is taken from machine data POS_AX_VELO unit as set in machine data DBX3000 7 Start positioning axis 0 1 Reset does not result in a stop DBX2 2 Delete distance to go spindle reset 0 1 Interrupt sig...

Page 1185: ... cycle The signals Position reached and Error are reset the Error number can be read in this case 30 DB380x PLC NCK control signals Valid values Remark DBX3002 0 Incremental 0 1 Only one of the bits must be set if all bits are 0 then this means absolute positioning DBX3002 1 Shortest distance 0 1 DBX3002 5 Direction of rotation as for M4 0 DBX3003 0 Absolute negative direction 0 1 DBX3003 1 Absolu...

Page 1186: ...3003 DBB3003 Error number First function activation using positive edge of Start Positioning axis active 1 shows that the function is active and that the output signals are valid Position reached and Axis stationary are possibly withdrawn Positive acknowledgement Position reached 1 and Positioning axis active 1 Reset of function activation after receipt of acknowledgment Signal change via function...

Page 1187: ... dimension inch 1 Traversing dimension inch DBD3002 3 Handwheel override 1 Override ON DBD3004 Setpoint position setpoint distance REAL for incremental Setpoint distance DBD3008 Feedrate velocity REAL if 0 the value is taken from machine data POS_AX_VELO unit as set in machine data DBX3000 7 Start positioning axis 0 1 Reset does not result in a stop DBX2 2 Delete distance to go spindle reset 0 1 I...

Page 1188: ...hed and Axis stationary are possibly withdrawn Positive acknowledgement Position reached 1 and Positioning axis active 1 Reset of function activation after receipt of acknowledgment Signal change via function Positioning is interrupted by delete distance to go signal duration min 1 PLC cycle The signals Position reached and Error are reset the Error number can be read in this case 30 UURU HOHWH GL...

Page 1189: ... DBX3002 5 Direction of rotation as for M4 0 1 DBX3003 0 Absolute negative direction 0 DBX3003 1 Absolute positive direction 0 DBD3002 7 Automatic gear stage selection 1 Automatic gear stage selection ON DBD3008 Feedrate velocity REAL Spindle speed DBD3000 5 Start spindle rotation 0 1 DBX3001 5 Stop spindle rotation 0 1 DB390x NCK PLC status signals Remark DBX3000 7 Positioning axes active 1 for s...

Page 1190: ...s Positioning axis active to be reset DB380x PLC NCK control signals Valid values Remark DBX3002 0 Incremental 0 Direction of rotation as for M4 1 Direction of rotation specified by M4 0 Direction of rotation specified by M3 DBX3002 1 Shortest distance 0 DBX3002 5 Direction of rotation as for M4 0 1 DBX3003 0 Absolute negative direction 0 DBX3003 1 Absolute positive direction 0 DBD3002 2 Traversin...

Page 1191: ...03 DBB3003 Error number DBX1 4 Axis spindle stationary Function activated by user with a positive edge of Start Signals Positioning axis active and Position reached are signaled back Position reached is in this case irrelevant The user stops spindle rotation by resetting Start and setting Stop The spindle stops and the Spindle stationary signal is set The user then resets Stop Reset of Stop causes...

Page 1192: ...f rotation as for M4 0 1 DBX3003 0 Absolute negative direction 0 DBX3003 1 Absolute positive direction 0 DBD3002 2 Traversing dimension inch 1 Traversing dimension inch DBD3002 6 Const Cutting rate 1 Constant cutting rate ON DBD3008 Feedrate velocity REAL Spindle speed DBD3000 5 Start spindle rotation 0 1 DBX3001 5 Stop spindle rotation 0 1 DB390x NCK PLC status signals Remark DBX3000 7 Positionin...

Page 1193: ...set of Stop causes Positioning axis active to be reset Status Meaning Errors caused by PLC handling 1 16 01 Several functions of the axis spindle were activated simultaneously 20 16 14 A function was started without the position being reached 30 16 1e The axis spindle was transferred to the NC while still in motion 40 16 28 The axis is programmed by the NC program NCK internal error 50 16 32 Perma...

Page 1194: ...hortest distance not possible corresponds to MMC alarm 16800 126 16 7e Absolute value minus not possible corresponds to MMC alarm 16820 127 16 7f Absolute value plus not possible corresponds to MMC alarm 16810 128 16 80 No transverse axis available for diameter programming corresponds to MMC alarm 16510 130 16 82 Software end switch plus corresponds to MMC alarm 20070 131 16 83 Software end switch...

Page 1195: ...index one of the two interrupts 1 or 2 is assigned the ASUB intended for the purpose Only one ASUB can be started at one time If in a PLC cycle both start signals of the function interface described below are set to a logical 1 then the ASUBs are started in the sequence in which they are called The user must set the start signal to a logical 0 if an acknowledgement was set in the interface for the...

Page 1196: ...the result interface Job result DB3400 ASUB Job r w PLC NCK interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBB 0000 INT1 start DBB 0001 INT2 start DBB 0002 DBB 0003 DB3400 ASUB Result r PLC NCK interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBB 1000 INT1 ASUB cannot be executed Interrupt No not allocated ASUB is being executed ASUB completed DBB 1001 INT2 ASUB canno...

Page 1197: ...l flow Function activated by user with a positive edge of Start ASUB is being executed is signaled back The acknowledgement ASUB completed indicates the successful execution ASUB is being executed is withdrawn The signal to initiate the function is reset after receiving the acknowledgement from the user Signal change by the firmware Not permitted If function activation is reset prior to receipt of...

Page 1198: ...P4 PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 14 6 Function interface Basic Functions 1198 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 ...

Page 1199: ...y measuring system with at least one zero mark Incremental linear measuring system Rotary measuring system with distance coded reference marks supplied by Heidenhain Linear measuring system with distance coded reference marks supplied by Heidenhain Absolute rotary measuring system Absolute linear measuring system Referencing methods Referencing with incremental measuring systems with BERO and one ...

Page 1200: ... machine function REF reference point approach must be selected DB11 DBX1 2 REF machine function Start of reference point approach In axis specific reference point approach each machine axis must be started individually Reference point approach is started with the axis specific traversing keys DB31 DBX4 6 Traversing key minus DB31 DBX4 7 Traversing key minus Direction enable To avoid faulty operat...

Page 1201: ...ynchronized 2 DB21 DBX36 2 all axes with obligatory reference point are referenced Distance coded measuring systems In distance coded measuring systems reference point approach can be started with any traversing key Sequence The machine operator or machine manufacturer via the PLC user program is responsible for ensuring that the machine axes are referenced in the proper order Machine operator The...

Page 1202: ...hannel of the machine axis MD30550 MA_ AXCONF_ASSIGN_MASTER_CHAN For aborting the reference point approach either mode group reset or channel reset for the master channel of the machine axis must be activated DB11 DBX0 7 mode group reset DB21 DBX7 7 channel reset All machine axes that have not yet successfully completed reference point approach when the action is cancelled remain in status Not ref...

Page 1203: ...uence in which the machine axes of the channel are referenced MD34110 MA_REFP_CYCLE_NR Number The machine axes are referenced in ascending order of numbers Machine axes with the same number will be referenced simultaneously Simultaneous reference point approach of several machine axes Several machine axes can be referenced simultaneously depending on the control Start of reference point approach C...

Page 1204: ...owleged with DB21 DBX36 2 all axes with obligatory reference point are referenced Cancellation of reference point approach In channel specific reference point approach the machine axis is traversed in the channel to which that axis is currently assigned as channel axis For aborting the reference point approach either mode group reset or channel reset for the corresponding channel must be activated...

Page 1205: ...tem Programming Syntax G74Machine axis Machine axis Function Machine axes can be referenced from a part program with part program instruction G74 Parameter Machine axes The name of the machine axis must be specified The machine axis must be a channel axis of the channel in which the part program is processed Effective G74 is non modal Special features G74 must be programmed in a separate part prog...

Page 1206: ...s then derived from the combination of BERO signal and encoder zero mark Figure 15 1 Zero mark selection with BERO Zero mark evaluation with BERO must be parameterized as the referencing mode MD34200 MA_ENC_REFP_MODE 5 Negative edge evaluation In the case of a referencing operation with a negative edge evaluation of the BERO signal MD34120 MA_REFP_BERO_LOW_ACTIVE FALSE synchronization is with the ...

Page 1207: ... mark of the position measuring system encoder zero mark Phase 3 Traversing to the reference point Figure 15 2 Time sequence when referencing with incremental measuring systems example GHFHOHUDWLRQ RI UHIHUHQFH SRLQW DSSURDFK 0RWLRQ FRPPDQG SOXV 0RWLRQ FRPPDQG PLQXV DQG WUDYHUVLQJ NH SOXV PLQXV DQG UHIHUHQFHG V QFKURQL HG HUR PDUN SRVLWLRQ PHDVXULQJ V VWHP 9HORFLW 5HIHUHQFH SRLQW DSSURDFK YHORFLW ...

Page 1208: ...ioned before the reference cam 2 The machine axis is positioned on the reference cam 3 The machine axis has no reference cam Case 1 The machine axis is positioned before the reference cam After the start of reference point approach the machine axis is accelerated in the parameterized direction and to the parameterized reference point approach velocity MD34010 MA_REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS Reference poi...

Page 1209: ...for deceleration Case 2 The machine axis is positioned on the reference cam The machine axis remains at its starting position Phase 1 is now complete Reference point approach is continued with Phase 2 Case 3 The machine axis has no reference cam Machine axes without reference point cams remain at their starting position These include for example Machine axes that only have one zero mark along thei...

Page 1210: ..._REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST max distance to reference cam DB31 DBX12 7 reference point approach delay 1 15 5 4 Phase 2 Synchronization with the zero mark Phase 2 Graphic representation Figure 15 5 Phase 2 Synchronization with the zero mark 9HORFLW 3KDVH GHFHOHUDWLRQ RI UHIHUHQFH SRLQW DSSURDFK 0RWLRQ FRPPDQG SOXV 0RWLRQ FRPPDQG PLQXV DQG WUDYHUVLQJ NH SOXV PLQXV DQG UHIHUHQFHG V QFKURQL HG HUR PDUN SRVLWLR...

Page 1211: ...rence cam signal edge the machine axis accelerates to the parameterized reference point creep velocity against the parameterized reference point approach direction traversing direction of Phase 1 MD34040 MA_REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER reference point creep velocity MD34010 MA_REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS Reference point approach in minus direction After the reference cam is exited DB31 DBX12 7 0 the next enc...

Page 1212: ... approach in minus direction After the reference cam is exited DB31 DBX12 7 0 the machine axis is decelerated to stillstand The machine axis then travels back to the reference cam at the parameterized reference point creep velocity MD34040 MA_REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER reference point creep velocity After the reference cam is reached DB31 DBX12 7 1 the next encoder zero mark is awaited As soon as the...

Page 1213: ...r the cyclically calculated offset path has been covered Because the offset path sshift is calculated by the NC in IPO cycles the following minimum and maximum offset paths sshift_min and sshift_max will result The reference cam offset acts in the direction of zero mark search Prerequisite The reference cam offset is only active for machine axes for which a reference cam has been parameterized MD3...

Page 1214: ... zero mark is always detected during reference point approach Dynamic response The following factors influence the dynamic response from the arrival of the reference cam to the machine up to the detection of reference cam signals transferred from the PLC user program to the NC Switching accuracy of the reference cam switch Delay of the reference cam switch NC contact Delay at the PLC input PLC cyc...

Page 1215: ...re effects or fluctuations in the operating time of the cam signal Phase 2 Features Feedrate override is not active Internal motion with feedrate override 100 If a feedrate override of 0 is specified motion is aborted Feed stop channel specific and axis specific is active NC STOP and NC START are not active If the machine axis does not arrive at Phase 2 within the parameterized distance of the ref...

Page 1216: ...equence The machine axis moves at the assigned reference point positioning velocity MD34070 MA_REFP_VELO_POS reference point positioning velocity from the encoder zero mark detected in Phase 2 to the reference point The path sref to be covered is calculated from the sum of the reference point distance plus reference point offset MD34080 MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST reference point distance MD34090 MA_REFP_MO...

Page 1217: ...interface signal depending on the active measuring system DB31 DBX60 4 5 Referenced Synchronized 1 2 1 Features of phase 3 Feed override active Feed stop channel specific and axis specific is active NC STOP and NC START are active Special feature of phase 3 If the parameterized distance from the encoder zero mark to the reference point i e the sum of reference point distance and reference point of...

Page 1218: ...During the time in which the measuring system encoder of the machine axis is switched off POWER OFF parking the axis etc the machine axis may not be moved any further by mechanical means e g coasting axes This must be supported by the machine manufacturer with such measures as holding brakes etc and ensured by the user Otherwise the actual value system of the machine axis will no longer be synchro...

Page 1219: ...Parking of the machine axis is again deselected etc the encoder status of the active measuring system of the machine axis must have the value 2 MD34210 MA_ENC_REFP_STATE 2 That is the encoder is referenced an exact stop is reached and automatic referencing is active the next time the encoder is activated The following conditions must be fulfilled Automatic referencing is assigned for the measuring...

Page 1220: ...ult The actual value system of the machine axis is synchronized with zero The status of the machine axis is set to Not referenced DB31 DBX60 4 60 5 Referenced Synchronized 1 2 0 15 5 6 2 Position restoration with POWER ON Function In addition to the axis position incremental encoder buffering also sets the referenced status However the restored incremental encoder position is actually not the same...

Page 1221: ...re referenced For further details see also machine data MD20700 MC_REFP_NC_START_LOCK NC start lock without a home position MD34110 MA_REFP_CYCLE_NR Axis sequence for channel specific referencing The PLC prompts the display of this state with the output of a corresponding PLC message by evaluating the above NC PLC interface signals Note In the case of spindles the states Position restored and Refe...

Page 1222: ... 20 mm is all that is required to reference the machine axis Referencing can be performed from any axis position in the positive or negative direction exception end of travel range 15 6 2 Basic parameter assignment Linear measuring systems The following data must be set to parameterize linear measuring systems The absolute offset between the machine zero point and the position of the first referen...

Page 1223: ...e operator interface screen 4 Measure the current position of the machine axis with reference to the machine zero point 5 Calculate absolute offset and enter in MD34090 The absolute offset is calculated with respect to the machine coordinate system and depending on the orientation of the measuring system equidirectional or inverse as Referencing methods Referencing with distance coded reference ma...

Page 1224: ... starting reference point approach refer to Axis specific referencing and Channel specific referencing reference cam In measuring systems with distance coded reference marks reference cams are not required for the actual referencing action For functional reasons however a reference cam is required for channel specific reference point approach and reference point approach from the part program G74 ...

Page 1225: ...ine axis is stopped again and the actual value system of the machine axis is synchronized to the absolute position calculated by the NC Sequence when contact is made with reference cam during referencing Once reference point approach is started the machine axis accelerates to the assigned reference point creep velocity MD34040 MA_REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER reference point creep velocity Before the ma...

Page 1226: ...ind the last of the parameterized number of reference marks The actual value system of the machine axis is synchronized Phase 2 Sequence In Phase 2 the machine axis completes reference point approach by traversing to a defined target position reference point This action can be suppressed in order to shorten the reference point approach MD34330 MA_STOP_AT_ABS_MARKER Travel to target position normal...

Page 1227: ...oint cam 1 Properties Feedrate override is not active Machine axis moves internally when feedrate override 100 If a feedrate override of 0 is specified an abort occurs The feed stop channel specific and axis specific is active NC STOP and NC START are not active If the parameterized number of reference marks is not detected within the parameterized distance after the exit of the reference cam the ...

Page 1228: ...BP40 2BA0 MD30340 MA_MODULO_RANGE_START starting position of modulo range Note The reference point position is mapped onto the assigned ghost modulo range even with axis function Determination of reference point position rotary distance coded encoder within the configured modulo range MD30455 MA_MISC_FUNCTION_MASK axis functions BIT1 1 ...

Page 1229: ...nge in actual value Activation The activation of the actual value adjustment to the referencing measuring system is machine specifically carried out via MD34102 MA_REFP_SYNC_ENCS 1 15 7 2 Actual value adjustment to the referenced measurement system Function If a machine axis has several measuring systems and one of them is referenced the remaining measuring systems can be referenced by actual valu...

Page 1230: ...ks is used for the passive measuring system referencing can be avoided if the following conditions are met 1 Active measuring system indirect measuring system motor measuring system with absolute encoder for example 2 Passive measuring system Direct measuring system with distance coded reference marks 3 Travel movement of the machine axis with the referenced indirect measuring system before measur...

Page 1231: ...d to the actual position of the active indirect measuring system but is not marked as referenced After the parameterized number of reference marks have been crossed the passive direct measuring system is automatically referenced Referencing is performed in every operating mode Sequence 1 Initial situation Neither of the measuring systems are referenced DB31 DBX60 4 0 referenced synchronized 1 DB31...

Page 1232: ... up mode will only result with Only one encoder zero mark in the traversing range of the machine axis Linear measuring systems with distance coded reference marks Modulo rotary axes absolute position within one revolution Zero mark selection when several zero marker signals occur If several encoder zero marks are detected in the traversing range of the machine axis due to machine specific factors ...

Page 1233: ... mode If the machine axis is not operating in the follow up mode at the start of reference point traversing the normal from the NC controlled reference point travels is carried out Referencing in follow up mode can be started in the following modes JOG REF Traversing keys AUTOMATIC Part program command G74 Sequence of referencing operation JOG REF mode 1 Activate follow up mode of machine axis DB3...

Page 1234: ...ccount activation of follow up mode DB31 DBX61 3 follow up mode active 1 5 The referencing operation is started internally in the NC as soon as part program instruction G74 is processed 6 External movement of machine axis across encoder zero mark or parameterized number of distance coded reference marks 7 The measuring system is referenced after the encoder zero mark or the assigned number of dist...

Page 1235: ...e machine axis can be immediately synchronized to the determined absolute position Adjustment Adjustment of an absolute encoder involves matching the actual value of the encoder with the machine zero once and then setting it to valid The current adjustment status of an absolute value encoder is displayed in the following axis specific machine data of the machine axis to which it is connected MD342...

Page 1236: ...ayed Alarm 25022 Axis Axis identifier Encoder Number Warning 0 or when addressing the zero mark monitoring only systems with SIMODRIVE 611D Alarm 25020 Axis Axis identifier Zero mark monitoring of the active encoder In all other cases e g PRESETON it is the sole responsibility of the user by resetting the status to 0 encoder not adjusted to show the misalignment of the absolute value encoder and t...

Page 1237: ... offset 4 Marking the absolute value encoder as adjusted MD34210 MA_ENC_REFP_STATE 2 5 Initiate POWER ON reset 6 Controlling the position of the machine axis displayed on the operator interface Note The encoder adjustment does not become active until the next time the encoder is activated e g when the controller is powered up Note Backlash compensation If backlash compensation is parameterized for...

Page 1238: ...nd the reference point value Procedure 1 Set reference mode to Take over of the reference point value MD34200 MA_ENC_REFP_MODE 0 2 Traversing machine axis in the JOG mode to the e g Laser interferometer position to be measured or already known e g fixed stop 3 Communicate the position of the machine axis relative to machine zero to the NC as the reference point value MD34100 MA_REFP_SET_POS Positi...

Page 1239: ... The position value is stored in the NC as a reference point value The position is reached when the probe switches and the NC then calculates the reference point offset from the difference between the encoder value and reference point value Note Activate reference point offset permanently The entered reference point offset MD34090 will only be permanently active after POWER ON Reset If the machine...

Page 1240: ...sition relative to machine zero when probe is switched as the reference point value for all relevant machine axes MD34100 MA_REFP_SET_POS reference point value 3 Activate NCK Reset for the acceptance of the entered machine data values 4 Start part program 5 After completion of the part program re secure the partial program start for machine axes which are not referenced MD20700 MC_REFP_NC_START_LO...

Page 1241: ...rted manually in JOG REF mode or in AUTOMATIC or MDA mode from a part program G74 After a successful reference point approach the absolute encoder is calibrated the actual value system of the machine axis is synchronized and the machine axis is referenced To identify this the NC sets an interface signal for the measuring system that is currently active DB31 DBB60 4 60 5 referenced synchronized 1 2...

Page 1242: ...ence point approach with a zero mark as is usual in incremental encoders refer to Chapter Referencing in incremental measuring systems even with absolute encoders the missing HW zero marks are created in software form once every encoder revolution always at the same position within the rotation Difference compared to referencing with incremental encoders An absolute encoder with replacement zero m...

Page 1243: ...t change with position jump or during serial number change Absolute position modulo range MD34220 MA_ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO 0 1 4096 Encoder Serial No MD34230 MA_ENC_SERIAL_NUMBER 0 The value must be updated from the PLC during each encoder change otherwise loss of adjustment plus alarm Transfer of series startup files Without any restrictions Due to encoder properties MD30250 MD30270 MD34090 MD3421...

Page 1244: ...o marks are generated If no zero marks are found within MD34060 MA_REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST otherwise an alarm will be triggered A start of the zero mark search with the override of a BERO MD34200 5 is not supported MD34200 0 is to be used as a equivalent The following MD must be set if the absolute encoder retains even the referenced status through POWER OFF besides the last position MD34210 MA_ENC_R...

Page 1245: ...er display The NC stores the serial numbers read in the build up specific to the machine in the machine data MD34230 MA_ENC_SERIAL_NUMBER encoder serial number Avoiding readjustments In some special cases for example when a machine axis built on rotary axes is removed and then mounted again readjustment is not necessary desirable To avoid readjustment zero must be parameterized as a serial number ...

Page 1246: ...ation of the assigned encoder limit frequency spindles MD36300 MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT When the measuring system is activated the NC synchronizes the actual value system of the machine axis with the current absolute value Traversing is disabled during synchronization for axes but not for spindles Parameterizing the encoder limit frequency spindles The EQN 1325 absolute encoder made by Heidenhain has an ...

Page 1247: ...cle of for example 12 ms Limit speed 4 12 ms 20 000 rpm The limiting frequency corresponding to the limiting speed is calculated to be 15 9 10 Referencing variants that are not supported The following referencing variants are not supported when used with absolute encoders Referencing calibrating with encoder zero mark Distance coded reference marks BERO with two edge evaluation MD31020 MA_ENC_RESO...

Page 1248: ...e within the range of the specific maximum encoder revolutions For example the EQN 1325 rotary absolute encoder by Heidenhain supplies a unique absolute value in the range of 0 to 4 096 encoder revolutions Depending on how the encoder is connected that will result in Rotary axis with encoder on load 4096 load revolutions Rotary axis with encoder on motor 4096 motor revolutions Linear axis with enc...

Page 1249: ...nsmission ratios are permitted We recommend that you parameterize endlessly turning rotary axes with absolute encoders as modulo rotary axes traversing range 0 360 degrees MD34220 MA_ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO Otherwise the machine axis may require a very long traverse path to reach absolute zero when the measuring system is activated Machine axes with absolute encoders To ensure that the NC correctly d...

Page 1250: ...ry axis spindle 30310 ROT_IS_MODULO Modulo conversion for rotary axis spindle 30330 MODULO_RANGE Magnitude of the modulo range 30340 MODULO_RANGE_START Starting position of modulo range 30355 MISC_FUNCTION_MASK Axis functions 31122 BERO_DELAY_TIME_PLUS BERO delay time in plus direction 31123 BERO_DELAY_TIME_MINUS BERO delay time in minus direction 34000 REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE Axis with reference cam 3...

Page 1251: ...ENC_REFP_STATE Status of absolute encoder 34220 ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO Absolute encoder range for rotary encoders 34230 ENC_SERIAL_NUMBER Encoder serial number 34232 EVERY_ENC_SERIAL_NUMBER Expansion of encoder serial number 34300 ENC_REFP_MARKER_DIST Basic distance of reference marks for distance coded encoders 34310 ENC_MARKER_INC Interval between two reference marks with distance coded scales 343...

Page 1252: ...All axes referenced DB21 DBX36 2 DB3300 DBX4 2 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Follow up mode request DB31 DBX1 4 DB380x DBX1 4 Position measuring system 1 position measuring system 2 DB31 DBX1 5 6 DB380x DBX1 4 Reference point value 1 to 4 DB31 DBX2 4 7 DB380x DBX2 4 7 Traversing keys minus plus DB31 DBX4 6 7 DB380x DBX4 6 7 Decelertion of reference point approach DB31 DBX12 7 DB380x...

Page 1253: ...SA Gear change M40 to M45 Spindle axis functionality spindle becomes rotary axis and vice versa Thread cutting G33 G34 G35 Tapping without compensating chuck G331 G332 Tapping with compensating chuck G63 Revolutional feedrate G95 Constant cutting rate G96 G961 G97 G971 Programmable spindle speed limits G25 G26 LIMS Position encoder assembly on the spindle or on the spindle motor Spindle monitoring...

Page 1254: ...ng modes Control mode Oscillation mode Positioning mode Synchronous mode synchronous spindle References Function Manual Extension Functions Synchronous Spindle S3 Rigid tapping References Programming Manual Fundamentals Chapter Motion commands Axis mode The spindle can be switched from spindle mode to axis mode rotary axis if the same motor is used for spindle and axis operation ...

Page 1255: ...0 in conjunction with a new S value or by M41 to M45 The spindle only changes to oscillation mode if the new gear step is not equal to the current actual gear step Oscillation mode Control mode When the new gear is engaged the interface signal DB31 DBX84 6 Oscillation mode is reset and the interface signal DB31 DBX16 3 Gear changed 6326 0 6326 0 6326 63 2 28321 6326 0 0 0 0 63 2 0 0 0 0 0 2832 RQW...

Page 1256: ...tion the assigned axis name is used to program a change to axis mode The gear step is retained Control mode Axis mode Switching from control mode to axis mode can be also achieved by the programming of M70 In this case a rotating spindle is decelerated in the same way as for M5 position control activated and the zero parameter set selected Axis mode Control mode To terminate axis mode M3 M4 or M5 ...

Page 1257: ... of the workpiece surface Speed control mode is activated in the part program with M3 M4 M5 or with SPCOF The following NC PLC interface signal is set DB31 DBX84 7 control mode NC PLC IS DB31 DBX61 5 Position controller active is reset if position control is not used Acceleration in speed control mode is defined independently of the gear stage in the machine data MD35200 MA_GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACC...

Page 1258: ...nterface signal is reliably present at a standstill DB31 DBX61 4 axis spindle stationary If DB31 DBX61 4 axis spindle stationary is signaled and there is no closed loop position control active for the spindle an actual speed of zero is displayed at the operator interface and zero is read with the system variable AA_S n References Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface Signals and Functi...

Page 1259: ...still set The actual gear stage should correspond to the set gear stage The actual gear stage signaled is relevant for selection of the parameter set Once the gear stage change GSW has been acknowledged via the PLC DB31 DBX16 3 the spindle is in speed control mode DB31 DBX84 7 1 If a direction of rotation M3 M4 M5 or FC18 Start spindle rotation or a spindle speed S value was programmed before the ...

Page 1260: ...g to an incremental position 999999 99 degrees in relation to the last programmed position The positioning direction is defined by the sign of the path to be traversed SPOS n DC Spindle positioning across the shortest path to an absolute position 0 to 359 999 degrees The positioning direction is determined either by the current direction of spindle rotation spindle rotating or automatically by the...

Page 1261: ...nternal processing of M19 NCK positions the spindle can be disabled as shown in the following example Implicitly generated auxiliary function M19 To achieve uniformity in terms of how M19 and SPOS or SPOSA behave at the NC PLC interface auxiliary function M19 can be output to the NC PLC interface in the event of SPOS and SPOSA The two following options are available for activating this function Ch...

Page 1262: ...ing ramp 100 0 with IPOBRKA for single axis interpolation References Function Manual Extension Functions Positioning Axes P2 Block change The program advances to the next block if the end of motion criteria for all spindles or axes programmed in the current block plus the block change criterion for path interpolation are fulfilled This applies to both part program and technology cycle blocks SPOS ...

Page 1263: ...ation A coordination of the sequence of motions can be achieved with PLC MD configuration Programming in the part program PLC If the NC PLC interface signal DB31 DBX83 5 spindle in the setpoint range is not available then the channel specific NC PLC interface signal DB21 DBX 6 1 read in inhibit can be set in order to wait for a spindle to reach a certain position MD configuration Setting MD35500 M...

Page 1264: ...B31 DBX 61 4 spindle stationary taking into account the tolerance MD36060 MA_STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL WAITS is terminated and the next block loaded when the first occurrence of the signal is detected WAITS for main spindle master spindle WAITS n for spindles with number n WAITS n m for several spindles up to the maximum number of spindles CAUTION The part program author must ensure that one of the foll...

Page 1265: ...oint side target after a change in speed or direction M3 M4 Missing enable signals If the WAITS function waits for the Spindle in setpoint range signal in speed control mode and the spindle stops or fails to rotate because an enable signal axial feed enable controller pulse enable etc is missing the block is not terminated until the Spindle in setpoint range signal is active once enable signals ar...

Page 1266: ...EL Acceleration in the speed control mode The configured dynamic response during positioning can be modified by programming or by synchronized actions ACC S n value With ACC S n 0 the configured acceleration takes effect Aborting the positioning process The positioning action is aborted By the NC PLC interface signal DB31 DBX2 2 delete distance to go spindle reset With every reset e g operator pan...

Page 1267: ...dle in speed control mode encoder limit frequency not exceeded Case 3 Spindle in position control mode Case 4 Spindle speed Position control activation speed Note The speed arising from the configuration of the encoder limit frequency for the resynchronization of the encoder MD36302 MA_ENC_FREQ_LOW must be greater than the position control activation speed MD35300 MA_SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO 6326 UHY PL...

Page 1268: ...ion control activation speed with the configured acceleration MD35200 MA_GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTL_ACCEL The spindle is synchronized once the encoder limit frequency threshold is crossed Spindle speed Position control activation speed SPOS M19 or SPOSA are programmed to switch the spindle to position control mode if it is not already in that mode The configured acceleration in position control mode is ac...

Page 1269: ...ation detects when the programmed spindle position can be approached accurately at the acceleration configured in position control mode MD35210 MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL Phase 4 Spindle speed Position control activation speed The spindle brakes from the calculated braking point with machine data MD35210 MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL to the target position Spindle speed Position control activation sp...

Page 1270: ...op DB31 DBX60 7 Position reached with fine exact stop The exact stop limits are defined with the machine data MD36010 MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE exact stop fine MD36000 MA_STOP_LIMIT_COARSE exact stop coarse Note The maximum encoder limit frequency of the spindle position actual value encoder is monitored by the control it may be exceeded in position control mode the setpoint speed is reduced to 90 of the...

Page 1271: ...ool change MD31040 MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT 0 Case 2 The spindle is synchronized This is the case if after switching on the control and drive the spindle is to be rotated through a minimum of one revolution with M3 or M4 and then stopped with M5 synchronization with the zero mark before the first positioning action Figure 16 2 Positioning with stationary spindle UHY PLQ D D UHY PLQ 6326 0 63 1 B326 75 B9 ...

Page 1272: ...e reference mark If the speed defined in machine data MD35300 MA_SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO Positioning speed is reached before the spindle is synchronized the spindle will continue to rotate at the positioning activation speed it is not accelerated further Case 2 Spindle synchronized SPOS M19 or SPOSA will switch the spindle to position control mode The acceleration from the following machine data is act...

Page 1273: ...programmed spindle position can be approached accurately at the acceleration defined in machine data MD35210 MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL At the point which is determined by the braking start point calculation in Phase 1 the spindle decelerates to a standstill with the acceleration given in the following machine data MD35210 MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL Phase 3 At the point which is determined by the ...

Page 1274: ...IMIT_FINE MD36000 MA_STOP_LIMIT_COARSE Phase 3 At the point which is determined by the braking start point calculation in Phase 2 the spindle decelerates to a standstill with the acceleration given in the following machine data MD35210 MA_GEAR_STEP_ POSCTRL_ACCEL Phase 4 The spindle is stationary and it has reached the position The position control is active and stops the spindle in the programmed...

Page 1275: ...h Exact stop fine the following NC PLC interface signal is output to check the position DB31 DBX85 5 spindle in position Setting the signal Preconditions for output of signal DB31 DBX85 5 spindle in position are as follows The reference state of the spindle DB31 DBX60 4 5 referenced synchronized 1 2 1 Exact stop fine must have been reached DB31 DBX60 7 exact stop fine 1 Additionally the last progr...

Page 1276: ...lity Why axis mode For certain machining tasks e g on lathes with end face machining the spindle not only has to be rotated with M3 M4 and M5 and positioned with SPOS M19 and SPOSA but also addressed as an axis with its axis identifier e g C Prerequisites The same spindle motor is used for spindle mode and axis mode The same position measurement system or separate position measurement systems can ...

Page 1277: ...31 DBX60 0 axis no spindle 0 Axis mode can be activated in all gear steps If the position actual value encoder is installed on the motor indirect measuring system the positioning and contouring accuracy can vary for the different gear steps The gear step cannot be changed when the axis mode is active The spindle must be switched to control mode This is done with M41 M45 or M5 SPCOF In axis mode th...

Page 1278: ...ands FFWON and FFWOF Machine data Meaning MD31050 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM Measuring gear denominator MD31060 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA Numerator load gearbox MD32200 MA_POSCTRL_GAIN KV factor MD32452 MA_BACKLASH_FACTOR Weighting factor for backlash MD32610 MA_VELO_FFW_WEIGHT Weighting factor for feedforward control MD32800 MA_EQUIV_CURRCTRL_TIME Equivalent time constant current control loop for fee...

Page 1279: ...ol type must always be not equal to 0 Feedforward control should always be operated with the value 100 to avoid alarms being output during positioning Figure 16 3 Validity of parameter sets for axis and spindle modes Programming Comment SPOS M5 Controller enable off by PLC is output on PLC M70 Switch actuator by PLC on account of M70 Controller enable on by PLC C NC traverses with axis parameter s...

Page 1280: ...r less the same as the time required to execute a programmed M70 block Differences may arise in the event of short switchovers when the spindle is stationary no braking time if the implicit generation and output of the auxiliary function M70 to the PLC is dispensed with see MD35035 Transition from positioning mode M19 SPOS SPOSA to axis mode The transition is executed immediately and without the g...

Page 1281: ...on to ensure there are criteria for the transition to axis mode If the spindle is in speed control mode the instruction M70 or SPOS must be programmed prior to programming as an axis Otherwise alarm signals occur during axis programming FC 18 As with synchronized actions transition to axis mode must also be undertaken on the application side in FC 18 e g through preparatory positioning instruction...

Page 1282: ...ions Invalid transition from speed control mode to axis mode Configuration MD35035 MA_SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK bit 20 1 N15 C77 Output of the implicit M70 to the PLC no intermediate block Program code Comment WHEN COND1 TRUE DO SPOS 180 WHEN COND2 TRUE DO POS C 270 Output of the implicit M70 to the PLC Program code Comment WHEN COND11 TRUE DO M3 S1000 WHEN COND12 TRUE DO M70 Output of M70 to the PLC WH...

Page 1283: ...20 MA_SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE Time when the spindle basic setting takes effect The time when the spindle basic setting takes effect is set in the machine data MD35030 MA_SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK Value Spindle basic setting 0 Speed control mode position control deselected 1 Speed control mode position control activated 2 Positioning mode 3 Axis mode Value Effective time 0 POWER ON 1 POWER ON and program s...

Page 1284: ... rotary axis This process is known as referencing The sequence of operations required to home an axis is known as homing Only a homed axis can approach a programmed position accurately on the machine References For further explanations about referencing the rotary axis see Function Description R1 Reference point approach Page 1199 Installation position of the position measurement system The positi...

Page 1285: ...sary the direction of motion is inverted prior to positioning Crossing the zero mark in JOG mode by means of direction keys in speed control mode Note If does not make any difference whether the synchronization procedure is initiated from the part program FC 18 or synchronized actions Note During synchronization of the spindle all four possible home position values are effective depending on the m...

Page 1286: ...dure see Function Description R1 Reference point approach Page 1199 The rotary axis is referenced at the same time as the spindle is synchronized see section Synchronization procedure if the position measuring system used for the spindle is also used for the rotary axis MD34200 7 The setting MD34200 MA_ENC_REFP_MODE 7 only executes position synchronization at a velocity speed which is fixed in mac...

Page 1287: ...le positioning SPOS M19 and SPOSA Thread cutting G33 G34 G35 Tapping without compensating chuck G331 G332 Revolutional feedrate G95 Constant cutting rate G96 G961 G97 G971 Spindle actual speed display Axis mode Synchronous spindle setpoint value linkage Resynchronizing the position measuring system for the spindle In the following cases the spindle position measurement system must be resynchronize...

Page 1288: ... when machining with tool orientation see Restoration of position after POWER OFF Page 1218 The following NC PLC interface signals display the state of the position measuring system after position restoration DB31 DBX71 4 Restored 1 for position measuring system 1 DB31 DBX71 5 Restored 2 for position measuring system 2 Once the tool has been retracted in the JOG mode axes whose positions have been...

Page 1289: ...type of gear stage change is set in machine data MD35010 MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE Machine data Meaning MD35012 MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_POSITION n gear stage change position MD35110 MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO n Maximum speed for automatic gear stage change MD35120 MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO n Minimum speed for automatic gear stage change MD35130 MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT n Maximum speed of gear stage MD35135...

Page 1290: ...ith a non variable transmission ratio basic setting The machine data of the first gear stage are effective 1 Spindle motor with up to 5 gear stages The gear stage change takes place in oscillation mode at indefinite change position 1 0 Meaning as in Bit 0 0 1 Meaning as in Bit 0 1 however the gear stage change takes place at the configured spindle position The change position is set in machine dat...

Page 1291: ...BLE Bit 5 1 in synchronized actions using DO M40 S Automatic gear stage selection to the programmed speed S DO M41 M45 Direct selection of gear stages 1 5 DO M70 For MD35014 MA_GEAR_STEP_USED_IN_AXISMODE 1 5 through the PLC using the FC18 function block in the reset state through description of NC PLC interface DB31 DBX16 0 16 2 actual gear stage A to C The mechanically active gear stage can be co...

Page 1292: ...J PD Q PD Q PD J PLQ J 6SHFLILDEOH XVLQJ 0 5B67 3B0 B9 2 0RWRU VSHHG 6SLQGOH VSHHG UHY PLQ 0D PRWRU VSHHG HDU VWHS HDU VWHS Q WKH FDVH RI DXWRPDWLF JHDU VWHS VHOHFWLRQ WKLV VSHHG UDQJH LV QRW XWLOL HG WR IXOO DGYDQ WDJH LQ JHDU VWHS 0D LPXP VSLQGOH VSHHG IRU JHDU VWHS 0LQLPXP VSLQGOH VSHHG IRU JHDU VWHS DXWRPDWLF JHDU VWHS VHOHFWLRQ 0D LPXP VSLQGOH VSHHG IRU JHDU VWHS DXWRPDWLF JHDU VWHS VHOHFWLRQ...

Page 1293: ...xis Spindle stationary with NC PLC IS DB31 DBX18 5 Oscillation speed In principle the new gear stage can also be engaged without oscillation When the new gear stage is engaged the following NC PLC interface signals are set by the PLC program DB31 DBX16 0 16 2 actual gear stage A to C DB31 DBX16 3 gear is changed 2 End of gear stage change The gear stage change is treated as completed spindle opera...

Page 1294: ...tapping without compensation chuck G331 G332 so that an effective adjustment of spindle speed and motor torque can be achieved The activation is undertaken by setting the following bit for the master spindle MD35010 MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE Bit 5 1 The number of used gear stages of the two gear stage datasets is defined with the machine data MD35092 MA_NUM_GEAR_STEPS2 The second gear stage block...

Page 1295: ... are set DB31 DBX82 3 change over gear stage DB31 DBX82 0 82 2 setpoint gear stage A to C While the appropriate gear stage is being determined a gear stage change is only requested if the new speed is not within the permissible speed range of the active gear stage The speed is limited to the maximum speed of the current gear stage or raised to the minimum speed of the current gear stage and the ap...

Page 1296: ...ers to this permanently defined gear stage Note In the case of M40 the spindle must be in open loop control mode for automatic gear stage selection with an S word Otherwise the gear stage change is rejected and the following alarm is set Alarm 22000 gear stage change is not possible Note An active reduction gear is not considered in the selection for the automatic gear stage change 6SHHG 0D LPXP V...

Page 1297: ... the following NC PLC interface signal were set DB21 DBX6 1 read in disable Specification of gear stage via PLC with FC18 The gear stage change can also be performed by function block FC18 during a part program in the reset state or in all operating modes If the speed and direction of rotation is specified with FC18 the NC can be requested to select the gear stage as appropriate for the speed This...

Page 1298: ...he part program must be in the reset state Boundary conditions Transfer of the gear stage to the NC is initiated when NC PLC IS DB31 DBX16 0 16 2 Actual gear stage A to C changes These three bits must be set continuously during operation Successful transfer is acknowledged with NC PLC IS DB31 DBX82 0 82 2 Set gear stage A to C to the PLC NC PLC IS DB31 DBX16 3 Gear changed must not be set If posit...

Page 1299: ...M3 M4 FC18 Start spindle rotation then the last speed and direction of rotation will become active again after the gear stage change In the new gear stage the spindle accelerates to the last spindle speed programmed S If position control was active before the gear stage change SPCON then it is reactivated after the gear stage change The next block in the part program can be executed Special featur...

Page 1300: ... the motor and load workpiece tool is interrupted This state can occur e g when pressing Reset or Emergency Stop while performing a gear stage change or when the machine is commissioned for the first time while it is being installed The control must identify this state where the gear train is open and the next gear stage change request must be unconditionally executed Function When the gear is dis...

Page 1301: ...ng gear stage 0 is the general enable of the gear stage change via via machine data MD35010 MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE assign parameters to the gear stage change MD35090 MA_NUM_GEAR_STEPS number of gear stages set up MD35092 MA_NUM_GEAR_STEPS2 2nd gear stage data set Number of gear stages that have been created if MD35010 MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE bit 5 1 tapping without compensating chuck PLC us...

Page 1302: ... gear stage change acknowledgement If the gear stage is selected then from the PLC the following NC PLC interface signal is set DB31 DBX16 3 gear is changed Actual gear stage 1 signaled to the NC DB31 DBX16 0 1 DB31 DBX16 1 0 DB31 DBX16 2 0 7 N80 is executed Due to the optimization of the gear stage change frequency in the part program the gear stage is not changed Part program Configuring data fo...

Page 1303: ...R n Active spindle gear stage AC_SGEAR reads the setpoint gear stage in the main run Value range 1 5 The data set for the spindle is activated corresponding to this gear stage Note For a search the actual gear stage VC_SGEAR n can differ from the setpoint gear stage AC_SGEAR n as during the search no gear stage change takes place Therefore using VC_SGEAR n and AC_SGEAR n it can be interrogated whe...

Page 1304: ...rameters with the following assignment is provided by the NC for each of the 5 gear stages Value Meaning 0 In system parameter set selection The parameter sets of the servo are assigned permanently The following applies For axes and spindles in the axis mode the first parameter set is active in principle Exception For G33 G34 G35 G331 and G332 for the axes involved the parameter set with the follo...

Page 1305: ...gear stage which is activated in spindle mode prior to M70 is not automatically loaded again See also Configurable gear step in M70 Page 1320 Load gearbox transmission ratio It is possible to configure positive or negative load gearbox factors for each gear stage and in axis mode The setting is undertaken separately for numerator and denominator via the machine data MD31050 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM...

Page 1306: ...e gear is configured with machine data MD31044 MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT2 Encoder on intermediate gear Change parameters for these machine data can be activated with NewConfig either using the SinuCOM NC commissioning software or via a softkey on the operator panel HMI The existing motor load gearboxes on the other hand are active after POWER ON Tool change If the intermediate gear is changed at the same t...

Page 1307: ...red in machine data MD10192 MN_GEAR_CHANGE_WAIT_TIME If the gear step change is not acknowledged within this time the NC will output an alarm Further events Events that initiate reorganization will also wait until a gear step change is completed The time entered in machine data MD10192 MN_GEAR_CHANGE_WAIT_TIME determines how long the control waits before executing the gear step change If this time...

Page 1308: ...X82 0 82 2 Set gear step A to C to the PLC 16 4 7 Gear step change with oscillation mode What is oscillation Oscillation in this context means that the spindle motor rotates alternately in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions This oscillation movement makes it easy to engage a new gear step Oscillation mode NC PLC IS DB31 DBX82 3 Change gear displays that a gear step change is required In...

Page 1309: ...p being defined by the NC the spindle does not change to oscillation mode Oscillation mode is activated with NC PLC IS DB31 DBX18 5 Oscillation speed Depending on NC PLC IS DB31 DBX18 4 Oscillation via PLC while the function is in operation a distinction is made between Oscillation via NCK Oscillation via PLC Oscillation with FC 18 References Function Manual Basic Functions PLC Basic Program P3 Os...

Page 1310: ...ed the spindle motor accelerates in the opposite direction to the speed defined in machine data MD35400 MA_SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO Time t2 t1 starts Phase 3 If time t2 t1 has passed the spindle motor accelerates in the opposite direction same direction as in Phase 1 to the speed defined in machine data MD35400 MA_SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO Time t1 t2 starts The process continues with Phase 2 Oscillation ...

Page 1311: ... the gear step change procedure and should therefore only be set as necessary If NC PLC IS DB31 DBX18 5 Oscillation speed is reset oscillation mode stops However the spindle remains in oscillation mode The acceleration is defined in the following machine data MD35410 MA_SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL The spindle will cease to be synchronized if an indirect measuring system motor encoder is used If the machine...

Page 1312: ...age NC PLC IS DB31 DBX18 5 Oscillation enable can be set by the PLC The spindle motor then performs an oscillation motion with preset values The oscillation motion is designed to facilitate and accelerate the re engaging of the gear wheels Writing of NC PLC IS DB31 DBX16 0 16 2 Actual gear step A to C by the PLC Once the PLC has sent DB31 DBX16 3 Gear changed to the NCK the last movement to be act...

Page 1313: ...6 4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 1313 Figure 16 6 Block change following oscillation mode UHY PLQ 6SLQGOH VSHHG 7LPH V 6 HDU FKDQJHG ORFN FKDQJH RFFXUV KHUH ...

Page 1314: ...quence for the gear step change with a spindle 3URJUDPPHG 6 YDOXH LUVW JHDU VWDJH HQJDJHG PHFKDQLFDO 6HFRQG JHDU VWDJH HQJDJHG PHFKDQLFDO QWHUQDO IHHG GLVDEOH 6SLQGOH VSHHG RVFLOODWLRQ VSHHG FRQWURO PRGH RVFLOODWLRQ PRGH JHDU LV FKDQJHG FKDQJH JHDU VWDJH VHW JHDU VWDJH VSLQGOH LQ VHWSRLQW UDQJH VSLQGOH VWDWLRQDU DFWXDO JHDU VWDJH W W W W 7 7 ...

Page 1315: ..._GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_POSITION If the gear stage change is performed out of a movement then the current direction of rotation is maintained The spindle is in positioning mode during the positioning action NC PLC IS DB31 DBX84 5 positioning mode is output If no reference is available DB31 DBX60 4 5 0 or NC PLC IS t1 With the programming of S1300 NCK detects a new gear step second gear step sets NST DB3...

Page 1316: ..._IS_DIRECT 0 If a measuring system with a direct encoder load encoder is active position control is deactivated DB31 DBX61 5 0 because the induction flux to the load is interrupted and closed loop position control is no longer possible If position controlled operation is not possible it can be disabled by resetting Controller enable DB31 DBX2 1 0 Mechanical switchover of the gear stage on the mach...

Page 1317: ...nce for the gear stage change at fixed position 3URJUDPPHG 6 YDOXH LUVW JHDU VWDJH HQJDJHG PHFKDQLFDO 6HFRQG JHDU VWDJH HQJDJHG PHFKDQLFDO QWHUQDO IHHG GLVDEOH 6SLQGOH VSHHG RVFLOODWLRQ VSHHG FRQWURO PRGH RVFLOODWLRQ PRGH JHDU LV FKDQJHG FKDQJH JHDUV VHW JHDU VWDJH VSLQGOH LQ VHW UDQJH VSLQGOH VWDWLRQDU DFWXDO JHDU VWDJH SRVLWLRQLQJ PRGH H DFW VWRS ILQH W W W W W ...

Page 1318: ...f the system is unable to reach the preset position then alarm 22020 is signaled and the gear stage change dialog between NCK and PLC does not take place in order not to destroy the gears As this alarm is serious the part program cannot continue and the cause must be eliminated under all circumstances Experience has shown that the abortion of positioning is usually due to incorrect MD settings or ...

Page 1319: ...5210 MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL The acceleration can be changed proportionally by programming ACC Sn Speed dependent acceleration The knee shaped acceleration characteristic is effective as in positioning with SPOS or FC18 Jerk It is currently not possible to limit the change in acceleration End of positioning The transition between the end of the positioning action DB31 DBX84 5 and the start of o...

Page 1320: ... be possible to execute SPOS from the part program from a synchronized action or via FC18 Start spindle positioning without errors Unless all requirements can be met the function described cannot be used successfully Activation The function of gear stage change at fixed position is activated by the configuration MD35010 MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE 2 16 4 9 Configurable gear step in M70 Technical ba...

Page 1321: ...nction is supported The sequence in M70 is then extended by the time it takes to position the spindle The position is approached at the current gear step Transition to axis mode without programming M70 The control system detects the transition to axis mode automatically from the program sequence see Implicit transition to axis mode Page 1280 and generates the requisite M70 sequence including the g...

Page 1322: ...on to axis mode if necessary Dry run feedrate DryRun Bit 0 0 When the DryRun function is active for part program blocks gear stages are changed with M40 M41 to M45 or programming via FC18 and synchronized actions Bit 0 1 When the DryRun function is active for part program blocks a gear stage change is suppressed with M40 M41 to M45 programming via FC18 and synchronized actions Program test and SER...

Page 1323: ...tage requested by the part program must be identified and selected It cannot be assured that the remainder of the part program will run without errors until the correct gear stage has been activated Any necessary gear stage change is performed in the system REPOS started on deselection if the spindle is in speed control mode A complete gear stage change dialog takes place with the PLC and the last...

Page 1324: ...1st gear stage is selected M0 Part program stops PI service Activate dry run feedrate DryRun Configuring N10 M42 2nd gear stage requested no gear stage change takes place N11 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 Positioning axes N12 M0 Part program stops PI service Deactivate dry run feedrate DryRun REORG and REPOS are performed now the gear stage change to the 2nd gear stage takes place N20 G1 Z100 F1000 N99 M30 Part pro...

Page 1325: ...movements via PLC interface Page 1335 10 For the master spindle the value of the 15th G group feedrate type can be accepted in setting data SD43206 SA_SPIND_SPEED_TYPE spindle speed type for spindle start via the PLC interface See Special spindle movements via PLC interface Page 1335 12 Bit 12 0 Spindle override is not effective for the zero mark search with M19 SPOS or SPOSA 0 Bit 12 1 Spindle ov...

Page 1326: ...g in the channel Every logical spindle used in the part program is assigned a physical spindle in a table comprising setting data SD42800 SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB n spindle number converter Index n corresponds to the programmed spindle number or the programmed address extension The contents of the particular SD is the physical spindle that is actually available The spindle number converter is effective...

Page 1327: ... channel whose table is changed should be in Reset status or the spindle to be changed should not be used in the running part program A synchronized response can be achieved by means of a STOPRE preprocessor stop The multiple mapping of logical to physical spindles is not prevented in the NC However with the display of logical spindle in the operator interface there are ambiguities corresponding t...

Page 1328: ... MD20092 MC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB_ENABLE 1 Activate spindle number converter SD42800 SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB 0 1 Master spindle as configured SD42800 SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB 1 1 Basic setting of the table SD42800 SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB 2 2 SD42800 SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB 3 3 SD42800 SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB 4 0 Logical spindle not assigned M3 S1000 Address extension 1 M1 3 S1 1000 is output The spindle with configured No ...

Page 1329: ... SD42800 SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB 0 2 defined internally by NCK M5 Master spindle address extension 2 the unset spindle number is output M3 5 The physical spindle configured with number 3 stops GET S4 Alarm 16105 as logical spindle 4 cannot be switched RELEASE S1 Channel spindle 1 physical Spindle 5 is enabled M30 ...

Page 1330: ...mming M3 M4 M5 S SVC SPOS M19 SPOSA M40 M41 to M45 and WAITS without entering the spindle number The current master spindle setting can be retained via RESET part program end and part program start The setting is done via the machine data MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK MD20112 MC_START_MODE_MASK M3 M n 3 Clockwise spindle rotation for the master spindle Clockwise spindle rotation for spindle number n ...

Page 1331: ...f the travel path If the spindle is in motion the direction of travel is inverted as necessary to allow traversing in the programmed direction If the zero mark is crossed during traversing the spindle is automatically synchronized with the zero mark if no reference is available or if a new one has been requested via an interface signal M19 M n 19 Positioning the master spindle to the position in S...

Page 1332: ...S n for spindle operating modes Axis identifier e g C for axis operation The correction value refers to for spindles in axis operation if MD30455 Bit 6 0 to the configured maximum axis velocity MD32000 MA_MAX_AX_VELO for spindles in spindle or axis operation if MD30455 bit 6 1 to the maximum speed of the active gear unit stage MD35130 MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT n For further explanations about th...

Page 1333: ...tem variables P_PFRAME SPI n TR value P_PFRAME CTRANS X axis value Y axis value SPI n axis value P_PFRAME CSCALE X scale Y scale SPI n scale P_PFRAME CMIRROR S n Y Z P_UBFR CTRANS A 10 CFINE 19 0 1 For further explanations about the programming of SPI see References Programming Manual Work Preparation M40 M n 40 Automatic gear stage selection for the master spindle Automatic gear stage selection f...

Page 1334: ...cordance with the programming in the part program An axis replacement is necessary in order to run the function Once the gear step change has been performed the spindle status is neutral same response to M3 M4 M5 programming References For further explanations regarding the programming of the spindle as well as spindle movements from synchronized actions refer to Programming Manual Job Planning Fu...

Page 1335: ...n the acceptance status A spindle job is always started on the Low High edge of an internal DBB30 signal Generally the internal DBB30 start signals do not have any meaning in the static status and do not prevent the spindle being programmed by FC18 synchronized actions the part program or JOG traversing movements e g when the STOP signal is statically at 1 Preconditions In order that spindle jobs ...

Page 1336: ...vable that the acceptance range will be indicated to the operator by a user side PLC application Spindle jobs outside the acceptance range can also be carried out using FC18 or ASUB Bit 4 1 The programmed speedS including speed setpoints via FC18 and synchronized actions are accepted in the following setting data SD43200 SA_SPIND_S speed for spindle start via PLC interface Programmed S values that...

Page 1337: ...t speed are active Setpoint speed for JOG For the following MD configuration MD35035 MA_SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK bit 5 1 the content from SD43200 SA_SPIND_S is active as setpoint speed for JOG You can use the JOG keys to operate the spindle at the speed defined in SD43200 If the content is zero other JOG speed definitions are active see SD41200 SN_JOGSPIND_SET_VELO Note The setting data is written imme...

Page 1338: ...pretation of the written values Further explanations regarding the system of units metric inch can be found in References Function Manual Basic Functions Velocities Setpoint Actual Value Systems Closed Loop Control G2 Definition via FC18 If the constant cutting rate is defined using FC18 the setting of bit 6 in byte 2 in the Signals to concurring positioning axes area determines how the speed valu...

Page 1339: ...SA_M19_SPOS spindle position for spindle positioning with M19 SD43250 SA_M19_SPOSMODE spindle position approach mode for spindle positioning with M19 16 7 5 External programming PLC HMI SD43300 and SD42600 The revolutional feedrate behaviour can be selected externally via the axial setting data SD43300 SA_ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE Rotational feedrate for spindles in JOG operating mode using the c...

Page 1340: ... 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 FPRAON S2 A Revolutional feedrate for spindle S2 ON derived from axis A The revolutional feedrate value must be specified with FA Sn FPRAOF S2 Revolutional feedrate for spindle S2 OFF SPI n It is also possible to program SPI n instead of SPI Sn ...

Page 1341: ... spindle monitoring functions speeds 6SLQGOH VSHHG 0D LPXP HQFRGHU OLPLW IUHTXHQF 0D LPXP VSLQGOH VSHHG 0LQLPXP VSLQGOH VSHHG IRU FXUUHQW JHDU VWHS 6 LV 6SLQGOH VWDWLRQDU Q Q PLQ 6SHHG UDQJH RI VSLQGOH RU VSLQGOH FKXFN 0D LPXP VSLQGOH VSHHG IRU FXUUHQW JHDU VWHS 3URJUDPPDEOH VSLQGOH VSHHG OLPLW 06 3URJUDPPDEOH PLQLPXP VSLQGOH VSHHG 6SHHG UDQJH RI FXUUHQW JHDU VWHS 6SHHG UDQJH RI FXUUHQW JHDU VWHS ...

Page 1342: ... spindle is stopped in the open loop control mode M5 then path feed is deactivated if the following machine data is set MD35510 MA_SPIND_STOPPED_AT_IPO_START feedrate enable for spindle stopped The path feed is re enabled if the spindle comes to a standstill 16 8 3 Spindle in setpoint range Function Spindle in setpoint range spindle monitoring checks whether The programmed spindle speed is reached...

Page 1343: ...tolerance range of the setpoint speed is defined by the spindle speed tolerance factor MD35150 MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL Example MD35150 MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL 0 1 The spindle actual speed may deviate 10 from the setpoint speed The following NC PLC interface signal is set to 1 if the spindle actual speed lies within the tolerance range DB31 DBX83 5 spindle in setpoint range 1 Special case If the spindl...

Page 1344: ...1 DBX83 2 Setpoint speed restricted The minimum gear stage speed is effective only in speed mode and can only be undershot by Spindle override 0 M5 S0 DB31 DBX4 3 spindle stop DB31 DBX2 1 withdraw controller enable DB21 DBX7 7 reset DB31 DBX2 2 delete distance to go spindle reset DB31 DBX18 5 oscillation speed DB21 DBX7 4 NC STOP axes plus spindles DB31 DBX1 3 axis spindle disable DB31 DBX16 7 del...

Page 1345: ...aluation of diagnosis data The system variables for each spindle can be read via synchronized actions and in the part program giving due consideration to the preprocessing stop in the NCK System variable Meaning AC_SMAXVELO n Maximum possible spindle speed rpm resulting from the active limiting data AC_SMAXVELO_INFO n Specification of the speed limiting data as numerical value AC_SMINVELO n Minimu...

Page 1346: ...XM AA_VMAXB and AA_VLFCT The following control response is obtained for a type SERUPRO block search The system variable AC_SMAXVELO AC_SMAXACC delivers the maximum representable speed acceleration AC_SMAXVELO_INFO and AC_SMAXACC_INFO deliver the VALUE 0 no limitation is active AC_SMINVELO and AC_SMINVELO_INFO deliver data as in case of normal part program processing AC_SPIND_STATE returns the stat...

Page 1347: ... and spindles of the channel are braked precondition encoder is still functioning Additional speed limiting by the user Using the following setting data the machine operator also has the option of setting a maximum permissible spindle speed e g to adapt the upper speed limit to the maximum speed of the currently mounted chuck after a chuck change SD43235 SA_SPIND_USER_VELO_LIMIT maximum spindle sp...

Page 1348: ...quency is exceeded NC PLC IS DB31 DBX60 4 Homed Synchronized 1 or DB31 DBX60 5 Homed Synchronized 2 are reset for the measurement system in question and NC PLC IS DB31 DBX60 2 encoder limit frequency 1 exceeded or DB31 DBX60 3 encoder limit frequency 2 exceeded are set If the spindle is in axis mode the maximum encoder limit frequency must not be exceeded The maximum velocity MD32000 MA_MAX_AX_VEL...

Page 1349: ...r frequency cannot be exceeded Spindle positioning mode axis mode Thread cutting G33 G34 G35 Tapping without compensating chuck G331 G332 does not apply to G63 Revolutional feedrate G95 Constant cutting rate G96 G961 G97 G971 SPCON 16 8 8 End point monitoring End point monitoring During positioning the spindle is in positioning mode the system monitors the distance from the spindle with reference ...

Page 1350: ... machine data MD36000 MA_STOP_LIMIT_COARSE Exact stop limit coarse and MD36010 MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE Exact stop limit fine are output to the PLC using NC PLC IS DB31 DBX60 7 Position reached with exact stop coarse and DB31 DBX60 6 Position reached with exact stop fine Block change for SPOS and M19 When positioning the spindle with SPOS or M19 the block is changed dependent on end point monitoring wit...

Page 1351: ...the minimum speed of the first gear stage MD35120 MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO 1 If MD35120 MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO 1 0 is configured then when programming S0 the first gear stage is selected If MD35120 MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO 1 0 is configured when programming S0 no gear stage change is performed and the last gear stage remains active This means that it remains possible to stop the spindle with S0 instead o...

Page 1352: ...uest a gear stage change special handling S0 N95 S5 M3 S5 is less than MD35120 of the 1st gear stage The 1st gear stage is selected MD35010 MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE AX5 1 Enable gear stage change MD35090 MA_NUM_GEAR_STEPS AX5 2 Number of existing gear stages MD35110 MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO 1 AX5 500 Upper switching threshold for gear stage 1 MD35120 MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO 1 AX5 10 Lower switching t...

Page 1353: ...bles NC PLC interface signals Requirement The spindle is connected to the drive via Sensor Module SMI 24 using DRIVE CLiQ Drive telegram 139 is configured for the spindle 16 9 2 Sensor data Sensors in the spindle motor The spindle sensors provide information about the clamping device and the angular position of the motor shaft Analog sensor S1 Clamped state Voltage value in the range from 0 10 V d...

Page 1354: ...control must not be part of an axis container whose axes are distributed over several NCUs via an NCU link Meaning System variable VA_ NC PLC interface DB31 OPI variables Drive parameters Sensor configuration MOT_SENSOR_CONF axis DBB132 vaMotSensorConf r5000 Clamped state 1 MOT_CLAMPING_STATE axis DBW134 vaMotClampingState r5001 Measured value analog sensor S1 2 MOT_SENSOR_ANA axis DBW136 vaMotSen...

Page 1355: ...s state values 1 2 and 11 a limit value of 0 rpm permanently applies In the various clamped states the control limits the spindle speed to the applicable limit Note The subsequently described evaluation of sensor S1 to generate the state value for the clamped state and limiting the spindle speed are only realized if the following state values are displayed in drive parameter r5000 r5000 0 1 Sensor...

Page 1356: ...lamped without tool is displayed in drive parameter r5044 A value of 65535 means that the speed limit is not active State value 1 Clamped state Voltage range 2 Speed limit Upper limit Lower limit 0 Sensor S1 not available or state values inactive 1 State initialization running 3 2 Released with signal error state p5041 0 p5040 3 3 Released p5041 0 p5041 1 p5043 0 4 Clamping with tool p5043 1 5 Rel...

Page 1357: ...S value P_SEARCH_DIR Collected direction of rotation P_SEARCH_GEAR Collected gear step Collected S value Direction of rotation Gear step 0 last speed 5 40 last GS N05 G94 M40 M3 S1000 1000 3 40 N10 G96 S222 222 3 40 N20 G97 f PlanAxPosPCS 3 40 N30 S1500 1500 3 40 N40 SPOS 0 1500 19 40 N50 M19 1500 19 40 N60 G94 G331 Z10 S300 300 19 40 N70 M42 300 19 42 N80 M4 300 4 42 N90 M70 300 70 42 N100 M3 M40...

Page 1358: ...escription 20090 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND Initial setting for master spindle on channel 20092 SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB_ENABLE Enabling disabling of spindle converter 20850 SPOS_TO_VDI Output of M19 to the PLC with SPOS SPOSA 22400 S_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET S function active after RESET Number Identifier MA_ Description 30300 IS_ROT_AX Rotary axis 30310 ROT_IS_MODULO Modulo conversion 31044 ENC_IS_DIRECT2 ...

Page 1359: ...EAR_STEPS2 2nd gear step data set Number of installed gear steps 35100 SPIND_VELO_LIMIT Maximum spindle speed 35110 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO n Maximum speed for automatic gear stage change 35112 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 n 2nd gear step data set Maximum speed for automatic gear stage change 35120 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO n Minimum speed for automatic gear stage change 35122 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 n 2nd gear step data ...

Page 1360: ...in JOG mode 42800 SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB Spindle number converter 42900 MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH Mirror tool length offset 42910 MIRROR_TOOL_WEAR Mirror wear values of tool length compensation 42920 WEAR_SIGN_CUTPOS Mirror wear values of machining plane 42930 WEAR_SIGN Invert sign of all wear values 42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST Retain the assignment of tool length components when changing the machining plane G17 t...

Page 1361: ...itoring with gear change DB31 DBX16 6 DB380x DBX2000 6 Delete S value DB31 DBX16 7 DB380x DBX2000 7 Feedrate override for spindle valid DB31 DBX17 0 DB380x DBX2001 0 Resynchronize spindle during positioning 1 DB31 DBX17 4 DB380x DBX2001 4 Resynchronize spindle during positioning 2 DB31 DBX17 5 Invert M3 M4 DB31 DBX17 6 DB380x DBX2001 6 Oscillation via PLC DB31 DBX18 4 DB380x DBX2002 4 Oscillation ...

Page 1362: ...ode DB31 DBX84 4 DB390x DBX2002 4 Active spindle positioning mode DB31 DBX84 5 DB390x DBX2002 5 Active spindle mode oscillation mode DB31 DBX84 6 DB390x DBX2002 6 Active spindle control mode DB31 DBX84 7 DB390x DBX2002 7 Spindle actually reached in position DB31 DBX85 5 DB390x DBX2003 5 M function for spindle DB31 DBB86 87 DB370x DBD0000 S function for spindle DB31 DBB88 91 DB370x DBD0004 Sensors ...

Page 1363: ...t cutting rate G96 G961 Constant speed G97 G971 Feed rate for thread cutting G33 G34 G35 Feedrate for tapping with compensating chuck G63 Feedrate for tapping without compensating chuck G331 G332 Feedrate for chamfer rounding FRC FRCM Non modal feedrate FB Programmable run in run out path for G33 The thread run in and run out path can be programmed The thread axis is accelerated or braked inside t...

Page 1364: ...ly regarded as a fixed modal value FLIN An Fvalue programmed in the block is traversed linearly over the path from the current value at the beginning of the block to the end of the block and is subsequently regarded as modal value FCUB The blockwise programmed Fvalues are relative to the end of the block connected by a spline The spline starts and ends tangentially to the previous or following fee...

Page 1365: ...FB A separate feedrate can be specified for an individual block with the FB command The earlier active path feedrate is overwritten for this block the earlier effective modal path feedrate is active again after this block Programmable single axis dynamic response The dynamic response of individual axes can be changed in a targeted manner via programming Percentage acceleration override ACC in part...

Page 1366: ...nd is observed in every type of interpolation even where allowance is made for tool offsets The value programmed under the address F remains in a program until a new F value or a new type of feedrate is programmed Value range for path feedrate F References Programming Manual Fundamentals Function Manual Basic Functions Velocities Setpoint Actual Value Systems Closed Loop Control G2 F value at PLC ...

Page 1367: ... velocity This cannot be exceeded If G0 is programmed traversing is at the path velocity resulting from the MD32000 MA_MAX_AX_VELO limitation Limit velocity for path axes In addition the FL axis command can be used to program a limit velocity for path axes geometry and synchronized axes This enables separate feedrates to be programmed for the working plane and infeed axis This means that a feedrat...

Page 1368: ...ramming example Linear feedrate G94 The linear feedrate is programmed in the following units relative to a linear or rotary axis mm min degrees min on standard metric systems inch min degrees min on standard imperial systems Revolutional feedrate G95 The revolutional feedrate is programmed in the following units relative to a master spindle mm rev on standard metric systems inch rev on standard im...

Page 1369: ...k from the programmed tooth feedrate Example Milling cutter with 5 teeth TC_DPNE 5 and V Path velocity in mm min or inch min n Speed of the master spindle in rpm F Programmed revolutional feedrate in mm rev or inch rev Note The programmed F value is deleted when the system switches between the feedrate types G93 G94 and G95 with F Revolutional feedrate in mm rev or inch rev FZ Tooth feedrate in mm...

Page 1370: ...ctive 17 2 3 Type of feedrate G96 G961 G962 G97 G971 Constant cutting rate G96 G961 The constant cutting rate is used on turning machines to keep the cutting conditions constant independently of the work diameter of the workpiece This allows the tool to be operated in the optimum cutting performance range and therefore increases its service life Selection of G96 G961 When programming G96 G961 the ...

Page 1371: ...fied reference axis with SCC AX for a constant cutting rate G96 G961 G962 References Function Manual Basic Functions Transverse Axes P1 example Example SG96 230 m min where r 0 2 m n 183 12 rpm where r 0 1 m n 366 24 rpm The smaller the workpiece diameter the higher the speed For G96 G961 or G962 a geometry axis must be defined as the transverse axis The transverse axis whose position affects the ...

Page 1372: ... is switched off depending on the machine data MD10710 PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB n setting data to be updated When G96 G961 G97 are reactivated this spindle speed limitation is also activated Note G96 G961 is only active during workpiece machining G1 G2 G3 spline interpolation etc where feedrate F is active The response of the spindle speed for active G96 G961 and G0blocks can be defined in the chann...

Page 1373: ...m spindle speed can be changed in the part program with G25 In the event of programming that would mean one of the spindle limits G25 or SD43220 SA_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G25 is not reached the Set speed too low interface signal DB31 DBX83 2 is set Figure 17 1 Spindle speed limitations The various spindle speed limits are illustrated in the figure above For more information and for information on the effe...

Page 1374: ...is with transverse axis function alarm 10870 No transverse axis defined is issued If a negative maximum spindle speed is programmed with the LIMS program command when G96 G961 are active alarm 14820 Negative maximum spindle speed programmed for G96 G961 is output If no constant cutting rate is programmed when G96 G961 is selected for the first time alarm 10900 No S value programmed for constant cu...

Page 1375: ...A_GEAR _STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT minimum velocity for gear step change The minimum spindle speed can be changed in the part program with G25 NC STOP single block NC STOP and single block even at the block boundary are only active after completion of thread chaining All subsequent G33 blocks and the first subsequent non G33 block are traversed like a single block Premature abortion without destruction T...

Page 1376: ...kpiece and the tool edge The tool braking ramp can be set shorter via DITE Due to the inertia of the mechanical system however a collision can nevertheless occur Remedy Program a shorter thread reduce the spindle speed The programmed run in and run out path only increases the rate of acceleration on the path If one of the two paths is set larger than the thread axis needs with active acceleration ...

Page 1377: ... deceleration distance is specified To avoid technology alarm 22280 the acceleration limits of the axis must be observed in case of very small run in and run out paths Compatibility Machine data MD20650 MC_THREAD_START_IS_HARD is dispensed with and is replaced by SD42010 SC_THREAD_RAMP_DISP 0 or SD42010 SC_THREAD_RAMP_DISP 1 The response of the new setting data with SD42010 SC_THREAD_RAMP_DISP 0 0...

Page 1378: ...ionality The thread lead increase G34 defines the numerical increase in the lead value A larger pitch results in a larger distance between the threads on the workpieces The velocity of the thread axis thus increases assuming that the spindle speed is constant The opposite naturally applies to decreasing thread lead G35 The following definitions have been made for the thread lead changes with respe...

Page 1379: ...ck preparation Alarm 10604 Thread lead increase too high or alarm 10605 Thread lead decrease too high are output if bit 10 in machine data MD11410 SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK is not set During thread cutting certain practical applications require a correction of the spindle speed In this case the operator will base his correction on the permissible velocity of the thread axis Note If the formula results i...

Page 1380: ... G35 The following alarms are output when programming is incorrect If the spindle speed is too high when G33 G34 G35 are active e g spindle override set to 200 alarm 22270 Spindle speed for thread cutting too high is output Alarm 22270 is output when the rapid traverse speed of the thread axis is exceeded It is possible to reduce the spindle speed using the spindle override switch to prevent serio...

Page 1381: ... setting for NC Reset and or NC Start is specified in machine data MD20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES The following sources can initiate a retraction motion during thread cutting Fast inputs programming with SETINTLIFTFAST for LIFTFAST option NC Stop Alarms that implicitly initiate the NC stop Figure 17 3 Interruption of G33 through retraction motion Note The non destructive interrupt function should only...

Page 1382: ...tion Manual Basic Function Mode Group Channel Program Operation K1 Chapter Asynchronous Subroutines ASUBs Interrupt Routines LFWP The plane of the retraction movement is the active working plane selected with G codes G17 G18 or G19 The direction of the retraction plane is independent of the path tangent This allows a fast lift to be programmed parallel to the axis These G functions can always be p...

Page 1383: ... for programming the plane of the retraction movement can be used independently of thread cutting N55 M3 S500 G90 G18 Set active machining plane N65 MSG thread cutting MM_THREAD N67 AC_LIFTFAST 0 Reset before beginning of thread N68 G0 Z5 N69 X10 N70 G33 Z30 K5 LFON DILF 10 LFWP ALF 7 Enable fast retraction for thread cutting Retraction path 10 mm Retraction plane Z X due to G18 Retraction directi...

Page 1384: ...thed actual values can be applied for constant coupled path and axis motions Machine data MD34990 ENC_ACTVAL_SMOOTH_TIME can be used to change the time constant for more effectively smoothed actual values for Thread cutting with feedrate for G33 G34 G35 Revolutional feedrate for G95 G96 G97 FRAPON Display of actual positions and actual speed velocity The larger the time constant the better the smo...

Page 1385: ... influenced by an override Depending on the configuration the override affects either the spindle speed or the path feedrate MD12090 MN_OVR_FUNCTION_MASK Note For further information about programming G63 G331 G332 please see References Programming Guide Fundamentals Programming Guide Cycles Bit Value Significance 0 0 The override influences the spindle speed initial setting Depending on the setti...

Page 1386: ...ly is possible again after G331 G332 has been executed 17 2 6 Feedrate for G63 tapping with compensation chuck Application G63 is a subfunction for tapping threads using a tap with compensating chuck An encoder position encoder is not required Speed S feedrate F thread lead With G63 a speed S must be programmed for the spindle and a feedrate F for the infeed axis axis for thread length The feedrat...

Page 1387: ...Identifier of channel axes MD20080 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB Parameter Feed value Value range 0 001 999 999 999 mm min degrees min or 0 001 39 999 9999 inch min For more information about the value range of the axial feedrate see References PG Fundamentals Programming Guide FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Velocities Setpoint Actual Value Systems Closed Loop Control G2 NC PLC interface channel ...

Page 1388: ...ion output to the NC PLC interface Output of the F functions to the NC PLC interface is not recommended Activating the output of F functions to the NC PLC interface can cause a drop in velocity in continuous path mode The output of F functions to the NC PLC interface can be suppressed MD22240 MC_AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE output time of the F functions For a detailed description please refer to References ...

Page 1389: ... 6 5 B581B B02 3L U 6 6SHHG 6 63 21 63 2 6 5 B581B U UXQ IHHGUDWH HHGUDWH RYHUULGH PDFKLQH FRQWURO SDQHO B 6SLQGOH RYHUULGH PDFKLQH FRQWURO SDQHO 3URJUDPPHG IHHGUDWH RYHUULGH 6WRUHG 6 YDOXH RU 6 YDOXH 0LQLPXP 3RVLWLRQLQJ RU SDWK YHORFLW 6SLQGOH VSHHG VHWSRLQW 6 DFWLYDWH GU UXQ IHHGUDWH FWXDO VSLQGOH VSHHG 6SLQGOH SRVLWLRQ FRQWURO 6 UDSLG RYHUULGH DFWLYH 6 IHHGUDWH RYHUULGH DFWLYH 6 RYHUULGH DFWLYH...

Page 1390: ...in JOG mode Feed stop DB31 DBX4 3 axis specific The axis specific Feed stop interface signal DB31 DBX4 3 is used to stop the relevant machine axis In automatic mode If the Feed stop is performed for a path axis all the axes traversed in the current block and all axes participating in the axis group are stopped If the Feed stop is performed for a positioning axis only this axis is stopped Only the ...

Page 1391: ...on axes The overrides influence the programmed values or the limiting e g G26 LIMS in spindle speed The feedrate override is inactive when the function Rigid tapping G63 is active Channel specific feedrate and rapid traverse For feedrate and rapid traverse override dedicated enable signals and correction offset factors are available in the NC PLC interface DB21 DBX6 7 feedrate override active DB21...

Page 1392: ...r operator panel front When rapid traverse override is active the feedrate override values are limited to 100 To activate the rapid traverse override via the operator panel front the basic PLC program transfers the selection of the feedrate override for rapid traverse to the activation signal for the rapid traverse override DB21 DBX6 6 DB21 DBX25 3 and the feedrate override value in the rapid trav...

Page 1393: ... This format being used is communicated to the NC via the following machine data MD12000 MN_OVR_AX_IS_GRAY_CODE axis feedrate override switch gray coded The following permanent assignment applies for binary code For gray coding the override factors corresponding to the switch setting should be entered into machine data MD12010 MN_OVR_ FACTOR_AX_ SPEED evaluation of axis feedrate override switch Bi...

Page 1394: ...responding to the switch position should be entered in machine data MD12070 MN_OVR_FACTOR_SPIND_SPEED n evaluation of spindle override switch Thread cutting The spindle override is active for G33 G34 G35 G331 G332 The spindle override is inactive for G63 Limiting the override factor For binary coded override factors the maximum possible overrides for path feedrate axis feedrate and spindle speed c...

Page 1395: ...edrate override Function The programmable feedrate override can be used to change the velocity level of path and positioning axes by means of a command in the part program A separate feedrate override can be programmed for positioning axes Programming The feedrate override can be changed with the following commands The programmable range is between 0 and 200 The default setting is 100 Effectivity ...

Page 1396: ...the feedrates for G93 G95 and G33 G34 G35 In this case the programmed feedrate is compared to the dry run feedrate in SD42100 DRY_RUN_FEED and the axis is then traversed at the higher of the two feedrates Dry run feedrate change Dry run feedrate active DB21 DBX318 6 The dry run feedrate SD42100 DRY_RUN_FEED 1 can be changed via the operator panel in the operating area Parameters The interface sign...

Page 1397: ...DRY_RUN_FEED is effective as follows 0 The maximum value from SD42100 DRY_RUN_FEED and the programmed velocity is effective This is the same as the default setting 1 The minimum value from SD42100 DRY_RUN_FEED and the programmed velocity is effective 2 Setting data SD42100 DRY_RUN_FEED is effective directly regardless of the programmed velocity 3 9 reserved 10 As for configured value 0 except for ...

Page 1398: ...the function Multiple feedrate in one block A permanent functional assignment applies within the byte Priorities The signals are scanned in ascending order starting at I0 Therefore the retraction motion SR has the highest priority and the feedrate F7 the lowest priority SR and ST end the feedrate motions that were activated with F2 F7 SR also ends ST i e the complete function The highest priority ...

Page 1399: ...k can be used to assign up to two digital input bytes or comparator input bytes to the NCK I O Machine data MD21220 MULTFEED_ASSIGN_FASTIN can also be used to invert the input bits Figure 17 5 Signal routing for Multiple feeds in one block Marshaling of the digital input bytes and parameterization of the comparators are described in Reference Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface Signa...

Page 1400: ... program up to 6 further feedrates per axis in the block The first expression in square brackets indicates the bit number of the input that activates the feedrate when changed The second expression indicates the axis to which the feedrate applies Example Bits 2 to 7 are permissible for the numerical expansion of the axial feedrate The values programmed under FMA are active non modally The feedrate...

Page 1401: ...ter is determined using calipers and depending on the limits the feedrate value required for roughing finishing or fine finishing is activated The position of the calipers also provides the end position Thus the block end criterion is determined not only by the programmed axis position of the infeed axis but also by the calipers Figure 17 6 Calipers Part program Note The unit for the retraction pa...

Page 1402: ...he activated fixed feedrate instead of using the programmed feedrate Behavior in JOG mode The fixed feedrate selected via the interface signal is applied during travel instead of the JOG velocities set The travel direction is specified via the interface signal The following MDs and interface signals can be used to select fixed feedrates for path geometry axes and for machine data Note The axial fe...

Page 1403: ...s not influence spindles positioning axes and tapping While traversing with fixed feedrate the override depends on machine data MD12200 MN_RUN_OVERRIDE_0 traveling with override 0 The DRF offset cannot be activated for a selected fixed feedrate The fixed feedrates are always linear feedrate values Switchover to linear feedrate is conducted internally even in case of revolutional feedrate Interface...

Page 1404: ...umber of blocks containing no traversing information is limited The maximum number is defined in machine data MD20200 CHFRND_MAXNUM_DUMMY_BLOCKS The possible blocks without traversing information in the compensation plane are pure dummy commands and are called empty blocks For this reason they may only be written between two blocks with traversing information Boundary conditions Feedrate interpola...

Page 1405: ...ogrammed with FB value The feedrate is interpreted according to the active feedrate type Boundary conditions The programmed value of FB value must be greater than zero If no traversing motion is programmed in the block e g Computational block the FB has no effect If no explicit feed for chamfering rounding is programmed then the value of FB also applies for any contour element chamfering rounding ...

Page 1406: ... changed Part program indirectly Writing the machine data with subsequent NewConfig Part program directly Percentage acceleration override ACC Synchronized actions indirectly Writing the machine data and initiating an ASUB for the activation of NewConfig Synchronized actions directly Percentage acceleration override ACC cannot be preset by the PLC Via the PLC the same options apply as in synchroni...

Page 1407: ...or main run axes command axes PLC axes asynchronous reciprocating axes etc For correct results system variable AA_ACC must therefore always be read at the same location part program or synchronized action from where the acceleration override was programmed with ACC Note Dynamic response changes Dynamic response changes made in the part program do not affect command or PLC axis motion Dynamic respo...

Page 1408: ...N80 G01 POS X 100 FA X 1000 ACC X 90 IPOENDA X Writing ACC in a synchronized action N100 EVERY A_IN 1 DO POS X 50 FA X 2000 ACC X 140 IPOENDA X Writing ACC and reading AA_ACC in a part program ACC X 50 writing RO AA_ACC X reading IF RO MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL X 0 5 checking SETAL 61000 ENDIF Writing ACC and reading AA_ACC in a synchronized action WHEN TRUE DO ACC X 25 R0 AA_ACC X writing and reading G4 F1...

Page 1409: ...ts for technology cycles and PLC user parts The PLC user program must be expanded if the servo parameter set is to be changed both inside a part program or synchronous action and the PLC After POWER ON the following initial settings are made Percentage acceleration override for all single axis interpolations 100 End of motion criterion for all single axis interpolations FINEA Servo parameter set 1...

Page 1410: ...eset the last programmed value remains for the part program specifications The settings for main run interpolations do not change Block search The last end of motion criterion programmed for an axis is collected and output in an action block The last block with a programmed end of motion criterion that was processed in the search run serves as a container for all programmed end of motion criteria ...

Page 1411: ...for feedrate programming Unit of measurement The applicable unit of measurement for feedrates is based on the value entered in machine data MD12240 SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC standard control system metric imperial and the type of axis entered in machine data MD30300 IS_ROT_AX rotary or linear axis Standard setting for feedrate type G94 is displayed on the screen as the standard setting The initial ...

Page 1412: ...Programmed path feedrate F Programmed feedrate change for path feedrate OVR Programmed positioning feedrate FA Programmed feedrate change for positioning feedrate OVRA U For more detailed information about syntax please see References PG Programming Guide Fundamentals Position spindle If G95 G96 G961 G97 G971 G33 G34 G35 is active spindle positioning should not be performed because the derived pat...

Page 1413: ...n N40 X20 CHF 3 FRC 200 Chamfer N40 N60 with FRCM 50 mm min N50 RNDM 2 FRCM 50 N60 Y20 Modal rounding N60 N70 with FRCM 50 mm min N70 X30 Modal rounding N70 N80 with FRC 100 mm min N80 Y30 CHF 3 FRC 100 Chamfer N80 N90 with FRCM 50 mm min modal N90 X40 Modal rounding N90 N100 with F 100 mm min deselection of FRCM N100 Y40 FRCM 0 Modal rounding N100 N120 with G95 FRC 1 mm rev N110 S1000 M3 N120 X50...

Page 1414: ... FRC 100 Chamfer N80 N90 with FRC 100 mm min modal N90 X40 Modal rounding N90 N100 with FRCM 50 mm min N100 Y40 FRCM 0 Modal rounding N100 N120 with F 100 mm min N110 S1000 M3 N120 X50 CHF 4 G95 F3 FRC 1 Chamfer N120 N130 with G95 FRC 1 mm rev N130 Y50 Modal rounding N130 N140 with F 3 mm rev N140 X60 M02 ...

Page 1415: ...12070 OVR_FACTOR_SPIND_SPEED Evaluation of the spindle override switch 12080 OVR_REFERENCE_IS_PROG_FEED Override reference velocity 12082 OVR_REFERENCE_IS_MIN_FEED Defining the reference of the path override 12090 OVR_FUNCTION_MASK Selection of override specifications 12100 OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN Limit for binary coded override switch 12200 RUN_OVERRIDE_0 Traversing with override 0 12202 PERMANENT_F...

Page 1416: ...D_VELO_LIMIT Maximum spindle speed 35130 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT Maximum speed of gear stage 35140 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT Minimum speed of gear stage 35160 SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT Spindle speed limitation via PLC Number Identifier SC_ Description 42000 THREAD_START_ANGLE Start angle for thread 42010 THREAD_RAMP_DISP Acceleration behavior of axis when thread cutting 42100 DRY_RUN_FEED Dry run fe...

Page 1417: ...00 DBX1008 3 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Dry run feedrate selected DB21 DBX24 6 DB1700 DBX0 6 Feedrate override for rapid traverse selected DB21 DBX25 3 DB1700 DBX1 3 Activate fixed feedrate 1 for path geometry axes DB21 DBX29 0 Activate fixed feedrate 2 for path geometry axes DB21 DBX29 1 Activate fixed feedrate 3 for path geometry axes DB21 DBX29 2 Activate fixed feedrate 4 for ...

Page 1418: ...al 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 17 7 3 4 Signals from axis spindle Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Revolutional feedrate active DB31 DBX62 2 DB390x DBX2 2 F function for positioning axis DB31 DBB81 Programmed speed too high DB31 DBX83 1 DB390x DBX2001 1 ...

Page 1419: ...s compensation Selection and deselection strategy configurable Normal or contour related Compensation active for all interpolation types Linear Circle Helical Spline Polynomial Involute Compensation at outer corners selectable Transition circle ellipse G450 or equidistant intersection G451 Parameter driven adaptation of G450 G451 functions to the contour Free traversing on outer corners with G450 ...

Page 1420: ...e of the description data direct from the current frame Flat Unique D number structure Compensations can be selected via unique D numbers with management function Special handling of tool compensations The evaluation of signs can be controlled for tool length and wear by the setting data SD42900 SC_MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH Sign change tool length when mirroring SD42960 SC_TOOL_TEMP_COMP Temperature comp...

Page 1421: ...l radius G462 If no intersection is possible between the last TRC block and a previous block the control calculates an intersection by inserting a straight line at the end point of the last block with tool radius compensation the block is extended by its end tangent Changing from G40 to G41 42 The change from G40 to G41 G42 and vice versa is no longer treated as a tool change for tools with releva...

Page 1422: ... M function The new tool is prepared for changing with the T function This setting is used mainly on milling machines with a tool magazine in order to bring the new tool into the tool change position without interrupting the machining process The old tool is removed from the spindle and the new tool is loaded into the spindle with the entered M function in the machine data MD22560 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M...

Page 1423: ...ting edge D0 deselects all tool compensations of the active tool Selection of the cutting edge when changing tool When a new tool new T number has been programmed and the old one replaced the following options are available for selecting the cutting edge The cutting edge number is programmed The cutting edge number is defined by the machine data MD20270 MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT Basic setting of too...

Page 1424: ...id traverse or G1 linear interpolation 18 2 2 Compensation memory structure Tool compensation memory size Each channel can have a dedicated tool compensation memory TO unit Which tool compensation memory exists for the relevant channel is set with the machine data MD28085 MC_MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT Assignment of TO unit to a channel The maximum number of tool cutting edges for all tools managed by the NC...

Page 1425: ...D1 is set up automatically when a new tool is loaded in the tool compensation memory Other cutting edges up to 8 are set up consecutively and contiguously using the New cutting edge soft key A different number of tool cutting edges can assigned to each tool in this way Figure 18 2 Example of a tool compensation memory structure for 2 channels HWF 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 KDQQHO HWF KDQQHO ...

Page 1426: ...lated in the NC Part program call 18 2 4 Address extension for NC addresses T and M MD20096 Whether also with tool management not activated the address extension of T and M is to be interpreted as spindle number can be set through the machine data MD20096 MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO spindle number as address extension The same rules then apply to the reference between the D number and T number as ...

Page 1427: ...r as address extension Effect on the T number If the Tool management function is active the values programmed with reference to the master spindle or master toolholder are displayed as programmed active T numbers If tool management is not active all programmed T values are displayed as programmed active regardless of the programmed address extension Only the T value programmed in relation to the m...

Page 1428: ...ompensation D4 relates to tool 5 as when tool management is active without active tool management and with the machine data MD20096 MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO TRUE Address extension 1 T1 M1 addresses the master spindle 18 2 5 Free assignment of D numbers Relative D numbers In the NCK it is possible to manage the D numbers as relative D numbers for the tool compensation data sets The corresponding...

Page 1429: ...ion in the part program This compensation number D is administered separately from the cutting edge number CE the number in the tool Catalog Any number can be used The number is used to identify a compensation in the part program and on the display The CE number identifies the actual physical cutting edge during retooling The cutting edge number CE is not evaluated by the NCK on compensation selec...

Page 1430: ...turned SETDNO Sets or changes the D number of the CE cutting edge of tool T If there is no data block for the specified parameter the value FALSE is returned Syntax errors generate an alarm The D number cannot be set explicitly to 0 GETACTTD Determines the associated T number for an absolute D number There is not check for uniqueness If several D numbers within a TO unit are the same the T number ...

Page 1431: ...D numbers 10 20 30 40 50 are assigned to T number 2 D numbers 100 200 are assigned to T number 3 etc CHKDNO MD18105 MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO 9999 The following data are to be checked for unique D numbers T number 1 with D numbers 1 2 3 T number 2 with D numbers 10 20 30 40 50 T number 3 with D numbers 100 200 30 typing error during definition 30 was entered instead of 300 Note When the Flat D num...

Page 1432: ...h one cutting edge with MD18105 MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO 20 Max value of the D numbers DRAM Within the part program this compensation is programmed as standard with T1 D2 You assign the current D number of cutting edge 3 to a variable DNoOld and define the variable DNoNew for the new D number The new D value 17 is then assigned to cutting edge CE 3 Now the data for the cutting edge are addressed ...

Page 1433: ...currently defined The D numbers are redefined with Note If a further cutting edge has been defined for the tool e g TC_DPCE 1 2 1 CE the D number 2 of the cutting edge 1 cannot have the same name as the D number of the cutting edge 3 i e SETDNO 1 1 17 returns the status FALSE as return value T1 D1 D no of cutting edge CE 1 T2 D10 D no of cutting edge CE 1 T3 D100 D no of cutting edge CE 1 DZERO SE...

Page 1434: ...w tool compensation with M function MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 0 MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 1 DZERO All D numbers of the TO unit are tagged as invalid One or more loops over the locations of the magazine s to check the tools and their cutting edge numbers If a tool is found which is still enabled TC_TP8 and has the required cutting edge number CE GETDNO the new D number is allocated to the cutti...

Page 1435: ... Include the missing cutting edge compensation data in the NCK using Overstore Following operator intervention the START key is pressed and the block which caused the error is executed again If the error was corrected the program is continued Otherwise an alarm is output again Tool change with T and M06 programming MD22550 1 In this case an error is detected in the NC block containing the tool pre...

Page 1436: ... required parameter T number can be accessed by the user for missing T number via the appropriate alarm 17191 Txx Error Data set with xx does not exist Detect state detect xx continue in program M06 Detect bit memory xx missing output alarm stop program Correct block with e g Tyy M06 start block Tyy M06 interpreted and OK Machining continues Txx Error Data set with xx does not exist Detect state d...

Page 1437: ...pecified increment as follows Specify the distance with handwheel via the machine data MD11346 MN_HANDWHEEL_TRUE_DISTANCE 1 handwheel path or speed specification Define the DRF offset in the transverse axis as a diameter offset with the machine data MD20360 MC_TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK Bit 9 1 definition of tool parameters Deselecting an axial DRF compensation DRFOF also deletes an existing tool com...

Page 1438: ...reating a new D number compensation block Programming Tool compensations can be programmed with system variables TC_DP1 to TC_DP25 The contents have the same meaning as before The syntax changes no T number is specified Flat D number function active TC_DPx d value where x parameter no d D number i e data with this syntax can only be loaded to the NCK if the Flat D number function is activated Flat...

Page 1439: ...ive compensation in NCK Address extension of D It is not possible to extend the address of D Only one active compensation data block is possible for the tool path at a given time Programming Programming in the part program is carried out as before Only the value range of the programmed D number is increased Example 1 MD parameterization Meaning MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 0 Tool change with progra...

Page 1440: ... unit are deleted Active compensation data blocks D numbers cannot be deleted This means that it may be necessary to program D0 before deleting X3 Traverse with compensations from D32000 T29000 Outputs T 29000 to the PLC X4 Traverse with compensations from D32000 D1 X5 Traverse with compensations from D1 Program code Comment T1 T2 T3 D777 No waiting D777 is activated T3 programmed and active tool ...

Page 1441: ...set using MD Compensations and the M6 command tool change are only calculated in reference to the master spindle Whether the tool change command is performed with an M function is defined via the machine data MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE new tool compensation with M function T is used as the tool preparation command The name of the M function for the tool change is defined via the machine data MD22...

Page 1442: ...ing assumptions 1 Tools are managed in magazines 2 Cutting edges are monitored limits reached cause the tool to be disabled 3 Idea behind replacement tools Tools are programmed for selection only the on the basis of their identifier NCK then selects the concrete tool according to the strategy This means that it only makes sense to employ tool management when specific tools have been defined and th...

Page 1443: ...nd flat D no It does not make sense to mix or distribute the tool management functions over the NCK and PLC since the main reason for tool management on the NCK is to save time This only works if the tasks that are time critical are carried out on the NCK This is not the case for Flat D number however Note Activation of both of the functions Flat D number structure and Tool management is monitored...

Page 1444: ...tting edge The following tool parameters are available for the relevant tool types Tool parameter Significance Note 1 Tool type 2 Cutting edge position for turning tools or for milling grinding tools with 2D TRC contour tool Geometry tool lengths 3 Length 1 4 Length 2 5 Length 3 Geometry tool shape 6 Radius 1 Length 1 for 3D face milling 7 Length 2 for 3D face milling 8 Radius 1 for 3D face millin...

Page 1445: ...st of tool types Functions Manual Special Functions 3D tool radius compensation W5 Wear tool shape 15 Radius 1 Length 1 for 3D face milling 16 Length 2 for 3D face milling 17 Radius 1 for 3D face milling 18 Radius 2 for 3D face milling 19 Angle 1 minimum limit angle for 3D face milling with 2D TRC contour tool 20 Angle 2 maximum limit angle for 3D face milling with 2D TRC contour tool Tool base di...

Page 1446: ...es the tool in question The selection of this tool type determines further components such as geometry wear and tool base dimensions in advance Conditions The following is applicable to the Tool type parameter The tool type must be specified for each tool cutting edge Only the values specified can be used for the tool type Tool type 0 zero means that no valid tool has been defined ...

Page 1447: ...QJ WRROV DQG GULOOLQJ WRROV DOO RWKHUV 0LOOLQJ WRROV DFFRUGLQJ WR 7 EDOO HQG PLOO HQG PLOO HQG PLOO ZLWK FRUQHU URXQGLQJ DQJOH KHDG FXWWHU DQJOH KHDG FXWWHU ZLWK FRUQHU URXQGLQJ IDFH PLOO WKUHDG PLOO VLGH PLOO WUXQFDWHG FRQH PLOO WZLVW GULOO VROLG ELW GULOOLQJ URG FHQWHU GULOO FRXQWHUVLQN SLORWHG FRXQWHUERUH WDS GULOO UHJXODU WKUHDG WDS GULOO ILQH WKUHDG WDS GULOO KLWZRUWK WKUHDG UHDPHU JULQGLQJ W...

Page 1448: ...accounted for with tool radius compensation G40 to G42 as follows Note The tool type has no significance in the turning tool groups Non listed numbers are also permitted in particular with grinding tools 400 499 Geometry Wear Base Einheit Length compensation Length 1 TC_DP3 TC_DP12 TC_DP21 mm Length 2 TC_DP4 TC_DP13 TC_DP22 mm Length 3 TC_DP5 TC_DP14 TC_DP23 mm Saw blade compensation Diameter d TC...

Page 1449: ...er with the cutting edge radius tool parameter 8 for the calculation of the tool radius compensation for turning tools tool type 5xx Figure 18 4 Dimensions for turning tools Turning tool Cutting edge position parameter values Figure 18 5 Tool parameter 2 P2 Machining behind the turning center Comman d Significance G40 No saw blade compensation G41 Saw blade compensation left G42 Saw blade compensa...

Page 1450: ...e entered for the cutting edge position The identifier 0 zero is not permitted as a cutting edge position 18 4 4 Tool parameters 3 5 Geometry tool lengths Description The lengths of the tools are required for the geometry tool length compensation They are input as tool lengths 1 to 3 in the tool parameters 3 to 5 The following length specifications must be entered as a minimum for each tool type T...

Page 1451: ... added in order to calculate the total tool length compensation in the geometry axes References For information about entering tool dimensions lengths in tool parameters 3 to 5 tool lengths 1 to 3 and how these are calculated in the three geometry axes please refer to Operating Manual Note All three tool parameters 3 to 5 tool length 1 to 3 are always calculated in the three geometry axes irrespec...

Page 1452: ...elate to the vector of the cutting edge center point to the cutting edge reference point and are counted clockwise Tool parameter Description Application 6 Tool length 1 Not used 7 Tool length 2 Not used 8 Tool radius 1 The tool radius must be entered for the following tool types in tool parameter 6 tool radius 1 Tool type 1xx Milling tools Tool type 5xx Turning tools A tool radius does not have t...

Page 1453: ...ation in tool parameters 6 to 11 and how these are calculated by geometry tool radius compensation in the three geometry axes Programming Manual Fundamentals Chapter Tool compensations 2 D tool compensation Functions Manual Special Functions 3D tool radius compensation W5 For 3D face milling please refer to Programming Manual Job Planning Chapter Transformations Three Four and Five axis Transforma...

Page 1454: ... added to wear tool length 1 etc to arrive at the size of the active tool 18 4 7 Tool parameters 15 20 Wear tool shape Description While geometry tool radius compensation tool parameters 6 to 11 is used to define the shape of the tool wear tool radius compensation can be used to correct the change in the active tool shape The active tool dimensions can change due to Tool wear caused during service...

Page 1455: ...t the discrepancy between the toolholder reference point F and the toolholder reference point F can be corrected on the three geometry axes three dimensional all 3 basic lengths are active irrespective of the tool type In other words a twist drill tool type 200 with a tool length compensation length 1 can also have a tool base dimension adapter dimension in 3 axes References Please refer to the fo...

Page 1456: ...8 9 Tool clearance angle of the turning tool during relief cutting Machining type longitudinal or transverse The tool clearance angle is entered in different ways according to the type of machining longitudinal or face If a tool is to be used for both longitudinal and face machining two cutting edges must be entered for different tool clearance angles Figure 18 10 Tool clearance angle for longitud...

Page 1457: ...blocks containing rational polynomials with a denominator degree 4 it is not permitted to change a tool with active tool radius compensation in cases where the distance between the tool edge center point and the tool edge reference point changes With other types of interpolation it is now possible to change when a transformation is active e g TRANSMIT For tool radius compensation with variable too...

Page 1458: ...rammed contour from the current tool radius Figure 18 11 Workpiece contour geometry with equidistant path TRC on the plane TRC is active on the current plane G17 to G19 for the following types of interpolation Note For tool radius compensation WRK see References PG Programming Manual Fundamentals Only the Programming Guide contains a complete technical description of the tool radius compensation T...

Page 1459: ... to be noted TRC can only be selected in a program block with G0 rapid traverse or G1 linear interpolation A tool must be loaded T function and the tool cutting edge tool compensation D1 to D9 activated no later than in the program block with the tool radius compensation selection Tool radius compensation is not selected with a tool cutting edge tool compensation of D0 If only one geometry axis is...

Page 1460: ... NORM in front of and behind the contour KONT and G450 G451 corner behavior at outer corners has a general effect and determines the approach and retraction behavior with TRC When tool radius compensation is deselected the retraction behavior is determined by the NORM KONT instructions Command Significance NORM Normal setting at start point end point initial setting KONT Follow contour at start po...

Page 1461: ...o program a simultaneous path component perpendicular to the compensation plane for approach retraction Only linear blocks are permitted for the original approach and retraction blocks with KONTT KONTC These programmed linear blocks are replaced in the control by the corresponding polynomial curves Exception KONTT and KONTC are not available in 3D variants of tool radius compensation CUT3DC CUT3DC...

Page 1462: ...tool has a radius of 10 mm the resulting tool center point path describes a circle with a radius of 60 mm The start end points are at X0 Y0 Z60 with the result that a movement takes place in the Z direction at the same time as the approach retraction movement in the compensation plane Figure 18 13 Approach and retraction with constant curvature during inside machining of a full circle Projection i...

Page 1463: ...ves along a circular path with radius 40 mm The end point of the approach blocks is at X40 Y30 The transition between the circular block and the retraction block is at the zero point Due to the extended continuity of curvature associated with KONTC the retraction block first executes a movement with a negative Y component This will often be undesired This response does not occur with the KONTT ret...

Page 1464: ... contour regardless of the position of the start point The approach behavior can be varied and adapted to special needs using a range of additional parameters The two functions smooth approach and smooth retraction are largely symmetrical The following section is therefore restricted to a detailed description of approach special reference is made to differences affecting retraction Note The figure...

Page 1465: ... 18 5 4 2 Parameters The response of the smooth approach and retraction function is determined by up to 9 parameters Non modal G code for defining the approach and retraction contour This G code cannot be omitted G147 Approach with a straight line G148 Retraction with a straight line G247 Approach with a quadrant G248 Retraction with a quadrant G347 Approach with a semicircle G348 Retraction with ...

Page 1466: ...h and retraction side is determined as if the tool radius were positive G141 Approach contour from left or retract to the left G142 Approach contour from right or retract to the right G143 Automatic determination of the approach direction i e the contour is approached from the side where the start point is located relative to the tangent at the start point of the following block P4 Note The tangen...

Page 1467: ...tic from P0 to P4 is shown in the figure If G247 or G347 is active quadrant or semicircle and start point P3 is outside the machining plane defined by the end point P4 a helix is inserted instead of a circle Point P2 is not defined or coincides with P3 The circle plane or the helix axis is determined by the plane which is active in the SAR block G17 G19 i e the projection of the start tangent is u...

Page 1468: ...nent perpendicular to the machining plane e g infeed movements approach movements from P3 to P4 this component must have the same leading sign It is not permitted to change direction An alarm is output if this condition is violated On detection of a direction reversal a tolerance is permitted that is defined by the machine data MD20204 MC_WAB_CLEARANCE_TOLERANCE direction reversal on SAR However i...

Page 1469: ... at least one geometry axis is programmed on the machining plane X or Y with G17 If only the position of the axis perpendicular to the machining plane Z with G17 is programmed in the SAR block this component is taken from the SAR block but the position in the plane is taken from the following block In this case an alarm is output if the axis perpendicular to the machining plane is also programmed ...

Page 1470: ...e case of 1 and 2 an additional path from P1 to P0 is inserted such that no movement is produced when tool radius compensation is deactivated at the end of the retraction contour i e this point defines the tool center point and not a position on a contour to be corrected 3 At least one axis of the machining plane is programmed The second axis of the machining plane can be determined modally from i...

Page 1471: ...r P3 to P4 G341 Feedrate of the infeed movement perpendicular to the machining plane from P2 to P3 FAD 0 or negative Alarm Output FAD Programmed value acts in accordance with the active G code of group 15 feed type G93 G94 etc FAD PM Programmed value is interpreted as linear feed like G94 irrespective of the active G code of group 15 FAD PR Programmed value is interpreted as revolutional feed like...

Page 1472: ...wing blocks 18 5 4 3 Velocities Velocities at approach In both approach diagrams below it is assumed that no new velocity is programmed in the block following the SAR block If this is not the case the new velocity comes into effect after point P4 Figure 18 18 Velocities in the SAR subblocks on approach with G340 1R YHORFLW SURJUDPPHG 2QO SURJUDPPHG 2QO SURJUDPPHG DQG SURJUDPPHG 9HORFLW RI SUHFHGLQ...

Page 1473: ...ity The last F command programmed in a preceding block always applies for the path from P4 to P2 G0 has no effect in these blocks Traversing from P2 to P0 takes place with the F command programmed in the SAR block or if no F command is programmed with the modal F command from a preceding block This applies on the condition that G0 is not active If rapid traverse is to be used on retraction in the ...

Page 1474: ...ct on the position values P_APR Read P3 start point in WCS P_AEP Read P4 contour start point in WCS P_APDV 1 If the content of P_APR and P_AEP is valid i e if these contain the position values belonging to the last SAR approach block programmed 0 The positions of an older SAR approach block are read 1R YHORFLW SURJUDPPHG 2QO SURJUDPPHG 2QO SURJUDPPHG DQG SURJUDPPHG 9HORFLW RI SUHFHGLQJ EORFN ROG F...

Page 1475: ...m number of blocks with no traversing motions with SAR If tool radius compensation is activated simultaneously in an approach block the first linear block of the SAR contour is the block in which activation takes place The complete contour generated by the SAR function is treated by tool radius compensation as if it has been programmed explicitly collision detection calculation of intersection app...

Page 1476: ... from the right Approach circle generated internally SAR contour has radius 20 so that the radius of the tool center path is equal to the programmed value DISR 10 Because of G341 the approach movement takes place with a circle in the plane resulting in a start point at 20 20 0 Because DISCL 5 point P2 is at position 20 20 5 and because of Z30 point P1 is in N10 at 20 20 30 Figure 18 21 Contour exa...

Page 1477: ...hat the radius of the tool center path is equal to DISR 10 The end point of the circle is obtained from N30 since only the Z position is programmed in N20 Infeed movement From Z20 to Z7 DISCL AC 7 with rapid traverse Then on to Z0 with FAD 200 Approach circle in X Y plane and following blocks with F1500 In order that this velocity becomes effective in the following blocks the active G code G0 in N...

Page 1478: ... N20 G41 G247 G341 Z0 DISCL AC 7 DISR 10 F1500 FAD 200 P3app N30 G1 X30 Y 10 P4app N40 X40 Z2 N50 X50 P4ret N60 G248 G340 X70 Y0 Z20 DISCL 6 DISR 5 G40 F10000 P3ret N70 X80 Y0 P0ret N80 M 30 Note The contour generated in this way is modified by tool radius compensation which is activated in the SAR approach block and deactivated in the SAR retraction block The tool radius compensation allows for a...

Page 1479: ...s programmed in the block with the tool radius compensation deselection then the compensation is deselected even if it is not on the current plane 18 5 6 Compensation at outside corners G450 G451 The G functions G450 G451 can be used to control the response with discontinuous block transitions at outside corners Figure 18 23 Example of a 90 degree outside corner with G450 and G451 Command Signific...

Page 1480: ...SC The G450 transition circle does not produce sharp outside contour corners because the path of the tool center point through the transition circle is controlled so that the cutting edge stops at the outside corner programmed position When sharp outside corners are to be machined with G450 the DISC instruction can be used to program an overshoot Thus the transition circle becomes a conic and the ...

Page 1481: ...ynomials are never extended Very pointed outside corners Where outside corners are very pointed G451 can result in excessive idle paths Therefore the system switches automatically from G451 intersection to G450 transition circle with DISC where appropriate when outside corners are very pointed The threshold angle contour angle for this automatic switchover intersection point transition circle can ...

Page 1482: ...e reason why it is not permitted to insert a transition circle at these outside corners with 5 axis machining is that this would impose restrictions on speed in contouring mode G64 Therefore the system switches automatically from G450 transition circle with DISC where appropriate to G451 intersection when outside corners are very flat The threshold angle contour angle for this automatic switchover...

Page 1483: ...find a point at which the two equidistant paths intersect If an intersection is found the programmed contour is shortened to the intersection first block shortened at end second block shortened at beginning Figure 18 28 Example of a shortened contour No intersection In certain cases no intersection is found between two consecutive blocks for inside corners see figure below RQWRXU DQJOH HORZ FRQWRX...

Page 1484: ...ed via machine data has been reached MD20240 MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_CHECK_BLOCKS blocks for predictive contour calculation for TRC If no intersection is found within the number of blocks defined for the check program execution is interrupted and an alarm is output Figure 18 29 If there is no intersection between N30 and block N40 the intersection between block N30 and block N50 is calculated Multiple in...

Page 1485: ...eneck detection examines whether the equidistant paths of non consecutive blocks intersect If an intersection is found the response is the same as for inside corners with multiple intersections The last intersection to be found is valid The maximum number of blocks used for the predictive check can be entered in the machine data MD20240 MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_CHECK_BLOCKS blocks for predictive contour c...

Page 1486: ... etc contained in the omitted blocks are executed at the intersection position in the sequence in which they are programmed in the NC program Warning 10763 If a block has been omitted as a result of the collision or bottleneck detection functions warning 10763 is output The program is not interrupted This warning is suppressed if bit 1 is enabled in machine data MD11410 MN_SUPPRES_ALARM_MASK Mask ...

Page 1487: ...tion value Supplementary conditions A variable compensation value is permissible for all types of interpolation including circular and spine interpolation It is also permitted to change the sign and therefore the compensation side Figure 18 32 Tool radius compensation with variable compensation value 2IIVHW FXUYH ZKHQ 6 FRQLF VHFWLRQ 2IIVHW FXUYH ZKHQ 6 FLUFOH 7RRO FHQWHU SDWK 3URJUDPPHG FRQWRXU 1...

Page 1488: ...e compensation radius becomes geater than the programmed circle radius then the machining is rejected with the following alarm Alarm 10758 Curvature radius with variable compensation value too small Maintain stability of closed contour If a radius of two circles is increased slightly a third block may be necessary in order to maintain the stability of the closed contour This is the case if two adj...

Page 1489: ...tial milling Normal case Tool radius compensation is normally active before the compensation suppression and is still active when the compensation suppression is deactivated again In the last traversing block before CUTCONON the offset point in the block end point is approached All following blocks in which compensation suppression is active are traversed without compensation However they are offs...

Page 1490: ...N20 TC_DP1 1 1 110 Type N30 TC_DP6 1 1 Radius N40 N50 X0 Y0 Z0 G1 G17 T1 D1 F10000 N60 N70 X20 G42 NORM N80 X30 N90 Y20 N100 X10 CUTCONON Activate compensation suppression N110 Y30 KONT On deactivation of contour suppression insert bypass circle if necessary N120 X 10 CUTCONOF N130 Y20 NORM No bypass circle on deactivation of TRC N140 X0 Y0 G40 N150 M30 RQWRXU ZLWKRXW 75 RQWRXU ZLWK 75 1 1 1 1 1 1...

Page 1491: ...ith CUTCONOF the 17th G code group approach and retraction behavior with tool compensation NORM KONT is evaluated i e a bypass circle is inserted if necessary for KONT A bypass circle is inserted under the same conditions as for activation of tool radius compensation with G41 or G42 The number of blocks with suppressed tool radius compensation is restricted MD20252 MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_SUPPR_BLOCKS Ma...

Page 1492: ...he block currently being interpolated if Look Ahead is active once the axes have come to a stop Alarms for preprocessing stop and active tool radius compensation Tool radius compensation generally requires at least one of the following traversing blocks even more for bottlenecks to determine the end point of a block Since the preprocessing stop of such a block is not available traversing continues...

Page 1493: ... intersection procedure for polynomials is released with the machine data MD20256 MC_CUTCOM_INTERS_POLY_ENABLE Intersection process possible for polynomials 18 5 13 G461 G462 Approach retract strategy expansion Function In certain special geometrical situations extended approach and retraction strategies compared with the previous implementation are required in order to activate or deactivate tool...

Page 1494: ...a straight line from the offset point at the end of block N20 to the programmed end point of N30 The intersection is approached if one is found The colored area in the figure is not machined although the tool used would be capable of this G460 With G460 the approach retraction strategy is the same as before G461 If no intersection is possible between the last TRC block and a preceding block the of...

Page 1495: ...gure 18 37 Retraction behavior with G462 The search for the intersection is then identical to the procedure for G461 With G462 the corner generated by N10 and N20 in the sample program is not machined to the full extent actually possible with the tool used However this behavior may be necessary if the part contour as distinct from the programmed contour to the left of N20 in the example is not per...

Page 1496: ...l has to be traversed An intersection calculation is no longer required for the linear section of the retraction block In the second case if no intersection is found between the inserted contour element and the preceding blocks the intersection between the retraction straight line and a preceding block is approached Therefore when G461 or G462 is active behavior deviating from G460 can only arise ...

Page 1497: ...y available for the milling versions Required data The following requirements must be met if the control is to take tool compensations into account for toolholders with orientation capability Tool data geometry wear etc Toolholder data data for the geometry of the toolholder with orientation capability Toolholder selection A toolholder defined in the control must be specified for the Toolholder wi...

Page 1498: ...ty Example Cardan toolholder with two axes for the tool orientation Figure 18 38 Cardan toolholder with two axes Processing toolholder data blocks Two options are available Explicit entry in the toolholder data block from the part program Automatic acceptance of certain values angles from a frame A requirement for this is that TCOFR Tool Carrier Orientation FRame is also specified when the toolhol...

Page 1499: ...ponents Angles in the toolholder data The programmed angles of rotation stored in the toolholder data are not affected by the angle of rotation defined by the frames When changing from TCOFR to TCOABS the original programmed angles of rotation in the toolholder data are reactivated Tool compensation types TRC takes account of the current tool orientation when CUT2D or CUT3DFS is active All other t...

Page 1500: ...rs Of these two the control selects the setting with which the rotary angle is as close as possible to the programmed rotary angle Storing angles in the toolholder data In virtually any case where ambiguities may arise it is necessary to store the approximate angle expected from the frame in the toolholder data Parameter sets A complete set of parameters for a toolholder with orientation capabilit...

Page 1501: ...he toolholder data block are of NC language format type REAL The values TC_CARR21 and TC_CARR22 for the axis identifier of the first rotary axis v1 and the second rotary axis v2 are of NC language format type AXIS They are all preset to zero The value TC_CARR23 is initialized with the uppercase letter T only tool can be rotated TC_CARRn m TC_CARR 0 0 has a special significance System variables for...

Page 1502: ...RR16 REAL 0 z component of offset vector l3 TC_CARR17 REAL 0 x component of offset vector l4 TC_CARR18 REAL 0 y component of offset vector l4 TC_CARR19 REAL 0 z component of offset vector l4 TC_CARR20 REAL 0 Axis identifier of the rotary axis v1 TC_CARR21 AXIS 0 Axis identifier of the rotary axis v2 TC_CARR22 AXIS 0 Kinematic type TC_CARR23 CHAR T Offset of rotary axis v1 TC_CARR24 REAL 0 Offset o...

Page 1503: ... x comp fine offset of offset vector l1 TC_CARR41 REAL 0 y comp fine offset of offset vector l1 TC_CARR42 REAL 0 z comp fine offset of offset vector l1 TC_CARR43 REAL 0 x comp fine offset of offset vector l2 TC_CARR44 REAL 0 y comp fine offset of offset vector l2 TC_CARR45 REAL 0 z comp fine offset of offset vector l2 TC_CARR46 REAL 0 x comp fine offset of offset vector l3 TC_CARR55 REAL 0 y comp ...

Page 1504: ...ammed or calculated from the active frame must then also be zero since the direction of the rotating axis is not defined If this condition is not satisfied an alarm is produced when the toolholder is activated Less than two rotating axes The option not to define a rotating axis makes sense when the toolholder to be described can only rotate the tool in one plane A sensible minimum data block may t...

Page 1505: ...tware versions The newly introduced vector l4 in particular has no significance Should the contents of l4 not be zero this is ignored The term Toolholder with orientation capability is actually no longer really appropriate for the new kinematic types with which the table can also be rotated either alone or additionally to the tool However it has been kept for reasons of compatibility The kinematic...

Page 1506: ...piece are rotary it is only possible to turn each of the components with one axis The kinematic of the rotary tool is described with the first rotary axis v1 and the two vectors l1 and l2 that of the rotary table with the second rotary axis v2 and the two vectors l3 and l4 The two kinematic chain components for machines with rotary tool and rotary workpiece are shown in the figure below Note On ma...

Page 1507: ...ffset vectors l1 to l4 and the offsets of the rotary axes v1 and v2 can be represented as the sum of a basic value and a fine offset The fine offset parameters assigned to the basic values are achieved by adding a value of 40 to the index of the basic value Note On machines with extended kinematics it is generally useful as with machines where only the table can be rotated for the machine referenc...

Page 1508: ...tion A data block for describing a rotation comprises one vector v1 v2 to describe the direction of rotation of the rotary axis in its initial state and an angle α1 α2 The angle of rotation is counted positively for clockwise rotation facing the direction of the rotation vector The two toolholder angles α1 and α2 are determined using a frame independent of the active plane currently selected G17 G...

Page 1509: ... block Component of the offset vector l1 200 0 0 Component of the offset vector l2 0 0 0 Component of offset vector l3 100 0 0 Component of rotary axis v1 1 0 0 Component of rotary axis v2 1 0 1 Tool base dimension of tool reference point 0 0 250 Note The tool reference point for the tool base dimension is defined by the reference point at the machine For more information about the reference point...

Page 1510: ...ck values are specified for the toolholder shown on a machine with rotary toolholder Description NCK variables Value x component of offset vector l1 TC_CARR1 200 y component of offset vector l1 TC_CARR2 0 z component of offset vector l1 TC_CARR3 0 x component of offset vector l2 TC_CARR4 0 y component of offset vector l2 TC_CARR5 0 z component of offset vector l2 TC_CARR6 0 x component of rotary a...

Page 1511: ...at the required orientation is set first and not modified during a machining process such as pocket milling on an inclined plane Furthermore the following 3 functions are described which are required for oblique machining Position programming in the direction of the tool orientation independent of an active frame Definition of a frame rotation by specifying the solid angle Definition of the compon...

Page 1512: ...ng two values are variable and are used to specify the orientation The constant values describe offsets and directions and setting options for the rotary axes the variable values describe the angles of the rotary axes 18 6 4 Machine with rotary work table System variables To date the angles stored in TC_CARR13 and TC_CARR14 were used for the calculation of the active tool length with TCOABS This s...

Page 1513: ...crements are scaled after determination of the angle from the active frame rotation If the requested orientation is not possible due to the machine kinematic the machining is aborted with an alarm This also applies if the target orientation is very close to an achievable orientation In particular the alarm in such situations cannot be prevented through the angle approximation TCARR frame offset A ...

Page 1514: ...ry tables kinematic types P and M activation with TCARR similarly does not lead to an immediate rotation of the coordinate system see figure i e even though the zero point of the coordinate system is offset relative to the machine while remaining fixed relative to the zero point of the workpiece the orientation remains unchanged in space Activation of kinematic types P and M With kinematics of typ...

Page 1515: ... also rotated according to the rotation of the table then PAROT can be used to activate such a rotation in a similar manner to the situation with a rotary tool With PAROT the translations scalings and mirrorings in the active frame are retained but the rotation component is rotated by the rotation component of a toolholder with orientation capability corresponding to the table PAROT and TOROT take...

Page 1516: ...he data of a toolholder Part program TC_CARRn m value This describes the previous value of the system variables n for toolholder m with the new value value value TC_CARRn m With def real value the parameters of a toolholder m can be read if they have already been defined e g set MD18088 Otherwise an alarm is signaled OPI interface The parameters of a toolholder with orientation capability can be r...

Page 1517: ...r is selected TCOFR or TCOFRZ The toolholder with orientation capability is set so that the tool points in the Z direction TCOFRX The toolholder with orientation capability is set so that the tool points in the X direction TCOFRY The toolholder with orientation capability is set so that the tool points in the Y direction The effect of TCOFR is such that when machining on an inclined surface tool c...

Page 1518: ...angles originally stored in the toolholder data are reactivated on a change from TCOFR to TCOABS Read rotary angle α1 or α2 The angles currently used to calculate the orientation can be read via system variable P_TCANG n where n 1 or n 2 If two permissible solutions i e a second valid pair of angles are available for a particular orientation the values can be accessed with P_TCANG 3 or P_TCANG 4 T...

Page 1519: ...ngth components of the active tool are interchanged The components of the toolholder are not interchanged The resulting tool length vector is then rotated in accordance with the current toolholder and if necessary modified by the offsets belonging to the toolholder The two toolholder angles α1and α2 are determined using a frame independent of the active plane currently selected G17 G19 Limit value...

Page 1520: ...ia the machine data MD28085 MC_MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT Assignment of TO unit to a channel Canceling all toolholder data blocks All values of all toolholder data sets can be deleted from within the part program using one command TC_CARR1 0 0 Values not set by the user are preset to 0 Activation A toolholder becomes active when both a toolholder and a tool have been activated The selection of the toolholde...

Page 1521: ...fied and an orientation that cannot be achieved by an active frame is requested with TCOFR an alarm is output Vector angle of rotation dependencies If vector v1 or v2 which describes the direction of a rotary axis is set to zero the associated angle of rotation α1 or α2 must also be set to zero Otherwise an alarm is produced The alarm is not output until the toolholder is activated i e when the to...

Page 1522: ... and higher If TCOABS was active for the last selection before reset the behavior is unchanged compared to previous versions A different active G code causes the toolholder with orientation capability to be activated with the frame that was active before the last reset Modified toolholder data TC_CARR are also considered If these data are unchanged the toolholder is activated in exactly the same s...

Page 1523: ... to define the kinematics are not perpendicular to each other This applies if fewer than two rotary axes are defined and is the case With kinematic type T with rotary tool if the tool axis which defines the tool direction is not perpendicular to the second axis With kinematic types M and P with rotary workpiece if the tool axis which defines the tool direction is not perpendicular to the first axi...

Page 1524: ... determined from a currently active orientable toolholder refer to Chapter Tool Holder with Orientation Capacity The angle of rotation of the tool holder with orientation capacity is normally but not necessarily defined with theTCOFR command from an active frame This method can be used to define the tool orientation independently of the actual kinematics with which the tool is rotated identically ...

Page 1525: ...Cutting edge position cut direction and angle for rotary tools Turning tools Turning tools means the following tools whose tool type TC_DP1 has values in the range of 500 to 599 Grinding tools tool types 400 to 499 are equivalent to turning tools Tools are treated independently of tool type such as turning tools if SD42950 SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE 2 ˠ ...

Page 1526: ... the cases in which both cutting edges lie in the same quadrant the values 5 to 8 characterize the cases in which both cutting edges lie in neighboring quadrants or there is a coordinate axis between the two cutting edges The cutting edge position is stored in the tool parameter TC_DP2 A cut direction can be defined for each turning tool It is stored in the tool parameter TC_DP11 It has values bet...

Page 1527: ...e stored in the tool parameters TC_DP10 or TC_DP24 18 7 4 Modifications during the rotation of turning tools Tool orientation Unlike milling tools turning tools are not rotation symmetric This means that normally 3 degrees of freedom or three rotary axes are required to describe the tool orientation The concrete kinematics therefore is independent of the machine only to the extent the desired orie...

Page 1528: ...he cutting edge position remains independent of the initial state either in the value range 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 The new cutting edge position is then determined exclusively from the angle of rotation if the specified values for holder angle and clearance angle are not allowed negative values resulting plate angle negative or more than 90 Clearance angle and holder angle are not modified in all these ...

Page 1529: ...n an axis or a bisecting axis is not fulfilled in most cases This is not desirable Instead the cutting edge reference point should always be modified in such a way that the distance vector between cutting edge reference point and cutting edge center point has one of the mentioned 8 directions The cutting edge position must be modified for this if necessary The ratios are shown with examples in the...

Page 1530: ...ng tools which is modified according to the following description in case of rotations Any specified cutting edge position for tools that are not milling and tapping tools or turning tools according to the mentioned definitions is not evaluated The cutting edge position of the tapping and milling tools is stored in tool parameter TC_DP2 as in the case of turning tools Based on the definition of th...

Page 1531: ...on No valid cut direction is defined for the active tool 0 Alarm output for error Invalid cut direction 1 Program stop for error Invalid cut direction The cutting edge angle clearance angle and holder angle of the active tool are both zero 2 Alarm output for error Not defined cutting edge angle 3 Program stop for error Not defined cutting edge angle The clearance angle of the active tool has an im...

Page 1532: ...function CUTMOD is initialized automatically during POWER ON with the value stored in machine data MD20127 MC_CUTMOD_INIT If the value of this machine data is 2 CUTMOD is set to the value that is set in machine data MD20126 MC_TOOL_CARRIER_RESET_VALUE Active toolholder at RESET 18 7 8 Programming The Cutting edge data modification for rotary tools function is activated with the CUTMOD command Synt...

Page 1533: ...a new selection is required even if at a subsequent time the toolholder that can be orientated is re activated with the specified number The function is not influenced by a reset 1 The function is always activated if a toolholder that can be orientated is active When changing the toolholder or when de selecting it and a subsequent new selection CUTMOD does not have to be set again 2 The function i...

Page 1534: ...lready active A tool does not have to be re selected for this purpose Influence of the active machining plane To determine modified tool nose position cutting direction and holder or clearance angle the evaluation of the cutting edge in the active plane G17 G19 is decisive However if setting data SD42940 SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST change of the tool length component when selecting the plane a valid valu...

Page 1535: ...ot returned in P_CUTMOD but the number of the active toolholder that can be orientated at the time of programming P_CUTMOD refers to the actual state in the preprocessing AC_CUTMOD to the actual main run block P_CUT_INV AC_CUT_INV Supplies the value TRUE if the tool is rotated so that the spindle direction of rotation must be inverted To do this the following four conditions must be fulfilled in t...

Page 1536: ...d a toolholder that can be orientated which causes a rotation is activated Program code Comment N10 TC_DP1 1 1 500 N20 TC_DP2 1 1 3 Length of cutting edge N30 TC_DP3 1 1 12 N40 TC_DP4 1 1 1 N50 TC_DP6 1 1 6 N60 TC_DP10 1 1 110 Holder angle N70 TC_DP11 1 1 3 Cut direction N80 TC_DP24 1 1 25 Clearance angle N90 TC_CARR7 2 0 TC_CARR8 2 1 TC_CARR9 2 0 B axis N100 TC_CARR10 2 0 TC_CARR11 2 0 TC_CARR12 ...

Page 1537: ...10 the position is approached which keeps the old tool nose reference point at the zero i e the vector 1 12 is rotated through 30 in the Z X plane In block N260 contrary to block N200 CUTMOD 2 is effective As a result of the rotation of the toolholder that can be orientated the modified tool nose position becomes 8 The consequence of this is also the different axis positions The tool radius compen...

Page 1538: ...ion with incremental programming Scratch workpiece with tool tip Save the actual position in the basic frame set actual value after reducing it by the tool compensation Traverse incrementally from the zero position Activation With setting data SD42442 SC_TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG it is possible to define whether a changed tool length is traversed with FRAME and incremental programming of an axis or wh...

Page 1539: ...exed toolholder Hirth tooth system is restricting the setting of the tool orientation In these cases it is then necessary contrary to the motion actually requested perpendicular to the plane to drill in the tool direction as the drill would otherwise not be guided in the direction of its longitudinal axis which among other things would lead to breaking of the drill MOVT The end point of such a mot...

Page 1540: ...direction and with G19 in X direction This applies both where no toolholder with orientation capability is active and for the case of a toolholder with orientation capability without rotary tool or with a rotary tool in its basic setting MOVT acts similarly for active orientation transformation 3 4 5 axis transformation If in a block with MOVT the tool orientation is changed simultaneously e g act...

Page 1541: ...f machine data is not equal to zero MD18114 MN_MM_ENABLE_TOOL_ORIENT assign orientation to tool cutting Define direction vector If all four system variables contain 0 the orientation is defined only by the active plane as before If system variable TC_DPV t d is equal to zero the other three parameters if available define a direction vector The amount of the vector is insignificant Example System v...

Page 1542: ...or The plane of the basic orientation for a cutting edge is treated either like a milling tool or like a turning tool irrespective of the entry in TC_DP1 if the following setting data is not equal to zero SD42950 SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE allocation of the tool length components independent of tool type Plane change A change of plane causes a change in orientation The following rotations are initiated T...

Page 1543: ...el to coordinate axes that are required frequently The permissible values are shown in the table below The values in the first and second third columns are equivalent Example For milling tools TC_DPV t d 2 is equal to TC_DPV3 t d 0 TC_DPV4 t d 0 TC_DPV5 t d V TC_DPV t d Basic orientation Milling tools Turning tools 0 or 6 TC_DPV5 t d TC_DPV4 t d TC_DPV3 t d TC_DPV3 t d TC_DPV5 t d TC_DPV4 t d 1 0 ...

Page 1544: ...s of the G code groups TOWSTD TOWMCS and TOWWCS If a value other than the initial setting is needed to ensure correct calculation scratching may be performed only in the STOP state Note Special handling of tool compensations pays particular attention to tool compensations with evaluation of sign for tool length with wear and temperature fluctuations The following are taken into account Tool type T...

Page 1545: ...offsets in References FBW Function Manual Tool Management PG Programming Manual Fundamentals Tool Compensations Required setting data SD42900 SC_MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH mirroring of tool length components and components of the tool base dimension SD42910 SC_MIRROR_TOOL_WEAR mirroring of wear values of tool length components SD42920 SC_WEAR_SIGN_CUTPOS sign evaluation of the wear components SD42930 SC_W...

Page 1546: ... lengths TC_DP3 TC_DP4 TC_DP5 Tool base dimensions TC_DP21 TC_DP22 TC_DP23 Mirroring is performed for all tool base dimensions whose associated axes are mirrored Wear values are not mirrored Mirror wear values The following setting data should be set in order to mirror the wear values SD42910 SC_MIRROR_TOOL_WEAR 0 Sign change tool wear when mirroring Inverting the sign mirrors the wear values of t...

Page 1547: ...he tool length and other variables such as tool radius rounding radius etc Entering a positive wear dimension makes the tool shorter and thinner Activation of modified setting data When the setting data described above are modified the tool components are not reevaluated until the next time a tool edge is selected If a tool is already active and the data of this tool are to be reevaluated the tool...

Page 1548: ...f tools The assignment of tool length components to geometry axes for turning and grinding tools tool types 400 to 599 is generated from the value of the following setting data in accordance with the following table SD42940 SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST change of tool length components on change of planes N10 SC_WEAR_SIGN 0 No sign inversion of the wear values N20 TC_DP1 1 1 120 End mill N30 TC_DP6 1 1 100...

Page 1549: ... value range is from 0 to 2 Any other value is interpreted as 0 The assignment of tool length components is always independent of the actual tool type Value 1 Always as for milling tools Value 2 Always as for turning tools Each value not equal to 0 which is not equal to one of the six listed values is evaluated as value 18 Layer Length 1 Length 2 Length 3 Z Y X 18 Y X Z 19 X Z Y 17 Z X Y 18 Y Z X ...

Page 1550: ...chining the dimensions continue to be displayed for a tool in the Z direction after the plane change When transformation is deactivated the basic tool is displayed in the x y or z direction according to the working plane Allowance is made for a programmed toolholder These tool dimensions are not altered when traversing without a transformation Note When toolholders with orientation capability are ...

Page 1551: ...pensation in the tool direction is an option which must be enabled beforehand It is activated by setting the following machine data to a value other than zero MD20390 MC_TOOL_TEMP_COMP_ON Activation of temperature compensation for tool length In addition the bit 2 must be set for each affected channel axis in the machine data MD32750 MA_TEMP_COMP_TYPE axis index temperature compensation type This ...

Page 1552: ...ree temperature compensation values together form a compensation vector and are contained in setting data SD42960 SC_TOOL_TEMP_COMP 0 Temperature compensation with reference to tools To SD42960 SC_TOOL_TEMP_COMP 2 The setting data are user defined e g using synchronized actions or from the PLC The compensation values can therefore also be used for other compensation purposes In the initial state o...

Page 1553: ...ts initial state the tool is parallel to the Z axis If the B axis is rotated through 90 degrees the tool points in the X direction Therefore a temperature compensation value in the following setting data is also effective in the direction of the machine X axis if transformation is active SD42960 SC_TOOL_TEMP_COMP 2 Temperature compensation with reference to tools If the transformation is deactivat...

Page 1554: ... 0 1 Geo axis for channel axis 1 MD24120 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 1 2 Geo axis for channel axis 2 MD24120 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 2 3 Geo axis for channel axis 3 MD24570 TRAFO5_AXIS1_1 0 0 0 MD24570 TRAFO5_AXIS1_1 1 0 0 Direction MD24570 TRAFO5_AXIS1_1 2 1 0 First rotary axis is parallel to Z MD24572 TRAFO5_AXIS1_2 0 0 0 Direction MD24572 TRAFO5_AXIS1_2 1 1 0 Second rotary axis is parallel to Y M...

Page 1555: ...However because the transformation is already deactivated the applied orientation is parallel to the Z axis again For more details on Temperature compensation see References FB2 Function Manual Extended Functions Compensations K3 For information on Generic 5 axis transformations see References FB3 Function Manual Special Functions 3 to 5 Axis Transformation F2 MD20390 TOOL_TEMP_COMP_ON TRUE Temper...

Page 1556: ... are intended for general use i e with active or inactive tool management or with the flat D number function Machine data are used to classify the sum offsets into Sum offset fine Sum offset coarse setup offset Setup offset The setup offset is the compensation to be entered by the setup engineer before machining These values are stored separately in the NCK The operator subsequently only has acces...

Page 1557: ... A new cutting edge compensation is activated An operator panel front RESET is performed An operator panel front START is performed The end of the program has been reached The name is oriented to the logic of the corresponding machine data for tools and cutting edges The setup offset and sum offset fine can be read and written via system variables and corresponding OPI services Summary of compensa...

Page 1558: ...DP8 TC_DP17 Length 4 tool type 700 slotting saw TC_DP9 TC_DP18 Length 5 TC_DP10 TC_DP19 Angle 1 angle between face of tool and torus surface TC_DP11 TC_DP20 Angle 2 angle between tool longitudinal axis and upper end of torus surface TC_DP21 Adapter length 1 TC_DP22 Adapter length 2 TC_DP23 Adapter length 3 System variable Clearance angle TC_DP24 The clearance angle is stored here for ManualTurn to...

Page 1559: ...C_SCP43 TC_SCP53 TC_SCP63 TC_ECP13 TC_ECP23 TC_ECP33 TC_ECP43 TC_ECP53 TC_ECP63 The numbers in bold 1 2 6 designate the parameters of a maximum of six location dependent or similar compensations that can be programmed with DL 1 to 6 for the parameter specified in column one TC_DP12 TC_DP4 Length 2 TC_SCP14 TC_SCP24 TC_SCP34 TC_SCP44 TC_SCP54 TC_SCP64 TC_ECP14 TC_ECP24 TC_ECP34 TC_ECP44 TC_ECP54 TC...

Page 1560: ...sic setting of the additive offset without a program DL programming The sum offset is always programmed relative to the active D number with the command DL n The sum offset n is added to the wear of the active D number The sum offset is deselected with the command DL 0 Note If you use setup offset and sum offset fine both compensations are combined and added to the tool wear Note DL0 is not allowe...

Page 1561: ...4 1 Setup offsets are available The sum offset is now composed of the sum offset fine represented by TC_SCPx and the setup offset represented by TC_ECPx Two data sets therefore exist for one DL number The sum offset is calculated by adding the corresponding components TC_ECPx TC_SCPx D2 Cutting edge offsets i e TC_DP3 to TC_DP11 wear TC_DP12 to TC_DP20 adapter dimension DL 1 Sum offset 1 is added ...

Page 1562: ...rst sum offset of the cutting edge D2 Cutting edge compensations i e TC_DP3 to TC_DP11 wear TC_DP12 to TC_DP20 adapter dimension DL 1 Sum offset 1 is added to the previous D2 compensations i e TC_ECP13 TC_SCP13 to TC_ECP21 TC_SCP21 DL 2 Sum offset 2 is added to the D2 compensation instead of sum offset 1 i e TC_ECP23 TC_SCP23 TC_ECP31 TC_SCP31 DL 0 Deselection of sum offset Only the data of D2 rem...

Page 1563: ... cutting edge d on tool t TC_SCP43 t d 1 234 Sets the value of the first component of sum offset 4 for cutting edge d on tool t to the value 1 234 R5 TC_ECP13 t d Sets the value of the R parameter to the value of the first component of setup offset 1 for cutting edge d on tool t R6 TC_ECP21 t d Sets the value of the R parameter to the value of the last component of setup offset 1 for cutting edge ...

Page 1564: ... data are saved during a general tool data backup as a component of the D number data sets It is advisable to save the sum offsets in order to allow the current status to be restored in the event of an acute problem Machine data settings can be made to exclude sum offsets from a data backup settings can be made separately for setup offsets and sum offsets fine status DELDL t d Deletes all sum offs...

Page 1565: ...set without program T5 M06 Tool number 5 is loaded no compensation active D1 DL 3 Compensation D1 sum offset 3 of D1 are activated X10 DL 2 Compensation D1 sum offset 2 are activated X20 DL 0 Sum offset deselection only compensation D1 is now active D2 Compensation D2 is activated the sum offset is not included in the compensation X1 DL 1 Compensation D2 sum offset 1 are activated X2 D0 Compensati...

Page 1566: ... TC_ADPT1 TC_ADPT3 Total offsets fine TC_SCPx3 TC_SCPx5 Sum offsets coarse or setup offsets TC_ECPx3 TC_ECPx5 Offset vector l1 of toolholder with orientation capability TC_CARR1 TC_CARR3 Offset vector l2 of toolholder with orientation capability TC_CARR4 TC_CARR6 Offset vector l3 of toolholder with orientation capability TC_CARR15 TC_CARR17 Note The tool base dimension and adapter dimension can on...

Page 1567: ...ations with the aid of offset vectors l1 l3 For more information see References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Tool Offset W1 Section Toolholder with orientation capability Minor operator compensations Minor compensations however must also be modified during the normal production mode The reasons for this are e g Tool wear Clamping errors Temperature sensitivity of the machine These compensat...

Page 1568: ...nents SD42935 Which of the wear components Wear TC_DP12 TC_DP14 Setup offsets or sum offsets coarse TC_ECPx3 TC_ECPx5 Sum offsets fine TC_SCPx3 TC_SCPx5 are to be transformed in the transformations Adapter transformation Toolholder with orientation capability are to be or not to be transformed can be defined via the setting data SD42935 SC_WEAR_TRANSFORM transformation of wear values With the sett...

Page 1569: ...D Initial setting value for offsets in tool length TOWMCS Wear data in the machine coordinate system MCS TOWWCS Wear values in workpiece coordinate system WCS TOWBCS Wear values in basic coordinate system BCS TOWTCS Wear values in the TCS Tool Coordinate System at the toolholder tool carrier reference point T TOWKCS Wear values in tool coordinate system for kinematic transformation KCS of tool hea...

Page 1570: ...ool length components Figure 18 53 Coordinate system for the evaluation of tool lengths 18 11 5 2 Functionality of the individual wear values TOWSTD Initial setting default behavior The wear values are added to the other tool length components The resulting total tool length is then used in further calculations In the case of an active toolholder with orientation capability The wear values are sub...

Page 1571: ...s calculated as for TOWMCS without taking the wear into account The wear data are interpreted in the workpiece coordinate system The wear vector in the workpiece coordinate system is converted to the machine coordinate system and added to the tool vector TOWBCS Wear values in BCS basic coordinate system If a toolholder with orientation capability is active the tool vector is calculated as for TOWM...

Page 1572: ...dinate system by way of the tool coordinate system of the kinematic transformation and added to the tool vector G code change when a tool is active Changing the G code in the group TOWSTD TOWMCS TOWWCS TOWBCS TOWTCS and TOWKCS does not affect an already active tool and does not become effective until the next tool is selected A new G code of this group will also come into effect if it is programme...

Page 1573: ...ng the wear components On a plane change the assignment between the non transformed wear components and the geometry axes is retained i e these are not interchanged as with other length components The assignment of components depends on the active plane for tool selection Example Let s assume a milling tool is used where only the wear value TC_DP12 assigned to length L1 is not equal to zero If G17...

Page 1574: ...y A further function can be used to determine information about the assignment of the tool lengths of the active tool to the abscissa ordinate and applicate 18 12 2 Saving with TOOLENV Scope of a tool environment The TOOLENV memory function is used to save any current states needed for the evaluation of tool data stored in the memory The individual data are as follows The active G code of group 6 ...

Page 1575: ... of the active toolholder with orientation capability The orientation component and the resulting length of an active transformation In addition to the data describing the environment of the tool the T number D number and DL number of the active tool are also stored so that the tool can be accessed later in the same environment as the TOOLENV call without having to name the tool again Not in the t...

Page 1576: ...The TOOLENV function is a predefined subprogram It must therefore be programmed in a separate block 18 12 3 Delete tool environment DELTOOLENV function This function can be used to delete sets of data used to describe tool environments Deletion means that the set of data stored under a particular name can no longer be accessed an access attempt triggers an alarm The DELTOOLENV function is a predef...

Page 1577: ...ad or by a cold start NCK powerup with default machine data There are no further automatic deletion operations e g on RESET Syntax There are two call formats Status DELTOOLENV Status DELTOOLENV _NAME Value parameter Status INT 0 Function OK 1 No memory reserved for tool environments MD18116 MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ENV 0 number of tool environments in TO area i e the tool environments functionality is not a...

Page 1578: ... 0 P_TOOLENV This system variable returns the number of the nth data set for describing a tool environment The assignment of numbers to data sets is not fixed but can be changed as a result of deleting or creating data sets The data sets are numbered internally The range is from 1 to P_TOOLENVN 18 12 5 Read T D DL from a tool environment GETTENV function The GETTENV function is used to read the T ...

Page 1579: ...nd the conditions under which the tool is used The GETTCOR function is a predefined subprogram It must therefore be programmed in a separate block Syntax Status GETTENV _NAME _TDDL Value parameter Status INT 0 Function OK 1 No memory reserved for tool environments MD18116 MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ENV 0 number of tool environments in TO area i e the tool environments functionality is not available 2 A tool e...

Page 1580: ...th of cutting edge LEN 1 Abscissa LEN 2 Ordinate LEN 3 Applicate LEN 4 Tool radius LEN 5 The coordinate system defined in _COMP and _STAT is used as the reference coordinate system for the length components If no coordinate system is defined in _COMP the tool lengths are represented in the machine coordinate system The assignment of the abscissa ordinate and applicate to the geometry axes depends ...

Page 1581: ... two alternative components is active for the tool in use E Setup offsets G Geometry K Kinematic transformation is only evaluated for generic 3 4 and 5 axis transformation S Sum offsets T Toolholder with orientation capability W Wear If the first substring is empty except for white spaces the complete tool length is calculated allowing for all components This applies even if the _COMP parameter is...

Page 1582: ...ASK 3 definition of tool parameters MD20100 MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF X Geometry axis with face axis funtion X is diameter axis standard turning machine configuration _T INT Internal T number of tool If this parameter is not specified or if its value is 0 the tool stored in _STAT is used If the value of this parameter is 1 the T number of the active tool is used It is also possible to specify the number ...

Page 1583: ... transformation in the channel Only the sum is relevant for the transformation in both cases The way in which the two individual components are composed is insignificant When calculating the tool length however it is relevant which component is assigned to the tool and which is assigned to the tool table This explains the introduction of new machine data MD24558 24658 MC_TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_PART_1...

Page 1584: ...easuring cycles The above functions can be configured to reproduce the behavior of the measuring cycles in relation to the tool length calculation GETTCOR _LEN Calculates the tool length of the currently active tool in the machine coordinate system allowing for all components GETTCOR _LEN CGW W Calculates the tool length for the active tool consisting of the adapter or tool base dimension geometry...

Page 1585: ...te values TC_DP3 to TC_DP5 Syntax Status SETTCOR _CORVAL _COMP _CORCOMP _CORMODE _GEOAX _STAT _T _D _DL With the exception of the first two parameters _CORVAL and _COMP all of the parameters can also be omitted Value parameter Status INT 0 Function OK 1 No memory reserved for tool environments MD18116 MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ENV 0 number of tool environments in TO area i e the tool environments functionali...

Page 1586: ...ius dimension This means that a tool is e g longer by the specified dimension this correspondingly results in a change to the workpiece diameter that is twice as large The dimensions refer to the basic system inch or metric of the control system _COMP STRING String that comprises either one or two characters The first or only character for the 1st component Val1 and the second character for the 2n...

Page 1587: ...ultaneously In contrast to the versions from 0 and 1 the offset values contained in _CORVAL refer to the coordinates of Val1 components see following parameter _CORMODE of the tool Any possible inclination of an existing tool compared with the workpiece coordinate system has no influence on the offset 3 5 Correction of tool lengths L1 to L3 TC_DP3 to TC_DP5 or the corresponding values for wear set...

Page 1588: ... set to zero L1 L2 L3 become zero or coordinate values that were previously zero are now not equal to zero However if the corresponding operations are successively executed for all three geometry axes then all three coordinate values of the components to be deleted are always zero If the tool is not rotated with respect to the workpiece coordinate system or is rotated so that all tool components r...

Page 1589: ... in parameter _COMP error code in Status Note Calculating the tool length depending on machine data MD20360 The two least significant bits of this machine data specify how the wear bit 0 and tool length bit 1 are to be evaluated if a diameter axis is used for turning and grinding tools If the appropriate bits are set then for the tool length calculation a factor of 0 5 is applied to the associated...

Page 1590: ...tal tool length is thus L1 0 333 1 000 1 333 Example 2 _CORCOMP is 1 therefore an offset value of 0 333 acting in the Z direction is added to the wear value of 1 0 Therefore the resulting total tool length is L1 10 0 1 333 11 333 N10 def real _CORVAL 3 N20 TC_DP1 1 1 120 Milling tool N30 TC_DP3 1 1 10 0 Geometry L1 N40 TC_DP12 1 1 1 0 Wear L1 N50 _CORVAL 0 0 333 N60 t1 d1 g17 g0 N70 r1 settcor _CO...

Page 1591: ...o the geometry axes 1 Function is OK however the content of _MATRIX must be evaluated for a correct description the tool length components are not parallel to the geometry axes 1 Invalid string in parameter _COORD 2 No tool active _AXIND 3 INT array Indices 0 to 2 are assigned to the abscissa 0 ordinate 1 and applicate 2 e g _AXIND 0 contains the number of the tool length components which are effe...

Page 1592: ...TRIX The _COORD parameter can be used to specify which coordinate system is to be used for the geometry axes If the _COORD parameter is not specified notation LENTOAX _AXIND _MATRIX the WCS is used default Example Standard situation milling tool with G17 L1 applies in Z applicate L2 applies in Y ordinate L3 applies in X abscissa Function call in the form Status LENTOAX _AXIND _MATRIX WCS The resul...

Page 1593: ... applicate A frame rotation of Z through 60 degrees is now programmed with G17 active e g rot Z60 The direction of the applicate Z direction remains unchanged the main component of L2 now lies in the direction of the new X axis the main component of L1 now lies in the direction of the negative Y axis The return axis is thus 1 and _AXIND contains the values 2 3 1 In this case the associated matrix ...

Page 1594: ... must be deactivated until the first valid T number has been output again That means that the NCK must not wait on D programming REORG The only writable variable A_MONIFACT which is defined here is stored by main run data Since the write process takes place synchronously to the main run no special measures are required for Reorg 18 14 2 SD42935 expansions SD42935 Which of the wear components are t...

Page 1595: ...adius 5 mm and length 20 mm Block N90 defines a rotation of 37 degrees about the Y axis Block N120 activates the tool radius compensation and all settings are made to describe the compensation in the following blocks with a rotation of 37 degrees about the Y axis N10 Definition of toolholder 1 N20 TC_CARR8 1 1 Component of the first rotary axis in the Y direction N30 N40 Definition of tool compens...

Page 1596: ... distance of 20 mm from the zero point N10 TC_DP1 1 1 120 N20 TC_DP3 1 1 13 Tool length 13 mm Definition of toolholder 1 N30 TC_CARR1 1 0 X component of 1st offset vector N40 TC_CARR2 1 0 Y component of 1st offset vector N50 TC_CARR3 1 0 Z component of 1st offset vector N60 TC_CARR4 1 0 X component of 2nd offset vector N70 TC_CARR5 1 0 Y component of 2nd offset vector N80 TC_CARR6 1 15 Z component...

Page 1597: ...s a rotation in accordance with the rotation of the table of the toolholder with orientation capability The new X direction thus points in the direction of the bisecting line in the 4th quadrant the new Z axis in the direction of the bisecting line in the 1st quadrant The zero point is approached in N290 i e the machine position X10 607 Y0 Z 4 393 since the position of the zero point is not change...

Page 1598: ...tersecting lines in the X Z and in the Y Z plane each form an angle of 45 degrees or 45 degrees with the X or Y axis The plane defined in such a way therefore has the following position the surface normal points towards the solid diagonals N370 traverses to the position X20 Y0 Z0 in the new coordinate system Since the tool is deselected with D0 at the same time there is no longer an additional off...

Page 1599: ...ro N10 TC_TP2 1 MillingTool Name of identifier N20 TC_TP7 1 9 Location types N30 TC_TP8 1 2 Status enabled and not blocked D corr D 1 N40 TC_DP1 1 1 120 Tool type milling N50 TC_DP3 1 1 tool length compensation vector N60 TC_DP12 1 1 wear N70 TC_SCP13 1 1 0 1 Sum offset DL 1 N80 TC_ECP13 1 1 0 01 Insert offset DL 1 N90 TC_ADPTT 1 5 Adapter transformation N100 TC_ADPT1 1 0 001 Adapter dimension Mag...

Page 1600: ...n block N370 a rotation through 30 degrees is activated about the X axis The original compensation value of 1 01 in the Z direction thus yields a new Z component of 0 875 1 01 cos 30 and a new Y component of 0 505 1 01 sin 30 This yields the dimension specified in the program comment when added to the sum of the tool length sum offset and adapter dimension produced in block N390 In addition a tool...

Page 1601: ...e The sum of the two vectors yields the dimension specified in the comment in N430 18 15 2 Examples 3 6 SETTCOR function for tool environments Example 3 _CORCOMP is 2 therefore the compensation effective in the Z direction is entered in the geometry component the old value is overwritten and the wear value is deleted The resulting total tool length is thus L1 0 333 0 0 0 333 Example 4 N10 def real...

Page 1602: ...o be rotated in relation to the workpiece coordinate system WCS In the WCS the compensation value N70 acts on the geometry axis with index 1 i e on the X axis because G18 is active Since _CORRMODE 3 the tool wear in the direction of the X axis of the WCS must become zero once N100 has been executed The contents of the relevant tool parameters at the end of the program are thus N10 def real _CORVAL...

Page 1603: ... compensation value is 0 the total tool length and thus the position approached in N140 may not change If _CORVAL were not equal to 0 in N120 a new total tool length and thus a new position in N140 would result however the wear component of the tool length would always be zero i e the total tool length is subsequently always contained in the geometry component of the tool The same result as that a...

Page 1604: ...sult that the total tool length is stored in the geometry component of the tool due to TC_DP13 after the first SETTCOR call in N100 N30 TC_DP3 1 1 10 0 Geometry L1 N40 TC_DP4 1 1 15 0 Geometry L2 N50 TC_DP12 1 1 10 0 Wear L1 N60 TC_DP13 1 1 0 0 Wear L2 N70 _CORVAL 0 0 0 N71 _CORVAL 1 5 0 N72 _CORVAL 2 0 0 N80 rot y 30 N90 t1 d1 g18 g0 N100 r1 settcor _CORVAL GW 1 3 1 N110 t1 d1 x0 y0 z0 MCS positi...

Page 1605: ...e figure below Figure 18 55 Tool length compensation example 8 N10 def real _CORVAL 3 N20 TC_DP1 1 1 500 Turning tool N30 TC_DP3 1 1 10 0 Geometry L1 N40 TC_DP4 1 1 15 0 Geometry L2 N50 TC_DP5 1 1 20 0 Geometry L3 N60 TC_DP12 1 1 10 0 Wear L1 N70 TC_DP13 1 1 0 0 Wear L2 N80 TC_DP14 1 1 0 0 Wear L3 N90 SC_WEAR_SIGN TRUE N100 _CORVAL 0 10 0 N110 _CORVAL 1 15 0 N120 _CORVAL 2 5 0 N130 rot y 30 N140 t...

Page 1606: ...of setting data SD42930 on the L3 component in the Y direction can be recognized without the additional complication caused by the frame rotation Example 9 2 tool length must be valued in the diameter axis with the factor 0 5 is the value of machine data MD20360 MC_TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK definition of tool parameters X is diameter axis TC_DP3 1 1 10 000 Geometry L1 unchanged TC_DP4 1 1 15 000 Geo...

Page 1607: ... added to the original length in lengths L2 and L3 Twice the compensation value 2 mm is added to the original tool length in L1 in order to change the total length by 1 mm as required If the positions approached in blocks N110 and N130 are compared it can be seen that each axis position has changed by 1 mm N150 r4 TC_DP4 1 1 5 4 000 1 000 N160 r5 TC_DP5 1 1 6 5 000 1 000 N170 m30 ...

Page 1608: ...IND_OF_SUMCORR Properties of additive offsets in the TO area SRAM 18114 MM_ENABLE_TOOL_ORIENT Assign orientation to cutting edges 18116 MM_NUM_TOOL_ENV Tool environments in the TOA area SRAM Number Identifier MC_ Description 20096 T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO Meaning of the address extension with T M tool change 20110 RESET_MODE_MASK Definition of initial control setting after RESET part program end 2...

Page 1609: ..._INTERS_POLY_ENABLE Intersection process possible for polynomials 20270 CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT Basic setting of tool cutting edge without programming 20272 SUMCORR_DEFAULT Initial setting of additive offset without program 20360 TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK Definition of tool parameters 20390 TOOL_TEMP_COMP_ON Activation of temperature compensation for tool length 20392 TOOL_TEMP_COMP_LIMIT Maximum tempe...

Page 1610: ...CUTPOS Sign of wear for tools with cutting edge position 42930 WEAR_SIGN Sign of the wear 42935 WEAR_TRANSFORM Transformations for tool components 42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST Change of tool length components for change of plane 42950 TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE Assignment of the tool length offset independent of tool type 42960 TOOL_TEMP_COMP Temperature compensation value in relation to tool 42974 TCARR_FINE_CO...

Page 1611: ... specified from the key operated switch on the machine control panel or from the PLC user program It is only permissible to set one bit If several bits are set simultaneously the control internally activates switch position 3 Key operated switch position DBX56 7 DBX56 6 DBX56 5 DBX56 4 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 2 0 1 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 Corresponding to Machine data for protection levels MD11612 MD51044 MD510...

Page 1612: ...s reported The HMI buffer battery should be checked An insufficient battery voltage also affects the current time on the operator interface Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 No HMI battery alarm is present Signal irrelevant for SINUMERIK 840 840Di with PCU 50 PCU 20 or PCU 70 Additional references BHsl Operator Components Manual Chapter Replacing the battery DB10 DBX104 7 NCK CPU ready Edge evalua...

Page 1613: ...chine axis of the NC the corresponding drive is not in cyclic operation i e it is not cyclically exchanging PROFIdrive telegrams with the NC Signal irrelevant for SINUMERIK 840Di sl DB10 DBX108 6 Drives ready Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 For all machine axes of the NC the corresponding drives are ready DB31 DBX93 5 1 DRIVE ready Signal state 0 For at least one machine ...

Page 1614: ...e References The control is not ready again until after POWER ON Corresponding to Relay contact NC Ready Additional references DA Diagnosis Manual FB1 Functions Manual basic Functions PLC Basic Program P3 DB10 DBX109 0 NCK alarm is active Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 At least one NCK alarm is present This is a group signal for the interface signals of all existing chan...

Page 1615: ... is activated This can be evaluated Additional references DA Diagnostics Manual DB10 DBX109 7 NCK battery alarm Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 The NCK battery voltage monitoring function has responded This may be due to the following causes The battery voltage is within the pre warning limit range approx 2 7 to 2 9 V Alarm 2100 NCK battery warning threshold reached has b...

Page 1616: ... automatically The screen is darkened if no key is pressed for a period defined via the following machine data on the keyboard MD9006 MM_DISPLAY_BLACK_TIME time to darken the screen The screen is brightened the next time a key on the operator panel front is pressed Application example s Screen saver Special cases errors Notice The keyboard of the operator panel front continues to be effective if t...

Page 1617: ...ion example s Applies to HMI Advanced only Corresponding to DB19 DBX20 4 Recall alarm cleared DB19 DBX0 7 Actual value in workpiece coordinate system 0 machine coordinate system Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The PLC selects the display of actual values in the workpiece coordinate system WCS This means that when the machine area is selected the WCS dis...

Page 1618: ...t program Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Unload active Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Unload inactive Application example s Valid for HMI Embedded a file transfer can be initiated using the hard disk DB19 DBX13 6 Load part program Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Loading active Signal state 0 or edge chang...

Page 1619: ...to DB19 DBB12 DB19 DBB15 PLC line offset Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic Description This byte to control the RS 232 C interface defines the line of the standard or user control file in which the control file to be transferred is specified Application example s Valid for HMI Embedded with reference to DB19 DBB12 Dependent on DB19 DBX14 7 0 Akt FS PLC line offset in a standard control fi...

Page 1620: ...ence to DB19 DBB13 Dependent on DB19 DBX14 7 0 Akt FS PLC line offset in a standard control file DB19 DBX14 7 1 Pas FS PLC line offset in a user control file DB19 DBX44 0 Mode change disable Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Mode change disable active Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Mode change disable active DB19 DBX45 0 FC9 Out Active Edge evaluation ...

Page 1621: ...er via the PLC user program Application example s Applies only to HMI Advanced DB19 DBX20 4 Recall alarm cleared Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Recall alarm deleted inactive Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Recall alarm deleted inactive Note The signal is not reset automatically it must be set by the user via the PLC user program Application example s...

Page 1622: ... channel number from HMI Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic DB19 DBB24 Actual image number of the JobShop interface Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic DB19 DBX26 1 OK job list selection from PLC status Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Transfer correctly completed Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Transfer completed with error Correspondin...

Page 1623: ...tate 1 or edge change 0 1 Selection active Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Selection inactive Corresponding to Valid for HMI Advanced DB19 DBB27 Error program handling Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic DB21 DBX6 2 Delete distance to go channel specific Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Delete distance to go channel specific IS Delete distance t...

Page 1624: ...ic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 At least one NCK alarm is present for this channel Thus the following group interface signal is also set DB10 DBX109 0 NCK alarm is present The PLC user program can interrogate whether processing for the channel in question has been interrupted because of an NCK channel DB21 DBX36 7 NCK alarm with processing stop present Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 No NCK...

Page 1625: ...ve DB31 DBX1 3 Axis spindle disable Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Axis disable Spindle disable Test status If the interface signal Axis disable is output for this axis no more position partial setpoints are output to the position controller the axis travel is therefore disabled The position control loop remains closed and the remaining following error...

Page 1626: ...is spindle disable edge change 1 0 does not take effect until the axis spindle is stationary i e an interpolation setpoint is no longer present Application example s The interface signal Axis disable and Spindle disable is used when running in and testing a new NC part program In so doing the machine axes and spindles should not execute any traversing or rotational movement DB31 DBX1 3 Axis spindl...

Page 1627: ...aversing command for this axis i e the axis traverses the remaining distance to go For response together with synchronized operation see References FB2 Function Manual Expanded Functions Synchronized Spindle S3 This signal is no longer effective when the coupling for FS FA is activated No 6 If the signal for the LS LA is set it also applies to the FS FA s No 7 A workpiece clamped between two spind...

Page 1628: ... controller enable so that the previous setpoint position is restored Then all the other axis movements start from the setpoint position valid before controller enable was removed When the position control is switched in again the axis may make a speed setpoint jump Zero speed monitoring or clamping monitoring is still active In order to disable switch out the zero speed monitoring when clamping a...

Page 1629: ...wing features are valid Both position measuring systems are inactive There is no actual value acquisition The position measuring system monitoring functions are disabled among others cable connection of a measured value encoder The reference point has no effect DB31 DBX60 4 5 referenced synchronized has the signal condition 0 As soon as an axis is parked the interface signals DB31 DBX61 5 position...

Page 1630: ...e removed from the machine the position measuring system monitoring is switched off in the parking position The mounted axis spindle encoder turns so quickly in certain applications that it can no longer maintain its electrical characteristics edge rate of rise etc 3 Switch off measuring system When measuring system 1 or 2 is switched off the associated interface signal DB31 DBX60 4 60 5 reference...

Page 1631: ...is of the geometry grouping is stationary or traversing at this point in time Axis spindle stationary Position control loop of axis is opened When IS Follow up mode 1 the position actual value is switched to the position setpoint i e the setpoint position is corrected to the actual value position The position actual value of the axis spindle continues to be acquired by the control The controller e...

Page 1632: ...B31 DBX61 3 follow up mode active DB31 DBX1 4 follow up mode DB31 DBX61 5 position controller active DB31 DBX61 6 speed controller active DB31 DBX61 7 current controller active MD36620 MA_SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME switch off delay controller enable MD36610 MA_AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME braking ramp time when errors occur DB31 DBX2 2 Delete distance to go axis specific spindle reset Edge evaluation yes ...

Page 1633: ...gnal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Signal irrelevant for MD35590 MA_PARAMSET_CHANGE_ENABLE 0 Application example s The binary coded index of the parameter set to be activated is located in the 3 bits 0 corresponds to the 1st parameter set 1 corresponds to the 2nd parameter set etc max 6 parameter sets are possible Special cases errors Indices 6 7 are mapped onto parameter set 6 Corresponding to DB31 ...

Page 1634: ...are as follows Current setpoint filters low pass band stop for adaptation to the mechanics Motor speed normalization Speed controller parameters Speed setpoint filter Speed monitoring data As soon as the new drive parameter becomes effective the drive signals this to the PLC using the interface signals DB31 DBX93 0 1 and 2 active parameter set Application example s Drive parameter switchover can b...

Page 1635: ...al DB31 DBX21 5 motor being selected must be set to 0 Corresponding to DB31 DBX93 3 and 4 active motor DB31 DBX21 5 motor being selected Additional references IDsl Commissioning Manual IBN CNC NCK PLC Drive DB31 DBX21 5 Motor being selected Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The PLC outputs the interface signal DB31 DBX21 5 motor being selected to the driv...

Page 1636: ...ing to DB31 DBX93 6 integrator n controller disabled Additional references IDsl Commissioning Manual IBN CNC NCK PLC Drive DB31 DBX21 7 Pulse enable Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Pulse enable is signaled by the PLC for this drive axis spindle The pulses for the drive modules are only enabled if all enable signals are available see DB31 DBX93 5 In this...

Page 1637: ... no Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 The control signals that the follow up mode for the axis spindle is not active Prerequisites for this are The controller enable for the drive has been withdrawn either by the PLC with controller enable 0 signal or inside the control for faults refer to the references Follow up operation is selected either by the PLC with IS follow up operation 1 signal or...

Page 1638: ... be accelerated Corresponding to MD36060 MA_STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL maximum velocity speed for signal Axis spindle stationary DB31 DBX61 5 Position controller active Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 The control signals that the position controller for the axis or spindle is closed Signal state 0 The control signals that the position controller for the axis or spindle is open I...

Page 1639: ...n axes as soon as MD30350 MA_SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT output of the axis signals for simulation axes 1 Corresponding to DB31 DBX61 5 position controller active DB31 DBX61 7 Current controller active Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 The control signals that the current controller is closed for the axis or spindle Signal state 0 The control signals that the current controller for ...

Page 1640: ...d with Lubrication pulse interface signal Machine bed lubrication therefore depends on the distance traveled Corresponding to MD33050 MA_LUBRICATION_DIST lubrication pulse distance DB31 DBX92 1 Ramp function generator disable active Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 PLC receives the signal that the ramp function generator fast stop is active The function has been activated ...

Page 1641: ...lection is active Note When selecting the motor to reduce the starting currents it is possible to change between star and delta operation Motor selection Meaning B A Motor 1 Star operation active 0 0 Motor 2 Delta operation active 0 1 Motor 3 Reserved 1 0 Motor 4 Reserved 1 1 Corresponding to DB31 DBX21 3 and DBX21 4 motor selection DB31 DBX21 5 motor being selected Additional references IDsl Comm...

Page 1642: ...Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 The pulses have been enabled for the drive The axis spindle can now be traversed Signal state 0 The pulses have been disabled for the drive Therefore the axis spindle cannot be traversed The pulses are disabled as soon as there is no enable signal refer to the following diagram Further if the controller enable of drive is withdrawn the driv...

Page 1643: ...7 pulse enable MD1404 MD_PULSE_SUPRESSION_DELAY MD1403 MD_PULSE_SUPRESSION_SPEED Additional references IDsl Commissioning Manual IBN CNC NCK PLC Drive DB31 DBX93 7 Pulses enabled 5 QIHHG UHJHQHUDWLYH IHHGEDFN PRGXOH 3 3XOVH HQDEOH GULYH PRGXOH 5 1 3XOVHV HQDEOHG 6DIH RSHUDWLQJ VWRS WHUPLQDO 3XOVH HQDEOH KDUGZDUH 3XOVH HQDEOH VRIWZDUH WHUPLQDO HQWUDO SXOVH HQDEOH 3 167 SXOVHV HQDEOHG 3 167 SXOVH HQ...

Page 1644: ...108 6 drive ready is withdrawn If the motor temperature rises still further and the shutdown threshold defined in MD1607 MD_MOTOR_TEMP_SHUTDOWN_LIMIT motor temperature shutdown limit default value 155 C is reached the drive is stopped immediately refer to in the diagram An alarm is also output and IS Drive Ready canceled However if the motor temperature drops back down to below the warning thresho...

Page 1645: ... warning Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 The drive module sends the warning heatsink temperature prewarning to the PLC This triggers the following Terminal 5 on the infeed regenerative feedback module is simultaneously activated The drive module is switched off after 20 seconds The drives are stopped when the impulse enable is removed Then alarm 300515 is triggered Signal...

Page 1646: ...etpoint has entered the speed actual value has reached the speed tolerance bandwidth MD1426 MD_SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_TOL tolerance bandwidth for nset nact signal and has remained within this tolerance bandwidth for at least the time defined using machine data MD1427 MD_SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_DELAY delay time nset nact signal refer to the diagram Even if the speed actual value leaves the tolerance band becaus...

Page 1647: ...EQ_ACT_DELAY Additional references IDsl Commissioning Manual IBN CNC NCK PLC Drive DB31 DBX94 2 Ramp up completed 7 0 0 B63 B 6B 4B 7B VLJQDO WKDW LV LQWHUORFNHG 7 7 WKHUHIRUH QR VLJQDO 7 7 6LJQDO 7 7 6LJQDO 7 7 WKHUHIRUH QR VLJQDO 7 7 0 0 B63 B 6B 4B 7B72 6 QDFW QVHW 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH QDFW 6SHHG WROHUDQFH EDQGZLGWK 6SHHG VHWSRLQW QVHW 6 5DPS XS FRPSOHWHG 6SHHG Q 7LPH 7LPH 7LPH 7LPH LQDFWLYH DFWL...

Page 1648: ... is set using the machine data MD1428 MD_TORQUE_THRESHOLD_X threshold torque as a of the actual torque limit value The torque threshold characteristic is speed dependent While ramping up the interface signal DB31 DBX94 2 Md Mdx remains at 1 The signal Md Mdx only becomes active after ramp up has been completed DB31 DBX94 2 ramp up completed 1 and the signal interlocking time for the threshold torq...

Page 1649: ... 7 0 0 B72548 B7 5 6 2 B B 7 0 0 B63 B 6B 4B 7B 7 7 7 WKHUHIRUH QR VLJQDO VLJQDO WKDW LV LQWHUORFNHG 7 7 LQWHUORFNHG WR DFWLYH 7KUHVKROG WRUTXH 0 0 B72548 B7 5 6 2 B IRU 0G 0G 7RUTXH VHWSRLQW 0G 7RUTXH 7LPH 6 0G 0G 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH QDFW 6SHHG WROHUDQFH EDQG 6SHHG VHWSRLQW QVHW 6 5DPS XS FRPSOHWHG 6SHHG 7LPH 7LPH 7LPH 7LPH LQDFWLYH DFWLYH 5DPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU DFWLYH FRQWURO ZRUG VHUYR ...

Page 1650: ...ed Cyclic Signal state 1 The drive signals to the PLC that the speed actual value nact is less than the threshold speed nx The threshold speed is defined using the machine data MD1417 MD_SPEED_THRESHOLD_X Signal state 0 The speed actual value is higher than the threshold speed Corresponding to MD1417 MD_SPEED_THRESHOLD_X threshold speed nx for nact nx Additional references IDsl Commissioning Manua...

Page 1651: ...Signal state 0 The conditions described above have not yet been fulfilled The speed actual value is outside the speed tolerance bandwidth Corresponding to DB31 DBX94 2 ramp up completed MD1426 MD_SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_TOL MD1427 MD_SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_DELAY Additional references IDsl Commissioning Manual IBN CNC NCK PLC Drive DB31 DBX94 6 nact nset ...

Page 1652: ...nt DB21 DBX8 0 DBX9 1 Activate machine specific protection zone 1 10 Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The pre activated machine related protection zone 1 10 is activated by the PLC user program The protection zone is immediately activated Only protection zones that have been pre activated in the part program can be activated Signal state 0 or edge ch...

Page 1653: ... 1 0 The machine related protection zone 1 10 is deactivated in the current block De activated in the part program The protection zone can therefore not be activated or de activated in the PLC user program using the interface signal DB21 DBX8 0 to DBX9 1 activate machine related protection zone 1 10 Corresponding to DB21 DBX8 0 DBX9 1 activate machine related protection zone 1 10 DB21 DBX274 0 DBX...

Page 1654: ...clic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The activated channel specific protection zone 1 10 is violated in the current block The pre activated channel specific protection zone 1 10 would be violated in the current block if it would be activated by the PLC Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The activated channel specific protection zone 1 10 is not violated in the current block The pre activated chan...

Page 1655: ...ious interface signals Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Normal condition a hardware limit switch has not been actuated Corresponding to MD36600 MA_BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE deceleration behavior when the hardware limit switch responds DB31 DBX12 2 DBX12 3 2nd software limit switch plus or minus Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 2nd software limit switch for the ...

Page 1656: ...has been exceeded The reference point for the position measuring system involved has been lost IS Referenced synchronized has a signal state 0 Closed loop position control is no longer possible Spindles continue to run with closed loop speed control Axes are stopped with a fast stop with open circuit position control loop along a speed setpoint ramp Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The limit freq...

Page 1657: ...pped with NC Stop the spindle is in the closed loop position controlled mode SPCON SPOS instruction and is stationary the axis is switched from closed loop speed controlled to closed loop position controlled mode with IS position measuring system Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The axis is not in the appropriate exact stop or the interpolator is active for the axis or the path movement was stopp...

Page 1658: ...p and LookAhead B1 Basic Functions 1658 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 Signal irrelevant for Rotary axes that are programmed as rounding axes Corresponding to MD36010 MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE exact stop fine DB31 DBX60 7 Position reached with exact stop fine ...

Page 1659: ...d A block change is not executed and the channel message Wait Auxiliary function acknowledgment missing is displayed Meaning after the fixed stop has been reached IS Fixed stop reached DB31 DBX62 5 1 The function is aborted the alarm 20094 axis 1 Function aborted is output Significance when de selecting the function FXS 0 via the part program The torque limiting and the monitoring of the fixed sto...

Page 1660: ...played Meaning before the fixed stop has been reached IS fixed stop reached 0 Travel to fixed stop is aborted The alarm 20094 Axis 1 Function aborted is displayed Meaning after the fixed stop has been reached IS fixed stop reached 1 The torque limiting and monitoring of the fixed stop monitoring window are canceled Deselection DB31 DBX1 1 acknowledge fixed stop reached IS irrelevant for MD37060 MA...

Page 1661: ...ted cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The fixed stop was reached after selecting the FXS function This signal is used by analog drives e g to switch the actuator from speed controlled to current or torque controlled mode so that a programmable clamping torque can be set Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The fixed stop has still not been reached after selecting the FXS function ...

Page 1662: ...ith a new value together with the associated change signal at the beginning of an OB1 cycle In this case the change signal indicates that the appropriate value is valid Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The change signals are reset by the PLC basic program at the start of the next OB1 cycle The value of the data involved is not valid DB21 DBX59 0 DBX59 4 M fct 1 5 not decoded Edge evaluation No Si...

Page 1663: ...0 to 99 integer number The M functions remain valid until they are overwritten by new M functions Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 After the PLC has ramped up All help functions are deleted before a new function is entered Application example s Decoding and evaluation of M functions that are not decoded as standard or via a list Using the extended address the M function can be assigned to another...

Page 1664: ...change 0 1 The D function programmed in an NC block is made available here as soon as the D change signal is available Value range of D functions 0 to 999 integer number The D function remains valid until it is overwritten by a new D function Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 After the PLC has ramped up All help functions are deleted before a new function is entered Application example s Implement...

Page 1665: ...ugh overwriting of the set feed rate override Corresponding to MD22240 MC_AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE output time of F functions DB21 DBB194 DBB206 Dynamic M functions M0 M99 Edge evaluation No Signal s updated job controlled by NCK Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The dynamic M signal bits are set by decoded M functions Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 For a general help function output the dynamic M sig...

Page 1666: ...for positioning axes are stored here The axis to which each value applies is determined by the extended address DB31 DBD86 M auxiliary function for spindle Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Job controlled The values for the M3 M4 M5 help functions are sent to the associated interface for the addressed spindle DB31 DBD88 S auxiliary function for spindle Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Job con...

Page 1667: ...ngeover inhibit 1 Corresponding to DB11 DBX6 0 active AUTOMATIC mode DB11 DBX0 1 MDA mode Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 MDA mode is selected by the PLC program Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 MDA mode is not selected by the PLC program Signal irrelevant for DB11 DBX0 4 operating mode changeover inhibit 1 Corresponding to DB11 DBX6 1 active MDA mode ...

Page 1668: ...to their acceleration characteristics without contour violation The program can be restarted with NC start None of the spindles of that mode group are affected Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Channel status and program execution are not influenced Special cases errors All the axes of a mode group that are not triggered by a program or a program block e g axes traverse because traverse keys are b...

Page 1669: ... mode group are cleared if they are not POWER ON alarms Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Channel status and program execution are not influenced by this signal Corresponding to DB21 DBX7 7 channel reset DB11 DBX6 7 all channels in the reset state Special cases errors An alarm that withdraws the interface signal DB11 DBX6 3 mode group ready ensures that all channels of the mode group are no longer...

Page 1670: ...ed Signal irrelevant for If JOG mode is not active Additional references FB1 Functions Manual Basic Functions Reference Point Travel R1 DB11 DBX1 6 Single block type B Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Bit set and DB11 DBX1 7 not set Response across modes All channels are stopped All channels receive a start command Channel KS stops at the end of the block The c...

Page 1671: ...ssible to determine which single block type is required The control then assumes No single block across mode groups Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 If DB11 DBX1 7 is not set and DB11 DBX1 6 is set then it is single block type B If DB11 DBX1 6 and DB11 DBX1 7 are not set it is impossible to determine which single block type is required The control then assumes No single block across mode groups C...

Page 1672: ...luation No Signal s updated Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The machine function REPOS is selected by HMI within BAG Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The machine function REPOS is not selected by HMI Application example s When a fault occurs when executing a part program e g tool breakage the axis is manually moved away from the fault location in the JOG mode in order to be able to r...

Page 1673: ...de group ready Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 This signal is set after power on and all of the voltage have been established The mode group is now ready and parts programs can be executed and axes traversed in the individual channels Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The mode group is not ready Possible causes for this are A critical axis or spindl...

Page 1674: ...HMI corresponding to the used software DB11 DBX7 1 Active REPOS machine function Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Machine function REPOS is active in the mode group Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Machine function REPOS is not active Application example s When a fault occurs when executing a part program e g tool breakage the axis is manually moved...

Page 1675: ...d Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Activation of program control Conditional stop M01 is requested Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Activation of program control Conditional stop M01 is not requested Corresponding to DB21 DBX24 5 M01 selected DB21 DBX32 5 M0 M01 active DB21 DBX1 6 PLC action completed Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic At the end of the block search concluding act...

Page 1676: ...state 1 or edge change 0 1 Skip blocks marked in the part program with an slash are not processed If there is a series of skip blocks the signal is only active if it is present before the first skip block of the series is decoded Note The signal should be available prior to the start of the part program Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Skip blocks marked in the part program with an slash are proc...

Page 1677: ...face signal DB21 DBX7 0 NC start disable 1 Corresponding to DB21 DBX7 1 NC START DB21 DBX7 1 NC START Edge evaluation yes Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 AUTOMATIC mode The selected NC program is started or continued or the auxiliary functions that were saved during the program interruption are output If data are transferred from the PLC to the NC during program status Pr...

Page 1678: ...edge change 1 0 No effect Signal irrelevant for Program status aborted Channel status Reset Special cases errors If data are transferred to the NCK after NC STOP e g tool offset the data are cleared at the next NC START Corresponding to DB21 DBX7 2 NC STOP at block limit DB21 DBX7 4 NC STOP axes plus spindles DB21 DBX35 2 program status stopped DB21 DBX35 6 channel status interrupted DB21 DBX7 4 N...

Page 1679: ...to nearest path point RMN Corresponding to DB21 DBX25 0 DBX25 2 REPOS mode REPOSPATHMODE DB31 DBX10 0 REPOSDELAY DB21 DBX31 4 REPOS mode change REPOSMODEEDGE Edge evaluation yes Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The REPOS mode has changed DB21 DBX31 0 DBX31 2 REPOS mode REPOSPATHMODE Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 REPOS mode has not changed Corresponding to DB21 DBX31 0 ...

Page 1680: ...ion on contour Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The search target is found during Block search with computation on contour Additional references PGA Programming Manual Advanced DB21 DBX32 5 M00 M01 active Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The part program block is processed the auxiliary functions are output and M00 is in the RAM M01 is in the RAM and IS...

Page 1681: ...4 Block search active Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The block search function is active It was selected from the operator interface screen and started using the interface signal DB21 DBX7 1 NC start Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Search target found Application example s The block search function makes it possible to jump to a certain block within ...

Page 1682: ...block and the word M02 M30 or the decoded M signal used for these functions Auxiliary functions that could result in a read in operation being stopped and any S values that are to be operative beyond M02 M30 must not be written in the last block of a program DB21 DBX33 6 Transformation active Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The NC command TRAORI activat...

Page 1683: ...Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The part program was started with the interface signal DB21 DBX7 1 NC start and is running The running program was stopped with the interface signal DB21 DBX6 1 read in disable Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Program stopped by M00 M01 or NC stop or operating mode change If single block mode the block is processed End of program reached M...

Page 1684: ...it Programmed M00 or M01 or Single block mode Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Program status stopped is not present Corresponding to DB21 DBX7 3 NC stop DB21 DBX7 4 NC stop axes plus spindles DB21 DBX7 2 NC stop at the block limit DB21 DBX35 3 Program status interrupted Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 When the operating mode changes from AUTOMATIC or ...

Page 1685: ...nal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The NC part program in AUTOMATIC or MDA mode or a traversing motion in JOG mode can be interrupted by DB21 DBX7 3 NC stop DB21 DBX7 4 NC stop axes plus spindles DB21 DBX7 2 NC stop at the block limit Programmed M00 or M01 or Single block mode After an NC start the part program or the interrupted traversing movement can be continued Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 D...

Page 1686: ... status of the concerned channels Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The concerned channel is not ready for a part program processing of machine axes geometry axes and positioning axes Corresponding to MD11600 MN_BAG_MASK DB21 DBX37 6 Read in disable is ignored Edge evaluation Signal s updated The following machine data are used to specify that the read in disable DB21 DBX6 1 is to be ignored MD116...

Page 1687: ...le block is not active DB21 DBB0 4 0 OR single block is active DB21 DBX0 4 1 AND part program block is single block operative Corresponding to Read in disable is ignored DB21 DBX37 6 read in disable is ignored DB21 DBB208 DBB271 Active G function of groups 1 to 60 Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 0 A G function or mnemonic identifier of the G group is active The active G fun...

Page 1688: ...nd goes to program status Stopped IS DB21 DBX318 0 ASUB is stopped is set The user presses Start The IS DB21 DBX318 0 ASUB is stopped is reset the re approach motion is started At the end of the re approach motion the FC9 signal ASUB done is set and the path of the interrupted part program is continued DB21 DBX318 1 Block search via program test is active Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic...

Page 1689: ...before REPOS and IS DB21 DBX319 REPOSMODEEDGE does not influence the SERUPRO approach Corresponding to DB21 DBX31 4 REPOSMODEEDGE DB21 DBX319 1 DBX319 3 Repos Path Mode Ackn 0 2 Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 Using the interface signal DB21 DBX319 1 DBX319 3 Repos Path Mode Ackn 0 2 with the 3 bits one of the functions for the re approach point RMB RMI RME or RMN can be ...

Page 1690: ...21 DBX31 4 REPOSMODEEGGE DB21 DBX319 0 REPOSMODEEGGEACKN DB31 DBX70 2 Repos Delay Ackn Additional references FB1 Functions Manual Basic Functions BAG Channel Program Operation Reset Response K1 Section Block search type 5 SERUPRO for block search DB21 DBX319 1 DBX319 3 Repos Path Mode Ackn 0 2 5 3263 7 02 5 32602 W 5 32602 1 5HSRV 3DWK 0RGH FNQ 1 1 1 7KH UHPDLQLQJ EORFN LV ILQLVKHG 2XWSXW 68 RPPDQ...

Page 1691: ... call function or The event driven user program has expired or was cancelled with RESET Bit assignments Bit 0 part program start from channel status RESET Bit 1 end of part program Bit 2 operator panel reset Bit 3 run up Bit 4 1st start after the search run Bit 5 7 reserved currently always 0 All bits 0 No event driven program call is active Signal duration at least one complete PLC cycle DB21 DBX...

Page 1692: ...TIMER_MODE Activation of the program runtime measurement MD27880 MC_PART_COUNTER activation of workpiece counters DB31 DBX10 0 REPOSDELAY Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The REPOS offset of the axis is first applied with its next programming Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 There is no REPOS offset Special cases errors The signal is not relevant for pa...

Page 1693: ...1 The axis was programmed within a traversing block and the REPOS offset was applied Note A REPOS offset was available for the axis and REPOSDELAY was active DB31 DBX10 0 REPOSDELAY 1 This signal behaves the same as DB21 DBX319 1 DBX319 3 Repos Path Mode Ackn Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The value zero is used to acknowledge that the REPOS offset is not active for this axis This signal is can...

Page 1694: ...0 2BA0 DB31 DBX76 4 Path axis Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The axis is involved in the path path axis Note In conjunction with SERUPRO in status Target block found the signal refers to the status of the axis in the target block Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The axis is not involved in the path ...

Page 1695: ...he external work offest of an axis is used as the new value for calculating the total work offset between the basic and the workpiece coordinate systems Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The preselected value of the external work offset of an axis is not used as the new value for calculating the total work offset between the basic and workpiece coordinate systems The previous value is still valid ...

Page 1696: ...6 1 acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP DB10 DBX56 2 Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The EMERGENCY STOP state is only reset if the interface signal DB10 DBX56 2 acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP is set followed by the interface signal DB11 DBX0 7 mode group reset It must be noted that IS Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP and IS Reset must be set tog...

Page 1697: ...ace signal DB21 DBX7 7 reset Corresponding to DB10 DBX56 1 EMERGENCY STOP DB10 DBX106 1 acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP DB11 DBX0 7 mode group reset DB10 DBX106 1 EMERGENCY STOP active Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The NC is in the EMERGENCY STOP state Corresponding to DB10 DBX56 1 EMERGENCY STOP DB10 DBX56 2 acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP DB10 DBX56 2 Acknowl...

Page 1698: ...have reached their reference point the interface signal DB21 DBX36 3 all axes present is set Application example s If the machine axes are to be referenced in a particular sequence there are the following possibilities The operator must observe the correct sequence when starting The PLC must check the sequence when starting or define it itself The function channel specific referencing will be used...

Page 1699: ...n referenced Special cases errors The spindles of the channel have no effect on this interface signal Corresponding to DB31 DBX60 4 referenced synchronized 1 DB31 DBX60 5 referenced synchronized 2 DB31 DBX2 4 DBX2 7 Reference point value 1 to 4 Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 When the reference cam is reached the NCK is signaled which coded reference ca...

Page 1700: ... prevent the machine axis from being located behind after the referencing cam Corresponding to DB31 DBX2 4 DBX2 7 reference point values 1 to 4 DB31 DBX60 4 Referenced synchronized 1 Edge evaluation Signal s updated Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Axes When being referenced if the machine axis has reached the reference point incremental measuring systems or the target point for length measuring ...

Page 1701: ...sponding to DB31 DBX1 6 position measuring system 2 MD34102 MA_REFP_SYNC_ENCS measuring system calibration 0 DB31 DBX71 4 POS_RESTORED 1 Edge evaluation Signal s updated Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 If MD34210 MA_ENC_REFP_STATE is set to a value of 3 the last axis position buffered before switch off is restored in distance coded incremental measuring systems Referencing does not take place au...

Page 1702: ...wing fashion Control mode Spindle stops Program continues to run Spindle continues to run with subsequent M and S program commands Oscillating mode Oscillation is interrupted Axes continue to run Program continues with the actual gearbox stage With the following M value and higher S value it is possible that the IS DB31 DBX83 1 programmed speed high is set Positioning mode Is stopped Axis operatio...

Page 1703: ...grammed spindle speed and the next block in the parts program can be executed The actual gear stage is output in coded format For each of the 5 gear stages there is one set of parameters assigned as follows Special cases errors If the PLC user reports back to the NCK with a different actual gear stage than issued by the NCK as the setpoint gear stage the gear change is still considered to have bee...

Page 1704: ...as the setpoint gear stage the gear change is still considered to have been successfully completed and the actual gear stage A to C is activated Corresponding to DB31 DBX16 2 DBX16 0 actual gear stage A to C DB31 DBX82 2 DBX82 0 setpoint gear stage A to C DB31 DBX82 3 change over gear stage DB31 DBX18 5 oscillation speed DB31 DBX16 4 DBX16 5 Resynchronizing spindles 1 and 2 Edge evaluation yes Sig...

Page 1705: ... irrelevant for spindle modes other than the positioning mode Application example s The spindle has an indirect measuring system and slippage may occur between the motor and the clamp If the signal 1 when positioning is started the old reference is deleted and the zero mark is searched for again before the end position is approached Corresponding to DB31 DBX60 4 referenced synchronized 1 DB31 DBX6...

Page 1706: ...ace signals DB31 DBX18 6 DBX18 7 setpoint direction of rotation counter clockwise and clockwise The oscillation i e the continuous change of the direction of rotation is performed by the PLC user program using the interface signal setpoint direction of rotation counter clockwise and clockwise oscillation via the PLC Application example s If the new gear stage cannot be engaged in spite of several ...

Page 1707: ...the spindle starts to oscillate with the oscillation acceleration MD35410 if the interface signal DB31 DBX18 4 oscillation via the PLC is not set then automatic oscillation is executed in the NCK using the IS Oscillation speed The two times for the directions of rotation are entered in the machine data MD35440 MA_SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW oscillation time for the M3 direction and MD35450 MA_SPIND_OSCIL...

Page 1708: ...ously enabled no oscillation speed is output If an interface signal is not set then an oscillation speed is not output Corresponding to DB31 DBX18 4 oscillation controlled by the PLC DB31 DBX18 5 oscillation speed DB31 DBX60 0 Spindle no axis Edge evaluation yes Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The machine axis is operated in one of the following spindle modes Control mode...

Page 1709: ...ction M41 M45 corresponding to gear stage 1 5 If set gear stage actual gear stage DB31 DBX82 3 change gear 1 DB31 DBX82 0 DBX82 2 set gear stage set gear stage Automatic gear stage selection depending on the progr Spindle speed via M function M40 at specified setpoint speed requires gear stage change DB31 DBX82 3 change gear 1 DB31 DBX82 0 DBX82 2 setpoint gear stage setpoint gear stage Signal sta...

Page 1710: ...evaluation yes Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The effective setpoint speed exceeds the actual max limit value The setpoint speed is limited to this limit Limit values MD35130 MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT maximum speed of gear stage MD35100 MA_SPIND_VELO_LIMIT max spindle speed DB31 DBX3 6 spindle speed limitation to MD35160 MA_SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT G26 upper spindle spe...

Page 1711: ...alues are greater than 1500 rpm SG1 is active MD36932 MA_ SAFE_VELO_OVR_FACTOR SG1 1111 11111 rev min MD36933 MA_SAFE_DES_VELO_LIMIT SG1 90 Programming M3 S1500 The speed setpoint is limited to 1000 rev min MD36932 MD36933 DB31 DBX83 1 1 Corresponding to DB21 DBX6 0 feed disable DB31 DBX4 3 feed spindle stop DB31 DBX83 5 spindle in setpoint range DB31 DBX83 2 Setpoint speed increased programmed sp...

Page 1712: ... spindle deviates from the set speed by less than the spindle speed tolerance MD35150 MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The actual speed of the spindle deviates from the set speed by more than the spindle speed tolerance MD35150 MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL Normal status during the acceleration deceleration phase of the spindle Signal irrelevant for All spindle modes except for cont...

Page 1713: ...too high Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Rigid tapping active Application example s Notice If the following signals are set during rigid tapping the thread will be destroyed DB11 DBX0 7 mode group reset 1 DB21 DBX7 7 channel reset 1 DB31 DBX2 1 controller enable 0 DB31 DBX8 3 feed stop 1 DB31 DBX84 5 Active spindle mode Positioning mode Edge evaluation yes Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 ...

Page 1714: ... stop fine DB31 DBX60 7 exact stop fine 1 Additionally the last programmed spindle position must have been reached on the setpoint side If the spindle is already at the programmed position after a positioning then signal DB31 DBX85 5 spindle in position is set Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 When signal DB31 DBX60 7 is withdrawn exact stop fine then signal DB31 DBX85 5 spindle in position is als...

Page 1715: ... spindle channel specific DB31 DBX132 0 Sensors available Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Power up Signal state 1 The sensor required for spindles with SMI 24 is available Signal state 0 The sensor required for spindles with SMI 24 is not available Corresponding to DB31 DBX132 1 Sensor S1 clamped state is available DB31 DBX132 4 Sensor S4 is available DB31 DBX132 5 Sensor S5 is available DB31 ...

Page 1716: ...riable VA_MOT_CLAMPING_STATE axis OPI variables vaMotClampingState DB31 DBW134 Clamped state Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic Depending on the position of the clamping device sensor S1 supplies an analog voltage value To simplify the evaluation of the clamped state the analog voltage of sensor module SMI 24 is converted into a state value The state values correspond to certain voltage ra...

Page 1717: ...e with SMI 24 2 7648 Corresponding to DB31 DBW134 clamped state Drive parameters p5041 0 5 p5043 0 6 DB31 DBX138 4 Sensor S4 piston end position Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 The piston is in position i e the piston is free to move Signal state 0 The piston is not in position Corresponding to DB31 DBX132 4 Sensor S4 available DB31 DBX138 5 Sensor S5 angular position of ...

Page 1718: ...un feed can be activated from the PLC or operator panel When selected from the operator panel front the PLC interface signal DB21 DBX24 6 dry run feed selected is set and transferred from the PLC basic program to the interface signal DB21 DBX0 6 activate dry run feed When selected using the PLC the IS activate dry run feed should be set from the PLC user program Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 T...

Page 1719: ...g With binary coding the feed value is interpreted in 0 to 200 feed changes are possible in accordance with the binary value in the byte The following permanent assignment applies Binary values 200 are limited to 200 The machine data MD12100 MN_OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN limit for binary coded override switch can be used to additionally limit the maximum feedrate override With Gray coding the individual...

Page 1720: ...ings The number of possible switch settings for standard machine panels is described in the Configuration Guides for SINUMERIK 840D Corresponding to DB21 DBX6 7 feed rateoverride active MD12030 MN_OVR_FACTOR_FEEDRATE n evaluation of the path feed rate override switch MD12100 MN_OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN limit for binary coded override switch DB21 DBB4 Feedrate override 7DEOH UD FRGLQJ IRU IHHG UDWH RYH...

Page 1721: ...For binary coding the rapid traverse override is interpreted as a 0 to 100 feed changes are possible in accordance with the binary value in the byte The following permanent assignment applies Binary values 100 are limited to 100 Using the machine data MD12100 MN_OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN limit for binary coded override switch the maximum rapid traverse override can be additionally limited In gray codin...

Page 1722: ...ult settings The number of possible switch settings for standard machine panels is described in the Configuration Guides for SINUMERIK 840D Corresponding to DB21 DBX6 6 rapid traverse override active MD12050 MN_OVR_FACTOR_RAPID_TRA n evaluation of the path feed rate override switch MD12100 MN_OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN limit for binary coded override switch DB21 DBB5 Rapid traverse override 7DEOH UD FRG...

Page 1723: ... control panel Special cases errors The feed disable is inactive when G33 is active DB21 DBX6 6 Rapid traverse override active Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The rapid traverse override between 0 and a maximum of 100 entered in the PLC interface is channel specific The override factor is defined using the machine data MD12040 MN_OVR_RAPID_IS_GRAY_C...

Page 1724: ...n the machine data for the 1st switch setting is output as the override value Application example s The override value is generally selected using the feed rate override switch on the machine control panel Using the interface signal DB21 DBX6 7 feed rate override active the feed rate override switch can be enabled from the PLC user program while commissioning a new NC program e g using the key ope...

Page 1725: ...feed rate DB21 DBX25 3 Feed rate override selected for rapid traverse Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The feed rate override switch should also be active as rapid traverse override switch Override values above 100 are limited to the maximum value for 100 rapid traverse override The interface signal DB21 DBX25 3 feed rate override for rapid traverse ...

Page 1726: ...uation No Signal s updated Cyclically Description These signals are used to select de select the function fixed feed and define which fixed feed should be effective for path geometry axes Corresponding to MD12202 MN_PERMANENT_FEED n MD12200 MN_RUN_OVERRIDE_0 LW LW LW LW 0HDQLQJ L HG IHHG LV GH VHOHFWHG L HG IHHG LV VHOHFWHG L HG IHHG LV VHOHFWHG L HG IHHG LV VHOHFWHG L HG IHHG LV VHOHFWHG ...

Page 1727: ...inary or Gray coding With binary coding the feed value is interpreted in 0 to 200 feed changes are possible in accordance with the binary value in the byte The following permanent assignment applies Binary values 200 are limited to 200 Using the machine data MD12100 MN_OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN limit for binary coded override switch the maximum axis specific feed rate override can be additionally limit...

Page 1728: ...default settings The number of possible switch settings for standard machine panels is described in the Configuration Guides for SINUMERIK 840D Corresponding to DB31 DBX1 7 override effective MD12010 MN_OVR_FACTOR_AX_SPEED n evaluation of the axis feed rate override switch MD12100 MN_OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN limit for binary coded override switch DB31 DBB0 Feed rate override axis specific 7DEOH UD FRG...

Page 1729: ... used as the internal override factor Exceptions are the zero setting for a binary interface and the 1st switch setting for a Gray coded interface In these cases the override factors entered at the PLC interface are used For a binary interface the override factor 0 For a gray coded interface the value entered in the machine data for the 1st switch setting is output as the override value Applicatio...

Page 1730: ...to the path contour When the feed stop signal is canceled execution of the interrupted parts program is resumed The position control is retained i e the following error is eliminated If a travel request is issued for an axis with an active feed stop this is kept This queued travel request is executed immediately after the feed stop is canceled If the axis is interpolating in relation to others thi...

Page 1731: ...dle override Edge evaluation No Signal s updated Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The spindle override can be defined via the PLC in binary or Gray coding The override value determines the percentage of the programmed speed setpoint that is issued to the spindle With binary coding the override is interpreted in 0 to 200 feed changes are possible in accordance with the binary value in t...

Page 1732: ...070 MN_OVR_FACTOR_SPIND_SPEED n The table contains the default settings The number of possible switch settings for standard machine panels is described in the Configuration Guides for SINUMERIK 840D Corresponding to DB31 DBX1 7 override active MD12070 MN_OVR_FACTOR_SPIND_SPEED n evaluation of the spindle override switch MD12100 MN_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN limit for binary coded override switch DB31 DBB19 ...

Page 1733: ...5 and from the axis DB31 DBB74 DBB81 are valid The interface signals to the spindle DB31 DBB16 DBB19 and from the spindle DB31 DBB82 DBB91 are invalid Application example s If a machine axis operates alternatively as a spindle or rotary axis Turning machine Spindle C axis Milling machine Spindle rotary axis for rigid tapping The currently active operating mode can be identified from interface sign...

Page 1734: ... Edge evaluation yes Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The actual speed exceeds the maximum spindle speed MD35100 MA_SPIND_VELO_ LIMIT by more than the spindle speed tolerance MD35150 MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL Corresponding to MD35150 MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL spindle speed tolerance MD35100 MA_SPIND_VELO_LIMIT maximum spindle speed DB31 DBX83 1 Setpoint speed limited programmed sp...

Page 1735: ...lues are greater than 1500 rpm SG1 is active MD36932 MA_ SAFE_VELO_OVR_FACTOR SG1 1111 11111 rev min MD36933 MA_SAFE_DES_VELO_LIMIT SG1 90 Programming M3 S1500 The speed setpoint is limited to 1000 rev min MD36932 MD36933 DB31 DBX83 1 1 Corresponding to DB21 DBX6 0 feed disable DB31 DBX4 3 feed spindle stop DB31 DBX83 5 spindle in setpoint range DB31 DBX83 2 Setpoint speed increased programmed spe...

Page 1736: ...spindle deviates from the set speed by less than the spindle speed tolerance MD35150 MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The actual speed of the spindle deviates from the set speed by more than the spindle speed tolerance MD35150 MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL Normal status during the acceleration deceleration phase of the spindle Signal irrelevant for All spindle modes except for contr...

Page 1737: ...oo high Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Rigid tapping active Application example s Notice If the following signals are set during rigid tapping the thread will be destroyed DB11 DBX0 7 mode group reset 1 DB21 DBX7 7 channel reset 1 DB31 DBX2 1 controller enable 0 DB31 DBX8 3 feed stop 1 DB31 DBX84 5 Active spindle mode Positioning mode Edge evaluation yes Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 o...

Page 1738: ...top fine DB31 DBX60 7 exact stop fine 1 Additionally the last programmed spindle position must have been reached on the setpoint side If the spindle is already at the programmed position after a positioning then signal DB31 DBX85 5 spindle in position is set Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 When signal DB31 DBX60 7 is withdrawn exact stop fine then signal DB31 DBX85 5 spindle in position is also ...

Page 1739: ...pindle channel specific DB31 DBX132 0 Sensors available Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Power up Signal state 1 The sensor required for spindles with SMI 24 is available Signal state 0 The sensor required for spindles with SMI 24 is not available Corresponding to DB31 DBX132 1 Sensor S1 clamped state is available DB31 DBX132 4 Sensor S4 is available DB31 DBX132 5 Sensor S5 is available DB31 DB...

Page 1740: ...iable VA_MOT_CLAMPING_STATE axis OPI variables vaMotClampingState DB31 DBW134 Clamped state Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic Depending on the position of the clamping device sensor S1 supplies an analog voltage value To simplify the evaluation of the clamped state the analog voltage of sensor module SMI 24 is converted into a state value The state values correspond to certain voltage ran...

Page 1741: ...with SMI 24 2 7648 Corresponding to DB31 DBW134 clamped state Drive parameters p5041 0 5 p5043 0 6 DB31 DBX138 4 Sensor S4 piston end position Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Cyclic Signal state 1 The piston is in position i e the piston is free to move Signal state 0 The piston is not in position Corresponding to DB31 DBX132 4 Sensor S4 available DB31 DBX138 5 Sensor S5 angular position of th...

Page 1742: ... for position axes spindles MD32040 MA_JOG_REV_VELO_RAPID revolutional feed rate for JOG with rapid traverse override MD32050 MA_JOG_REV_VELO revolutional feed rate for JOG mode DB31 DBB78 DBB81 F function for positioning axis Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The F value of a positioning axis programmed in the current block is entered in the axis specifi...

Page 1743: ...ode group Mode group BCD Binary Coded Decimals Decimal numbers encoded in binary code BERO Proximity limit switch with feedback oscillator BI Binector Input BICO Binector Connector BIN BINary files Binary files HHU HandHeld Unit BCS Basic Coordinate System BO Binector Output OPI Operator Panel Interface C CAD Computer Aided Design CAM Computer Aided Manufacturing CC Compile Cycle Compile cycles CI...

Page 1744: ...r display DIR Directory Directory DO Drive Object DPM Dual Port Memory DPR Dual Port RAM DRAM Dynamic memory non buffered DRF Differential Resolver Function Differential resolver function handwheel DRIVE CliQ Drive Component Link with IQ DRY Dry Run Dry run feedrate DSB Decoding Single Block Decoding single block DSC Dynamic Servo Control Dynamic Stiffness Control DW Data Word DWORD Double Word cu...

Page 1745: ...irmware G GC Global Control PROFIBUS Broadcast telegram GEO Geometry e g geometry axis GIA Gear Interpolation dAta Gear interpolation data GND Signal Ground GP Basic Program PLC GS Gear stage GSD Device master file for describing a PROFIBUS slave GSDML Generic Station Description Markup Language XML based description language for creating a GSD file GUD Global User Data Global user data H HEX Abbr...

Page 1746: ... Feed PMS Position Measuring System PC Position Controller LSB Least Significant Bit LUD Local User Data User data local M MAC Media Access Control MB Megabyte MCI Motion Control Interface MCIS Motion Control Information System MCP Machine Control Panel MD Machine Data MDI Manual Data Automatic Manual input MSGW Message word MCS Machine Coordinate System MLFB Machine Readable Product Code MM Motor...

Page 1747: ... Memory Card International Association PCU PC Unit PG Programming device PKE Parameter identification Part of a PIV PKW Parameter identification Value Parameterizing part of a PPO PLC Programmable Logic Control Adaptation control PN PROFINET PNO PROFIBUS user organization PO POWER ON POU Program Organization Unit POS Positioning e g POS axis positioning axis channel axis which is not traversed to ...

Page 1748: ...pe of processor with small instruction set and ability to process instructions at high speed ROV Rapid Override Input correction RP R variable arithmetic parameter predefined user variable RPY Roll Pitch Yaw Rotation type of a coordinate system RTLI Rapid Traverse Linear Interpolation Linear interpolation during rapid traverse motion RTCP Real Time Control Protocol S SBC Safe Brake Control Safe br...

Page 1749: ...ction T TB Terminal Board SINAMICS TCP Tool Center Point Tool tip TCP IP Transport Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCU Thin Client Unit TEA Testing Data Active Identifier for machine data TIA Totally Integrated Automation TM Terminal Module SINAMICS TO Tool Offset Tool offset TOA Tool Offset Active Identifier file type for tool offsets TRANSMIT Transform Milling Into Turning Coordination transf...

Page 1750: ...S Workpiece coordinate system T Tool TLC Tool Length Compensation WOP Workshop Oriented Programming WPD WorkPiece Directory Workpiece directory TRC Tool Radius Compensation T Tool TO Tool Offset TM Tool Management TC Tool Change X XML Extensible Markup Language Z WOA Work Offset Active Identifier for work offsets ZSW Status word of drive ...

Page 1751: ...O ದ DVLF XQFWLRQV ದ WHQVLRQ XQFWLRQV ದ 6SHFLDO IXQFWLRQV ದ 6 QFKURQL HG DFWLRQV ದ 7RRO PDQDJHPHQW XQFWLRQ 0DQXDO 62 GLDOHFWV 2SHUDWLQJ QVWUXFWLRQV ದ 8QLYHUVDO ದ 7XUQLQJ ದ 0LOOLQJ ದ 0 GYDQFHG 3URJUDPPLQJ 0DQXDO ದ XQGDPHQWDOV ದ RE SODQQLQJ ದ 0HDVXULQJ F FOHV 3URJUDPPLQJ 0DQXDO ದ 62 7XUQLQJ ದ 62 0LOOLQJ LDJQRVWLFV 0DQXDO 2SHUDWLQJ 0DQXDO ದ 7XUQLQJ ದ 0LOOLQJ RPPLVVLRQLQJ 0DQXDO ದ 1 1 3 ULYH ದ DVLF 6RI...

Page 1752: ...Appendix 20 2 Overview Basic Functions 1752 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 ...

Page 1753: ...perator panel in plain text with date and time and the corresponding symbol for the cancel criterion Alarms and messages are displayed separately 1 Alarms and messages in the part program Alarms and messages can be displayed in plain text directly from the part program 2 Alarms and messages from PLC Alarms and messages for the machine can be displayed in plain text from the PLC program No addition...

Page 1754: ... right angled coordinate system Rotary axes rotating around X Y and Z are identified using A B and C Additional axes situated parallel to the specified axes can be designated using other letters Axis name See Axis identifier Backlash compensation Compensation for a mechanical machine backlash e g backlash on reversal for ball screws Backlash compensation can be entered separately for each axis Bac...

Page 1755: ...e Block search function can be used to select any location in the part program at which the program is to be started or resumed Booting Loading the system program after power ON C axis Axis around which the tool spindle describes a controlled rotational and positioning movement Channel A channel is characterized by the fact that it can process a part program independently of other channels A chann...

Page 1756: ... wire cables with a connector at each end This connecting cable connects the CPU to a programming device or to other CPUs by means of a multi point interface MPI Continuous path mode The objective of continuous path mode is to avoid substantial deceleration of the path axes at the part program block boundaries and to change to the next block at as close to the same path velocity as possible Contou...

Page 1757: ...ta definitions for global user data These data can be initialized directly when they are defined Data word Two byte data unit within a data block Diagnosis 1 Operating area of the control 2 The control has both a self diagnostics program as well as test functions for servicing purposes status alarm and service displays Dimensions specification metric and inches Position and lead values can be prog...

Page 1758: ... reach their exact stop limits the control responds as if it had reached its precise destination point A block advance of the part program occurs External zero offset Zero offset specified by the PLC Fast retraction from contour When an interrupt occurs a motion can be initiated via the CNC machining program enabling the tool to be quickly retracted from the workpiece contour that is currently bei...

Page 1759: ...ng data Parameter Value Value range TRUE FALSE Application Part program Static synchronized action Geometry Description of a workpiece in the workpiece coordinate system Geometry axis Geometry axes are used to describe a 2 or 3 dimensional area in the workpiece coordinate system Ground Ground is taken as the total of all linked inactive parts of a device which will not become live with a dangerous...

Page 1760: ...lling and milling operations on workpiece surfaces that do not lie in the coordinate planes of the machine can be performed easily using the function inclined surface machining Increment Travel path length specification based on number of increments The number of increments can be stored as setting data or be selected by means of a suitably labeled key i e 10 100 1000 10000 Incremental dimension A...

Page 1761: ...chine can be set up Individual axes and spindles can be traversed in JOG mode by means of the direction keys Additional functions in JOG mode include Reference point approach Repos and Preset set actual value Key switch The key switch on the machine control panel has four positions that are assigned functions by the operating system of the control The key switch has three different colored keys th...

Page 1762: ...signable number of traversing blocks Machine axes Physically existent axes on the machine tool Machine control panel An operator panel on a machine tool with operating elements such as keys rotary switches etc and simple indicators such as LEDs It is used to directly influence the machine tool via the PLC Machine coordinate system A coordinate system which is related to the axes of the machine too...

Page 1763: ...vidual program blocks or block sequences with no reference to a main program or subroutine can be input and executed immediately afterwards through actuation of the NC start key Messages All messages programmed in the part program and alarms detected by the system are displayed on the operator panel in plain text with date and time and the corresponding symbol for the cancel criterion Alarms and m...

Page 1764: ...on that occurs within the control is performed based on NURBS Non Uniform Rational B Splines As a result a uniform process is available within the control for all interpolations for SINUMERIK 840D OEM The scope for implementing individual solutions OEM applications for the SINUMERIK 840D has been provided for machine manufacturers who wish to create their own operator interface or integrate proces...

Page 1765: ...s demarcated by a line feed There are two types main blocks and subblocks Part program management Part program management can be organized by workpieces The size of the user memory determines the number of programs and the amount of data that can be managed Each file programs and data can be given a name consisting of a maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters Path axis Path axes include all machinin...

Page 1766: ...r program the user data and the basic PLC program are stored together in the PLC user memory PLC Programming The PLC is programmed using the STEP 7 software The STEP 7 programming software is based on the WINDOWS standard operating system and contains the STEP 5 programming functions with innovative enhancements Polar coordinates A coordinate system which defines the position of a point on a plane...

Page 1767: ...he function of which is stored as a program in the control unit This means that the layout and wiring of the device do not depend on the function of the control The programmable logic controller has the same structure as a computer it consists of a CPU central module with memory input output modules and an internal bus system The peripherals and the programming language are matched to the requirem...

Page 1768: ...ion of the coordinate system around a particular angle Rounding axis Rounding axes rotate a workpiece or tool to an angular position corresponding to an indexing grid When a grid index is reached the rounding axis is in position Safety Functions The control is equipped with permanently active montoring functions that detect faults in the CNC the PLC and the machine in a timely manner so that damag...

Page 1769: ...ardware limit switch Two value pairs can be specified for each axis and activated separately by means of the PLC Spline interpolation With spline interpolation the controller can generate a smooth curve characteristic from only a few specified interpolation points of a set contour SRT Transformation ratio Standard cycles Standard cycles are provided for machining operations which are frequently re...

Page 1770: ... acknowledgement times for the auxiliary functions can be minimized and unnecessary hold points in the machining process can be avoided Synchronized axes Synchronized axes take the same time to traverse their path as the geometry axes take for their path Synchronized axis A synchronized axis is the gantry axis whose set position is continuously derived from the motion of the leading axis and is th...

Page 1771: ...ts is limited by the maximum number of active channels A TOA unit includes exactly one tool data block and one magazine data block In addition a TOA unit can also contain a toolholder data block optional Tool Active part on the machine tool that implements machining e g turning tool milling tool drill LASER beam etc Tool nose radius compensation Contour programming assumes that the tool is pointed...

Page 1772: ...ain the STEP 7 commands Data blocks These blocks contain constants and variables for the STEP 7 program User defined variable Users can declare their own variables for any purpose in the part program or data block global user data A definition contains a data type specification and the variable name See System variable Variable definition A variable definition includes the specification of a data ...

Page 1773: ...n machining operations programmed in the workpiece coordinate system the dimensions and directions refer to this system Workpiece zero The workpiece zero is the starting point for the workpiece coordinate system It is defined in terms of distances to the machine zero Zero offset Specifies a new reference point for a coordinate system through reference to an existing zero point and a frame 1 Settab...

Page 1774: ...Glossary Basic Functions 1774 Function Manual 09 2011 6FC5397 0BP40 2BA0 ...

Page 1775: ...27 239 AC_PATHJERK 238 239 AC_PROG_NET_TIME_TRIGGER 663 AC_REQUIRED_PARTS 668 AC_SGEAR 1303 1323 AC_SMAXACC 1345 AC_SMAXACC_INFO 1345 AC_SMAXVELO 1345 AC_SMAXVELO_INFO 1345 AC_SMINVELO 1345 AC_SMINVELO_INFO 1345 AC_SPECIAL_PARTS 669 AC_SPIND_STATE 1345 AC_STOLF 208 AC_TOTAL_PARTS 668 AN_AUXFU_LIST_CHANNO 449 AN_AUXFU_LIST_ENDINDEX 451 AN_AUXFU_LIST_GROUPINDEX 449 AN_POWERON_TIME 661 AN_SETUP_TIME ...

Page 1776: ...thorization 63 Access features 64 Access method 1101 Access security 63 ACN 1331 ACP 1331 Action blocks 506 Action single block 498 Activation from machine control panel hand held unit 894 Actual image number of the JobShop interface 1622 Actual value 1108 Actual value in workpiece coordinate system 40 Actual value synchronization 48 Actual value acquisition 353 Actual value correction 355 Actual ...

Page 1777: ...asic tool orientation 1541 Block Hide 615 Block search Cascaded 505 Time sequence of types 1 2 and 4 505 with calculation at block end point type 4 504 with calculation at the contour type 2 504 with calculation in program test mode SERUPRO type 5 504 without calculation type 1 504 Block search SERUPRO 518 Automatic interrupt pointer 545 Conditions for axis functions 553 Control REPOS with VDI int...

Page 1778: ... as transverse axis 1371 Interrupts 1374 Constant cutting rate setting 1338 Constant speed G97 G971 1371 Constant tangent 1461 Continuous path mode 154 continuous path mode Implicit 157 Contour sampling factor 195 sampling time 195 tolerance 203 Contour error 78 Contrast 55 Control direction 361 Control system response at the end of the parts program 628 at the start of the parts program 628 durin...

Page 1779: ...3 38 1613 DBX108 5 38 1613 DBX108 6 38 1613 DBX108 7 38 1613 DBX109 0 38 1614 DBX109 5 1614 DBX109 6 38 1615 DBX109 7 38 1615 DBX180 2 1613 DBX56 1 46 562 819 821 823 1696 DBX56 2 819 822 1696 DBX56 4 65 1611 DBX56 5 65 1611 DBX56 6 65 1611 DBX56 7 65 1611 DBX92 0 880 DBX92 1 880 DB11 DBX0 0 485 488 1667 DBX0 1 485 1200 1203 1667 DBX0 2 485 1200 1203 1667 DBX0 4 491 1668 DBX0 5 482 1668 DBX0 6 482...

Page 1780: ...8 DBB193 1665 DBB194 1333 DBB194 DBB206 435 1665 DBB2 1676 DBB202 1333 DBB208 DBB271 1687 DBB35 520 DBB376 580 1691 DBB4 1719 DBB5 1721 DBB58 1662 DBB58 DBB67 435 DBB60 DBB64 1663 DBB60 DBB65 1662 DBB66 DBB67 1663 DBB68 DBB112 435 DBB68 DBB97 1663 DBB68ff 1333 DBB98 DBB115 1663 DBX0 4 499 1675 DBX0 5 1675 DBX0 6 501 1718 DBX1 0 1203 1698 DBX1 1 1652 DBX1 6 506 508 1675 DBX1 7 496 562 1676 DBX10 0 ...

Page 1781: ...562 563 1299 1344 1678 DBX7 5 495 DBX7 7 562 564 822 1202 1204 1205 1277 1678 DBX8 0 DBX9 1 1652 DBX8 0 to DBX9 1 119 DB21 DBX378 0 593 DBX378 1 600 DB31 DBB0 1727 DBB1 5 1246 DBB1 6 1246 DBB19 1731 DBB2 1 1246 DBB60 4 1229 1239 1241 DBB60 5 1229 1239 1241 DBB68ff 1333 DBB78 DBB81 1742 DBB86 1714 1738 DBB88 1715 1739 DBD 78 1666 DBD86 1666 DBD88 1666 DBW134 1716 1740 DBW136 1717 1741 DBX1 0 41 50 ...

Page 1782: ...74 1319 1657 DBX61 0 41 50 1637 DBX61 3 42 50 1233 1234 1637 DBX61 4 49 50 1233 1258 1259 1264 1293 1342 1638 DBX61 5 46 47 50 1257 1316 1638 DBX61 6 47 50 1639 DBX61 7 50 1639 DBX62 2 1370 1742 DBX62 4 305 311 1660 DBX62 5 273 305 311 1661 DBX64 6 440 DBX64 7 440 DBX68 0 68 3 1336 DBX69 0 50 68 DBX69 0 DBX69 2 1639 DBX69 0 69 2 1304 DBX69 1 50 68 DBX69 2 50 68 DBX7 7 1344 DBX70 0 530 533 1692 DBX...

Page 1783: ...alues in the diameter 833 DL functions 396 DRIVE 253 Drive test travel enable 41 Drive test travel request 50 DRIVEA 253 Drives in cyclic operation 38 Drives ready 38 Dry run feedrate 500 1396 Dynamic response adaptation 183 Dynamic response adaptation 376 Dynamic response of an axis spindle 1406 DYNFINISH 191 DYNNORM 191 DYNPOS 191 DYNROUGH 191 DYNSEMIFIN 191 E EMERGENCY STOP Acknowledgment 822 I...

Page 1784: ...Feedrates Dry run feedrate 1396 Feed disable 1390 Feed override 1395 Feedrate control 1389 Feedrate override 1391 Feedrate spindle stop 1390 feedrates in one block 1398 Rigid tapping G331 G332 1385 Spindle override 1394 Thread cutting G33 1374 FGROUP 699 702 FIFO Buffer 624 Fine interpolation 375 Fine offset 687 Firmware 1087 Fixed feedrate values 1402 FL 1367 Flat D number structure 1438 Follow u...

Page 1785: ...k active 1679 Activate associated M1 1662 Activate channel specific protection zone 1652 Activate dry run feed 1718 Activate fixed feed rate 1 4 for machine axes 1730 Activate fixed feed rate 1 4 for path geometry axes 1726 Activate M01 1675 activate machine specific protection zone 1652 Activate program test 1676 Activate referencing 1698 Activate single block 1675 Activate skip block 1676 Activa...

Page 1786: ... frequency exceeded 1656 Error 1622 Error program handling 1623 Extended address F functions 1 to 6 1665 Extended address H functions 1 to 3 1664 Extended address M functions 1 to 5 1663 Extended address S functions 1 to 3 1663 External zero offset 1695 F auxiliary function for positioning axis 1666 F function for positioning axis 1742 FC9 Out Active 1620 FC9 Out Done 1620 FC9 Out Error 1620 FC9 O...

Page 1787: ...leted 1646 Rapid traverse override 1721 Rapid traverse override active 1723 Read in disable 1676 Read in enable is ignored 1686 Recall alarm cleared 1621 Reference point approach delay 1700 Reference point value 1 to 4 1699 Referenced synchronized 1 1700 Referenced synchronized 2 1701 Referencing active 1698 Remote diagnosis active 1611 Repos DEFERAL Chan 1691 REPOS Delay Ackn 1693 REPOS offset 16...

Page 1788: ...end 151 Interpolatory axis grouping 47 Interrupt lock 602 routine 591 signal 592 Interrupt routine End 594 Inverse time feedrate G93 1368 IPTRLOCK 542 IPTRUNLOCK 542 J Jerk increase velocity dependent jerk 241 Jerk limitation 168 Jerk limiting Smoothing method 245 Jogging during interruption of a JOG ASUB 597 in the mode type AUTOMATIC 487 K Key disable 39 Key switch 65 Kinematic transformation 71...

Page 1789: ...4 345 348 349 MD10270 347 MD10290 347 MD10292 347 MD10600 726 785 787 MD10602 752 753 755 762 766 MD10610 688 746 MD10612 746 747 MD10613 797 MD10615 795 MD10618 120 MD10680 196 MD10682 196 MD10702 499 506 607 611 MD10704 1396 1397 MD10707 521 MD10708 521 MD10710 102 1372 MD10712 193 MD10713 437 MD10714 411 638 MD10715 637 MD10716 637 MD10719 640 MD10735 487 488 MD10804 638 MD10806 638 MD10814 638...

Page 1790: ...D20109 582 MD20110 344 595 628 695 795 796 803 829 831 1422 1441 1442 1522 1539 1564 MD20112 522 595 628 631 696 799 803 829 1441 1522 MD20114 605 MD20116 598 MD20117 599 609 611 MD20118 632 696 MD20120 631 1441 1522 MD20121 631 1422 1441 MD20124 464 MD20125 1531 MD20126 1522 1532 MD20127 1532 MD20130 631 1441 MD20140 631 MD20144 633 MD20150 102 209 220 235 253 254 340 345 493 559 628 632 734 796 ...

Page 1791: ...D22254 411 426 639 MD22256 411 426 639 MD22410 1395 MD22510 559 1073 MD22530 459 1522 MD22532 459 696 MD22534 459 MD22550 640 1422 1434 1435 1439 1441 MD22560 411 464 639 1422 1441 MD22562 1435 1436 MD22600 537 MD22601 537 552 MD22620 555 MD22621 522 MD22680 545 MD24000 747 MD24002 797 MD24004 795 MD24006 717 734 796 MD24007 798 MD24008 717 795 MD24010 746 MD24020 741 MD24030 738 MD24040 771 772 M...

Page 1792: ...250 127 362 MD32260 127 MD32300 79 192 219 228 229 230 231 252 600 1209 1383 1406 1407 MD32310 157 192 229 230 MD32400 245 246 384 MD32402 246 383 384 MD32410 245 384 MD32420 221 235 236 MD32430 235 MD32431 192 234 240 MD32432 192 241 MD32433 192 229 MD32434 228 229 240 MD32435 240 MD32438 241 MD32439 242 MD32440 181 184 MD32452 378 1278 MD32610 79 378 1278 MD32620 380 1279 MD32630 380 MD32640 383...

Page 1793: ...10 1263 1342 MD35550 1289 1295 MD35590 49 67 1290 1304 MD36000 84 151 378 1270 1274 1349 1350 MD36010 81 82 84 151 378 1270 1274 1349 1350 MD36012 84 152 378 1278 MD36020 81 82 386 387 MD36030 83 84 378 386 387 MD36040 83 319 386 387 MD36042 319 MD36050 84 90 MD36052 85 87 90 MD36060 49 50 1258 1264 1342 MD36100 96 MD36110 96 MD36120 96 MD36130 96 MD36200 93 378 1278 MD36210 91 362 MD36220 92 MD36...

Page 1794: ...change 1307 Nonlinear signal distortions 78 Non modal feedrate FB 1405 NORM 1460 O of defective drive modules Identification 293 Offset 1101 Onboard IO 1099 Operating modes Interlocks 490 monitoring functions 490 Operating statuses 486 Operations 1119 Orientation 108 tolerance 203 OTOL 203 Output Behavior of an auxiliary function 417 counter 448 Sequence 448 Overload factor 157 Override in G331 33...

Page 1795: ...el for user ASUB 605 Protection levels 63 programmable 66 Protection zones 77 107 Activate 116 data storage 115 Deactivation 116 Definition as per partprogram 111 Definition with system variables 114 Enable 120 Example activation 140 Example definition 130 Restrictions 125 Protection zone violation 120 Pulse multiplication factor 366 R Radius related data 833 Ramp up completed 54 Reaching simulate...

Page 1796: ...20 1373 SD43235 1347 SD43240 1261 1331 1339 SD43250 1261 1339 SD43300 1339 1370 SD43400 101 SD43410 101 SD43420 100 SD43430 100 SD43500 312 SD43510 312 313 SD43520 312 Secant error 195 Selection of the cutting edge when changing tool 1423 Self acting SERUPRO 541 SERUPRO 309 end ASUB 452 SPEED factor for channel axes during ramp up 537 SERUPRO approach 520 525 control from the PLC 530 Influence pat...

Page 1797: ...rd control 380 Speed control loop 374 Speed controller active 50 Speed default 1337 Speed setpoint adjustment 362 Speed setpoint output 361 SPI 1333 Spindle definitions 1336 gear stage 0 1300 interface 1335 job 1335 setpoint speed 1343 speed limits 1345 speed maximum 1344 speed minimum 1344 spindle modes 1254 Spindle disable 41 Spindle functions using a PLC 494 Spindle override factor 1394 Spindle...

Page 1798: ...ction 1459 Smooth approach and retraction 1464 Transition circle 1480 variable compensation value 1487 Tool revolver axes 698 TOOLENV 1574 Toolholder reference point T 706 Toolholder selection 1497 Toolholder with orientation capability 1420 1497 Calculation of active tool length 1512 Create new 1516 Examples 1595 Kinematic chain 1504 Toolholder with orientation capability Control system response ...

Page 1799: ...sion 291 Vertical axes 314 W WAITENC 633 WAITS 1332 WALCS0 104 WALCS1 WALCS10 104 WALIMOF 101 WALIMON 101 WCS 40 Work offset P_EXTFRAME 834 Working area limitation 98 in BCS 100 in WCS SZS 102 Working area limitation group 102 Workpiece counter 668 simulation 503 Workpiece coordinate system WCS 40 685 721 Workpiece zero W 706 X XE MERGEFORMAT 393 Y YDelta 1025 Z Zero points 706 Zero vectors 1504 ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for SINUMERIK 828D Turning

Reviews:

Related manuals for SINUMERIK 828D Turning

Brands by name

Popular brands

Siemens SINUMERIK 828D Turning, Function Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for SINUMERIK 828D Turning

Reviews:

Related manuals for SINUMERIK 828D Turning

Brands by name

Popular brands